Bob Vilahttps://www.bobvila.comen-USThu, 20 Feb 2025 04:49:56 -0500WordPress 6.7.2hourly1<![CDATA[The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed]]>The best weeding tool is comfortable to use & sturdy enough for even the toughest taproot. See which removed stubborn weeds in our tests.

The post The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weeding-tool/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=108856Wed, 19 Feb 2025 09:35:15 -0500ReviewsLandscapingLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Though herbicides control weeds, these chemicals can pose serious health risks to humans and wildlife. Manual weeding, on the other hand, gets the job done without harm to people, pets, or the environment. With a well-made weeding tool and some vigilance, banishing these pesky plants can be fairly simple.

Weeds proliferate in your garden seemingly overnight, and it’s easiest to remove them when they’re young. Some weeds, such as dandelions, develop a single taproot that grows deeper into the soil as the plant matures. The longer the taproot, the more difficult it becomes to eradicate. Though some weeds release without a fight, others will have gardeners wondering whether they need a jackhammer to dislodge them. That said, timing and soil conditions are key to weed removal: After a rainfall, soil is softer and more willing to release roots.

With a proliferation of weed-control tools available, choosing the right one for the task at hand may feel like a shot in the dark. To help, we searched out and tested tools that work best for a variety of circumstances. Our favorite was the Original Weeder from CobraHead, thanks to its versatile uses and durable tempered steel head. Shoppers looking for the best weeding tool will want to check out our shopping considerations and product reviews ahead.

  1. BEST OVERALL: CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden Tool
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Radius Garden Ergonomic Weeder
  3. BEST KNIFE WEEDER: Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife
  4. BEST STANDING WEEDER: Grampa’s Weeder
  5. BEST FORK WEEDER: Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder
  6. BEST SHORT-HANDLE HOE: Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool
  7. BEST LONG-HANDLE HOE: Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe
The Best Weeding Tools Options
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

Product Comparison

TypeHandle LengthHead Size
CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden ToolDigging, cutting, raking8 inches5 inches long by 1 inch wide
Radius Garden Ergonomic WeederDigging5.75 inches9 inches long by 1.5 inches wide
Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel KnifeDigging, cutting5.5 inches7.5 inches long by 1.75 inches wide
Grampa’s WeederDigging, pulling 39 inches1 inch wide by 2.5 inches deep, with a 5.5-inch step lever
Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong WeederDigging, pulling34 inches3 inches long by 0.5 inch wide
Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden ToolDigging, chopping, slicing5 inches5 inches long by 1.25 inches wide
Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren HoeDigging, chopping54 inches6 inches long by 4.75 inches wide

Our Top Picks

With our shopping considerations in mind, which we look at later in greater detail, we created a list of the best weeding tools for typical lawn, garden, and landscape projects. Read on to learn more about these tools and how they performed in our tests.

Best Overall

CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden Tool

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator
Photo: amazon.com

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, cutting, raking
  • Handle length: 8 inches
  • Head size: 5 inches long by 1 inch wide

What We Like

  • Multiuse tool works great for both for weeding and planting
  • Tempered steel head is durable and easily lasts several seasons
  • Thick, comfortable handle; ideal for long hours in the garden
  • Works in any soil type; provides excellent versatility

What We Don’t Like

  • Only for up-close work; may require lots of bending and kneeling
  • Cuts deep taproots instead of pulling them

Great for removing stubborn weeds from heavy soil, this weeding tool’s curved, forged-steel end hooks deeply beneath the weed to lift and remove it. It’s made to easily pierce soil and let the user apply pressure from the side, bottom, or any angle in between to find the weed’s weakest point.

The multifunction tool’s shovellike tip resembles a snake head and can be used for planting rows of seeds, scratching in fertilizer around plants, and scraping out young weed seedlings. The plastic grip is designed to help gardeners keep a firm hold while they work.

In testing, the CobraHead’s versatility truly impressed us. The curved shaft and fingernail-like shape of the blade dug deep into the soil for removal of taproot, yet it just scratched the surface to cultivate safely next to young seedlings. In addition to our in-ground and container garden weeding tests, we used the CobraHead to prepare planting spots for new seedlings. The tough blade quickly loosened the surface to a depth of about 4 inches with little effort.

The thick handle provided a sure, comfortable grip in either hand. The drawback of this tool’s design is that it easily cuts off the deepest taproots, leaving the stump behind to resprout. But for young weeds of all types, cultivating near sensitive plants, and occasional soil preparation work, this is a handy little tool. We can highly recommend the CobraHead’s unique shape and lightweight design to tackle weeding and many other garden-related tasks.

Get the CobraHead weeding tool at Amazon, Gardener’s Edge, or Grow Organic.

Best Bang for the Buck

Radius Garden Ergonomic Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Radius Garden 102 Hand Weeder
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging
  • Handle length: 5.75 inches
  • Head size: 9 inches long by 1.5 inches wide

What We Like

  • Digs deeply to remove the whole tap root
  • Comfortable ergonomic handle helps reduce fatigue after prolonged use
  • Strong die-cast aluminum blade will not bend

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires bending or kneeling; not a long tool
  • Thick blade is more difficult to use in heavy soil

Gardeners need a strong grip to weed in dense soil, but as hands tire, grip strength suffers. The curved handle on the Radius Garden weeding tool is designed to keep the user’s hand and wrist aligned while pushing the serrated aluminum tool next to the root to lift out the weed. This impressive tool helps remove deeply rooted weeds that grow at the base of vegetables, shrubs, and perennials—and it’s a bargain, to boot.

The narrow blade easily cuts through any type of soil to remove pesky weeds and help to navigate around nearby plants without damaging their roots. The unusual shape of the thermoplastic grip provides a smooth, comfortable surface that’s easy to hang on to.

Another versatile weeder that doubles as a transplanter, this Radius hand tool proved impressive for the price. It was very effective at removing established taproot weeds, with the narrow blade easily reaching 5 to 6 inches deep to loosen the soil for thorough removal without breaking the root. For shallow, fibrous weeds, we slid the blade just below the soil surface at a shallow angle, a slow process, but ultimately successful.

As a transplanter for seedlings, however, it worked quite well. It was lightweight and easy to use, and the oversize ergonomic cushioned grip left us with virtually no hand fatigue after extended use. Those who need a taproot weeding tool for working in confined spaces will find this one quite helpful, and it’s likely to come in handy for other chores as well.

Get the Radius Garden weeding tool at Amazon.

Best Knife Weeder

Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, cutting
  • Handle length: 5.5 inches
  • Head size: 7.5 inches long by 1.75 inches wide

What We Like

  • Mid-tang stainless steel blade is very sharp and durable
  • Sharp edge and measured blade markings helps with precision
  • Comfortable nonslip grip feels good in the hand
  • Hard plastic sheath included to protect the blade when not in use

What We Don’t Like

  • Premium price point compared to similar products
  • Sheath not as durable as the knife; may need replacing every few seasons

Though several popular configurations of weeding knives exist, we prefer the classic Japanese hori hori knife design. This weeding tool by Nisaku combines classic style with modern materials that will probably last a lifetime. The stainless steel blade features one smooth sharpened edge and one serrated edge to cut easily through weed roots, divide clumps of perennials, and cut garden twine. The concave face of the blade is ideal for removing taproots, and engraved measurement markings help to gauge transplant planting depth.

The ergonomic contoured handle includes a textured surface for improved grip and a wide molded hilt loop for hanging on a hook in the garden shed. The knife comes with a plastic sheath for safe carrying and storage.

In testing, the do-it-all Nisaku hori hori garden knife proved comfortably constructed, well-balanced, and easy to use for large and small hands. It did a great job of taproot removal and skimming the soil beneath fibrous rooted weeds, though it was less successful when it came to prying weeds from narrow cracks between bricks and pavers. We also used it to dig, divide, and transplant a few hostas that had finished blooming, and it made quick work of the tough fibrous roots.

The blade’s material construction looks, feels, and is in fact extremely high quality: high carbon 440C stainless steel hardened to HRC 58—similar in material and hardness as professional kitchen knives and top-notch pocket knives. Even after digging around in the dirt, the edges were still sharp enough to slice easily through ¼-inch-thick forsythia branches. Though we found the plastic scabbard to feel rather cheap, we believe that serious gardeners will want to keep this tool close at hand for all sorts of chores.

Get the Nisaku weeding tool at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Standing Weeder

Grampa’s Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Grampa’s Weeder
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, pulling
  • Handle length: 39 inches
  • Head size: 1 inch wide by 2.5 inches deep, with a 5.5-inch step lever

What We Like

  • Can easily pull taproot lawn and garden weeds
  • Made from durable hardwood handle and steel head
  • Works from a standing position; better for reducing back pain

What We Don’t Like

  • Specialty single-task tool not as versatile as other weeders
  • Weeds can clog the tool head; can require manual removal

Before the days of spray-on weed killers, obtaining a weed-free lawn meant pulling the pesky unwanted plants by hand. Grampa’s Weeder was probably hailed as a miracle back saver when it was introduced in 1913. Now the classic design represents an efficient alternative to chemical controls. Plus, it can be rather fun to use.

The simple, ingenious design features a steel step-on lever connected to a hinged jaw. Step down to insert the tool into the soil, then lever back on the handle to pull out the weed, root and all. Results are immediate, with no ugly dead weeds left in the lawn.

During tests, we found Grampa’s Weeder was most effective for use on dandelions and other fleshy rooted and rosette-forming weeds such as wild violet and wild lettuce. We had the greatest success when our clay-based soil was moist but not muddy. When the soil was too wet, the tool lost gripping ability, and when the soil was dry, the weed roots were more likely to break off. But in the most favorable conditions, we pulled 10 to 12 weeds per minute (5 to 6 seconds per weed).

Working just a few minutes a day, long enough to fill a bucket with weeds, we completely eradicated weeds from 5,000 square feet of lawn in 3 days. Grampa’s Weeder worked just as well in landscape and flower beds. For those who deal with regular invasions of taproot and fleshy root weeds, this could be a helpful weapon to fight the good fight.

Get the Grampa’s Weeder weeding tool at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Garrett Wade.

Best Fork Weeder

Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder
Photo: acehardware.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, pulling
  • Handle length: 34 inches
  • Head size: 3 inches long by 0.5 inch wide

What We Like

  • Cushioned nonslip grip is easier to handle for long periods
  • Capable of pulling out tough taproot weeds
  • Works from a standing position to save users’ backs
  • Also useful as a trash gatherer; multi purpose tool

What We Don’t Like

  • Taller or shorter users may find it less comfortable
  • Sharp head sometimes cuts off some of the root

Two-prong weeders are taproot specialists, and this one from Corona is one of the best. This weeding tool is made of steel with a sharpened heat-treated fork-tipped blade. It features a long handle that turns weeding into stand-up work, saving the user’s back and knees, while a trapezoidal-shaped cushioned-grip handle reduces hand fatigue.

We used this Corona tool to pull weeds from lawn, landscape, and garden beds. Although it is made of steel, it felt lightweight to carry around, and we appreciated the simplicity of the design—a complete lack of moving parts. It proved easy to operate one-handed: Slide the head into the ground next to the weed, then pull the lever backward to excavate the weed. It worked best on medium to large weeds (smaller weeds often slipped between the forks) when soil was damp. Mud, unfortunately, prevented the lever action from working properly, while hard dry soil led to root breaks and only partial removal. This weed puller was especially useful for woody weeds such as young oak, sweet gum, and elm seedlings. Despite soil condition issues, the tool proved to be an easy-to-use, easy-to-store asset for patrolling the yard.

Get the Corona weeding tool at Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Acme Tools.

Best Short-Handle Hoe

Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, chopping, slicing
  • Handle length: 5 inches
  • Head size: 5 inches long by 1.25 inches wide

What We Like

  • Sharp blade easily slices through roots; great for dealing with lots of weeds
  • High-carbon-steel blade and hardwood handle
  • Blade easy to sharpen and stays sharp a long time
  • Blade is angled for user comfort and efficient work

What We Don’t Like

  • Not designed for left-handed use
  • Overall tool length feels a bit too short

A kana hoe, which works on the pull stroke, is used for scraping and slicing cleanly through shallow roots in the upper layers of soil. This one from Elegital is built for up-close work in raised beds, container gardens, and in-ground gardens. The broadly curved blade is attached to the handle at a comfortable angle to reduce hand and wrist fatigue while working aggressively. It features a hardwood handle and a high-carbon-steel head that stays sharp longer and resharpens more easily than other types of steel.

The size of this tool was just right for scratching out 2 or 3 square feet of weeds at a time. The sharp blade sliced right through, whether the weeds were young or well established. In established garden areas, three or four strokes were adequate to cut through weed roots and break up the resulting debris. It works the soil to a depth of up to 4 or 6 inches, so it’s useful for preparing planting holes as well. However, where thick tree roots or large rocks were present, it became much less effective.

This kana hoe would be a great choice for general weeding and replanting in raised beds or well-established in-ground gardens but probably not for landscape beds. Note: The blade orientation is for right-handed users. Lefties may want to check out this one from Bonsai.

Get the Elegital weeding tool at Amazon.

Best Long-Handle Hoe

Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, chopping
  • Handle length: 54 inches
  • Head size: 6 inches long by 4.75 inches wide

What We Like

  • Welded steel head and hardwood handle is durable and long lasting
  • Lightweight and easy to use; works large soil areas quickly
  • Also useful for planting and cultivating

What We Don’t Like

  • Not built for use in untilled soil

This garden hoe is designed to be effective at eliminating different kinds of weeds in different garden spaces, and help with planting too. With an overall length of 54 inches, the Truper Tru weeding tool is a back-saving weed slayer. It offers plenty of reach to work through raised beds efficiently and in-ground gardens without unnecessary bending and stooping. It features a 54-inch hardwood handle and welded steel head.

We liked that we could easily use any edge of this hoe to eradicate weeds in different ways. Between rows of garden vegetables, we mostly used the long, slightly curved sides of the blade to scrape the weeds away, switching to the right or left side as needed to avoid damaging garden plants. Between plants spaced at least 4 or 5 inches apart, we employed the pointed end to scratch out weeds. In addition to weeding, we used this hoe to pull soil into mounds (“hills”) to plant squash and to create long, narrow furrows for planting beans.

The hardwood handle was lightweight and strong, and it felt good in hand, but it is no doubt susceptible to degradation if left exposed to the elements. Plus, we found that the tool was not particularly effective at working in heavy clay soil that had not been previously tilled. Still, this Warren hoe would make an excellent primary weeding tool for any vegetable gardener, and its versatility will suit those just beginning to establish a garden tool collection or with limited storage space.

Get the Truper weeding tool at Amazon, DK Hardware, or North 40 Outfitters.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Weeding Tools

Those looking for nontoxic ways to eliminate weeds from lawns and gardens typically begin by simply pulling them by hand. Soon enough they realize that specialized tools are better for controlling the toughest weeds. The locations where those tools will be used and the types of weeds that are present play dominant roles in deciding which weeding tools are best suited for the job. Our tests, therefore, included a variety of tools designed for specific tasks.

We carried out our weeding tool tests in two trial areas: a lawn and a vegetable garden. Both areas included a variety of common weeds with different growth habits, such as dandelions, wild violet, crabgrass, and spurge. We used each tool for a minimum of an hour to weed in one or both of these areas, depending on the tool design. For instance, we used the Warren hoe only in the garden, but we tested the Radius weeding tool in both areas.

For inclusion in this guide, we required that a tool offer excellent results in one or more critical weeding tasks: general weed control in raised or in-ground garden beds, general weed control in container gardens or confined spaces, or removing taproot and rosette weeds from lawns. Because of the diversity of designs tested, we evaluated each tool based on its ability to perform its own designed purpose instead of comparing dissimilar tools.

The Best Weeding Tools Types
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Weeding Tool

With a wide array of weeding tools from which to choose, it may be difficult to decide on the best ones to maintain garden beds and lawns. However, shoppers may appreciate the variety when they understand the features each tool offers, from pulling weeds to cutting through compacted soil. Take some time to learn about these implements and the factors that set them apart to find the best tool for weeding any yard.

Types of Weeding Tools

The method of weed removal, such as digging, chopping, cutting, slicing, or raking, distinguishes the several types of weeding tools from one another.

Digging and Chopping

Taproot weeds such as dandelions require a digging tool that penetrates soil deeply enough to dislodge the entire root. Traditional fork-tongue fishtail weeders work well. Snakehead and spearpoint tips also rise to the task. Grub hoes, the toughest of these tools, may make the best match for large weeds in heavy soil.

Short-handled chopping hoes help remove large weeds in areas that require more precision, such as around the base of perennials and shrubs. Steel diggers, perhaps the best digging tools for hard clay soil, won’t bend or break in denser soils.

Cutting and Slicing

Although not always useful on deeply rooted weeds, cutting tools such as knives and sickles work well on roots that are more fibrous, such as those of crabgrass and creeping Charlie, which sit close to the soil surface.

Knives cut away entire pieces of weed-infested turf and scrape out weeds from sidewalk cracks and pavers. Slicers, such as stirrup-style hoes, skim the surface of the soil with a push/pull motion. They quickly remove smaller weeds or those in cultivated beds.

Raking

Ideal for loose, easy-to-work soil in cultivated flower and vegetable gardens, raking weeders, like stirrup hoes, forks, and hybrid cultivators, combine digging and raking tools on a single head to lift clusters of shallow-rooted weeds.

These tools work with a push/pull action, skimming the soil surface and dislodging smaller weeds that gardeners can gather and discard or leave in place to decompose and feed the soil. Consider a long-handled raking weeder for removing weeds around shrubs and a short version for raised beds and tight spaces.

Size and Weight

The size and components of a weeding tool have the most impact on its weight. Hand tools may weigh less than a pound and usually no more than 5 or 6 pounds. Lighter manual full-length tools such as hoes and forks usually weigh between 5 and 10 pounds.

A heavy tool can be tiring to wield when weeding for a long period, so try to strike a balance between durability and weight (not to mention cost). Aluminum and plastic garden tools are lighter and less expensive, but they most likely won’t last very long. Steel and fiberglass are pricier and last longer. Wooden tools weigh more and cost less.

Those working on a small flower bed with minimal growing areas may find a smaller, lighter tool sufficient. Smaller tools allow for more flexibility and precision in tighter spaces. More extensive gardens require heavier, sturdier tools that provide more leverage for digging and breaking up soil.

Blade and Handle Material

Stainless steel, aluminum, plastic, wood, and fiberglass figure prominently into the handles and blades of weeding tools.

  • Steel lasts a long time and gets the job done, but it’s not lightweight. A steel shaft or handle weighs more than aluminum, plastic, and fiberglass. And only stainless steel or powder-coated steel resists rust.
  • Aluminum weighs less than steel and resists rust. On the other hand, this less expensive material bends and dents more easily than steel. Aluminum may not stand up well to hard, rocky soil.
  • Plastic handles weigh less and cost less, but the lightweight, inexpensive material can break or crack with heavy or extended use—so they’re hardly a bargain in the long run.
  • Wood handles and shafts provide a cost-effective, durable, and moderate weight option. But wood can break, crack, and rot in certain weather conditions.
  • Fiberglass provides a strong and lightweight handle at a slightly higher price. This material stands strong against rust and extreme weather.

Handle Length

For the right handle length, consider both the work area and the user’s own physical limitations. Large garden beds and walkways are best weeded from an upright position that takes the stress off the back, helping gardeners do the greatest amount of work with the least amount of effort. If bad knees or hips make it difficult to kneel comfortably, choose a longer handle.

Some weeders include a feature that lets users pull the weed and discard it without having to bend over. Raised beds and tight spaces are conducive to short-handled weeders that let gardeners—especially those with healthy joints—get up close. Some weeding tools include an ergonomic grip that keeps the hand and wrist at the same angle, eliminating strain on joints caused by prolonged repetitive use.

Grip

Rubber coating on grips and handles can help alleviate wear and tear on hands. Shoppers will want to keep in mind that regardless of the ergonomic or fatigue-relieving features any handle or grip might offer, it’s still a good idea to wear a quality pair of gardening gloves to avoid scratches and cuts from branches, stones, and thorns.

Plastic handles designed in ergonomic shapes that offer a comfortable grip work fine for smaller tools. However, they often can’t handle the leveraging pressure that larger tools can, and they will snap easily.

The Best Weeding Tools Options
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

FAQs

Q. What are the best tools for removing weeds?

Many different tools can aid in removing weeds. As noted in this guide, weeding tools typically fall into three categories: digging and chopping tools, cutting and slicing tools, and raking tools. Within these categories, there are a variety of options, including fork weeders, snakehead weeders, spearpoint-tip weeders, grub hoes, knife weeders, sickles, and stirrup hoes.

Q. Which tool is used for removing weeds around plants?

It’s important to move carefully around flowers, shrubs, and other plants to avoid damaging their roots. With this in mind, the Elegital weeding tool is a good choice for maintaining control while removing weeds from around plants.

Q. What is the best tool for removing dandelions?

Pullers tend to be the best dandelion weeder tools. One of the best tools for removing dandelions is Grampa’s Weeder.

Q. What is the best hand weeder?

The best hand weeder can vary depending on the user and the task at hand, but the CobraHead weeding tool and the Radius Garden weeding tool are among the best hand weeders available.

The post The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-19T09:35:15-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested]]>The best garden hose reels eliminate the need to wrap up a hose manually and keep the hose stored tidily. Learn the features to look for and see our picks.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:45:56 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’ve ever used a hose around the garden, you may know the struggle of wrangling it when you’re done with a given task. Although many garden hose storage options seek to simplify putting away a garden hose, few make it as easy as a retractable hose reel. There are a number of retractable hose reels on the market, and we tested eight top models for functionality, durability, installation ease, value, and curb appeal.

How does a retractable hose reel work? A round housing unit holds a garden hose and a reel powered by a large spring. As you extend the hose from the unit, a spring attached to the reel begins to wind and tighten. When you’re finished using the hose and want to store it, simply tug the hose to release a locking mechanism and engage the spring-loaded reel, which automatically winds up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Our top pick was the 130-foot retractable option from Giraffe Tools thanks to its lockable hose and 180-degree swivel. Find out how each product fared in our hands-on testing and which ones are our top picks for the best retractable garden hose reels in various categories.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  2. RUNNER-UP: Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  5. BEST FOR SMALL YARDS: Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
  6. BEST FOR MEDIUM YARDS: Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  7. BEST FOR LARGE YARDS: Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  8. BEST SPIKE-MOUNTED: Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike 
The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels Options
Photo: Katie Barton for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

LengthSizeNozzle
Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel130 feet½-inch diameterAdjustable with 9 spray pattern
Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel100 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 100 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel60 feet½-inch diameter Not included
Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel50 feetUnspecifiedFire hose
Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel90 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel155 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike66 feetUnspecifiedFire hose

Our Top Picks

These top picks represent some of the best retractable garden hose reels on the market today. They are easy to operate, with proven designs that will quickly retract a hose without tangling. We’ve included a selection of reels to accommodate various hose lengths, and we extensively tested each model for functionality and durability.

Best Overall

Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • 130-foot hose locks at any length, making it ideal for all yard sizes
  • Auto-rewind system retracts the hose without any kinking or tangling
  • Hose reel features a 180-degree swivel and is removable for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Loose rubber gaskets inside the hose’s couplings fell out upon unboxing

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 130 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Adjustable with 9 spray patterns

With its ample length and durable construction, this retractable garden hose reel from Giraffe Tools is a quality choice for just about any yard. It comes equipped with a 130-foot hose that locks at any length, allowing it to reach even the far corners of a lawn. The hose itself is made of an abrasion-resistant hybrid material that can handle pressures of up to 600 pounds per square inch (PSI)—nearly twice what most hoses can handle—without bursting. This is a key feature, given that the hoses in retractable reels generally aren’t replaceable. 

The Giraffe Tools retractable hose reel came with everything we needed to mount the bracket to our wooden post, and the process was simple, taking less than 10 minutes. The handy quick-release system made it easy to set the reel in the bracket and remove it for portability or storage. The hose pulled out smoothly, requiring little effort on our part. To retract the hose, we gave it a gentle tug, and the auto-rewind system kicked in, rolling it up without any kinking or tangling. 

We also appreciated the hose’s high-quality spray nozzle, which features nine unique spray patterns. We repeatedly dropped the hose on our concrete patio to test for durability, and there was no damage to the nozzle or couplings. The only malfunction we encountered was minor: The rubber gaskets in the hose’s couplings were loose, falling out as we unboxed the reel. It was easy to put them back in place, but potential buyers will want to keep this in mind.

Get the Giraffe Tools 130-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Runner-up

Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install mounting bracket; hose reel locks in place via a metal pin
  • 100-foot hose length is ideal for yards and gardens of all sizes
  • Durable 9-pattern spray nozzle is suitable for various applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Retraction requires the gentlest of pulls; required several attempts after each use

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Aquazilla retractable water hose reel was on par with our top pick, earning it the Runner-Up award. The hose features a ⅝-inch diameter and a 100-foot length, perfect for extended reach through the yard. The mounting bracket has a 180-degree swivel, and the hose locks at any length. 

Upon unboxing the Aquazilla retractable garden hose, we were impressed with the attractiveness of the design. A handle at the top of the reel made it easy for us to carry and then install the product. It took us a mere 5 minutes to install the mounting bracket on our wooden post; the reel hooked to the bracket via a removable metal pin. 

During testing, we could pull the hose smoothly from the reel, and it locked into place the second we stopped pulling. Our only issue was that retracting the hose required only the gentlest tug, which we never could seem to achieve on the first try. However, once the hose did retract, the hose guide prevented any kinking. The heavy-duty, pistol-grip spray nozzle resisted any cracking when we dropped it on our concrete patio. We also found the nozzle’s nine different spray patterns useful for many applications, including rinsing off our patio and watering flowers.

Get the Aquazilla retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Reasonably priced compared with retractable hose reels of a similar size
  • Easiest to pull the hose of all the models we tested
  • 100-foot hose length is suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic housing unit appears to be of lower quality than other top picks

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 3/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

This retractable garden hose reel from Eneacro offers several good features at a reasonable price. It automatically locks at any length and retracts slowly using an internal breaking mechanism. The hose’s 100-foot length makes it suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes. The reel includes a side mount and can rotate 180 degrees to reach all parts of a yard, and users can remove the reel from the bracket for easy winter storage. 

Upon unboxing, it was apparent why this garden hose reel was cheaper than other products on our list. The plastic housing unit was thinner, and the hose looked to be of lower quality. However, looks can be deceiving, as we were pleasantly surprised by this hose reel’s performance. 

We installed the mounting bracket by drilling four pilot holes and then screwing the bracket in place. We then attached the reel and began using the hose. This hose was the easiest to pull among all of our top picks. There was no resistance, and drawing out the entire hose length took zero force. When we had finished using it, the hose retracted smoothly. The hose also features a handy pistol-grip nozzle with nine spray patterns. While this model’s housing unit appears to be a lower quality than that of the other products, it’s still an ideal option for users who value ease of use—and at a lower price.

Get the Eneacro retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Upgrade Pick

Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Features durable construction and an attractive modern design
  • Hybrid polymer hose is thick, flexible, and resistant to kinking
  • Simple installation and easy to remove from the mount for portability or storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Inconsistent retraction; the hose sometimes rewinds to one side rather than evenly throughout the reel
  • Doesn’t include a spray nozzle or screws for the mounting bracket

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 3/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs

  • Length: 60 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Not included

For shoppers who want to invest in a higher-priced retractable hose reel, it’s best to choose a sturdy model designed for ease of use like this Macnaught hose reel that features heavy-duty construction and a high-quality hose. Although the 60-foot hose has a smaller ½-inch diameter, it’s made from a hybrid polymer material that doesn’t hold a coiled shape, making it easier to extend and less likely to kink. 

When we unboxed the hose reel, we were impressed with the material quality. The hose felt flexible but thick—definitely a grade above the other options. The housing unit featured durable plastic and a modern design. It included a metal bracket for installation; unfortunately, though, no screws were included. Luckily, we had some screws on hand and were able to mount the bracket to our post in just a few minutes.

Similar to other retractable garden hose reels, this model locks automatically and retracts with a gentle pull. However, the retraction was inconsistent during our testing. Sometimes the garden hose would retract in an even pattern, while other times it would all go to one side. In those instances, we’d have to unwind the hose and retract it again to straighten it out. An additional downside to this model is that it didn’t include a spray nozzle.

Get the Macnaught retractable garden hose reel at Amazon

Best for Small Yards

Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel

 The Best Retractable Garden Hose Option Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Includes hose guide for easy, even retraction within the reel
  • Reel attaches to the mounting bracket via a removable metal pin
  • Hose is easy to pull out, locks in place, and smoothly retracts

What We Don’t Like

  • Hose features plastic couplings with snap-on connections, which may be less desirable 

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 50 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

The shorter 50-foot hose on this Gardena model is ideal for keeping flower beds and landscaping in smaller yards well irrigated. Similar to other hose reels, it mounts to a wall and swivels 180 degrees to access different parts of the yard. A bracket on the mount pairs with a standard padlock (not included) to prevent theft. Users can easily remove the reel from the mount for winter storage. 

We installed the bracket to our wooden post with four screws and then set the reel on top, locking it in with a metal pin. We then tested the hose, pulling it out and retracting it more than a dozen times. The hose extended and retracted smoothly and efficiently each time. This product includes a handy hose guide for installation on the corner of a house or building to prevent snags.

Rather than metal couplings like the other hose reels we tested, this product has plastic couplings with snap-on connections. The water source hook-up, however, has a standard threaded connection. Additionally, this hose reel has a basic fire-hose nozzle, which wasn’t our favorite, but it works well for watering plants.

Get the Gardena 50-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best for Medium Yards

Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Attractive and high-quality housing unit made from reinforced propylene plastic
  • Kink-proof hose retracts via a guide that keeps it tidy inside the housing unit
  • 90-foot hose length and versatile spray nozzle are ideal for many applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t pull as smoothly as other tested products from this brand; requires force

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 90 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel is an attractive option for midsize yards and gardens. The housing unit is durable, consisting of reinforced propylene plastic that won’t fade in the sun. The reel features a self-layering system that guides the hose into the unit smoothly and without any kinking. 

This model included everything we needed to mount it, including a propylene bracket and four screws with plastic anchors. After mounting, all we had to do was set the reel in place. We started our functionality testing by pulling the length of the hose out of the reel multiple times. We immediately noticed that this model required much more force to pull than the other Giraffe Tools models we tested.

The retraction on this hose worked as expected, rewinding smoothly and without kinks. We repeatedly dropped the nine-setting spray nozzle on the concrete patio to mimic the regular wear and tear the hose might experience. The couplings never warped, and the nozzle didn’t crack or show any signs of damage. Overall, this is a high-quality retractable garden hose reel, but it requires some upper body strength to extend the entire length of the hose.

Get the Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best for Large Yards

Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Extra-long hose length of 155 feet is ideal for large yards, gardens, and barns
  • Durable, heavy-duty housing is made from reinforced and fade-resistant propylene
  • Versatile spray nozzle with 9 spray patterns meets multiple needs

What We Don’t Like

  • Long hose length makes reel heavier to carry and install
  • Wider mounting bracket may limit installation options

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 155 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

With a whopping 155 feet of hose length, this Giraffe Tools option is one of the longest retractable garden hose reels on the market, making it ideal for yards that extend far from the spigot. The reel functions similarly to other retractable hose reels, locking automatically at any length and retracting with a simple tug. 

The mounting bracket was wider than others on our list, requiring a minimum of a 4-inch by 6-inch post on which to mount it. Alternatively, users can mount it directly to the side of a house or building. We installed the bracket on our wooden post, which took only a few minutes. We then set the reel in place and began using the hose. The reel weighs about 40 pounds, making it slightly more challenging to install.

We expected such a long hose to be more difficult to pull, but it wasn’t. It pulled smoothly from the reel, locking in place each time we stopped. It also retracted with a gentle tug, never kinking. The durable sprayer nozzle featured the same nine-setting pistol grip as on all the Giraffe Tools models we tested. We subjected the nozzle to many drops on our concrete patio, and it held up well. And we found the multiple sprayer settings useful for a variety of applications.

Get the Giraffe Tools 155-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Spike Mounted

Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike

 The Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install metal ground spike eliminates the need for wall mounting
  • Hose pulls out smoothly and retracts with a gentle tug
  • 66-foot length suits small to medium yards and gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Includes a basic adjustable nozzle instead of a higher-quality spray nozzle
  • Expensive for the quality and size of the hose reel

Our Ratings: Installation 4/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 3.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 66 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

Users who can’t or don’t want to wall-mount a hose reel can still enjoy the benefits of a retractable garden hose with the spike-mounted Gardena 66-foot hose reel. The housing unit is constructed with frostproof and UV-resistant material and features RollControl technology for safe retraction.

This hose reel came with everything we needed to install it. We mounted the stake by finding a suitable, utility-free area in our yard and then used the included metal rod to twist the stake into place. We couldn’t get the stake all the way into the ground, but we pushed it deep enough to support the hose reel. We then assembled the reel and placed it on the mount. 

The hose didn’t feel quite as durable as the other models we tested, but it extended and retracted smoothly with no tangling or kinking. The 66-foot length makes it best suited for small to medium yards. This model has a fire-hose adjustable nozzle, which didn’t have the quality of the nozzles on other top picks. However, it still held up to many drops on the concrete patio and worked well for watering plants. 

Get the Gardena 66-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels

  • Products tested: 8
  • Hours spent testing: 6.5
  • Tests performed: 5
  • Average price: $180

Before starting our hands-on testing of the best retractable garden hose reels, we researched top consumer needs and considered more than 15 options with high user reviews. Then, we narrowed our list to eight models to test and spent a month installing and using each retractable hose reel.

First, we mounted each hose reel to a wooden post using the included bracket and screws, if applicable. To test for functionality, we extended the full length of the hose and then retracted it at least a dozen times, noting the overall ease or difficulty, the smoothness, and how well it retracted. We also dropped the hose couplings and any included nozzles on our concrete patio multiple times to mimic the natural wear and tear these parts may undergo. Finally, we kept all of our test results in a rubric, and—at the end of the testing period—used these results to rate each product and award it as the top pick in one of the categories.

What to Consider When Choosing a Retractable Garden Hose Reel 

Although knowing the length of the hose is key when you’re purchasing a retractable garden hose reel, there are other important factors to consider, such as the hose diameter, nozzle type, and mounting design. 

Length

“Hose length is definitely a top consideration,” says Jeremy Yamaguchi, CEO of Lawn Love. “If you want to be able to extend your hose out to water the plants across your lawn without requiring a watering can to make up the difference, then make sure to measure the distance you need.”

Though other types of hose storage solutions may allow you to add length by attaching an additional hose, you won’t be able to add to or replace the hose that comes with a retractable reel. The best way to determine the length you’ll need is to measure from an outdoor spigot to the farthest point in the yard. Hose lengths for retractable garden hose reels typically range from about 50 to 150 feet. 

Mounting and Portability 

A retractable garden hose holder comes with a mounting kit for installation on the side of a house, shed, or even a fence or post. The mounting kit allows the reel to hinge left to right 180 degrees, making it easier to direct the hose toward a flower bed, driveway, or other location. 

Mounting the hose reel is necessary to provide a solid base while pulling the hose for retraction. A hose reel wall mount typically has a removable pin that allows the user to detach the entire device from the mount, which is convenient when storing the hose in a shed or garage for the winter. 

Hose Size

Hose sizes for retractable garden hoses vary from ⅜ of an inch in diameter up to ⅝ of an inch in diameter. A larger-diameter hose can carry more water and therefore produce a higher flow rate than a smaller-diameter hose. With this in mind, a ⅜-inch or ½-inch hose is best suited for watering plants, while a ⅝-inch hose is ideal for uses that demand higher water volume, such as running a sprinkler or washing a car. 

Nozzle Type

Some garden hose reels feature one of two types of nozzle: pistol grip or fire hose. Pistol-grip models fit ergonomically in the hand with a grip and trigger that allow the user to regulate the amount of output. The nozzle has a throttle tip for toggling between eight or nine spray patterns, including a stream, broad fan, and mist. 

Fire-hose nozzles are long and straight. The user can adjust the spray from a high-pressure stream to a broad fan by twisting the nozzle. Though a fire-hose nozzle doesn’t offer the same variety of spray patterns as a pistol-grip nozzle, it is usually made from all-metal parts and is typically more durable. 

Most nozzle types use standard fittings, so you can easily replace one later with an aftermarket nozzle, if necessary.

The Advantages of Owning a Retractable Garden Hose Reel

Although retractable reels are one of the more expensive storage solutions for garden hoses, there are several good reasons to invest in one. A retractable hose reel makes it easy to collect and store a garden hose that is up to 155 feet in length, eliminating the need to wrangle a hose manually. Garden hose reels also feature wall mounts, which can inconspicuously attach to a house or shed, unlike a hose reel cart that requires indoor storage. These reels detach easily from their mounts and double as a storage container for the hose during winter months. A retractable garden hose reel can:

  • Eliminate the need to manually wind up a hose
  • Store the hose in an out-of-the-way place
  • Allow for convenient transport of the hose for winter storage

“With longer hoses, it’s definitely helpful to have a crank feature or a retractable design to bring the hose back into place. If you don’t need a long hose and/or don’t need to take it out very far, a retractable hose may be an unnecessary expense,” says Yamaguchi. With that in mind, if you have a small yard with low water needs, a quality expandable hose may be sufficient.

FAQs

If you’re wondering how to use your new retractable garden hose reel or want to know what to do if the hose becomes damaged, read on for answers to these frequently asked questions. 

Q. Why do I need a retractable garden hose reel?

A retractable garden hose reel makes it easier to collect and store the hose by eliminating the need to manually wind it up. A quality hose reel also provides a tidy place to store the hose during the winter months. 

Q. How do I use a hose reel?

To use a hose reel, grab the nozzle end and pull the hose to the desired location for watering. The hose will automatically lock when you stop pulling. To retract the hose, give it a quick tug. The hose reel will automatically wind up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Q. Can I replace a hose in a retractable hose reel?

Most hoses in retractable hose reels are not replaceable. If the hose becomes damaged, however, you may be able to repair it with a patch kit. 

Meet the Tester

Katie Barton has over 10 years of experience in product writing, has tested dozens of cleaning products, and has authored hundreds of articles for major media outlets. Her cleaning and organizing advice has been featured on GOBankingRates, Realtor.com, Yahoo!, Cabin Life, and more. She takes an unbiased approach to product testing, using each product multiple times or for several days/weeks to determine efficacy. Her goal is to help readers decide which products are worth their hard-earned money and which fall flat.

Additional research provided by Tony Carrick.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T10:45:56-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden]]>Explore the best soil for raised beds to suit different types of plants, from topsoil to mixes, peat moss, compost, and more.

The post The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-for-raised-beds/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-for-raised-beds/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 08:53:57 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

For plants, soil provides another vital element. It doesn’t just deliver nutrients to hungry fruits, vegetables, and flowers; good garden bed soil increases the airflow around plant roots to avoid compaction and improve drainage as it retains moisture for basic hydration.

Gardening with raised beds provides more control over the soil. However, the best soil for raised beds depends on the plants you want to grow. Many soil types are suitable for a variety of uses, while others are more specific in their purpose. To bolster our own research, we interviewed Elizabeth Jones, the seed librarian at the Jefferson Public Library in Jefferson, Georgia, and owner of Excel at Gardening, who gave us her expert advice on soil.

Our favorite was FoxFarm’s Happy Frog potting soil for its organic mix of pH-balanced ingredients. Read on for more of the top soils for raised beds and some things to keep in mind as you shop. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting Soil
  2. RUNNER-UP: Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil Mix
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco Coir
  4. BEST ORGANIC: Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil
  5. BEST TOPSOIL: Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil
  6. BEST COMPOST: Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost
  7. BEST PEAT MOSS: Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss
  8. BEST VERMICULITE: Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite
  9. BEST FOR VEGETABLES: Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed Mix
  10. BEST FOR HERBS AND FLOWERS: Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil
The best soil for raised beds options being poured into a raised bed
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

IngredientsQuantityOrganic?
FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting SoilEarthworm castings, bat guano, and aged forest products2 cubic feet✅
Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil MixSphagnum peat moss, peat humus, coir, perlite, ground limestone20 quarts❌
Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco CoirCompressed coco coir15 gallons (from 1 block); other sizes available✅
Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting SoilCoco coir, worm castings, and fertilizer12 cups (expands to 3 gallons)✅
Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top SoilReed sedge peat and sand4.5 cubic feet✅
Charlie’s 10-Pound CompostChicken manure, biochar, organic grasses and organic crop production residue0.4 cubic feet✅
Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat MossPeat moss10 quarts ✅
Ferry Morse Professional Grade VermiculiteVermiculite grades8 quarts❌
Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed MixFully cured compost, sphagnum peat moss, dehydrated poultry manure, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, biochar, worm castings and mycorrhizae1 cubic foot ✅
Miracle-Gro Raised Bed SoilSphagnum peat moss, compost, worm castings, alfalfa and kelp meal1.5 cubic feet✅

Our Top Picks

Here are some of our top soil recommendations to help fill raised garden beds. There are specialized soils as well as general mixes to help plants thrive, including soils from brands long trusted in the gardening world. All you’ll need to do is slip on your gardening gloves, open up the bags, fill up your beds, refill your watering can, and get growing. 

BEST OVERALL

FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting Soil

 Bag of FoxFarm 2-Cubic Feet Happy Frog Potting Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Earthworm castings, bat guano, and aged forest products
  • Quantity: 2 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Mycorrhizal fungi content promotes root development
  • Excels at starting seeds
  • Great for winter sowing
  • pH-balanced product ideal for fruits, vegetables, and flowers

What We Don’t Like

  • Comes at a premium price

The FoxFarm Happy Frog organic garden soil contains a mix of microbes with mycorrhizal fungi and sediment. The fungi content enhances the nutrient uptake of the root system by creating a symbiotic relationship with the root mass. Essentially, it expands the root’s reach, promoting their development. 

That fungi content gets balanced with sediment that maintains the light texture and aeration needed to let plant roots expand as they consume nutrients. The mix contains a pH balance for optimal growth that’s supportive of fruit, vegetables, or flowers. Keep in mind that the soil has been inoculated with mycorrhizal fungi, so there is a possibility to see white growth in the mix, which is normal.

Get the FoxFarm soil for raised beds at Amazon, Target, or Walmart.

RUNNER-UP

Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil Mix

 Bag of Sunday Moisture Potting Mix
Photo: GetSunday.com

Product Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, peat humus, coir, perlite, ground limestone
  • Quantity: 20 quarts
  • Organic: No

What We Like

  • Ideal for repotting plants into containers and raised beds
  • Also includes ground limestone for added nutrients
  • Helps drain and aerate roots for better plant growth

What We Don’t Like

  • Users will want to pair it with a fertilizer for best results

With ingredients like peat humus for nutrients, perlite for aeration, and peat moss for moisture retention, Sunday’s soil mix provides the right growing conditions for healthy plant growth and proper drainage. This is especially useful when used in a raised bed setting, where aeration and drainage are vital to plant success. 

This 20-quart bag of soil is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use and is especially great for repotting plants and herbs in containers. A final special ingredient in this product is ground limestone, which adds essential calcium and magnesium nutrients to the soil for optimal plant growth. Sunday does note to consumers, however, that this is not a substitute for fertilizer.

Get the Sunday soil for raised beds at Sunday.

BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK

Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco Coir

 Brick of Mountain Valley Minute Soil - Compressed Coco Coir
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Compressed coco coir 
  • Quantity: 15 gallons (from 1 block); other sizes available
  • Organic: Yes

What We Like

  • Compact, lightweight, and easy to store until needed
  • Available in multiple sizes, either as large bricks or smaller pucks
  • Suitable for a range of flowers, plants, and herbs

What We Don’t Like

  • Coco coir is nutrient-poor, requiring supplements for better plant growth
  • Retains moisture extremely well; not suitable for all plants

Mountain Valley Minute Soil compressed coco coir fiber grow medium squeezes the growing medium down to a compact brick full of goodness. Made of raw coconut coir, this fibrous block expands to a light texture designed to aerate and it retains moisture. At the same time, it provides a nutritious boost for topsoil. 

Gardeners can rehydrate the entire block to create 15 gallons of growing medium or hydrate only the amount needed for a specific project. The compressed packaging stores easily and provides options for a wide range of gardening needs and uses. These compressed blocks come in several sizes to suit most gardener’s available storage space. 

Get the Mountain Valley soil for raised beds at Amazon or True Leaf Market.

BEST ORGANIC

Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil

 Box of Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Coco coir, worm castings, and fertilizer
  • Quantity: 12 cups (expands to 3 gallons)
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Holds 50 percent more water than regular soil
  • Can be used on existing soil as a nutrient boost
  • Can be rehydrated as needed

What We Don’t Like

  • Not available in multiple size options

Organic Plant Magic compressed organic potting soil for gardens and plants contains natural, organic fertilizer ingredients to feed and nourish plants. This compressed soil can be rehydrated and used as the nutrient layer or applied directly to existing soil without rehydrating. This dry, organic mix alone holds 50 percent more water than regular soil, which is one reason it works so well for raised beds. 

The soil contains natural coconut coir, worm castings, mycorrhizae, helpful bacteria, amino acids, and humic acids. These ingredients work together for a slow release of nutrients so that plants don’t get overwhelmed. This package requires 12 cups of water to create 2 pounds of compressed soil. The mixture then expands to create 3 gallons of usable healthy soil.

Get the Organic Plant Magic soil for raised beds at Amazon or Organic Plant Magic.

BEST TOPSOIL

Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil

 Bag of Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Reed sedge peat and sand
  • Quantity: 4.5 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes

What We Like

  • Works well with heavy clay soils to help loosen the mixture
  • Helps increase water retention in lighter soils 
  • Can be used as a top dressing and to fill holes in lawns and gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be mixed with other soil

Topsoil fills a raised bed rather than nourishing the plants in it. The Michigan Peat Garden Magic top soil does that with a mix of reed sedge peat and sand. For gardeners who are using dirt from the natural landscape, this garden soil mix can loosen heavy clay soils and improve the water retention of light, airy soils. 

Sometimes topsoils can arrive with twigs and debris that aren’t harmful but don’t help your garden. The Michigan Peat topsoil (usually) arrives without clumps or these surprise additions, sticking with pure ingredients. However, the topsoil is designed to be used as conditioner for heavy soil or mixed with other growing mediums, but not used on its own.

Get the Michigan Peat soil for raised beds at Amazon.

BEST COMPOST

Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost

 Bag of Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Chicken manure, biochar, organic grasses and organic crop production residue
  • Quantity: 0.4 cubic feet
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Composted for 8 to 12 weeks
  • Powerful formula, yet it’s still safe to use in direct contact with plants 
  • Affordable compared to other big name brands

What We Don’t Like

  • Made to be used as an amendment/natural fertilizer only

Charlie’s Compost has natural ingredients composted and ready for plants to soak up nutrients. It contains a garden soil mix of chicken manure, cornstalks, forest products, hay, straw, clay, and microbe inoculants. Before being bagged, the ingredients are composted for 8 to 12 weeks, at which time they’re ready for application to the garden. 

The blend is designed to be mixed with other soils or as an additive around plants. If used in direct contact with plants, be sure to use it sparingly: It’s powerful enough to burn delicate plants. There have also been (rare) instances of bags arriving with ingredients that aren’t completely broken down. 

Get the Charlie’s Compost soil for raised beds at Amazon.

BEST PEAT MOSS

Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss

 Bag of Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Peat moss 
  • Quantity: 10 quarts 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Provides ample drainage and aeration
  • Also adds great moisture retention
  • Relatively affordable bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Designed to be mixed with heavy soil

Hoffman Canadian sphagnum peat moss contains 99.8 percent natural ingredients, consisting almost entirely of natural peat. This mix helps break up compacted soils, aerate roots, and improve drainage. However, the peat also holds water for better moisture retention in a raised bed setting. 

This bag provides a big bang for the buck. It’s meant to mix with other soils, so even in a large raised bed, it can go a long way. Keep in mind that heavily compacted soils will require more peat to loosen the soil than light, airy soils.

Get the Hoffman peat moss at Amazon.

BEST VERMICULITE

Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite

 Bag of Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Vermiculite grades
  • Quantity: 8 quarts 
  • Organic: No

What We Like

  • Can be added to other soils for a potent mix
  • Suitable for seedlings and plants that prefer a high moisture content
  • Can help promote aeration in more compacted soils

What We Don’t Like

  • May provide too much moisture for some plants 
  • Not meant to be the primary growing medium

The professional-grade vermiculite by Ferry Morse contains a mix of vermiculite grades, fine to coarse, in one mix. However, it tends to contain more fine-grade particles, which makes a difference in the plants for which it works best—mostly plants that prefer a high moisture content. With the right soils, it can be used to improve aeration and keep plants well hydrated. 

This vermiculite provides adequate moisture levels for seedlings, too. However, the fine grade doesn’t take much moisture to keep plants healthy. Gardeners need to know their plants and soil mixes well when using this vermiculite. In some cases, it can retain too much moisture for plants that are easily overwatered.

Get the Ferry Morse vermiculite at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Ferry Morse.

BEST FOR VEGETABLES

Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed Mix

 Bag of Coast of Maine Castine Blend - Organic & Natural Mix
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Fully cured compost, sphagnum peat moss, dehydrated poultry manure, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, biochar, worm castings and mycorrhizae
  • Quantity: 1 cubic foot 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Specially designed for outdoor raised garden beds
  • Balanced pH is safe to use for vegetables, fruits, plants, and flowers 
  • OMRI listed for guaranteed natural and organic materials
  • Website has a handy calculator for how much users need for their space

What We Don’t Like

  • Moisture retention and nutrients not suitable for indoor use or potted plants

Coast of Maine Organic & Natural Mix nourishes plants with natural ingredients designed for plants meant for human consumption. That doesn’t mean it can’t work well for flowers and inedibles, but when it comes to vegetables, organic ingredients ensure top nutrients. It’s OMRI listed, providing an extra layer of assurance that ingredients meet requirements to qualify as natural and organic. 

This raised bed mix contains fully cured compost, dehydrated poultry manure, sphagnum peat moss, biochar, worm castings, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, and mycorrhizae. 

A wide and varied mix of ingredients balances pH and provides nutrients for an equally diverse range of plants. Keep in mind that this soil is designed specifically for outdoor raised beds. It’s not one to use with indoor potted plants because it won’t provide the right moisture retention or nutrients. 

Get the Coast of Maine soil for raised beds at Amazon, The Home Depot, Target, or Coast of Maine.

BEST FOR HERBS AND FLOWERS

Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil

 Bag of Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil
Photo: lowes.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, compost, worm castings, alfalfa and kelp meal
  • Quantity: 1.5 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Premixed bag is specially formulated for raised bed gardens 
  • Mixture can help control weeds and pests 
  • Certified by the Organic Materials Review Institute

What We Don’t Like

  • Does not control moisture as well as other options

The OMRI-certified Miracle-Gro raised bed soil mix provides organic matter needed for good drainage while growing flowers, herbs, vegetables, and fruits. The raised bed soil requires no mixing. Designed specifically for raised beds, this mixture helps keep pests and weeds under control. 

The premixed blend comes in 1.5 cubic foot bags. It takes about three bags to fill a 2-foot by 2-foot bed that is 1 foot high.

Get the Miracle-Gro soil for raised beds at Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Tractor Supply Co.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Soil for Raised Beds

We researched the most sought-after soil for raised beds in their respective categories and discovered that the best options are determined by their ingredients, quantity, versatility, and other special features included by top brands.

While searching for the best garden bed soil, we reached out to Teri Valenzuela, the natural science manager at Sunday, a nationwide lawn and garden care company. Her advice? “Look for ingredients like fresh compost or peat humus for good nutrient levels, vermiculite or perlite for aeration, and peat moss or coconut coir for moisture retention. These ingredients provide the right growing conditions for healthy plant growth and proper drainage.”

She adds that shoppers will want to “avoid mixes with heavier in-ground garden soil mixes, bio-solids containing contaminants, and excessive wood products. They may hinder plant growth by impacting drainage and nutrient availability.”

With these expert tips in mind, we made sure to include a wide range of soil recipes on our list of recommendations that meet these standards, avoiding poorer quality mixes. As such, many of our chosen mixes are formulated to provide drainage and aeration and select options can be used for indoor and outdoor plants, vegetables, fruits, flowers, and herbs. 

Whether you need 1 cubic foot or over 15 gallons of soil, the above list includes options that resist compacting, are pH-balanced, and can be used on existing soil with grown plants as well as seedlings. Many of our picks can be mixed with other soils to create a custom blend that works perfectly for your own plants.

What to Consider When Choosing Soil for Raised Beds

Growing flowers and food in a raised garden bed differs from growing them directly in the ground. Consider these key points before dumping dirt into your raised beds. 

Raised Bed Height

Knowing the size of your raised bed garden will help you determine how much soil you will need to fill it. Thankfully, there are plenty of useful calculators that can help with this task, taking into account shape and dimensions. In general, the taller the raised bed, the more raised bed soil you’ll need. 

Taller raised beds or tabletop designs can eliminate back strain and make gardening more comfortable. Alternatively, you can fill the bottom of a tall ground level bed with filler like dead leaves or cardboard to minimize the amount of raised bed soil mix you’ll need. 

Plant Type and Root Depth 

The plants grown in the garden will determine the best raised bed soil depth needed for optimum growth. Generally, a good rule of thumb is to build a raised bed that’s at least 6 inches deep. This depth allows for drainage and retains moisture at levels needed for many common crops. However, some plants have deeper roots than others. For example, if you plan to grow root vegetables like carrots, a depth of 12 inches is preferable. 

Raised beds are great for any kind of plant but work particularly well for growing vegetables. Elevating the growing space keeps weeds at bay and the soil warm and prevents compaction. Gardeners also get to start with pristine, neutral-pH soil. However, if you’re using previously used soil, do a soil test to determine whether you need any amendments or fertilizer to renew the nutrients.

Soil Components

Many gardeners have tried-and-true soil mix recipes, but in general, it’s best to avoid settling for uber-cheap bags of raised bed soil. A good soil mix contains topsoil, a small amount of substrate, and a significant amount of compost, which contains nutrients that improve soil conditions. 

The least expensive bags of soil are usually low quality and full of weed seed, debris, and other nasty contaminants. They’re also unlikely to contain many valuable nutrients. 

Topsoil is basically filler soil needed for everything from raised bed gardening to indoor potted plants. It makes up the bulk of most raised bed soil mixes. It’s not very rich in nutrients but is a necessary component that contains organic matter. 

The substrate makes up a small percentage of the raised bed soil mix but is extremely important. It helps control moisture content, which is key in a raised bed. Some of the substrates that might appear in soil mixes include peat moss, rock phosphate, vermiculite, perlite, and coco coir. Again, the type of plants you choose to grow will help determine the appropriate substrate to support them. 

Be careful to avoid adding too much peat moss, which can increase the acidity of the soil and throw off the pH balance. Some gardeners prefer to fill raised garden beds with a topsoil-free mix, using equal parts compost, perlite, and coco coir. It makes for a fluffy, moisture-retaining growing medium. 

Compost from multiple sources is best because it provides a wide variety of nutrients. It can even come from your own backyard pile that consists of leaves, grass clippings, and other yard waste. 

In the world of soil, the term “organic” refers to organic materials such as compost and mulch. “Nonorganic” materials aren’t necessarily harmful. They’re just inert and include things like pebbles, rock phosphate, and perlite. Nonorganic soil that contains no organic matter lacks nutrients but is also free of contaminants. When the terms are used in this way, the term “nonorganic” doesn’t mean synthetic fillers or chemicals; it means that the substances are not nor have they ever been alive. 

However, the term “organic” can also mean free of synthetic chemicals and pesticides. The USDA’s National Organic Program (NOP) covers farm practices, including soils and other substances applied to crops like organic fertilizer. In addition, the Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI), a volunteer organization, lists products that organic farmers can use to produce food. Both the NOP or OMRI list possible soils, amendments, and fertilizers that can be used and still maintain an “organic” garden.

Topsoil

Topsoil isn’t the same as garden soil. As the name suggests, it’s the top layer of soil. This general-purpose soil is ideal for filling in garden beds or preparing a bare lawn for growth. 

It’s not very nutrient-rich, but it contains important organic matter, so it’s not entirely useless. If you buy topsoil bags and plan to use them to fill your raised beds, pour the topsoil in first since this soil makes a great base layer and filler. Then cover the topsoil with a more nutrient-rich mix of compost, peat moss, and substrates that will nourish the plants. 

Fertilizer

The best raised bed soils contain nutrients that fuel growth. Organic, natural fertilizers include various types of compost, sea kelp, and worm castings. These fertilizers enhance the quality and condition of the soil without you having to worry about contamination. The slow-release properties of organic fertilizers prevent potentially harmful buildup and ensure that your plants aren’t harmed by a flood of nutrients all at once. 

According to Jones, “You want to check what type of fertilizer is in the soil and how long it takes for it to break down so you don’t overfertilize and burn your plants. You’ll also know how often you need to fertilize again. I prefer getting premixed soil to minimize how much work (physical labor) I’ll have to do. Hand mixing and moving dirt is hard work.”

It’s also important to note that some raised bed soil mixes may contain synthetic fertilizers. They provide a quick nutrient boost but don’t improve soil condition and texture like organic options. This is why it is best to choose or make a soil mix with organic nutrient sources.

FAQs 

Q. How many soil bags do I need for a raised bed? 

It depends entirely on the size and shape of the raised bed. If you know your garden bed’s dimensions, you can plug them into a soil calculator to find out how much you need. 

Q. How do you prepare soil for a raised bed? 

If you’re buying potting soil in bags, it’s typically premixed, so there’s not much to do other than water it before planting. Topsoils that act as fillers require you to layer substrate and/or compost on top. Once you’ve done that, it’s all about water. Watering the soil prior to planting, using either a watering can or a garden hose, ensures your plants have enough moisture to start growing.

Q. Is topsoil good for a raised bed? 

A topsoil product is a great filler, but it’s not designed to be the main nutritive soil in a raised bed. The plants need nutrients, and topsoil is not rich in organic matter like compost or potting soils.

Q. Can I use only compost for a raised bed? 

Yes. In fact, the Square Foot Gardening Foundation recommends a compost-only option for gardeners on a budget or those who don’t have access to other mix-ins. However, while this can be cheaper (if you have access to free compost), the soil in a compost-only bed can become compacted. 

Q. How often should I replace the soil in my raised bed?

Jones shares her insights on this topic: “Signs that you need more soil nutrients: The plants aren’t thriving as they did in years past. Could be stunted, low fruit/vegetable production, or generally unhealthy.”

She adds, “All beds are going to lose soil. It’s the nature of raised beds. I add more soil to mine a minimum of every 2 years, more if needed. I will side-dress with compost and manure every year. Plus, I add things like egg shells, coffee grounds, and wood ash.”

The post The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T08:53:57-05:00
<![CDATA[Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best]]>The best fertilizer spreaders allow you to maintain a lush lawn easily. We put our top picks to the test to see how each performed. Check out our reviews here.

The post Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-spreader/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-spreader/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 07:21:32 -0500ReviewsDIYLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether seeding a new lawn, feeding an existing garden, or treating a yard for an insect infestation, a fertilizer spreader is an invaluable tool. These machines apply lawn care products quickly and evenly without requiring you to touch them, keeping you safe from contacting potentially dangerous chemicals and resulting in more consistent application with less product waste. In the winter, they can also be used to spread salt on icy walkways and paths. But knowing which spreader is right for your property and needs requires a little research, which is why we tested 13 popular models before selecting just nine to recommend. 

Based on our tests and the professional opinions of two lawn care experts, we chose the Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader as our top pick. This three-point fertilizer spreader holds a substantial amount of product, delivers a consistent spread pattern, and is easy to maneuver—even when full. However, there’s also a lot to like about the rest of the models that passed our tests, so it’s worth reviewing all of the best fertilizer spreaders before choosing the one that’s right for you.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Scotts Elite Spreader
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR LARGE YARDS: Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST PULL-BEHIND: Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST DROP: Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop Spreader
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST MANUAL HANDHELD: Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader
    Jump to Review
  9. BEST BATTERY HANDHELD: Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader
    Jump to Review
Best Fertilizer Spreader
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Fertilizer Spreaders Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeCapacityFlow Controller 
Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary50 poundsSliding lever
Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary50 poundsSliding lever
Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary25 poundsDial and spring lever
Scotts Elite SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary60 poundsDial and spring lever
Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary130 poundsSliding lever
Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast SpreaderTow-behind, rotary130 poundsSliding lever
Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop SpreaderWalk-behind, drop32 poundsDial and spring lever
Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered SpreaderHandheld, rotary2 poundsDial and spring trigger
Ryobi 18v One+ 1-Gallon Power SpreaderHandheld, rotary10 poundsDial and sliding lever

Our Top Picks

Each of the following models earned a spot on our list based on their standout performance in our hands-on tests. Read on to learn more about their spreading capacity, holding capacity, precision, and method of operation.

Best Overall

Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty steel T-handle, epoxy-coated frame, and pneumatic stud tires 
  • Easy to operate and maneuver when full
  • Instructions for assembly and use are simple to follow

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes up a lot of storage space 
  • Doesn’t come with a rain cover

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 50 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 5/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 3/5; Value 5/5

The Earthway walk-behind broadcast fertilizer spreader is a commercial-grade multiuse spreader sized for yards between 10,000 square feet and an acre. It features a heavy-duty poly hopper with a 50-pound capacity, and its frame has a 175-pound load-bearing limit for withstanding uneven terrain. The 13-inch-diameter stud tires are attached via rustproof rims, and the super-duty gearbox is durable enough to last for years.

While the assembly instructions for this pick were incredibly easy to follow, assembly and calibration still took a few hours. However, once we got started actually using this rugged yard fertilizer spreader, we found its two-position height adjustment handle and T-speed lever comfortable despite our different heights, and we liked how evenly the three-hole drop shut-off system delivered product across our lawn. Even when fully loaded, the air-filled pneumatic stud tires rolled effortlessly up and down slopes and over rough ground, cushioning bumps to maintain a highly consistent distribution pattern. In addition to being an excellent choice for year-round use as a lawn seed fertilizer spreader, this Earthway model would also work well with ice-melting products. 

What our tester says: “Once we got to testing this spreader, we both remarked on how durable it felt and how comfortable and easy it was to operate. Since it is on the large side, it would be nice if it had a rain cover so we could store it outside, but that’s really the only thing about this pick that we don’t love.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Earthway fertilizer spreader at Amazon, The Home Depot, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Earthway.

Runner-up

Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast Spreader

 Best Fertilizer Spreader Titan
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Large hopper is ideal for big properties
  • 3-position handle makes it easy to control flow
  • Comes with a rain cover for outdoor storage 

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are a bit hard to follow
  • Too large for most small- and medium-sized yards

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 50 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 5/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 4/5; Storage 4/5; Value 4.5/5

Titan Attachments broadcast fertilizer and seed spreader is a versatile, high-capacity tool designed to evenly distribute herbicides, fertilizers, insecticides, grass seed, and even ice melt. With a 50-pound drum and three-position gearbox, it holds plenty of product and is easy to control for consistent application.

Built for year-round use, this spreader features a high-grade steel frame, heavy-duty plastic components, and pneumatic tires that make it possible to run on turf or sod without damaging the grass. Despite its sturdy construction, it only weighs 25 pounds, making it light enough to maneuver without much effort but heavy enough to tackle hilly, root-filled, and rugged terrain. It covers a wide path for efficient lawn fertilizer application and is probably best for open spaces that are 10,000 square feet or larger. Though it was relatively quick to assemble and calibrate at about an hour and 15 minutes, the instructions would be fairly hard to follow if you didn’t have much experience putting this type of tool together. 

Get the Titan Attachments fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Walmart, or Titan Attachments.

Best Bang for the Buck

Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast Spreader

 Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comes precalibrated and fully assembled
  • Folds down for storage 
  • EdgeGuard feature keeps fertilizer on lawns only

What We Don’t Like

  • Hard to get the last bit of fertilizer out 
  • Can be difficult to maneuver on uneven ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 25 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 3/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 5/5

Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard mini broadcast spreader is small, lightweight, and easy to store, making it ideal for those with limited space. Though it can hold up to 5,000 square feet of lawn products for yards up to 10,000 square feet, its fold-down handle makes it easy to tuck out of the way when the work is complete. It also includes a control panel with precision rate settings for more accurate coverage and an EdgeGuard feature that blocks the right side to prevent fertilizer from spraying onto sidewalks or flower beds. 

During testing, we appreciated that this little spreader didn’t need any assembly. Its hard plastic wheels came attached and the spreader itself was already calibrated. Still, the wheels are fairly skinny and hard, so they didn’t roll as smoothly across uneven ground as air-filled tires. Also, we noticed that the last bits of product always got stuck to the bottom of the spreader due to static buildup. For the price, though? It’s a great choice for homeowners with small- to mid-sized yards and limited storage space who still want easy operation and precision coverage. 

Get the Scotts EdgeGuard fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Upgrade Pick

Scotts Elite Spreader

 Scotts Elite Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 2 rotors for consistent coverage
  • Holds up to 60 pounds to treat over 20,000 square feet 
  • Arrives calibrated and mostly preassembled and folds for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Some fertilizer discharges toward the wheel during use 
  • Wheels aren’t great for rough ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 60 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 4/5; Storage 4/5; Value 4/5

The Scotts Elite spreader is a high-capacity option designed to efficiently cover up to 20,000 square feet with 60 pounds of product. Its twin discharge design evenly lays down material in a 6-foot-wide path, meaning it spreads fertilizer twice as fast as more basic models. 

Assembly of the Scotts Elite was quick and easy—all we had to do was snap on the wheels and unfold the handle. The soft plastic wheels rolled much more easily over varying terrain than the standard hard-plastic wheels on less expensive Scotts spreaders, but not as well as air-filled tires. We liked that the comfortable ergonomic handle has a smartphone holder so you can stay connected as you work. This is also a versatile spreader since it can accommodate large particles of corrosive rock salt in addition to standard-sized ice melt, making it a good all-around spreader for midsize suburban yards, especially in icy climates. 

Get the Scotts Elite fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, Blain’s Farm & Fleet, or Scotts.

Best for Large Yards

Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Holds 130 pounds, covering up to 25,000 square feet 
  • Large air-filled pneumatic tires 
  • Easy to smoothly control fertilizer flow 

What We Don’t Like

  • Gearbox feels a bit undersized for so much weight
  • Coverage path also feels narrow for such a big machine

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 130 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 2/5; Storage 2/5; Value 4/5

The Agri-Fab push broadcast spreader is big enough to apply conventional or organic lawn fertilizer to yards of up to 1 acre. With a 130-pound hopper, it holds nearly three times as much product as our top two picks. Depending on how you have it set, it can distribute a path width of 8 to 12 feet and cover up to 25,000 square feet with each load. 

Despite its large capacity, this lightweight spreader weighs only 6.81 pounds, enabling excellent maneuverability even when full. Its steel rod flow-control arm makes it easy for users to open and close the rustproof poly-constructed hopper, and the heavy-duty 1-inch pneumatic tires offer a smooth ride even over roots and rocks or through dips in the yard.

Assembly of this spreader takes about an hour, plus you’ll need another 10 minutes or so to calibrate it. Although the coverage path is similar to 50-pounder spreaders, the massive hopper reduces time spent refilling, making it an efficient option for larger properties. 

Get the Agri-Fab push fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., Northern Tool + Equipment, or Target.

Best Pull-Behind

Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Low center of gravity increases stability 
  • Durable steel frame and 13-inch pneumatic tires
  • Short trailer tongue makes it easy to maneuver

What We Don’t Like

  • Control arm awkward to maneuver from mower seat
  • Gearbox seems a bit undersized

Specs 

  • Type: Tow-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 130 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 4/5; Ease of Assembly 3/5; Storage 2/5; Value 4/5 

The Agri-Fab pull-behind fertilizer spreader functions as a large motorized fertilizer spreader when attached to a lawn tractor, riding lawn mower, or other vehicle via its universal hitch. Designed for properties of 1 acre or more, it features a 130-pound heavy-duty plastic hopper and a steel direct flow control arm, which is accessible from the driver’s seat for quick and even application of seed and other lawn care materials.

When trying out this tow-behind model, we liked its squatty dimensions, short hitch length, and 13-inch pneumatic tires, which made it highly maneuverable, even around curves. The low height also allowed for easier loading and improved stability on hilly ground. However, we found the control lever, located on the trailer tongue, to be somewhat awkward to operate from the mower seat. 

Get the Agri-Fab tow-behind fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, Target, Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Drop

Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop Spreader

 Scotts Turf fertilizer spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Built-in cable-driven gate control for accurate application
  • Heavy-duty frame built for long-term use 
  • Works well along flower beds and gardens 

What We Don’t Like

  • Too small for large spaces
  • Plastic wheels aren’t great for uneven ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, drop
  • Capacity: 32 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 3/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 4/5; Value 5/5

The Scotts classic drop spreader is a reliable choice for small properties. Its heavy-duty plastic hopper holds 32 pounds of fertilizer for new grass or already established lawns, which is enough to cover up to 10,000 square feet. It features a 22-inch spread pattern for excellent coverage and accuracy, controllable by a cable-driven gate on the handle. Select from 23 spreader settings to customize the application rate and then squeeze the handle to open the hopper to let it flow. 

We liked that this spreader came preassembled and calibrated. It also laid a highly consistent path of fertilizer, but we had to pay attention to prevent gaps in coverage. Like many other Scotts spreaders, this one features hard plastic wheels that sometimes struggle on uneven ground or imperfect grass. Its tubular frame seems strong and durable, but the other parts are mainly lightweight plastic. This would make a good fertilizer spreader for occasional use, especially if the property has numerous plant beds, sidewalks, tree rings, and other obstacles that users need to work around.

Get the Scotts Classic fertilizer spreader at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Manual Handheld

Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader

 Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Takes up almost no storage space
  • Noncorrosive materials also compatible with garden fertilizers, weed killers, and ice melt
  • No assembly required 

What We Don’t Like

  • Less accurate than walk-behind spreaders
  • Flow can be inconsistent at times

Specs 

  • Type: Handheld, rotary
  • Capacity: 2 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring trigger

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 4/5

The Scotts Whirl fertilizer hand spreader is a convenient year-round tool for small yards. It measures just 8.5 inches high by 8.7 inches wide by 13.1 inches deep and weighs only about a pound, making it convenient to carry and store. Since it’s constructed from heavy-duty plastic, it’s safe to use with everything from spring and winter grass fertilizer to ice melt without worrying about corrosion, as you might with a spreader with metal components.

We liked this spreader because it takes up almost no storage space and is super easy to operate. All we had to do was fill the hopper, squeeze the trigger, and turn the handle. It has an adjustment dial to control the opening width, and the trigger opens the hopper gate to release the material as you turn the baseplate crank. There’s even a slide-out wrist support to help steady the hopper and reduce operator fatigue during use. This would be a good tool for seeding bare spots created by chinch bug damage, treating difficult-to-reach areas, or spreading ice-melt products.

Get the Scotts Whirl fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Target.

Best Battery Handheld

Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • No assembly required
  • Great for small areas or more precise application
  • Works with everything from organic fertilizer to ice melt

What We Don’t Like

  • Battery sold separately 
  • No always-on setting

Specs 

  • Type: Handheld, rotary
  • Capacity: 10 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 4.25/5

The Ryobi 18V (volt) One+ 1-gallon power spreader is a cordless battery-powered tool that makes it easy to distribute fertilizer and seed as well as ice melt. Compatible with the brand’s One+ battery system and equipped with a 10-pound hopper, it’s great for quick and easy application in small- to medium-sized spaces. It features an adjustable flow rate that allows you to customize spread based on material and desired coverage and a lightweight design that’s easy to maneuver, especially compared to large, push-type spreaders.

Those looking to cover a large property will likely find their hand getting tired since there’s no always-on setting. Instead, users must hold the trigger down to propel product out, making it a better option for spot treatments or small spaces. However, if you already own compatible 18V Ryobi tools and prefer the precision of a hand spreader, it’s an excellent option.

What our tester says: “I like this little battery-powered hand spreader for spot-treating areas of my yard that seem to struggle, but I also used it this past winter to apply salt to my front porch and steps so delivery people didn’t slip. Since I already had other 18V Ryobi tools, this multi-function spreader made an especially nice addition to my lineup.”—Michelle Larson, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ryobi fertilizer spreader (tool only) at The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Fertilizer Spreaders

Testing Stats
Products tested 13
Hours/weeks/time spent testing 37 hours
Tests performed5
Price range$30 to $370

Testing fertilizer spreaders meant rating them based on ease of assembly and calibration; distribution width, accuracy, and consistency; ease of controlling the on-off function while in motion; maneuverability over varying terrain; and user comfort.

To arrive at these ratings, we assembled each model, loaded them with lawn fertilizer, and ran them across a tarp on level ground, measuring discharge width and consistency. During that process, we tested the on-off functionality while moving, which is important at start-up and when preparing for end turns. Finally, we pushed or pulled each spreader through a variable-terrain course, observing the way it rolled over bumps and dips and navigated corners. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer Spreader

To help us determine which fertilizer spreader features matter most, we also spoke to Taylor Olberding, co-founder of nationwide lawn maintenance company Heroes Lawn Care, for his professional opinion. In addition to considering your property’s size and unique features, it’s also important to consider whether you’d rather push, pull, or carry the spreader and whether there are any extras that might make using it more comfortable. You’ll also want to pay attention to what it’s made from since some materials are more durable than others. 

According to Olberding, users should “Ensure it has air-filled tires (not plastic tires), is made of stainless steel/noncorrosive material with a plastic hopper, and can be easily configured based on the fertilizer product.” He also adds, “Ensure you are able to adjust the openings for accurate application and have an edge guard to help prevent fertilizer from spreading onto nontarget areas.”

Types of Fertilizer Spreaders

Two basic types of spreaders exist for dry applications––rotary spreaders, also known as broadcast spreaders—and drop spreaders. There are also spreaders designed for liquid products, including homemade lawn fertilizer

Rotary/Broadcast Spreaders

A rotary spreader uses a rotating base plate to disperse seeds or granules that pour slowly from a hopper. They are called broadcast spreaders because they throw the product several feet to the front and sides of the spreader path. 

Rotary spreaders cover an area three times their width, or broader, on every pass. These are the fastest tools you can use to spread dry materials, but their spreading abilities are less accurate than those of drop spreaders. Rotary spreaders are available in several sizes, so you can buy one that works for a tiny garden, a large estate lawn, and anything in the middle.

Drop Spreaders

When precision is critical, choose a drop spreader. These devices drop a swath of product through a wide, narrow opening directly beneath the spreader. They provide calibrated coverage, but the precision boosts the chance that the user will miss or double-cover an area. 

For users who have precise application needs, this tool is ideal. Users can easily control where a drop spreader distributes the product because it only drops between its wheels. The downside is that users will spend more time covering a lawn using a drop spreader than a rotary spreader.

Liquid/Spray Spreaders

The most efficient way to spread liquid fertilizer and other liquid lawn treatments is with a hose-end chemical spreader/sprayer. These devices automatically mix the correct proportion of concentrated chemicals with a flowing stream of water that travels through the spreader and out the nozzle. 

Liquid spreaders are especially useful as secondary tools for emergency treatments and for applying product quickly, although they are less accurate than the other two types of spreaders. Remember, too, that liquid lawn chemicals deliver fast results, but most liquids dissipate more quickly than granules, so regular use is costly.

Method of Operation 

The most popular spreaders are broadcast because they offer a balance between speed and precision. Manufacturers make these spreaders in a wide range of sizes, including everything from small, handheld models to extra-large spreaders that can be pulled behind vehicles.

Drop spreaders are the best choice when users must navigate obstacles and narrow spaces. They work exceptionally well on small to medium intensively landscaped yards.

Holding Capacity

It is important to know the spreader’s holding capacity because that will determine how often the spreader will have to be refilled based on the size of the area it needs to cover. Ideally, users will want to simply fill the spreader once and deposit the treatment over the entire area.

Holding capacity and lawn size go hand in hand. A handheld spreader is well suited for small lawns up to 1,500 square feet. For medium-sized lawns up to 5,000 square feet, a small walk-behind spreader suits the job. Large walk-behind spreaders work well for yards up to about 20,000 square feet. Go for a tow-behind spreader if the yard is larger than half an acre.

Spreading Capacity 

Spreading capacity refers to the types of fertilizers or materials a spreader can handle. The best fertilizer spreaders can help with planting grass seeds and distributing pelletized chemicals, but far fewer can handle sand, powdered lime, and compost.

Precision 

All lawn spreaders deliver better precision than spreading fertilizer by hand, making them useful tools since applying too much or too little product is one of the most common fertilizer mistakes people make. Still, some spreaders are more precise than their competitors, and spreaders that are more accurate tend to be slower. For example, drop spreaders are precise but slow, whereas broadcast spreaders are a bit less accurate but fast. Liquid spreaders are not exact, but they are quite quick.

Drop spreaders are the most precise because manufacturers calibrate them for a consistent flow rate to spread only a thin band directly beneath the hopper and between the wheels. You can calibrate a broadcast spreader to deliver a steady flow rate, but you must walk at a consistent pace for even coverage. Manufacturers calibrate liquid spreaders to mix the amount of concentrate per gallon of water accurately, but you are in control of the coverage.

The Advantages of Owning a Fertilizer Spreader 

A fertilizer spreader simplifies lawn treatments because it allows users to quickly and evenly apply seed, fertilizer, and lawn pest control products. You will also save time and money using a spreader because it allows you to quickly and evenly apply lawn products.

  • Spreaders apply lawn treatments far more evenly than hand spreading.
  • Fertilizer spreaders significantly reduce the time and effort users expend to apply lawn treatments.
  • The use of a fertilizer spreader for lawns minimizes the user’s exposure to chemicals.

FAQs

Even if you’ve already chosen the best fertilizer spreader for your yard, you may still have a few questions. The following answers to frequently asked questions should fill in any remaining gaps in your knowledge about operating and caring for these tools.

Q. How do you use a fertilizer spreader?

Refer to your spreader owner’s manual to find the correct setting for the product you will spread. The product label tells you how many pounds to apply per 1,000 square feet. 
Load the hopper with enough product for the square footage of the area you will cover. Select the correct setting for the material you spread, squeeze the handle, and walk from one corner of the yard, continuing in straight parallel lines until the area is covered. 

Q. How do you spread fertilizer without a spreader? 

You can spread fertilizer by hand, though your results might not be as consistent as they are with a spreader. Don gloves and pour granular fertilizer into a plastic bucket. Start to walk at one corner of the yard and toss the fertilizer in a sweeping motion as you walk in straight lines. Try to keep a consistent pace to spread the product as evenly as possible. 
For more even coverage, apply half the fertilizer while you walk in parallel lines in one direction, then apply the other half while you walk in a perpendicular set of parallel lines.

Q. How do you clean a fertilizer spreader?

To clean a fertilizer spreader, empty the hopper and use compressed air or a rag to remove all granules and residue from the spreader’s parts. Thoroughly wash the spreader, paying close attention to crevices and moving parts where debris may be lodged. Allow the spreader to dry thoroughly and store it out of the elements once you’re done.

Q. When is the best time of year to fertilize your lawn?

We checked in with Chris Ramos from Blain’s Farm & Fleet to see when he recommends customers fertilize their lawns, and he had this to say: “Fertilizing in fall proves best because root strengthening through winter leads to a healthier spring lawn. Applying fertilizer during spring can benefit grasses that need an early growth advantage, especially cool-season varieties.”

Q. What should you do after fertilizing?

It’s always a good idea to read the label for post-application recommendations straight from the manufacturer. However, it’s generally best practice to water the area lightly to help the product get into the soil and avoid mowing for a few days to prevent the fertilizer from getting kicked up before it has a chance to work. 

Q. How do I know what spreader setting to use?

“To find the right setting, check the product label, which generally includes the settings for seeds and fertilizers. If you are still unsure, begin with a lower application rate and add more if necessary to prevent overapplication,” says Ramos.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a product tester and writer with an extensive background in the nursery and landscaping industries. He kept his tool box well stocked in order to build or repair fences, walls, irrigation systems, and equipment on any given day. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest hand tools, lawn care products, outdoor power equipment, and other outdoor-living goods.

The post Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T07:21:32-05:00
<![CDATA[Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It]]>Bermuda grass thrives in warm climates, but it needs the best fertilizer for Bermuda grass to reach its potential. See top-rated picks here.

The post Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-for-bermuda-grass/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=159373Tue, 18 Feb 2025 06:56:34 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Fertilizers for Bermuda grass are high in nitrogen with lower levels of phosphorus and potassium, providing the nutrients this warm-season grass needs to grow into a lush green lawn. Drought tolerant and not picky about the soil in which it grows, Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon) is soft yet tough enough to stand up to kids, pets, and other traffic. Though it’s relatively easy to care for, it’s still important to choose the right lawn care products for growing Bermuda grass to ensure a strong and healthy lawn.

To help you select a good fertilizer for Bermuda grass, we spoke to an award-winning landscape contractor and international arborist about which types of fertilizers are best and how to apply them. Based on our research, our top pick is the Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food—a high-nitrogen fertilizer that enhances nutrient and water absorption. For the healthiest and best-looking lawn, we recommend you review all of our fertilizer recommendations before selecting one of the best fertilizers for Bermuda grass to meet your lawn’s needs.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  3. BEST ORGANIC: Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST LIQUID: Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST NITROGEN ONLY: Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FAST-ACTING: Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  7. BEST FOR NEW GRASS: Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Fertilizers for Bermuda Grass Comparison Chart

Product NameNPK RatioQuantityCoverage
Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food32-0-1014.06, 28.12, or 42.18 pounds5,000, 10,000, or 15,000 square feet
Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food30-0-65 pounds7,200 square feet
Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food10-0-117 or 51 pounds5,000 or 10,000 square feet
Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend6-0-032 ounces3,200 square feet
Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food28-0-032 ounces3,200 square feet
Scotts Green Max Lawn Food27-0-216.67 or 33.33 pounds5,000 or 10,000 square feet
Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food32-0-412.5 or 37.5 pounds5,000 or 15,000 square feet

Our Top Picks

Without the proper fertilizer or weed and feed for Bermuda grass, your lawn may look sickly and sparse. Each of the following fertilizers provides the nutrients Bermuda lawns need, enhancing color uniformity and promoting a thick, dense turf. 

Best Overall

Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Scotts
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Feeds for up to 8 weeks
  • 3 sizes for various property needs 
  • Helps lawns absorb water and nutrients

What We Don’t Like

  • Can’t be used within 1 month of first frost

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 32-0-10
  • Quantity: 14.06, 28.12, or 42.18 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000, 10,000, or 15,000 square feet

The Scotts Southern Turf Builder lawn food is specifically designed for warm-season grasses like Bermuda grass. Its 32-0-10 NPK ratio provides an ample dose of nitrogen to promote lush, green growth while also supplying a good amount of potassium for enhanced drought and heat tolerance. Though this is our top pick for Bermuda lawn maintenance, it’s safe for use on all grass types and can also be applied while lawns are wet or dry. When used as directed, you can walk on it immediately after application, making it a smart choice for families and pet owners. 

This Bermuda grass care product uses Scotts’ All-in-One Particles technology to build strong, deep roots that can withstand challenging conditions. We also really like that it comes in three sizes yet only requires application every 6 to 8 weeks. Depending on the size of your yard, you may only need one bag. Though watering is not required after application, Scotts says light watering will help it act faster.

Get the Scotts Southern fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Best Bang for the Buck

Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Dissolves easily when used with a Garden Feeder
  • Feeds up to 7,200 square feet of Bermuda grass
  • Starts feeding instantly for quick results

What We Don’t Like

  • Ideal application method requires additional purchase

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 36-0-6
  • Quantity: 5 pounds
  • Coverage: 7,200 square feet

Miracle-Gro’s water-soluble lawn food is a fast-acting fertilizer with an NPK ratio of 36-0-6 designed to promote a lush lawn. Its high concentration of nitrogen plus added iron help grass develop a gorgeous green color within days of application. This Miracle-Gro fertilizer is safe for use on both warm- and cool-season grasses and is easy to apply with the aid of the brand’s hose-end garden feeder (sold separately)—simply fill the dispenser with the water-soluble granules, attach a garden hose, and spray the lawn in a uniform pattern. When applied in this way, a 5-pound container can feed lawns up to 7,200 square feet.

Miracle-Gro recommends using this product for Bermuda grass lawn care every 4 to 6 weeks during the growing season. The quick-release formula provides a rapid nutrient boost, making it ideal for lawns in poor condition. 

Get the Miracle-Gro fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Miracle-Gro.

Best Organic

Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Safe to walk on immediately 
  • Works for up to 10 weeks
  • Overapplication doesn’t cause turf burn

What We Don’t Like

  • Needs to be applied when lawn is dry and recently mowed

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 10-0-1 
  • Quantity: 17 or 51 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

Jonathan Green’s organic lawn food is a granular fertilizer for Bermuda grass made from a mix of plant and animal proteins like feather meal, soybean meal, molasses, and wheat middlings. Its 10-0-1 NPK slow-release formula provides a steady delivery of nitrogen as well as supplemental iron to keep grass green and lush for up to 10 weeks. 

This organic fertilizer is safe for kids and pets to walk on immediately after application, and even when overapplied, it won’t burn your grass. It’s well suited to both cold- and warm-season grasses and can be used in spring, summer, or fall. For best results, the manufacturer suggests distributing it when grass is dry and has been recently mowed. It’s available in either a 17-pound bag covering up to 5,000 square feet or a 51-pound bag that feeds up to 15,000 square feet, making it easy to find the right fit for lawns of all sizes.

Get the Jonathan Green lawn fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Walmart, or Johnathan Green

Best Liquid

Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Grade
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comes with a hose attachment
  • Ideal for small to medium lawns
  • Easy-to-use liquid solution

What We Don’t Like

  • 1 bottle won’t be enough for large lawns

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 6-0-0
  • Quantity: 32 ounces
  • Coverage: 3,200 square feet

The Simple Lawn Solutions lawn energizer has a simple 6-0-0 NPK ratio with added nutrients like sulfur, magnesium, and manganese. This formula helps improve soil composition and supports enzyme production, protein synthesis, and nutrient absorption for a healthy, thick lawn. It’s also enhanced with iron, helping grass produce chlorophyll to create an intensely green hue.

Since this is a liquid pick, its uptake into grass roots and blades is relatively quick, so you should notice results within days of application. Though we chose the 32-ounce size for inclusion in our list, this product is also available in 1- and 2.5-gallon containers—they just don’t come with the convenient spray applicator attached. Since this concentrated product must be diluted, it may be smart to buy the bottle with the applicator first and refill it with more budget-friendly bottles for subsequent use. The 32-ounce size will treat up to 3,200 square feet, while the 2.5-gallon jug covers up to 32,000 square feet. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions energizer fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Nitrogen Only

Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Nitrogen
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Uses a blend of quick- and slow-release nitrogen
  • Comes in a ready-to-use sprayer and bigger jugs
  • Can be used on all types of grass

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer bottle has limited coverage

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 28-0-0
  • Quantity: 32 ounces
  • Coverage: 3,200 square feet

If you want immediate greening and lasting results, Simple Lawn Solutions high-nitrogen lawn food is the pick for you. The concentrated liquid has a 28-0-0 NPK ratio with 70 percent quick-release and 30 percent slow-release nitrogen to get Bermuda grass lawns healthy and keep them that way. Like the other Simple Lawn Solutions product on this list, this one is available in a convenient 32-ounce hose-end dispenser jug for easy application over 3,200 square feet of lawn as well as larger bottles that don’t have the sprayer. 

This nitrogen-only product is particularly effective for treating nitrogen deficiencies and enhancing lawn thickness. It’s suitable for use on all types of grass and shows results within days. Still, the fact that it comes in a ready-to-spray bottle does bump up the price a bit, so you may want to buy larger refill bottles after your initial purchase to help bring the overall cost down. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions high-nitrogen fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Fast-Acting

Scotts Green Max Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Has added iron for enhanced greening
  • Results in just 3 days; works for up to 8 weeks
  • Also available in a ready-to-spray liquid formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Can cause turf burn if overapplied

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 27-0-2
  • Quantity: 16.67 or 33.33 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 10,000 square feet

Scotts Green Max lawn food is a dual-action fertilizer that delivers quick greening and thickening for Bermuda grass and all other lawn types. Its 27-0-2 NPK ratio formula also includes 5 percent iron for enhancing greening in just 3 days, and it can be applied in the spring, summer, or fall. You can spread it while grass is wet or dry and walk over it immediately after. 

Like all high-nitrogen fertilizers, this pick can cause burn grass if overapplied. For best results, Scotts recommends using it with a broadcast/rotary spreader on a setting of 3¼ to 3¾ or a drop spreader on 7 to 7½. A 16.67-pound bag is enough to cover up to 5,000 square feet, and it’s also available in 33.33-pound packages that feed up to 10,000 square feet.

Get the Scotts Green Max fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Scotts.

Best for New Grass

Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Safe for use when seeding
  • Promotes root development to prevent future problems
  • Compatible with any grass type

What We Don’t Like

  • Some reports of increased weed growth

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 32-0-4
  • Quantity: 12.5 or 37.5 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

This Turf Builder lawn food from Scotts is safe to use when seeding and helps build deep roots to encourage quick and vigorous growth. Its high nitrogen content is compatible with all grass types, aiding each in absorbing water and nutrients. By encouraging such strong growth, this pick protects your lawn against future problems.

This granular fertilizer comes in 12.5- and 37.5-pound bags for 5,000 or 15,000 square feet of coverage, respectively. It’s easy to apply using a spreader, and Scotts has setting instructions on the back of the bag. For quick results, the company recommends watering after application, though it’s not necessary. Scotts also says your lawn will look its best if you use this product every 6 to 8 weeks during the growing season. 

Get the Scotts Turf Builder fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Bermuda Grass

To gather our list of top picks for Bermuda grass fertilizer, we drew on our team’s lawn care experience and the advice of a landscaping expert. We identified the most important features to look for first and then found a variety of products that met those criteria. 

To ensure compatibility with Bermuda grass specifically, we prioritized fertilizers with high amounts of nitrogen, no phosphorus, and relatively low levels of potassium. We also considered ease of application, including frequency of suggested feedings, and looked for both liquid and granular options as well as synthetic and organic options. Lastly, we prioritized products that come in a range of sizes so shoppers with small and large lawns have plenty of excellent fertilizers to choose from. 

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass

Reviewing the following considerations prior to making your final fertilizer selection will help ensure you choose the right product for your needs. 

Fertilizer Types

Lawn fertilizers come in three main types: liquid, granular, and water-soluble. Each has its benefits and drawbacks.

  • Liquid: This type of fertilizer gives Bermuda grass a quick burst of nutrients as the grass absorbs them directly through its foliage, which is the quickest way. However, due to their short-lived effects, they typically require more frequent applications. Liquid lawn fertilizers often come concentrated and require a garden-type pump sprayer or hose-end dispenser for application.
  • Granular: Dry granular fertilizers come in tiny pebbles for application with push-type fertilizer spreaders. Some formulations dissolve slowly to release nutrients over time, though some contain a percentage of quick-release nutrients for faster results. Generally speaking, the overall effects of granular fertilizers last longer than those of liquid products, allowing for less frequent applications.
  • Water-soluble: Water-soluble fertilizers are small, sand-like bits that dissolve quickly in water. They’re typically used with a hose-end dispenser so lawnkeepers can fertilize and water the grass simultaneously. Because water-soluble fertilizers generally require a hose for application, they’re best for smaller yards.

NPK Ratio 

Commercial lawn and yard fertilizers contain premeasured quantities of nitrogen (N), which stimulates leafy green growth; phosphorus (P), which plays a vital role in flower and fruit production; and potassium (K), which boosts overall plant health. These three nutrients are listed on the fertilizer package by weight. 

The best fertilizer for Bermuda grass will have an N-P-K ratio high in nitrogen with little or no phosphorus and a small amount of potassium. For example, an NPK ratio of 32-0-10 contains 32 percent nitrogen, no phosphorus, and 10 percent potassium. This is a great ratio for Bermuda grass. 

Organic vs. Synthetic 

Most lawn fertilizers contain synthetic ingredients, but the demand for organic fertilizers made of natural ingredients is increasing. 

  • Organic: Natural lawn fertilizers contain various blends of nonchemical nutrients, such as poultry manure, compost, livestock manure, and earthworm castings. They often cost more because the ingredients require more work to collect, treat, and turn into fertilizer. Most organic lawn fertilizers come in granule form and don’t cause harm to plants or aquatic life if they drain into waterways.
  • Synthetic: Formulated in a lab with chemicals or artificial versions of natural ingredients, synthetic fertilizers contain concentrated nutrients, such as potassium, phosphorus, and nitrogen. Some brands contain other minerals, including calcium or boron, to increase soil health. Excess chemical runoff from synthetic fertilizers may harm fish if it gets into waterways and ponds.

Application

Many types of Bermuda grass require fertilizing only once or twice per growing season to reach their full potential, but some of the new hybrid forms of Bermuda grass, such as Midway, Tifway, or Tifgreen, benefit from more frequent applications. 

The first fertilizer application of the year should be after late spring or early summer once the grass is fully green. At this time, growers can apply an all-purpose lawn fertilizer with a high ratio of nitrogen according to the instructions on the package. If you intend to overseed with more Bermuda grass seed, wait 2 weeks after fertilizing. 

Depending on the product you’re using, you may need to apply a second round of fertilizer in midsummer and a third in the fall. You may want to use a lawn fertilizer containing a higher level of potassium for the fall application, as this will help with disease resistance and root strength for Bermuda grass in winter.

For the best long-term results, consider having the soil tested for deficiencies and add additional nutrients as needed. In most communities, growers can take soil samples to their local County Extension Agency for a comprehensive soil test and nutrient recommendations.

FAQs

Though you probably aren’t still asking, “What is Bermuda grass?” you may still have questions about fertilizing this type of grass. Read on for answers to the most commonly asked questions about the best fertilizers for Bermuda grass. 

Q. How often should I fertilize my Bermuda grass? 

It depends on the fertilizer’s potency and whether it’s a quick- or slow-release formula. In general, Bermuda grass needs fertilizer every 4 to 6 weeks.

Q. When is the best time to fertilize my Bermuda grass?

The best time to fertilize a lawn of Bermuda grass is late spring once it’s fully green. Reapply fertilizer in midsummer and fall or more often depending on the fertilizer’s strength.

Q. How do I apply fertilizer to my lawn?

Use a pump-type sprayer or a hose-end sprayer to apply liquid fertilizer and a push-spreader for granular fertilizers. Be sure to follow the instructions on the package to avoid overapplication that causes fertilizer burn

Q. Can I apply fertilizer to wet grass?

In most cases, yes—though it is best to wait after heavy rain when water is still running off the lawn because the fertilizer could wash away.

Q. Do you have to water after fertilizing?

Most granular fertilizers can remain on the lawn for a couple of days before watering, but check the instructions to be sure.

Q. Should you bag Bermuda grass clippings?

We spoke to Scott Seargeant, an award-winning International Consulting Arborist and owner of Seargeant Landscape & Arboriculture, about whether it’s better to mulch or bag Bermuda grass clippings. He said, “Mulching Bermuda grass is better than bagging it. The clippings will break down and return some of the elements back into the ground where the grass can use them again.”

Q. Can you overfertilize Bermuda grass?

Yes, you can overfertilize Bermuda grass, in fact, overfertilization is one of the fertilizer mistakes most people make

Q. How do you encourage Bermuda grass to spread?

We also asked landscape contractor Scott Seargeant this question, and he gave the following advice: “Mowing Bermuda grass at a lower height of about 1 inch will cause it to grow more horizontally. Adding a moderate amount of fertilizer will increase growth. This should be done in warm to hot weather.”

The post Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T06:56:34-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass]]>Since zoysia grass requires nutritional support for optimal health, use the best fertilizer for zoysia grass. Find out which products are our top picks.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-zoysia-grass/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=211779Mon, 17 Feb 2025 15:39:33 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Native to Asia, zoysia is a warm-season turf grass commonly grown in the southern part of the U.S., where summer temps easily reach the century mark. It tolerates extreme heat, high humidity, and even slight drought. In general, most all-purpose lawn fertilizer products are also optimal for zoysia grass because turf grasses have similar nutritional needs. 

Those looking to establish a new zoysia lawn or boost the health of an existing one can often do so by applying lawn fertilizer. Our favorite fertilizer for zoysia grass is the Scotts Green Max Lawn Food for its easy-to-apply granular formula; NPK ratio of 27-0-2; and 10,000-square-foot coverage area. However, we found all the selected products on this list to be effective and reliable. 

Ahead, learn what type of fertilizer is desirable for use on a zoysia spread, and find out why the following lawn-food products are among the best fertilizers for zoysia grass.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BALANCED FORMULA: Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST PLUS WEED CONTROL: Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR ALKALINE SOIL: The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WITH MICRONUTRIENTS: Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST SLOW-RELEASE: Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen 6-4-0 Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
A person pouring a bag of fertilizer into a spreader
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

TypeCoverageNPK Ratio
Scotts Green Max Lawn FoodGranularUp to 10,000 square feet27-0-2
Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn FoodWater-soluble granules Up to 7,200 square feet36-0-6
Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPKConcentrated liquidUp to 3,200 square feet16-4-8
Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3GranularUp to 5,000 square feet28-0-3
The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 FertilizerGranularUp to 5,000 square feet16-4-8
Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn EnergizerConcentrated liquidUp to 12,800 square feet6-0-0 
Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen 6-4-0 FertilizerSlow-release granulesUp to 2,500 square feet6-4-0
Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn FertilizerGranular, slow-releaseUp to 5,000 square feet30-0-4

Our Top Picks

To qualify for a spot in this lineup of the best fertilizers for zoysia grass and be considered an asset to regular lawn care, the following products had to meet specific criteria. They have a higher nitrogen ratio than potassium or phosphorus, which is a must for any lawn fertilizer; they are straightforward to apply; and they contain quality ingredients. The following lawn fertilizers vary slightly in usage and nutritional ingredients, but each is a standout in its category. 

Best Overall

Scotts Green Max Lawn Food

 A Bag of Scotts Green Max Lawn Food - Lawn Fertilizer Plus
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 10,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 27-0-2 

What We Like

  • Boosts growth and promotes quick greening
  • Can be applied in any season and to any grass variety 
  • Treats areas of up to 10,000 square feet 

What We Don’t Like

  • Can stain concrete, driveways, and other surfaces  

For quick zoysia greening and a boost in growth, consider Scotts Green Max Lawn Food, which features a high nitrogen 27-0-2 NPK ratio. In addition to the standard nutrients, Green Max contains iron, a micronutrient that helps lawn grasses green up quickly. 

The manufacturer recommends using a drop spreader to apply this granular product for best results. When applied as directed, a 33.33-pound bag treats up to 10,000 square feet of lawn. Keep it off sidewalks and driveways, as iron tends to leave rusty stains on concrete and masonry. Brush off any errant product with a broom promptly to prevent staining.  

Get the Scotts Green Max fertilizer for zoysia grass at Walmart.

Best Bang For The Buck

Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food

 A bag of Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Water-soluble granules 
  • Coverage: Up to 7,200 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 36-0-6

What We Like

  • Absorbs quickly into the ground  
  • Easy to apply 
  • Suitable for small to large yards

What We Don’t Like

  • Must have a hose applicator to apply (not included)

There’s no need to spend a lot of green to feed a zoysia lawn. Miracle-Gro’s affordable water-soluble fertilizer comes with a high-nitrogen NPK ratio of 36-0-6, which helps grass develop a rich green color while boosting health and encouraging dense growth. 

This option comes in a 5-pound bag of water-soluble fertilizer. Just dump a bag into a hose-end applicator, and connect the applicator to the end of a garden hose. When the water is turned on, the fertilizer is diluted and dispersed evenly for spraying over the lawn. A single box treats up to 7,200 square feet and is mild enough to use every 2 to 3 weeks if desired. It’s a budget-friendly way to keep a zoysia lawn healthy and looking great. 

Get the Miracle-Gro fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Balanced Formula

Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK

 A bottle of Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Concentrated liquid
  • Coverage: Up to 3,200 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 16-4-8 

What We Like

  • Contains beneficial nutrients
  • Comes with a built-in sprayer attachment use 
  • Suitable for 3,200 square feet of any grass type 

What We Don’t Like

  • Slightly pricey for the coverage area provided 
  • Some users have reported difficulty using the hose attachment 

Those looking to add a broader range of nutrients to their zoysia lawn may appreciate Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 liquid fertilizer. It provides ample nitrogen and smaller amounts of phosphorus and potassium to help with root growth and encourage rich color. The product also contains seaweed and fish emulsions that may help balance soil that lacks nutrients (a soil test is recommended to be sure). 

Simple Lawn Solutions is a concentrated liquid, but there’s no need to worry about measuring or mixing. It comes in its own spray dispenser that attaches to a garden hose for uniform distribution. One 32-ounce bottle treats up to 3,200 square feet of lawn.

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Plus Weed Control

Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 28-0-3 

What We Like

  • High nitrogen content for lawn greening
  • Suitable for areas of up to 5,000 square feet  
  • Easy to apply with most broadcast or drop fertilizer spreaders 

What We Don’t Like

  • Herbicide performance may suffer if the lawn is dry at application
  • Should not be exposed to water within 24 hours of application 

Dandelions and clover are no match for Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3, which does double duty as a fertilizer and a pesky weed killer. Its high-nitrogen NPK ratio is 28-0-3, making it well suited for greening up lawns, including zoysia lawns, and encouraging the grass to reach a rich color. 

In addition to its nutritional content, Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed contains 2,4-D, a selective herbicide that kills annual weeds but won’t harm zoysia grass. The manufacturer recommends mowing the grass and watering it before applying this fertilizer—the 2,4-D herbicide adheres best to damp leaf blades, giving it the most weed-killing power. 

One 14.29-pound bag of granular Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed for zoysia grass treats up to 5,000 square feet of lawn and is suitable for use in a broadcast or drop spreader. 

Get the Scotts Turf Builder fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best For Soil Conditioner

The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 Fertilizer

 A bag of The Andersons Professional PGF Complete 16-4-8
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 16-4-8 

What We Like

  • High nitrogen content as well as humic acid
  • Slow-release nutrients
  • Small particle size good for even distribution 
  • Fast-acting formula offers visible results in 6 to 14 days

What We Don’t Like

  • Other amendments may be required to reduce high pH levels

Zoysia grass grows best in soil with a pH between 6 and 6.5, but if your yard is higher on the pH scale, fertilizing with a product that neutralizes pH might be a good idea. (Rather than guessing at the pH level, the best course of action is to have the soil tested by a local extension agency or soil test kit.) 

The Andersons Professional PGF fertilizer contains humic acid, which helps neutralize pH levels in any turf type. In addition, the product features a 16-4-8 NPK ratio, so the grass will receive a healthy dose of nitrogen and small amounts of phosphorus and potassium. An 18-pound bag of The Andersons PGF fertilizer will treat up to 5,000 square feet for up to 8 weeks, with visible results in 6 to 14 days. 

Be aware that this product can help neutralize the pH level, but depending on the soil test results, it may not be sufficient for reducing it to an optimal level for growing zoysia. A professional soil test will be required to determine that. 

Get The Andersons fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon (18 pounds).

Best For Maintenance

Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer

 A bottle of Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Concentrated liquid
  • Coverage: Up to 12,800 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 6-0-0 

What We Like

  • Nitrogen for boosting grass color
  • Easy-to-use concentrated liquid
  • Can be used on all grass types

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be diluted and poured into a sprayer (not included)

Most of the time, high nitrogen is all that’s necessary to boost grass color and health, but that doesn’t mean additional nutrients won’t be beneficial, especially if the soil is depleted of natural nutrients (a soil test is the best way to find out).

Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer contains an added oomph of nutrients, including iron, magnesium, and manganese, which are trace minerals designed to enhance soil. The iron and nitrogen content encourages a rich color and robust growth, while the other nutrients may help root growth and overall grass density. 

The product comes in a 1-gallon concentrated liquid form and can be diluted and applied via a pump-type garden sprayer to spaces of up to 12,800 square feet. Note: While Lawn Energizer may boost the health of slightly depleted soil, it may not be sufficient for correcting significant soil problems—only the result of a professional soil test will let home landscapers know how to properly amend the soil. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon and Simple Lawn Solutions (32 ounces).

Best Slow-Release

Milorganite 32 lb. Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer

 A bag of Milorganite 32 lb. Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Slow-release granules
  • Coverage: Up to 2,500 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 6-4-0 

What We Like

  • Slowly releases nutrients into the grass
  • Provides quick greening and healthy growth 
  • Environmentally friendly formula  

What We Don’t Like

  • Iron ingredients may stain concrete if not removed promptly 
  • May leave behind a slight earthy aroma when first applied 

Some lawn fertilizers should be applied every 2 weeks, but Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer dissolves gradually, so it keeps feeding the grass for up to 10 weeks. This product has a 6-4-0 NPK ratio and contains iron to help green up the lawn quickly. 

A 32-pound bag of Milorganite Fertilizer treats up to 2,500 square feet of lawn. If that seems like less coverage than other fertilizers, keep in mind that it works longer, so fewer feedings are necessary throughout the summer. The granulated formulation can be applied with a drop spreader or a broadcast spreader. To keep the iron in the product from staining concrete, sweep away any excess product that gets on sidewalks and patios immediately after application. 

Get the Milorganite fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Also Consider

Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer

 A bag of Pennington UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular, slow-release
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 30-0-4 

What We Like

  • Contains iron for thick greening
  • Provides helpful nutrients for up to 3 months
  • Compatible with most drop or broadcast spreaders  

What We Don’t Like

  • Iron ingredients may stain concrete if not promptly removed 
  • Suitable for application between June and August only 

The combination of 5 percent fast-acting iron and 10.5 percent slow-release nitrogen in this Pennington UltraGreen lawn fertilizer is just the ticket for enhancing lackluster lawns for up to 3 months. With an NPK ratio of 30-0-4, there’s plenty of nitrogen to go around, but it dissolves gradually over 3 months to keep grass consistently fed. The iron in Pennington UltraGreen is fast-acting and will help grass develop a rich green color in a few short days. 

A 14-pound bag of Pennington UltraGreen covers up to 5,000 square feet and can be applied by either a drop spreader or a broadcast spreader. Be sure to sweep away any product that gets on patios or sidewalks to prevent staining from the iron in the mix. 

Get the Pennington fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass

Lawn fertilizer products are straightforward, and most contain high nitrogen levels, the most critical nutrient for greening up a lawn and boosting growth. We looked extensively at dozens of lawn fertilizer products before selecting the ones in this lineup as among the best for zoysia grass. 

In general, most lawn fertilizers will be good bets for applying to zoysia grass because zoysia has the same nutritional needs as other turfgrasses. We looked at nationally known companies with stellar reputations for making quality lawn and garden products, such as Miracle-Gro and Scotts. Still, we didn’t automatically eliminate fertilizers from smaller or niche manufacturers if they contained quality ingredients. 

Finally, we looked at how satisfied customers were with different lawn fertilizer products. In the final analysis, we considered products containing additional ingredients, although our focus was still on ensuring that the product had adequate nitrogen.

What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer for Zoysia Grass

Keep a few basic factors in mind when shopping for a zoysia fertilizer, including yard size and product coverage rates, the overall health of the existing soil, and the preferred application method. For the best results, test the soil before applying fertilizer. Soil test kits are available online and from local extension agencies, many of which allow users to ship samples to a professional lab for testing and soil amendment recommendations.

Standard lawn fertilizers typically do not contain all the components necessary to correct significant soil problems. Rather, their primary purpose is to boost the color of the grass and make it grow faster.

Type

Fertilizer products for treating zoysia lawns are available in three standard types: liquid, water-soluble, and granular. Each has its benefits and considerations.

  • Liquid: For the quickest fertilizer uptake, consider applying a liquid product. Of the three types of fertilizer, liquid works the fastest because the blades of grass readily absorb the product. Liquid fertilizers come in ready-to-use solutions and concentrated formulas that require dilution with water.
  • Water-soluble: This fertilizer looks grainy, but when mixed with water, it dissolves almost immediately, making it suitable for treating with hose-end applicators. Miracle-Gro fertilizers are often water-soluble, and using them is as easy as dumping a premeasured packet into a hose-end container and then spraying old or new grass. This type of product is absorbed just as quickly as a liquid product.
  • Granular: Rather than spraying, granular lawn fertilizers are applied using a fertilizer spreader, such as a drop spreader or broadcast spreader. Many are formulated to release the nutrients over time for continuous lawn feeding.

Soil pH

Zoysia grass grows well in various soil types, including sandy soil and loamy soil. It prefers a slightly acidic soil types from 6 to 6.5 on the pH scale. However, it will often tolerate slightly more alkaline or more acidic soil types (within a 0.4-point range) if other needs are met, such as regular watering and fertilizing. A few types of zoysia grass fertilizer provide pH-balance ingredients. Still, if the existing soil is over 7 (too alkaline) or under 5.6 (too acidic), it may require the application of different amendments, such as sulfur or lime. The only way to know for sure is to have the soil tested at a lab and then amended according to the recommendations before zoysia fertilization.

NPK Ratio

On virtually all zoysia grass fertilizing products (except a few all-natural products), buyers will find an NPK ratio that signifies the amount of the three essential nutrients found in fertilizer: nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K).

Zoysia is like other turf grasses when it comes to an optimal NPK ratio. Look for a ratio where the amount of nitrogen is higher than both phosphorus and potassium. For zoysia, a typical NPK ratio might be 15-1-5, which indicates the product contains 15 parts nitrogen, 1 part phosphorus, and 5 parts potassium by volume. 

Nitrogen is necessary for giving zoysia grass a rich green color and for boosting healthy growth. Some lawn fertilizer formulations may contain no phosphorus or potassium at all, in which case the package might read 10-0-0.

Organic vs. Synthetic

Most lawn fertilizers contain synthetic components, but a growing number of manufacturers are developing all-natural fertilizers as consumer preference for eco-friendly products increases. Lawn grasses typically react the same way to the nutrients in either type of fertilizer, so the zoysia grass will benefit from both.

  • Synthetic: Fertilizers that contain chemical and artificial ingredients, such as synthetic forms of minerals and nutrients, are often less expensive to produce than natural products. These fertilizers will not go bad but may lose some of their effectiveness over time. 
  • Organic: Shoppers will likely notice how much more expensive all-natural fertilizers are than synthetic options—some organic products run more than three times as much for a product that covers the same size lawn. The price difference lies in the difficulty of manufacturing organic fertilizers, which typically include earthworm castings and sterilized manure ingredients. Organic fertilizers are often safer to use around pets and people, depending on the specific product.

Application

Zoysia grass doesn’t green up as early in the spring as cool-season grasses, such as fescue, and the general rule of thumb is to wait to apply fertilizer to zoysia until it’s fully green. By waiting, the grass gets a chance to green up naturally, which prompts its roots to wake up from winter and draw on their own energy. This gives them a solid start to the growing season. After the zoysia is green, applying a nitrogen fertilizer will help it maintain rich color and boost growth. 

Deciding when to fertilize zoysia also depends on the product. Some products call for applying fertilizer as often as twice a month, while others should be used just once per growing season. Additionally, consider fertilizing the zoysia lawn one last time in the fall. This will strengthen the grass and help it remain resilient and healthy during its upcoming winter dormancy.

FAQs

Zoysia is a hardy, robust type of grass that thrives in heat, but it still requires some care to reach its full lush potential and stay healthy all summer long. Those learning how to care for zoysia grass will undoubtedly have some questions: What is the best fertilizer for zoysia grass, and what makes a zoysia lawn denser?

Q. When should I fertilize my zoysia lawn?

Apply fertilizer in mid to late spring after the grass greens up, then follow the manufacturer’s instructions for subsequent applications, ranging from every 6 to 12 weeks during the growing season. A final application in the fall before the grass goes dormant is also a good idea to protect the roots of zoysia during its dormancy.

Q. Can you overfertilize zoysia grass?

Yes, it’s possible to overfertilize and weaken the grass by applying the fertilizer at a rate that exceeds the recommended rate or by using fertilizer more often than recommended.

Q. How do I make my zoysia grass green?

Apply a lawn fertilizer that’s high in nitrogen, such as NPK 15-0-8. The high nitrogen will encourage a rich green color. Users will also want to apply fertilizer to grass in the spring when new seedlings are beginning to sprout to ensure they are hardy when fully grown.

Q. How do I make my zoysia grass thicker?

Zoysia grass spreads by rhizomes that run beneath the soil. The healthier the grass is, the denser it will become. In addition to zoysia grass fertilization, mow the lawn regularly (once or twice a week) and water during times of drought.

Q. Does zoysia grass require a lot of water?

Zoysia can tolerate frequent rainfall and slight drought conditions, but it will stay the healthiest with regular watering. Good zoysia grass care includes making sure the lawn has a minimum of 1 inch of water per week.

Q. How tall should you cut zoysia grass?

Zoysia is a low-growing grass that should be kept mowed at about 1 to 3 inches depending on the type of yard space and the sun exposure. Those with a lot of sun exposure will want to trim their grass to a maximum of 1.5 inches, while those with partial shade will want to consider a 2- to 3-inch mowing height. This is also convenient for those who don’t want to do a lot of maintenance since zoysia grass tends to grow slowly.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-17T15:39:33-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested]]>Learn how to choose the right type of lawn products that will work on your grass, and get recommendations for the best weed and feed.

The post The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weed-and-feed/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weed-and-feed/Mon, 17 Feb 2025 15:17:06 -0500ReviewsDIYLandscapingLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A drab, weedy lawn isn’t a lost cause with the help of modern weed and feed fertilizers. Designed to introduce essential nutrients to accelerate the grass’s growth, these products help lawns grow thick and healthy. At the same time, they put the hurt on weeds to choke out the plants you don’t want in favor of the lush carpet of greenery you do. After researching the top fertilizer mixes, we tested eight of the top weed and feeds on a lawn that needed some serious help. These weed and feed products were all tested for at least 4 weeks with varying results and levels of success.

After testing, we can say that our favorite is the GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food. It’s highly concentrated, so it doesn’t take much product to make a big difference. We tested the products in a grid, and the square with this product outgrew (and out-greened) all the others. 

The test lawn needed both nutrients and weed reduction, so it gave us the perfect canvas for testing. Keep reading to get a look at how the best weed and feed performed in real-world conditions and what kind of growth (and weed death) you can expect in your own yard.

  1. BEST OVERALL: GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST NATURAL: Espoma Organic Weed Preventer
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST COOL-SEASON: GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WARM-SEASON: Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LIQUID: Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control
    Jump to Review
The Best Weed and Feed Product Options
Photo: Stacey L. Nash for Bob Vila

Before You Buy Weed and Feed 

Maintaining a healthy lawn includes mowing, weeding, watering, and fertilizing. However, fertilizing isn’t always necessary. Overfertilizing a lawn will make the grass grow more vigorously, requiring more frequent mowing or leading to runoff, which ends up in the local watershed. 

Excessive fertilizing can also result in lawn burn, which is when the nitrogen and salt levels in the soil are too high and cause yellow to brown strips or patches of dead grass. A lawn only needs fertilizing if the soil lacks the vital nutrients to help it grow. Home soil test kits can be used to check the soil composition and help you decide what type of fertilizer will best nourish your grass. 

Product Comparison

NPK RatioApplicationGrass Type
GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food27-0-4Spring or early fallKentucky bluegrass, fine and tall fescues, perennial ryegrass, Bahia, St. Augustine, common Bermuda, hybrid Bermuda, zoysia, centipede, Colonial bent
Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed26-0-2SpringKentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass, centipede, Bahia, Bermuda, zoysia
BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed22-0-4Spring, early summer, fallBermuda, fescue, buffalo grass, seashore paspalum, zoysia
Espoma Organic Weed Preventer9-0-0SpringAll grasses
GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed24-0-6Spring or fallKentucky bluegrass, Bermuda, buffalo grass, perennial ryegrass, fine and tall fescues, Bahia, centipede, zoysia, St. Augustine (except for Floratam)
Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action29-0-10Active growth periodsSt. Augustine, Floratam, zoysia, centipede, carpet grass
Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control25-0-2Spring or fallBahia, Bermuda, centipede, zoysia, Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass

Our Top Picks

The following list includes the fertilizers that stood out during research and were then tested to narrow the field to some of the most effective weed and feeds on the market. This list includes both liquid and granular weed treatments. 

Best Overall

GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food

 A bag of GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Doesn’t require a lot of product to make a difference
  • Capable of killing over 250 weed varieties
  • Slow-release nitrogen formula
  • Made a noticeable difference in grass growth rate and health

What We Don’t Like

  • Should not be used on Floratam St. Augustine, Dichondra, and carpet grass 
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 27-0-4
  • Application: Spring or early fall
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, fine and tall fescues, perennial ryegrass, Bahia, St. Augustine, common Bermuda, hybrid Bermuda, zoysia, centipede, Colonial bent

Taking care of a lawn and reducing common weeds is part of property ownership, and for those who want to spruce up lawn health quickly, this GreenView weed and feed mix can do it. This fertilizer and weed killer for lawns is made with a slow-release nitrogen formula that thickens grass, without excessive growth, targeting 250 weed varieties, including dandelions, clover, plantain, dollar weed, and ground ivy. It was the top performer in our testing, creating grass that outgrew the rest. It’s also a great spring or fall weed and feed.

The granules are effective for over 8 weeks and are safe to use on warm- and cool-season grass types, though there are a few varieties to avoid. Plus, the slow release nitrogen is safer to use when temperatures start to rise without burning the grass or causing other lawn injury.

The grass was noticeably taller and greener in the square with this GreenView mix. It’s also a highly concentrated fertilizer and weed preventer, so it doesn’t take a large amount to make a big difference in lawn health. While it didn’t kill existing weeds, fewer weeds grew in the area where this mix was applied. Our only issue with this product is that it contains 2,4-D (as did almost all of the other synthetic products in this test), which has the potential to affect human health and the environment. Make sure to read the application instructions to reduce the potential harmful effects.

Get the GreenView broadleaf weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., The Home Depot, Walmart (39 pounds), or GreenView.

Best Bang for the Buck

Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Quick, tangible results for thickening grass and preventing weeds
  • Highly concentrated and ample quantity
  • Compatible with multiple grass varieties

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for warm-season grasses
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 4.5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 4/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 26-0-2
  • Application: Spring
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass, centipede, Bahia, Bermuda, zoysia

Scotts is a well-known brand with an extensive range of lawn care products, including fertilizer and weed and grass killer. This product combines the strongest weed and feed for lawns available from Scotts. It’s supposed to kill common broadleaf weeds like dandelions and clover using WeedGrip technology while feeding the lawn for thicker grass. However, our testing revealed more feed than weed. Granted, the lawn we tested it on has a serious clover and dandelion problem. It’s possible the weed issues were too much even for this powerful weed killer. While we didn’t see a noticeable difference in weed health, they didn’t proliferate.

Scotts Turf Builder is one of the most popular and economical fertilizer and weed control combination products available. Although this weed and feed for Bermuda grass works on many common turf grasses, such as fescue, centipede, Kentucky bluegrass, ryegrass, Bahia, and zoysia, it’s not recommended for some warm-season grasses, such as St. Augustine, Dichondra, or carpet grass. As a synthetic product, it contains 2,4-D, which has the potential to damage human and environmental health.

Get the Scotts Turf Builder weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot. 

Upgrade Pick

BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed

 A bag of BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Works on over 200 weed and grassy-weed varieties 
  • Long-lasting formula feeds for up to 3 months
  • Provides nutrients as well as heat and drought resistance
  • Requires a minimal amount of mix to make a big difference in lawn health

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for new grass
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 3.5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 22-0-4
  • Application: Spring, early summer, fall
  • Grass type: Bermuda, fescue, buffalo grass, seashore paspalum, zoysia

Taking care of grass while keeping away common weeds and crabgrass can be exhausting and time-consuming. But the BioAdvanced 5-in-1 weed and feed long-lasting formula greens grass and boosts growth so much that users might need to add an extra cutting to their weekly routine. This potent mix can act as a grass killer for crabgrass as well as broadleaf weeds like clover, dandelion, chickweed, and 200 other weed and grassy-weed varieties. It also strengthens established grass by fortifying roots. 

With a coverage area of over 4,000 square feet, this weed and feed mix resists the effects of heat and drought and is safe to use on cool-season grass types. It’s also a highly concentrated mix, requiring a minimal amount to be effective. 

In testing, it made a big difference in grass growth rate and health, making the grass noticeably brighter and taller. However, it didn’t do much to choke out the clover and weeds, though it showed some ability to prevent new weeds from sprouting. It also contains 2,4-D, a chemical that can potentially harm the environment or people.

Get the BioAdvanced weed and feed at Lowe’s, Walmart, or BioAdvanced.

Best Natural

Espoma Organic Weed Preventer

 A bag of Espoma Organic Weed Preventer on a white background.
Photo: acehardware.com

What We Like

  • Made from 100 percent corn gluten meal
  • Can be used in any season and is compatible with all lawn types
  • Can be used in flower beds or vegetable gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Only covers 1,250 square feet of lawn
  • Doesn’t fertilize or control weeds as well as synthetic products

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 4/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 3.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 9-0-0
  • Application: Spring
  • Grass type: All grasses

Espoma’s Organic Weed Preventer is a natural solution to prevent lawn weeds without harming the environment. This product is made with 100 percent corn gluten meal, which is a byproduct of the corn-milling process that contains a high amount of nitrogen. When applied to your lawn, the nitrogen in the corn gluten meal provides a slow-release fertilizer to nourish the grass and make it more resistant to weeds. Additionally, the corn gluten meal acts as a natural pre-emergent herbicide that inhibits the growth of weed seeds by drying out their roots.

Unlike chemical-based weed preventers, Espoma’s Organic Weed Preventer is safe for pets, children, and the environment. It can safely be used on flower beds and in gardens. During testing, we found that much more of this mix is required to be as effective as synthetic fertilizers. The granules are also more noticeable on the lawn. However, we didn’t have to worry about children or pets walking on that lawn while the granules were still visible. We also appreciated that it can safely be used on flowers and vegetable gardens. 

This fertilizer/weed preventer did improve grass color and growth, but it didn’t perform as well as synthetic products. Espoma can help prevent pre-emergent weeds, but not those already growing.

Get the Espoma weed and feed at Ace Hardware or Walmart. 

Best Cool-Season

GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed

 A bag of GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed on a white background.
Photo: tractorsupply.com

What We Like

  • Kills over 200 varieties of weeds
  • Slow-release formula fertilizes for up to 12 weeks
  • 36-pound bag treats up to 10,000 square feet of lawn
  • Made a noticeable difference in the health and growth rate

What We Don’t Like

  • Contains 2,4-D
  • Didn’t kill existing weeds

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 24-0-6
  • Application: Spring or fall
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, Bermuda, buffalo grass, perennial ryegrass, fine and tall fescues, Bahia, centipede, zoysia, St. Augustine (except for Floratam)

GreenView Fairway Formula fertilizes lawns, targets over 200 lawn weed species, and prevents crabgrass from growing. It contains both slow-release and quick-release nutrients that feed a lawn for up to 12 weeks at a time. We like that the slow release reduces the number of times the fertilizer would need to be applied in a year. 

Due to the slow-releasing formula, GreenView Fairway Formula is best for use on established lawns with a healthy root system. Using it on new grass may result in burning and stunted growth. It can be used on warm- or cool-season grasses, but check the acceptable grass varieties as there are some exceptions. 

This mix noticeably boosted grass health during testing, with the grass growing at a faster rate and being greener than non-treated grass. It comes in a large bag and doesn’t require a lot of granules to be effective, making it an economical option for large lawns. However, we didn’t notice any difference in weed health, either killing them or preventing more from growing. 

Get the GreenView Fairway Formula weed and feed at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware (18 pounds), The Home Depot, Walmart, or GreenView.

Best Warm-Season

Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Helps lawns withstand heat and drought
  • Large coverage area of up to 8,000 square feet
  • High-nitrogen formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Not safe for people and pets until fully watered in and dry
  • Contains Atrazine

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 29-0-10
  • Application: Active growth periods
  • Grass type: St. Augustine, Floratam, zoysia, centipede, carpet grass

We understand that warm-season grasses need a weed and feed that can withstand heat and drought conditions while building a thick green lawn. Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action is a 3-in-1 weed and feed made for southern lawns. It’s safe for use on St. Augustine, zoysia, centipede, and carpet grasses, but it’s not recommended for use on Bermuda grass. This product also contains an insecticide that targets fire ants, mole crickets, sod webworms, fleas, armyworms, and more, and it keeps them away for up to 6 months. 

Please note that this product wasn’t tested due to the geographic location of the tester.

Get the Scotts Turf Builder Southern weed and feed at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Liquid

Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control

 A spray bottle of Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for fertilizing and weeding in any season on any grass type
  • Easy to apply
  • Affordable
  • Noticeably killed weeds after a single application

What We Don’t Like

  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 4/5; Feed Effectiveness 3/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 1.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 25-0-2
  • Application: Spring or fall
  • Grass type: Bahia, Bermuda, centipede, zoysia, Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass

Scotts Liquid Turf Builder weed spray lets users easily fertilize a lawn while killing dandelions and clover. One of this product’s best features is the ease of application. All that’s required is for the user to attach the applicator to a garden hose and apply this liquid weed and feed concentrate spray as needed. The process was easy during testing. The bottle has a clear strip so we could see how much we’d applied as we went along. That was helpful, as we applied it to a small area and didn’t want to use the entire bottle. 

Scotts weed and feed helps control buckhorn, chickweed, clover, dandelion, ground ivy, henbit, knotweed, and more. Scotts Liquid Turf Builder weed and feed spray can be used with almost any grass type during any season. When used as directed, it won’t burn the lawn and only requires one or two treatments per year. However, for those who don’t notice a change in weeds after one application, it can be applied again within 3 to 4 weeks. 

The brand says there should be a noticeable decline in weeds after a few days, but we didn’t notice weeds dying out until 3 weeks into testing. This was one of the few products that killed existing weeds. While it increased grass growth and deepened the green somewhat, it didn’t have the drastic health benefits for the grass as some of the other weed and feeds we tested.

Get the Scotts liquid weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Or, DIY Your Own Weed and Feed

While there are many effective weed and feed products on the market, using commercial weed and feed can be expensive and harmful to the environment. A more natural solution is to make a DIY weed and feed using safe and effective ingredients. 

Mix 1 pound of corn gluten meal, 1 cup of Epsom salt, and 1 cup of dried lawn clippings to make your own weed and feed. Corn gluten meal acts as a natural pre-emergent herbicide that prevents weed seeds from germinating, while Epsom salt provides magnesium and sulfur to nourish the grass. Dried lawn clippings act as a slow-release fertilizer that provides nutrients for healthy lawn growth. By using this natural DIY weed and feed, users can maintain a beautiful and healthy lawn without harming the environment.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Weed and Feed

Testing Stats
Products tested:7
Hours spent testing:8 weeks
Tests performed:1
Price range:$20 to $70

We created a numbered grid using marking paint and stakes, and one weed and feed fertilizer was applied in each square. The exception was the liquid weed and feed, which required application in a larger area; it was applied to a 100-square-foot area next to the grid. 

We calculated how much weed and feed to spread in each square based on the manufacturer’s instructions so that we didn’t over- or under-fertilize. The space was small enough that we spread the fertilizers by hand to prevent them from mixing. We then took pictures upon application and once a week for 4 weeks. Each weed and feed was scored according to a rubric based on how much product it required, how well it performed, and the ingredients. We also considered the eco-friendliness of each fertilizer, looking for nontoxic options and also pet-friendly weed and feed. 

What to Consider When Choosing Weed and Feed 

Not every weed and feed formula works on every type of grass or in every climate. You need to keep in mind the type of grass, the weed species you want to target, and fertilizer ingredients. Different weed and feeds are also designed for application during different seasons to provide nutrients the grass needs at specific stages of the growth cycle and to better target weeds when they’re at their most vulnerable. 

Weed and Feed Type

Weed and feed can be divided into several types. The first is between natural and chemical weed and feeds. Natural weed and feeds may be organic (but not always) and often contain cornmeal as a natural weed preventative and grass fertilizer. These weed and feeds do not contain synthetic chemicals. 

Chemical weed and feeds can be further divided into pre- and post-emergent weed and feeds. Pre-emergent weed and feeds contain chemicals that prevent weed seeds from germinating. They do not target already existing weeds. Post-emergent weed and feeds contain chemicals that target existing weeds while fertilizing grass. However, some products (like BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed, our upgrade pick), contain chemicals that affect both pre- and post-emergent weeds. 

Grass Type

The best weed and feed product for a lawn depends on the grass type. Grass species have different nutrient requirements, so not all products are safe for every species of grass. Using the wrong weed and feed can stunt growth, burn, or further damage the grass. In general, grass species are divided into two categories: warm season and cool season. The seasons do not refer to the time of year but the climate and average soil temperature range. 

  • Warm-season turfgrasses grow best with average soil temperatures between 80 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit. Warm-season grasses thrive in the warmer climates of the southeastern and southwestern United States. They include Bahia, Bermuda, carpet grass, St. Augustine, and zoysia (Japanese lawn grass).
  • Cool-season turfgrasses grow best with average soil temperatures between 60 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit. Cool-season grasses thrive in the cooler climates of the Midwest and northern regions of the United States. Some cool-season grasses are Kentucky bluegrass, perennial ryegrass, and tall and hard fescue.

Selecting a weed and feed that’s compatible with the grass species will provide far better results.

NPK Ratio

To grow a lush lawn, your soil needs to have essential nutrients. Fertilizers temporarily add nutrients to the soil. Fertilizers typically list their nutrient ratios as an NPK formula. This denotation represents the percentage of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) in the product. 

  • Nitrogen (N) helps the grass grow properly and develop a green color.
  • Phosphorus (P) helps develop strong root systems.
  • Potassium (K) protects plants from disease, drought, and cold. 

There are at least 11 states that ban phosphorus fertilizer use or sale. Luckily, many lawn weed and feed manufacturers have adapted to this and removed phosphorus from their products. Don’t worry—the weed and feed will still green and thicken the grass without the additional phosphorus.

Fertilizers can also contain secondary elements and micronutrients needed for healthy growth, such as sulfur, calcium, magnesium, boron, iron, molybdenum, zinc, copper, chloride, nickel, and manganese. To find out exactly what nutrients the lawn needs, conduct a soil test. Either purchase a test for home use or take a soil sample to the local cooperative extension testing office. 

Natural vs. Synthetic

There are distinct differences between natural and synthetic weed and feeds. 

Natural and organic weed and feed products contain plant-based or mineral ingredients that are safe for the environment and human health. They nourish the soil and plants to make them more resistant to weeds and prevent weed seed germination. 

At this time, natural alternatives aren’t as effective as their synthetic counterparts. However, some users of natural weed and feeds report that they notice healthier grass and fewer weeds after using the products for several seasons. In short, it takes patience and consistency to see gradually improved lawn health. It also takes more of the product to fertilize, which increases the overall cost, but it’s often worthwhile for the long-term health of people and the environment. 

On the other hand, chemical-based products contain synthetic herbicides that quickly kill weeds and improve grass health. However, they may contain ingredients that hurt beneficial plants, insects, and wildlife. Two of the most commonly used herbicides, 2,4-D and Atrazine, have been linked to numerous health and environmental problems. 2,4-D is a hormone-disrupting chemical that can potentially cause cancer, congenital disabilities, and developmental issues in children. Atrazine is a highly toxic herbicide that can contaminate drinking water, cause congenital disabilities, and harm wildlife. 

Be careful when applying these products in areas with a shallow water table, as they have the potential to contaminate the water supply. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and keep children and pets off the lawn until the product has dried or worked its way into the grass/soil. 

Application

Weed and feed comes in two forms: liquid and granular. Liquid forms are simple to apply and kill weeds faster than the more economical, though slower-acting, granular forms. Weed killer spray or liquid weed and feed is designed for small yards. Granular weed and feed covers more area, often 5,000 square feet or more, and is often available in 18-pound bags and larger. Granular versions offer a better value, but users do need to water their lawns after application for the product to penetrate the grass.

FAQs

If you want a pet-safe weed and feed or are curious to know what type is best for killing stubborn weeds, read on for answers to these and other commonly asked questions.

Q. How fast does weed and feed work?

Depending upon the brand, it may take from 5 days to up to 2 weeks to see the visible results of weed and feed. However, natural and organic products may take longer to produce visible results. 

Q. When is the best time to apply weed and feed?

As with most gardening or fertilizing tasks, it is best to apply weed and feed in the spring. This is when weeds are actively beginning to grow, which allows the weed and feed to kill the weeds as seedlings. However, some brands do not recommend that the weed and feed become wet after application, so apply the weed and feed before rain—in some cases, at least 24 hours before any forecasts of rain. 

Q. Should I mow before weed and feed?

Read the manufacturer’s instructions. Some weed and feed products should be applied a day or two after mowing, while others should not. The application time varies by product and sometimes by the season in which the product is used.

Q. Is weed and feed bad for my lawn?

Weed and feed is a combination of fertilizer and various weed killers, so these products are not bad for your lawn. 

Q. Is weed and feed safe for dogs?

If used properly, pet-friendly weed and feed and many standard weed and feeds are generally safe to use on lawns and spaces where dogs (and even children) are actively playing. However, always follow the package instructions because some herbicides can be moderately toxic to dogs.

Meet the Tester

Stacey L. Nash has written about home and garden products, home design and decor, and general indoor and outdoor home improvement for 5+ years. She’s passionate about research and hands-on testing to find the products that add true value to homeownership and daily life. She lives on 12 heavily wooded acres, where she and her family put home and outdoor products to the test while avoiding bears and cougars. 

Additional research provided by Debbie Wolfe. 

The post The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-17T15:17:06-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested]]>Take better care of your garden by checking soil health. See our testing results and shopping considerations.

The post The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-test-kits/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=161733Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:32:20 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Testing garden soil is the best way to determine what it needs—if anything—and how much. A variety of soil testing kits are available, but how reliable are they? Home gardeners rely on these kits when deciding whether to amend their soil, so to narrow down the best soil test kits, we tested for accuracy, dependability, and ease of use. 

Soil testers range from simple pH strips to complex kits that pinpoint deficiencies. Serious gardeners will want to reach for comprehensive tests. As Jon Traunfeld, director of the Home & Garden Information Center at University of Maryland, explains, “We recommend that gardeners have their soil tested by accredited soil testing labs, public or private. A basic test that measures soil pH, important soil nutrients, and organic matter costs $20 to $25. The labs also provide recommendations for lime and fertilizer if needed.” These tests are available directly from labs or through your county extension office. 

For the average home gardener though, it can be easier to buy a soil test kit online, so that’s what we tested. To ensure accuracy, we compared product results to test results acquired from the Kansas State University soil testing lab. Our favorite product ended up being the MySoil Test Kit—it was easy to use and the results were simple to interpret, and most importantly of all, they were accurate. Ahead, learn what to look for when shopping for a soil test kit, and find out why the following products are well suited for helping determine soil deficiencies. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: MySoil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST PH STRIPS: Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST CHEMICAL TEST: Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST DIGITAL TEST: Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR CROPS: Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST PRECISION PH: Bluelab Soil pH Pen
    ↓ Jump to Review
Soil test kit on a table next to 3 test tubes with colored liquids
Photo: amazon

Product Comparison

Type of TestTests ForResult Time
MySoil Test KitProfessional, mail-in13 nutrients plus pH levelResults by email within 6 to 8 days of mailing the sample
Soil Savvy Soil Test KitProfessional, mail-in14 nutrients plus pH level11 days from when the sample was mailed
Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester KitsAnalog probeMoisture, pH, lightImmediate for moisture and pH, 10 minutes for light
Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips KitStripspH levelsWithin 20 seconds of testing
Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test KitChemical (at home)pH, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassiumVaries by the test but all within a few minutes
Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test KitChemical (digital results)Nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, and pHWithin a few seconds
Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test KitProfessional, mail-inCalcium, magnesium, phosphorus, potassiumResults available by email in one week
Bluelab Soil pH PenDigital probepH and temperatureImmediate

Our Top Picks

The kits we tested had to be accurate and relatively simple to use to earn a spot on this lineup. Test kits and equipment vary by the type of test being performed, so some are better suited to home gardeners, while others appeal to commercial and agricultural growers. We tested a range of kits—some required mailing off a soil sample for professional analysis, some involved chemical testing at home, and others required nothing more than sticking a probe in the soil.

Best Overall

MySoil Test Kit

 MySoil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: 13 nutrients plus pH level
  • Result time: Results by email within 6 to 8 days of mailing the sample

What We Like

  • Professional test for pH and a range of soil nutrients and minerals 
  • Process is clear and straightforward 
  • Results are detailed and easy to understand 

What We Don’t Like

  • No print option available on the website

For professional results, check out the MySoil test kit, which allows gardeners to gather soil samples and have them professionally tested. The MySoil kit offers an in-depth analysis, revealing the amounts of micronutrients, NPK, and macronutrients in the tested soil.

With the MySoil kit, we registered online and followed detailed instructions, gathering a large amount of soil from various areas of the property, mixing it together well, and filling the provided testing cup with the soil blend. Then we sent my soil sample to MySoil as well as an additional soil sample to Kansas State University’s agricultural department so we would have a quality comparison.

We received an email 6 days later with the results of the soil tests. We were impressed with the comprehensive results. The lab listed the levels of existing nutrients, including nitrogen, potassium, sulfur, calcium, iron, and more, and then compared our soil’s levels with optimal levels, which were also listed for each nutrient. We also received a bar chart that allowed us to visually compare the results, making them simple to understand.

Best of all, when the soil results from K-State came back, they were very close to the MySoil results, making us feel very comfortable with the quality of the MySoil lab results.

Get the MySoil soil test kit at Amazon or MySoil

Runner-up

Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit

 Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: 14 nutrients plus pH level
  • Result time: 11 days from when the sample was mailed

What We Like

  • Soil-collection instructions are easy to follow
  • Results provide detailed recommendations for both synthetic and organic amendments
  • Tests for aluminum, which our top pick does not test for 

What We Don’t Like

  • Could provide a better explanation of the results
  • It took the longest of all labs to get results

The Soil Savvy soil test kit offers professional soil analysis and custom fertilizer recommendations. It comes with a scoop, a collection cup containing liquid and a plastic ball, a prepaid postage envelope, and complete instructions for collecting and submitting a soil sample. 

As with the other soil samples we sent in the mail for professional testing, used the same soil gathered from various spots and then blended well. We spooned the soil into the cup, sealed it, and then went online and registered the barcode that came with the kit.

The lab took a little longer than we’d anticipated to get back to us, but in 11 days, we got an email directing us to log on for my results. We were impressed by the accuracy of the test results—they were right in line with the K-State results, and we also received customized recommendations for amending my soil to make it healthier. The Soil Savvy recommendations were broken down by synthetic and organic fertilizers—telling me exactly how much of each to apply per 1,000 square feet to amend the soil. 

Soil Savvy could have provided a better explanation of the results, however. We understand what nutrient ratios are, but a newbie gardener might benefit from further explanation of what the numbers mean. The lab tested for the 14 most common nutrients plus pH level.

Get the Soil Savvy soil test kit at Amazon or Soil Savvy.

Best Bang For The Buck

Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits

 Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Analog probe
  • Tests for: Moisture, pH, light
  • Result time: Immediate for moisture and pH, 10 minutes for light

What We Like

  • Very simple to use and provides immediate or near-immediate results
  • Doesn’t need batteries
  • Low-effort option

What We Don’t Like

  • Only measures moisture, pH, and light

Not all gardeners need or want a nutritional analysis of their soil. Some just want to know the pH level or how much light a plant would receive in a specific location. The Atree soil pH meter provides those answers accurately and at an affordable price.

We tested the Atree meter by inserting it in various spots in our flower garden. Over the years, we’ve added amendments, such as sulfur, to specific areas where acid-loving plants are growing, and we were curious whether this simple tester would pick up on that. It did—the soil around our hydrangeas, which we’ve amended heavily, tested at 6 on the pH scale, while the soil around our daisies registered at 6.8. Both seemed accurate based on our historical knowledge of our soil and the amendments we’ve made.

We then tested both moisture and light levels in various garden spots, and the Atree again seemed accurate. While this tester didn’t determine things like specific nutrient levels, we found that it would be great for gardeners who are happy with the health of their soil but would like to know if the light is adequate or whether the soil is draining well. The Atree did a good job measuring both.

Get the Atree soil test kit at Amazon

Best Ph Strips

Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit

 Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Strips
  • Tests for: pH levels
  • Result time: Within 20 seconds of testing

What We Like

  • Quick and accurate pH test results
  • Simple to use and read
  • Includes 100 test strips for lots of testing at an affordable cost

What We Don’t Like

  • Poor packaging likely led to short shelf life

Garden Tutor’s test strips offer quick results in determining indoor or outdoor soil’s acid/alkaline content. The kit contains 100 test strips and also includes a 16-page handbook that lists optimal pH levels for growing various plants.

We found the Garden Tutor soil pH test strips to accurately determine the pH levels in various parts of our flower garden. The simplest of all the kits we tested required mixing soil from a specific garden area with water and then dipping it in a pH test strip. In a few seconds, sensitive tabs on the test strip turned color, and we visually matched them to the color-coded chart on the outside of the bottle to determine the amount of acid or alkalinity of the soil.

We tested the soil in an area we knew had a lower pH, as we’ve added pH-lowering amendments for years. The Garden Tutor test strips determined that level to be 6.1, which sounded close and aligned with other pH tests we performed. We then tested the soil in a spot we knew was more alkaline and got a higher pH reading.

One thing we wish the manufacturer would have included, however, was a moisture-absorbent pack with the strips. We used about 20 strips in our initial tests, and all were fine. Three weeks later, however, the pH pads had all turned brownish, which we suspected was due to moist air getting into the bottle.

Get the Garden Tutor soil test kit at Amazon or Garden Tutor.

Best Chemical Test

Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit

 Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Chemical (at home)
  • Tests for: pH, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium
  • Result time: Varies by the test but all within a few minutes

What We Like

  • Provided accurate results
  • Looks intimidating but it’s relatively easy to use
  • No need to send off a sample and wait days for results
  • All the components fit into a small kit that’s easy to store 

What We Don’t Like

  • Did not have enough solution to complete 40 tests

In addition to determining soil’s pH level, the Luster Leaf soil test kit pinpoints the amount of the three most common soil macronutrients: nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium. There’s no need for the user to send a sample to a laboratory with this chemical test. 

When we first opened the Luster Leaf test kit case, we were surprised by the number of vials and bottles of solutions. It didn’t look very easy. After reading the instructions, we found it was actually pretty simple. Testing involved gathering soil, putting a tiny bit in a glass vial, adding a specific liquid and/or powder (depending on the test), and shaking the vial. We were then able to compare the color of the liquid in the vial to an included chart to get the results.

To determine the accuracy of the Luster Leaf tests, we compared the results we got from the mail-in soil tests. The NPK results were close to the lab results. For an at-home test, we were pretty impressed. (The pH, on the other hand, tested lower than the lab tests, but the soil where we took the sample for this test had been previously amended to lower pH.)

The downside? The manufacturer says the kit will perform 40 tests. We found that to be inaccurate. We followed the instructions carefully and had only enough solution to do about 15 tests.

Get the Luster Leaf 1662 soil test kit at Amazon.

Best Digital Test

Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit

 Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Chemical (digital results)
  • Tests for: Nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, and pH
  • Result time: Within a few seconds

What We Like

  • Digital results are straightforward and very easy to interpret
  • Testing just requires inserting the sample and pressing a test button
  • Includes a booklet that has pH preferences for over 450 plants

What We Don’t Like

  • Only 5 capsules per test for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash

The second Luster Leaf kit in the lineup tests for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium, but it takes some of the complexity out of testing using color-coded capsules. It also takes the guesswork out of matching the results with its easy-to-read digital display. Everything is color-coded: N, P, and K correspond with purple, blue, and orange, respectively, while green is for pH.

We collected a soil sample, filled one of the four test tubes, and then added filtered water to the tube. We shook the soil and water solution, inserted a color-coded capsule in the vial, and shook again. Once the contents were well mixed, we inserted the vial into the hole at the top of the digital reader and pressed the button corresponding to the test.

This was the same test as the first Luster Leaf kit, but it was more user-friendly, and the color-coding made everything understandable. The digital reader gave me the results via a lit-up button. If the soil had too much of a nutrient, it registered as “surplus,” and lower amounts registered as “sufficient,” “adequate,” “deficient,” or “depleted.” 

Unfortunately, the digital tester did not show how low or high a nutrient might have been, but we were able to look in the booklet and see optimal NPK levels for different plants, grasses, and flowers. The booklet also offered suggestions on how to amend the soil to raise or lower specific nutrient levels. 

Get the Luster Leaf 1605 soil test kit at Amazon or Earth Easy.

Best For Crops

Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit

 Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: Calcium, magnesium, phosphorus, potassium
  • Result time: Results available by email in one week

What We Like

  • Ideal for food plots
  • Customizable—write down the intended crop for personalized results
  • Detailed results arrive quickly and are tailored to the chosen crop

What We Don’t Like

  • Less comprehensive than some other tests

Hobby farmers and crop growers can receive an expert soil analysis with the Whitetail Institute’s Laboratory soil test kit. Growers also receive a custom consultation and recommendations for improving their soil based on the type of crop that will be grown. 

For testing, we once again used the same soil gathered from various spots, blended well, and sent the sample to Whitetail. Of the three mail-in soil kits we tested, Whitetail offered the highest level of customization. When we filled out the form, they asked what we planned to grow in the soil. We chose alfalfa and Whitetail sent specific instructions for amending the soil to make it suitable for growing alfalfa. 

The nutrient test results were very close to those we obtained from the other labs and Kansas State University, but Whitetail only tested for four nutrients: phosphorus, potassium, calcium, and magnesium. We called the local extension agent and asked why. He said those are the most critical four nutrients for most agricultural crops.

We could access the test results in just one week, and a few days later, a paper copy arrived via snail mail. We found that the Whitetail test kit results would be a boon for farmers or hobby farmers who want to create optimal soil conditions for a specific crop.

Get the Whitetail Institute soil test kit at Amazon, Cabela’s, or Whitetail Institute.

Best Precision pH

Bluelab Soil pH Pen

 Bluelab Soil pH Pen on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 3/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Digital probe
  • Tests for: pH and temperature
  • Result time: Immediate

What We Like

  • Provides very precise pH testing, measuring to 0.1 degree
  • Easy-to-see digital readout on a backlit LCD display
  • Developed for commercial growing needs

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be calibrated before use

For commercial-scale growers, hydroponic growers, or gardeners who want the ultimate in precision pH testing, consider the Bluelab pH pen that provides highly accurate acid/alkaline results. The pen comes with a backlit LCD display and requires a AAA battery for operation. It also features two-point calibration for ensuring accurate pH readings, but the calibration solution is not included.

We had to locate 7.0 and 4.01 pH solutions, and we were able to borrow some of both from the local high school chemistry class, but be aware that if you want to use this pen, you’ll need to buy some of your own.

After calibrating the Bluelab pen, which involves putting it first in one solution and then the other and pushing the calibration button each time, we were able to test the pH and the temperature of the soil of our potted plants. We were surprised at the accuracy of this pen tester as it measured pH to a tenth of a degree and clearly displayed the number on the LED screen. The pH was close to what we had gotten in other tests, but this seemed to be the most accurate of all the tests. The temperature reading was also handy, and it would be vital for hydroponic growers or commercial growers who needed to maintain a specific growing temperature.

Get the Bluelab soil test pen at Amazon or Bluelab.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Soil Test Kits

Testing Stats
Products tested  9
Time spent testing  1 hour per kit
Tests performed 9
Price range $10 to $200

Our goal in testing the soil test kits was to determine how accurate each was, how easy they were to use, and how beneficial the results would be for our readers. The types of soil tests varied widely—from professional tests that required sending a soil sample to a lab to simple pH meters that determined a soil’s acid or alkaline level via a probe. We extensively researched dozens of soil test kits and products before choosing which ones to test, and we intentionally chose different types of kits because growers have very different needs. 

Misti Mathis, co-owner of Harvest Gold Organics, which sells plant care products out of McKinney, Texas, offers some advice on how shoppers can decide between kits: “Ultimately, the best choice depends on your specific needs and budget. While home test kits won’t be as precise as professional labs, they’re a good option for many gardeners.” She adds that “a professional lab test might be a better choice if you’re facing severe plant growth issues or have unique soil characteristics.”

To help determine the effectiveness of individual lab tests, we also sent a soil sample to the agricultural department at Kansas State University, where they do high-end soil and plant testing. The results from Kansas State were used as a starting point for comparing the other lab tests and the at-home chemical testing kits. 

We awarded points for each kit or product, and at the end of testing, we added the points and used them to help determine the best uses and specific awards for each of the kits that earned a spot in this lineup.

What to Consider When Choosing a Soil Test Kit

Many gardeners and home landscapers buy fertilizer and soil amendment products that promise to produce robust plant growth, improve soil structure, or result in abundant blooms. Still, unless the products provide what the soil lacks, the results may not be what the gardener expected. In some cases—such as adding fertilizer to nutrient-dense soil—plants may even suffer from fertilizer burn. Soil testing takes the guesswork out of gardening and landscaping, and that’s why I tested the top soil test products on the market today.

Soil

Soil quality varies from location to location. The soil in some regions might be perfect for growing vegetables and flowers, while the soil someplace else must be heavily amended with organic matter to grow anything. The following four common types of soil have different properties: 

  • Silt: Fine and soft, silt grains are smaller than grains of sand. Silty soil is associated with prior flooding that washed topsoil downstream. Silty soils are suitable for growing most types of plants but will benefit from adding organic matter to help increase drainage. Depending on its nutrient content, silt may also require a fertilizer.
  • Loamy: An optimal blend of silt, sand, clay, and organic matter, loamy soil is a gardener’s best friend. It drains well, yet resists compaction as it dries out. It’s suitable for growing fruits, vegetables, and most types of flowers and shrubs.
  • Clay: While clay soil is full of nutrients, it’s composed of ultra-fine particles that stick together when wet and become rock-hard when dry. Plants don’t grow well in clay soil because their roots can’t push as easily through thick clay as they can with other soil types. Clay soil must be amended with organic matter, such as compost, to help aerate the soil and make it suitable for growing plants.
  • Sandy: Better than clay because it offers spaces between the grains for roots to grow, but not as nutrient-dense as loam, sandy soil drains well. It is suitable for growing bulbs, such as tulips, and root crops, including potatoes and carrots. When preparing soil for the upcoming growing season, adding organic matter will help it retain moisture when growing other types of plants.

Test Types

Several soil-testing products are available to determine the amounts of various nutrients and macronutrients in the soil. Among the most comprehensive tests are those that involve taking soil samples and sending them to a lab for analysis. Still, at-home kits and instruments like these can be of help.

  • Strips: A simple type of soil test, pH strips are coated bits of paper that determine the current acidity or alkalinity level of the soil. The gardener mixes soil with distilled water, using the recommended ratio on the package instructions. (Tap water can influence the pH readout.) After inserting the test strip in the solution, the resulting color of the strip lets the gardener know whether the soil in the garden is acidic or alkaline. A chart usually comes with pH test strips so users can compare the colors.
  • Analog: These testers are commonly used to test soil for moisture content, pH levels, and some may even test the quantity of the light in specific locations. They feature aluminum probes to be inserted in the soil when taking readings. Some may use batteries, but many analog testers react to wetness in the ground and often don’t need batteries.
  • Digital: Like analog soil testers, digital soil testers often come with probes to insert in the ground to determine moisture content and pH levels. They usually require batteries and may also be used in conjunction with chemical testing to help determine nutrient levels, such as the amount of nitrogen or potash in the soil.
  • Chemical: At-home chemical soil tests require adding a drop or two of a specific chemical called a “reagent” to a soil sample. The reaction helps show the health of the soil. Chemical soil tests are suitable for testing one or more factors, including pH, and specific nutrients, such as nitrogen or calcium.
  • Professional: The most reliable of all soil tests, professional tests require the gardener to collect a soil sample. The sample is mailed to a laboratory, where it’s analyzed for structure and a variety of nutrients. Then the lab sends the results and soil recommendations back to the gardener.

Testing

Testing kits and instruments commonly help pinpoint soil characteristics. Knowing the makeup of the soil helps you better maintain your garden. Keep in mind that various plants have specific nutrient requirements, so it’s essential to research the plant that will be grown before adding nutrients.

  • Macronutrients: The three most common macronutrients needed for healthy plant growth are nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K). Every bag of fertilizer will list an NPK number that identifies the amount of each of these three nutrients. The types of N, P, and K nutrients come in various forms, such as potassium carbonate for phosphorus, and urea or anhydrous ammonia for nitrogen. In general, all the NPK varieties perform similar functions. The key is knowing which specific nutrient that a plant needs and then using the soil test results to add a fertilizer formulation that helps balance nutrient levels. 
  • Micronutrients: Plants may require trace minerals as well as macronutrients, and a soil tester that pinpoints micronutrients, such as copper, iron, and manganese, tells the gardener if too much or not enough of these nutrients is in the soil. 
  • Acid or alkaline: The pH scale runs from 0 to 14, with 7 being neutral. Most garden plants prefer slightly acidic soil, between 6 and 7. However, some plants such as lilac and clematis prefer slightly alkaline soils, while azaleas prefer acidic (5.5) conditions.
  • Temperature: Testing soil temperature is much like testing human temperature; the tester has a thermometer that indicates how warm or cool the soil is. This is helpful for commercial growers who want to start production as early in the spring as possible. It also can be helpful for hobby gardeners who want to make sure the soil is warm enough before they set out seedlings. 
  • Light: Because plants need various amounts of light, a light meter can help determine whether a location will be optimal for a specific plant variety. While plants have different light needs, all need some light for photosynthesis, which is how the plant synthesizes water and carbon dioxide into food. Most at-home light meters will display low, medium, and high lighting conditions. A gardener can use these readings to determine whether a plant is receiving enough light (or too much light) in a specific spot. 
  • Moisture: One of the most common soil tests is for moisture, and it’s used to determine whether the soil is draining well. Moisture meters usually have a gauge that allows the gardener to see if the soil, whether it’s in a garden bed or is a potting soil mix, is dry, moist, or wet. 

Accuracy

Soil test kits vary in accuracy, with professional lab tests ranking as the most accurate. The quality and composition of the soil may also vary from one end of the garden to the other based on the amount of light that a specific spot gets, whether leaves fall and decompose in one spot, or what types of plants were grown there in the past. For example, plants in the legume family, such as soybeans or clover, can add nitrogen to the soil. 

Choosing the most accurate test or tester can prove challenging, but look for features such as large, easy-to-read gauges on analog testers and probes that are solidly attached. Chemical kits should offer multiple testing processes for double-checking results, and pH test strips will be most accurate before their expiration date. No matter the individual test kit, gardeners can help avoid mistakes by performing multiple tests in different spots. 

Speed of Results

The quickest results come from tests that determine pH and moisture. At-home test kits and instruments can determine these two factors in mere seconds. Testing for other nutrients may take longer, especially if the soil has to be combined with water and then allowed to settle before performing a chemical test.Light and moisture meters can often determine results in a few minutes. Retesting can be done as often as desired to get an idea of light quality during different times of the day and to see whether moisture evaporates more quickly from soil during higher outdoor temps. 

The longest wait period comes when seeking professional laboratory results. The gardener must gather the soil samples, place them in a package, and mail the package to the laboratory. Depending on the speed of the lab, it may take a few days to test the sample and then a few extra days to get the results. Some labs can send results by email, which speeds up the process by a couple of days. 

Ease of Use

Test kits that feature pH strips and meters with probes are simple to use and self-explanatory for the most part, but the best soil test kits come with directions on how to handle the strips and the probes, in addition to offering information for understanding the relevance of the test results. Chemical test kits can be more complex, but they come with instructions on gathering soil samples, mixing them, and choosing the chemicals to use when conducting specific nutrient tests. Chemical kits often come with charts that explain what the different results mean, such as various color changes that occur when testing for particular macronutrients and micronutrients.

FAQs

The best soil test kit can help a gardener figure out the most beneficial fertilizers or amendments to add to a garden. Below are answers to some common questions about soil testing kits.

Q. Why do I need to test soil?

If plants are thriving, there’s no need to test the soil. However, if plants seem to wilt, die, or just do poorly, testing the soil could help determine if the problem is due to a structure or nutrient deficiency in the soil.

Q. Can I test my own soil?

Absolutely. Many DIY-type soil testers are available for testing everything from moisture and pH to the amount and type of nutrients in the soil. Some involve sending the soil sample to a professional lab—these can yield the most accurate results. 

Q. Are digital soil testers accurate? 

Digital soil testers are usually reasonably accurate. Gardeners can increase accuracy by performing multiple tests in different spots of the garden and comparing the results.

Q. What are the soil-testing methods?

There are several soil testing methods. Soil test kits you can buy for at-home use feature pH strips, analog or digital meters, and chemical testing. They will include directions for the testing method. Professional testing is available by sending soil samples to a lab—you mail in a soil sample and they’ll provide results within a few days or weeks. 

Q. What does a pH test measure?

A pH test measures the acidity and alkalinity levels of the soil. The acidity of the soil can affect plant health, including how well it absorbs nutrients, so aiming for the ideal pH level for your plant types is one important step toward a flourishing garden. 

Q. How do I adjust the pH level of my soil?

Soil treatments are available that will either raise or lower the soil’s pH level, depending on what the gardener is growing. These are often called pH-UP and pH-DOWN products. You can also use amendments like garden lime and bone meal (which increase soil pH) and peat moss or sulfur (which lower soil pH) to naturally adjust pH levels in your garden.

Q. Do soil test kits expire? 

Kits with pH strips may expire in a few months, especially if they’re not kept in an airtight container. Meters and monitors will not expire. However, if they’re battery operated, they will require new batteries when the old ones run down. Chemical kits are often good for 2 to 5 years. 

Meet the Tester 

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

The post The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-17T14:32:20-05:00
<![CDATA[8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment]]>Safely rid your garden of weeds with the best organic weed killer. This guide offers top-rated picks and shopping tips.

The post 8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-organic-weed-killer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=152444Mon, 17 Feb 2025 12:14:18 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Despite attentive gardening practices, unwanted weeds can muscle in quickly, making organic weed killers a necessary tool for removing pesky plants without posing risks to food production or the environment. While these useful lawn-care products can help provide flowers and vegetables with the space they need to produce blossoms and edibles, it can be difficult to know which organic herbicides for weeds actually work. To help you in your search, we researched dozens of popular options and reached out to a lawn care and gardening expert for their experience-based insights.

As a result of our efforts, we found eight organic weed killers we feel confident recommending. Of those, our favorite is the Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer, a formula that’s easy to apply, works quickly, and is certified for organic use. Rather than spraying your garden with conventional herbicides full of toxic chemicals that do more harm than good, this and the rest of the best organic weed killers we selected use natural ingredients that work while keeping food, kids, and pets safe.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden Vinegar
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST SPRAY: Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root Kill
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST CONCENTRATE: Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SPOT TREATMENT: Sunday Weed Warrior
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST MULTIPURPOSE: Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR GRAVEL: Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
The Best Organic Weed Killer Options
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy an Organic Weed Killer

The best organic weed killers are a one-step way to remove unwanted weeds like dandelions, poison ivy, and more. But they may not give you the results you’re after since they’re typically nonselective, meaning they can kill all the plants in vegetable gardens, flower beds, and grassy areas in addition to weeds. More traditional methods, such as pulling weeds by hand or using a weeding tool, may provide better weed control for lawns and spaces where you want more control over which plants you eradicate.

Organic Weed Killer Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeSizeFormula
Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass KillerSpray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; acetic acid
Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden VinegarSpray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; acetic acid
Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root KillSpray24 ounces; other sizes availableNonselective; ammoniated soap 
Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew ConcentrateLiquid concentrate32 ounces; other sizes availableNonselective; caprylic acid and capric acid
Sunday Weed WarriorSprayTwo 32-ounce bottles; other sizes availableNonselective; ammoniated soap
Earthborn Elements Pure Borax PowderPowder1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; sodium borate
Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass KillerComfort wand spray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; ammonium nonanoate
Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass KillerLiquid1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; sodium chloride and acetic acid

Our Top Picks

The following organic weed killers made our list because they’re potent enough to kill weeds naturally without the use of harmful chemicals that can contaminate fruits and vegetables or leave environmentally damaging residues behind. Choosing the best organic weed killer from these options depends on individual needs and weed types needing removal.

Best Overall

Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer

 Bottle of Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer on white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Organic Material Review Institute (OMRI)-listed for organic use
  • Spray application makes it easier to be precise
  • Starts working within 24 hours of application 

What We Don’t Like

  • May not totally eliminate particularly stubborn weeds

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available 
  • Formula: Nonselective; acetic acid

Crabgrass, dandelions, thistles, and other weeds are history with just a spritz of OMRI-listed Green Gobbler vinegar weed and grass killer. Derived from corn, this natural acetic acid herbicide is nonselective, meaning it kills all vegetation it’s applied to with a turnaround time of 24 hours. The easy-to-use spray attachment that comes with the gallon bottle makes application a cinch, and larger quantities are available without the extra nozzle for use as refills.

Green Gobbler is especially beneficial along fence lines, around patios and pool areas, and in mulched flower beds where common weeds and grasses tend to sprout most. Just use care not to spray it on desirable plantings because they, too, will die.

Get the Green Gobbler organic weed killer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Green Gobbler

Best Bang for the Buck

Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden Vinegar

 Bottle of Natural Armor 30% Industrial Strength Vinegar on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 6 times more potent than comparable formulas 
  • Comes with an attachable trigger sprayer
  • Ideal for large areas needing extensive weed control 

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer clogs sometimes

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; acetic acid

To control weeds without spending a lot of cash, consider this Natural Armor concentrate. It’s available in an economical 1-gallon jug (as well as other sizes), comes at an attractive price, and contains vinegar that’s six times more potent than the household variety. This pet-safe weed killer can be applied using the attachable trigger sprayer, poured into a smaller spray bottle, or used with a pump-type garden sprayer. 

Natural Armor’s industrial-strength organic weed killer contains only pure and natural ingredients that are environmentally safe. It’s a nonselective vegetation killer that’s well suited for lawn edging and removing weeds from fence lines, between sidewalk cracks, and among patio pavers. This vinegar weed killer spray can also be used to clean mossy stone garden statues and outdoor ornaments.

Get the Natural Armor organic weed killer at Amazon or Natural Armor.

Best Spray

Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root Kill Herbicide

 Bottle of Natria Grass & Weed Control with Root Kill Herbicide on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ready-to-use formula 
  • Ideal for cracks in pavement, edging, and more 
  • Precise spray applicator enables use as a weed killer for lawns

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires a relatively thick coating to work

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 24 ounces; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammoniated soap

No need to mix or pour this Natria weed remover spray into another container—it comes in its own spray bottle and comes ready to apply. Unlike our two top picks, this option uses ammoniated soap of fatty acids, a natural ingredient that penetrates weed foliage to destroy the plant. Like our other recommendations, however, it’s also nonselective, so it shouldn’t be applied on a windy day if desirable plants are nearby. 

For best results, Natria recommends you apply enough of this organic product to fully saturate the weed’s foliage. The herbicide will then travel through the foliage and stems to the roots, destroying the weed completely and preventing regrowth. Though it’s a strong weed killer, Natria won’t contaminate soil, meaning gardeners can safely sow seeds 5 days after use.

Get the Natria organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Concentrate

Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate

 Bottle of Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Withers broadleaf or grassy weeds within hours
  • 32-ounce concentrate makes more than 8 gallons of product
  • Waterproof once dried 

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires dilution and a container for application

Specs

  • Type: Liquid concentrate
  • Size: 32 ounces; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; caprylic acid and capric acid

When it comes to making weed killers, Bonide has an excellent reputation, and this concentrate is no exception. It’s available in a couple of sizes, and the 32-ounce container of this organic weed killer is enough for over 8 gallons of diluted product. It’s easy to apply using a standard handheld or backpack sprayer, and once it dries, it’s waterproof for extended effectiveness. 

The chemical-conscious consumer can have peace of mind from this product as it is made with coconut and palm kernel oils, both capable of killing grassy and broadleaf weeds, moss, and algae. It is also suitable for applying to patios, walkways, driveways, fences, foundations, and more in temperatures as low as 40 degrees Fahrenheit. However, given that it is a nonselective option, it may not be safe for use directly on gardens or beloved plants. But, it can be used at a safe distance around these areas to kill harmful weeds and grasses. 

What our tester says: “We tried Deadweed Brew as part of our best weed killer tests by broadcasting it over a row of weeds growing between tire tracks on a gravel driveway. Within 4 hours, the weed zone had turned a pale greenish brown, and by the next morning, all the weeds were completely dead.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Bonide organic weed killer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Bonide.

Best Spot Treatment

Sunday Weed Warrior

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Sunday Weed Warrior
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to apply herbicidal soap kills grassy weeds
  • Results start to appear in just 20 minutes
  • OMRI-listed for safe organic use 

What We Don’t Like

  • May require periodic reapplication

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: Two 32-ounce bottles; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammoniated soap 

Sunday’s Weed Warrior is an herbicidal soap made from fatty acids designed to tackle grassy weeds, mosses, and algae. It works by breaking down the waxy coating that protects plants, leading to rapid dehydration and death. After application, you should start seeing visible results in about 20 minutes. 

As a nonselective killer, this isn’t a good weed killer for lawns since it will kill your grass, too. However, it’s quite effective as a spot treatment along sidewalks, next to flower beds, and near concrete patios via precise application using the spray bottle. Those needing to treat larger areas will be pleased to know there are refill sizes available, including a gallon jug that has a convenient sprayer wand. 

What our tester says: “The fact that I was so impressed with the Weed Warrior spot treatment that I bought the concentrated pouches to weed large areas is a testament to the product’s effectiveness.”—Daryna Tobey, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Sunday Lawn Care Review 

Get the Sunday organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Sunday.

Best Multipurpose

Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can be mixed to varying strengths for different needs
  • Durable, resealable container is easy to store safely
  • Great for flower beds, driveways, and stepping stones 

What We Don’t Like

  • Finding the right strength may require some tinkering

Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available 
  • Formula: Nonselective; sodium borate

Multipurpose borax can kill weeds, control unwanted insects, and boost laundry detergent—and it’s the active ingredient in Earthborn Elements borax powder. Borax, short for “sodium borate,” is a natural mineral mined in desert regions, including California’s Death Valley. 

To use, mix with water at a ratio of 10 ounces of borax to ½ cup of hot water, stirring until the powder dissolves. Next, further dilute the solution by pouring it into 2½ gallons of water, then spray it directly on weeds with a spray bottle or pump-type garden sprayer. Like many other natural weed killers, borax is nonselective, so you’ll want to take care to spray weeds only on a calm day to protect desirable plants. 

Get the Earthborn Elements organic weed killer at Amazon or Earthborn Elements.

Best for Gravel

Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed by OMRI for safe organic use
  • Results appear in about 15 minutes
  • Battery-powered sprayer covers gravel pads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer tube sometimes becomes disconnected

Specs

  • Type: Comfort wand spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammonium nonanoate

Though we’ve yet to test it as a weed killer for gravel, we can hardly wait to unleash Ortho GroundClear’s battery-powered sprayer on our weed-prone gravel parking pad. Since this gravel area sits somewhat close to a drainage ditch, we’re careful about how we care for it, so the fact that this weed and grass killer is OMRI-certified is ideal. We also appreciate that the sprayer wand has adjustable settings to enable more precise application in mulched garden beds and alongside landscaped spaces. 

Once applied, GroundClear gets to work, destroying plants’ cell membranes to cause dehydration and death in about 15 minutes. Though larger and more stubborn weeds may take a bit longer to die, this rainproof spray provides lasting effects that help prevent unwanted plants from coming back. 

Get the Ortho organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Ortho.

Also Consider

Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer

 The Best Dandelion Killer Option: Eco Living Solutions Organic Vinegar Weed Killer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed by OMRI for safe organic use
  • Results appear in about 15 minutes
  • Battery-powered sprayer covers gravel pads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer tube sometimes becomes disconnected

Specs

  • Type: Comfort wand spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammonium nonanoate

The Eco Living Solutions vinegar weed and grass killer contains high-strength vinegar for effective natural foliage eradication. It comes ready to use and should be sprayed full strength on weeds until foliage is saturated. It’s nonselective, so take care not to let overspray get on desirable plantings.

For those looking to get rid of grass, this product also works as an organic weed killer for lawns., making it an eco-friendly way to transition to xeriscape landscaping. Safe for honey bees, soil, and groundwater, it contains no harmful or toxic ingredients and can be applied to weeds in vegetable gardens or around fruiting vines. One gallon of this ready-to-use weed killer treats 1,000 square feet, and it also comes in a larger size to cover a greater area. Results start to show in as little as 24 hours, and no retreating is necessary.

Get the Eco Garden Pro organic weed killer at Amazon or Eco Living Solutions.

Or, DIY Your Own Organic Weed Killer 

If you prefer the DIY approach to killing weeds, you can make a weed killer using basic essentials you likely already have in your kitchen. Here’s Bob Vila’s favorite nonherbicide weed killer recipe.

In a large bowl, combine: 

  • 1 gallon of white household vinegar 
  • 1 cup of salt 
  • 1 tablespoon of dish soap 

After combining the ingredients, pour the DIY weed killer into a spray bottle or sprayer and apply. This homemade weed killer recipe will create a full gallon of foolproof organic weed killer that can be applied to large or small patches of weeds. 

If possible, try to apply this weirdly effective weeding solution when it is sunny to help dry out and shrivel the weeds. The combination of the weed killer and the sun will attack the weeds’ root systems and speed up the process.

For other ways to kill weeds without buying a weed killer, check out this list of homemade weed killer pros and cons. It details everything we like and don’t about popular DIY weed removal tactics. 

Our Verdict

Our top pick, the Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer, is less toxic than traditional formulas, while the Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder is a great multipurpose choice. Popular lawn and garden options from Roundup and Ortho weren’t listed because they didn’t meet our sustainability guidelines—each contains ingredients like glyphosate 2,4D that have harmful environmental effects.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Organic Weed Killers

Our list of recommendations is the result of an in-depth exploration of organic weed killers, which are more environmentally friendly products for killing weeds than conventional herbicides. It includes picks for specific categories so shoppers have more targeted options for their needs as well as products that come in different sizes with varying application methods for both expansive coverage and occasional spot treatment. 

Several of our recommendations are vinegar solutions of varying concentrations because vinegar kills weeds effectively without causing environmental harm. Depending on the specific weed problem, products with either 20 percent or 30 percent acetic acid will be appropriate.

What to Consider When Choosing an Organic Weed Killer

Before buying a weed killer, shoppers will want to investigate ingredients and read labels to determine whether the product will kill only specific weeds or affect all vegetation. It’s also a good idea to be mindful of the difference between organic herbicides that kill existing weeds and those that stop weed seeds from sprouting.

Pre-Emergent vs. Post-Emergent

Like chemical weed killers, organic herbicides are available in two types: pre-emergent and post-emergent. Herbicides that are pre-emergent destroy seeds or prevent them from sprouting, while the post-emergent kind kills or inhibits weeds that have already sprouted and are growing.

The difference between the two is crucial because once a pre-emergent product is sprayed on the soil, it will prevent all seeds from sprouting there—whether those of common weeds, plants you never knew were weeds, or desirable plants and flowers. While this type of spray will inhibit weed growth alongside fence lines, driveways, and patios, if any of it lands near a plot of soil intended for flowers or a vegetable garden, it’s unlikely that any seeds planted there will sprout.

Selective vs. Nonselective

A selective weed killer will destroy only specific types of weeds but not others. For example, organic herbicides developed for lawns likely target broadleaf weeds, such as chickweed and clover, but they won’t damage turf-type grasses like Bermuda grass

Nonselective weed killers will kill all vegetation—both weeds and desirable plants—so gardeners should use them with caution. If you’re trying to get rid of dandelions that have spread throughout your lawn, remember that spraying or broadcasting a nonselective weed killer will kill the grass along with the weeds. 

When it comes to natural herbicides, users have very few selective products to choose from; the majority are nonselective and designed to kill most forms of vegetation. They can be used between sidewalk cracks or patio pavers or to create fence lines but shouldn’t be used near desirable plants and flowers, especially on windy days.

Ingredients

True to form, organic weed killers will not have toxic ingredients. Shoppers looking for lawn-care items to start or maintain a garden may be surprised to find several household ingredients, such as vinegar, salt, and corn, present in some organic weed killers. Other beneficial ingredients include soaps and essential oils, such as cinnamon or clove. 

Lesser-known ingredients, like citric acid, caprylic acid (a coconut oil derivative), and D-limonene (derived from citrus fruits), also feature prominently in many organic weed killers. For added benefits, manufacturers may combine two or more of the above ingredients to control specific types of weeds.

Form

Natural weed-killing products are available in various forms, with some better suited to specific types of applications. 

  • Spray: Easy to use and offering uniform coverage, most sprays are designed for direct application to the weed’s foliage. Spraying should be avoided on windy days to avoid harming desirable plants.
  • Liquid concentrate: For those with large crops or heavy weed infestation, a liquid concentrate may be best. It can be diluted with water and easily applied over large areas with a pump-type garden sprayer.
  • Powder: Meant for broadcasting over specific areas, powder herbicides can also get carried by the wind and inadvertently kill nearby plants.
  • Salts: Products containing salt will kill plants, so be careful when using them. Salt makes soil infertile, and it can take years to leach it out. Salt-based nontoxic weed killers are often best for patio pavers or sidewalk joints rather than flower beds.

FAQs

If you’re switching from a traditional weed killer to an organic type, you may still have questions. Here are answers to some of the most frequently asked questions about organic weed killers.

Q. Will organic weed killers damage my soil? 

If they contain salt, then yes, they can. Organic herbicides that contain vinegar or other nonchemical ingredients that only stay in the soil for a few days and are less likely to cause damage

Q. Are organic weed killers completely safe and free of toxic elements?

Most organic weed killers are considered environmentally safe, but just because a product is natural or organic doesn’t mean it won’t cause headaches or other symptoms. Always read warning labels.

Q. How often can I use organic weed killers?

That depends on the product. Most sprays can be used whenever new weeds appear, and some may require two or more applications to get rid of certain types.

Q. What is the best time to spray weed killer?

For best results, apply weed killer early in the day or late in the afternoon to prevent rapid evaporation. Avoid spraying on windy days to keep the solution from drifting onto unintended areas, and try not to spray if rain is expected so the formula doesn’t get washed away before it has a chance to work.

Q. Is it better to spray weed killer wet or dry?

It’s better to spray weed killer on dry plants so the herbicide sticks instead of mixing with the moisture and running off.

Q. Should you cut weeds before spraying?

Many organic weed killers work by absorbing the solution through the leaves, so cutting them before application actually reduces the surface area available, which can reduce their efficacy. Chrissie Handley, a lawn care and gardening specialist at Online Turf—a turf, compost, and soil company—agrees. “It’s not really necessary—the weed killers generally target the plants by the root, so cutting the stems won’t increase the chances of absorbing the weed killer.” 

The post 8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-17T12:14:18-05:00
<![CDATA[Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service]]>The post Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/ace-hardware-yardrx-news/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427622Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:27:21 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Even the greenest of thumbs can struggle with common lawn issues like patches, snow mold, and pests. As an antidote to wandering a store searching for the right products and hoping that you chose correctly, lawn care subscriptions offer everything for proper yard maintenance — delivered right to your door.

Now, that convenient service, more synonymous with large chains, is available through a local hardware store. Known for providing personalized advice on home and lawn maintenance to its in-store customers, the venerable lawn and garden retailer Ace Hardware is now debuting a lawn care subscription called Ace YardRx—a natural next step on the journey to help even more homeowners work on their landscape.“We’re excited to launch Ace YardRx, a new subscription service that delivers yard care directly to our neighbors’ homes,” said Kim Lefko, Chief Marketing Officer at Ace Hardware.

How Does Ace YardRx Work?

Similar to other lawn care subscription services, the customized lawn care plan is location-based and delivered to customers throughout the growing season—spring, summer, and fall. Each box includes seasonal treatments for lawn growth and nourishment, weed prevention, and pest problems, as well as recommended application dates. Prices are given upfront along with estimated delivery dates for each box. Customers can also pick up subscription boxes in store or curbside.

To get a customized lawn care plan, customers simply create an account and enter their home address. Ace YardRx will use data such as climate, property size, and seasonal growth habits to develop a lawn care plan. Customers can further identify specific issues including insects, diseases, and fungi and filter by product preferences such as brand names, natural ingredients, or concentrates.

Ace Hardware YardRx truck loaded with supplies with man standing next to it
Photo: Ace Hardware

Curated Solutions From Local Experts 

Local Ace “YardRx-perts” identify the right products for specific regions and issues based on the data you submit. All products ship from local Ace Hardware stores, making pricing competitive and shipping free. Plus in-store experts are available to help troubleshoot or further tailor the products to specific growing zones.

Ace YardRx Takes the Guesswork Out of Lawn Care 

Available nationwide, Ace YardRx offers homeowners a lawn care prescription to treat any lawn care problems and get a fast track to a healthy, lush lawn. Simply follow each product’s recommendations for proper application. This program handles everything besides applying the products—or mowing the lawn. For that, a robot mower may be in order.

The post Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-14T14:27:21-05:00
<![CDATA[Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home]]>The post Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/outdoor-natural-disaster-protection/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427544Fri, 14 Feb 2025 13:32:34 -0500Lawn & GardenHome SafetyInteriorLandscapingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Nearly half of American homes are at severe or extreme risk of facing at least one type of climate-related natural disaster, according to the 2024 Realtor.com Housing and Climate Risk Report. This includes damage from floods, hurricane winds, wildfires, extreme heat, or hazardous air quality. Not only could this be devastating to your family and property, but it comes with a hefty price tag to repair and rebuild after a storm or other climate-related event.

Fortunately, there are several preventive measures you can take to safeguard your property so it is climate resilient. Consider pursuing the following hardscaping and landscaping projects to help with natural disaster protection.

1. Install permeable pavers.

As you add more hardscape materials like concrete patios to your yard, you can increase water runoff and erosion from the nonpermeable materials. Choosing permeable materials—which are porous so water can flow through them easily—for projects like pathways, patios, and decks can lessen runoff. 

According to the Environmental Protection Agency, such materials include pervious asphalt, interlocking pavers, pervious concrete, gravel, mulch, and plastic grid pavers, which allow rain and snowmelt to drain more easily into the soil during a storm. The ground absorbs the water, which decreases the burden on storm drains. This helps minimize water pooling and prevent flooding and water damage, especially during and after heavy rainfall. 

Grey permeable pavers with green grass peaking through
Photo: Douglas Sacha/Moment via Getty Images.

2. Design a landscaping windbreak.

The selection and placement of natural materials in your yard can help protect your property from strong winds. Referred to as landscaping windbreaks, these efforts can provide effective protection when the wind speed increases. A windbreak can reduce wind speed for a distance of as much as 30 times the windbreak’s height. Interestingly, windbreaks also lower heating costs by reducing the wind chill, or cooling effects of wind, on your house. 

To create an effective windbreak, you’ll need to identify the best trees, bushes, and shrubs for your local climate. The best foliage for a windbreak has low crowns that can slow wind speeds close to the ground. A mix of evergreens and deciduous trees is an effective option, and might include Eastern red cedar (Juniperus virginiana), Arizona cypress (Hesperocyparis arizonica), Ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), Sycamore (Platanus occidentalis), and Chinese elm (Ulmus parvifolia).

Plant the greenery together in a clump to block wind from the ground up to the height of the trees. The best place to plant a windbreak is one or two tree heights away from your house on the side where winds are worst. The larger the tree, the farther you should plant it from the house. Never plant trees near power lines. Dense trees and shrubs, combined with a wall, fence, or earth berm, can stave off or lift the wind all the way over the house.

3. Build a retaining wall.

Consider building a durable retaining wall to protect your home from flooding. Retaining walls are typically constructed out of reinforced concrete blocks, gabion, stacked stones, brick, rammed earth, or steel. The wall creates raised sections of the yard that serve as a strong barrier. By redirecting rainwater away from your property, a retaining wall helps keep flood water at bay to prevent basement leaks and other types of water damage to your home. 

Retaining walls also can prevent soil erosion. They stabilize slopes and help keep soil in place; eroded soil is a significant contributor to flooding, especially during heavy rain. By stopping erosion, the wall minimizes the amount of sediment that could block drainage systems or make flood conditions worse.

Retaining walls are a good investment overall. In addition to helping with long-term water management in your yard, their design can add an attractive hardscaping feature that enhances curb appeal. Given the complexity of building a retaining wall, it’s advisable to hire a pro to handle the job.

Brown stone retaining wall with plants in backyard
Photo: fotolinchen/E+ via Getty Images.

4. Create defensible space through firescaping.

Another way that vegetation in your yard can play a role in protecting your home is through firescaping. This approach involves designing fire-resilient landscaping around the perimeter of your home to reduce risks from wildfires in what’s referred to as a defensible space. 

Defensible space consists of multiple layers, or zones, that make it easier for firefighters to put out a blaze. 

  • Zone 0: This zone consists of the nearest 5 feet that surround your home; it should be free of dead or dying plants and any combustible items like wood piles or flammable outdoor furniture. Choose hardscaping materials such as pea gravel or decorative rocks, as opposed to combustible mulch or bark for shrub beds.
  • Zone 1: This is the area within 30 feet of your house that allows firefighters to tackle the fire. In addition to close hardscaping, plant low-growing and less-dense foundation shrubs, such as azaleas and boxwoods, and keep trees away from your house. 
  • Zone 2: This area extends 100 feet from your home and should include trees and shrubs that are thinned out, along with wide paths that create firebreaks. 

5. Add a rain garden.

Another way to minimize flooding is to build a rain garden in your yard, which is a garden strategically designed to collect and filter stormwater runoff from roofs, driveways, and other impervious surfaces. A rain garden design includes layers of soil, mulch, and native plants with deep root systems that help slow the flow of water. This way, the water seeps into the ground rather than pooling in the yard, overwhelming storm drains, or soaking areas by the house that can damage the foundation. Trees, grasses, ground covers, and shrubs are all part of an effective—and attractive—rain garden. 

The post Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-14T13:32:34-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers]]>Sharpening hedge trimmers regularly will keep your plants tidy and healthy. Follow these easy steps to save the expense of a pro sharpening.

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-sharpen-hedge-trimmers/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=66331Thu, 13 Feb 2025 16:27:56 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenRepair & MaintenanceToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If they’re properly sharpened, power hedge trimmers are a great time saver over manual trimmers for maintaining neat hedges and other landscaping. If your power trimmers are continually getting jammed and are chewing instead of slicing through branches, however, it’s probably time to sharpen the blades.

As is the case with lawn mower blades, knives, and other sharp implements, you can bring trimmers in for professional sharpening, but you can save money by handling this job yourself. Follow the simple steps below on how to sharpen hedge trimmers.

Why It’s Important to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Sharpening your hedge trimmers allows you to make quick work of that pruning job, plus it contributes to the health of your plants. “Letting your trimmers go dull is like trying to cut steak with a butter knife,” says Bryan Clayton, a longtime landscaper and CEO of GreenPal, a company that matches homeowners with landscaping services. He says with dull blades, “You’ll end up tearing your hedges rather than cutting them cleanly, which can lead to unhealthy plants prone to disease.”

RELATED: AUDIO: Bob Vila Explains How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Best Power Hedge Trimmer

Black+Decker hedge trimmer
Photo: Lowe’s

Black+Decker 20V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer, $64.98 at Lowe’s. This Black+Decker tool can cut through branches 3/4 inch in diameter. It has a padded front handle and enough battery power to trim up to 3,000 square feet. 

To discover other top-performing tools in this category, read our tested guide to the best hedge trimmers,

How often should you sharpen your hedge trimmers?

While you don’t need to sharpen your hedge trimmers often, you’ll need to give them a little TLC every now and then. “A good rule of thumb is to sharpen them at the start of the season, then check them every 50 hours of use,” Clayton says. It’s worth the time, he says, since “dull blades make your job harder.”

There are telltale signs that your hedge trimmer has dull blades:

  • Frequent jams: If branches and foliage are getting jammed in between the hedge trimmer’s teeth, it’s likely because the blades aren’t sharp enough to cut through the material.
  • Ragged cuts: Your hedge trimmer should cut cleanly through twigs and branches. If they’re chewing through them and leaving ragged cuts, then the blades are dull

Hedge trimmers and materials needed to sharpen blades.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Types of Hedge Trimmers

Power hedge trimmers come in several types, including gas, corded, and cordless electric models. Whether you own gas hedge trimmers, electric hedge trimmers, or battery-operated hedge trimmers, you’ll use the same process to sharpen the blades.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Project Overview

Working Time: 1 hour
Total Time: 1 hour
Skill Level: Intermediate
Estimated Cost: $10 to $15

Before You Begin

Unplugging the battery from an orange hedge trimmer with work gloves on.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Sharpening a hedge trimmer involves working around blades and filing, which can send metal shavings airborne. Take the required safety precautions before getting started. “Wear gloves and eye protection,” says Clayton. “Always unplug electric trimmers before you start, and for both types, make sure the trimmer is securely clamped down or held in a vise.” If you are maintaining battery-powered hedge trimmers, remove the battery.

How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers the Right Way

Step 1: Clean the trimmer blades.

Cleaning the trimmer blades on hedge trimmer with solvent.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Hedge trimmer blades often end up clogged with sap and pieces of branches and leaves. Start by removing any debris that’s caught in the trimmer’s teeth. Spray the blade with a little WD-40 to break down any sap that’s stuck to the blade. Give it a few minutes for the solvent to work its magic, then use a cloth to wipe the blades clean.

Step 2: Misalign the trimmer blades.

If the blades are aligned over top of each other, you’ll need to misalign them to expose all the edges so you can access each one with the file. Use a flathead screwdriver to reposition the blades so that each one is accessible.

Step 3: Sharpen with a flat file.

Sharpening hedge trimmer blades with flat file while wearing gloves.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Using your flat file, sharpen each blade individually.

  • File in the direction of the cutting edge only. Don’t use a back-and-forth sawing motion, since a flat file is designed to remove material in one direction only.
  • Filing using the correct angle is crucial to getting a sharp edge. Check your trimmer’s manual for the proper angle for the specific hedge trimmer.
  • File with care. Removing too much metal from the blades can weaken them, making the trimmer unusable.
  • Be consistent with the number of strokes you make on each blade to ensure they’re a consistent length when done. “Just focus on sharpening the top edge of each blade, maintaining the original angle, and whatever you do, don’t touch the flat bottom side,” Clayton says. “That’s your guide for keeping the cut accurate.” After sharpening one tooth, move onto the next until you’ve sharpened each one.

Step 4: Use a whetstone to remove burrs.

Removing burrs from hedge trimmers with whetstone.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Run a whetstone over the sharpened blades to remove any burrs that formed during sharpening. Remember, the blades cut by sliding against each other like a pair of scissors, so removing burrs that can interfere with this action is crucial.

Step 5: Spray with resin solvent.

Sharpening your hedge trimmers also removes any corrosion protection that was on the blades. Before you put the hedge trimmers back into service, you’ll need to restore that protection by applying a resin solvent to the blades. Spray the solvent onto the blades and wipe off any excess resin.

Final Thoughts

While learning how to sharpen hedge trimmer blades isn’t difficult, there is some risk to doing it yourself. Over-sharpening the blades can weaken them, making your hedge trimmer unusable. “Sharpening hedge trimmers isn’t rocket science, but it does require a steady hand and a bit of know-how,” Clayton says. “If in doubt, taking them to a professional isn’t just playing it safe; it’s ensuring your tools last longer and perform better.”

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-13T16:27:56-05:00
<![CDATA[Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers]]>Feed grass the good stuff for a deep green lawn that resists diseases and pests with the best organic lawn fertilizer. This buyer’s guide has top picks.

The post Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-organic-lawn-fertilizer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=159816Wed, 12 Feb 2025 12:37:42 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Along with mowing and watering, applying organic lawn fertilizers is an important part of creating a lush, healthy lawn. But while keeping your grass the right height and ensuring it gets enough to drink are relatively simple, choosing the proper natural lawn fertilizer is much more complicated. Factors like soil acidity, grass type, and time of year necessitate being somewhat selective about the lawn care products you choose.

To aid you in your efforts, we reached out to a lawn care expert for advice and researched dozens of good fertilizers before choosing the versatile and nonburning The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer as our top pick. Still, depending on the season or specific species of grass you have, another pick might be more appropriate. Read on for our reviews of some of the best organic lawn fertilizers and helpful tips for selecting the right one.

  1. BEST OVERALL: The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer 
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  3. BEST FOR P & K DEFICIENCY: Scotts Natural Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  4. BEST FOR N DEFICIENCY: Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer
    Jump to Review 
  5. BEST WITH NO PHOSPHORUS: Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR DARK-GREEN LAWN: Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer
    Jump to Review 
  7. BEST FOR FALL: Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer
    Jump to Review 
  8. BEST ORGANIC LIQUID: GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer
    Jump to Review 
The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizers Options
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy Organic Lawn Fertilizer

Choosing the best organic grass fertilizer requires an understanding of the lawn’s current condition. Is it generally healthy and simply needs regular feeding? Or does it display a nutrient deficiency of some kind? The type of grass will also determine which fertilizer to use. For example, fertilizers for St. Augustine grass will deliver different levels of nutrients than those for Bermuda grass. 

Before buying and applying fertilizer, it’s smart to perform a soil test to identify your soil’s pH and nutrient content. These results will help you determine which organic natural fertilizer to apply as part of your personal DIY lawn-care program

Organic Lawn Fertilizers Comparison Chart

Product NameNPK RatioQuantityCoverage
The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer 7-1-240 pounds5,600 square feet
Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food10-0-117 or 51 pounds5,000 or 15,000 square feet
Scotts Natural Lawn Food11-2-229.1 pounds4,000 square feet
Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer 13-1-21 gallon (makes 256 gallons)Up to 60,000 square feet
Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster8-0-030 pounds5,000 square feet
Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer6-4-036 pounds2,500 square feet 
Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer8-0-530 pounds5,000 square feet
GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer0.3-0-0.61, 5, 55, or 275 gallon(s)1,000 square feet per gallon

Our Top Picks

Each organic lawn treatment on our list of top picks is made from quality ingredients and provides essential nutrients for growing new grass or helping an existing lawn thrive. 

Best Overall

The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: The Andersons 7-1-2 Innova Organic Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Minimal dust granules
  • Suitable for many types of grass
  • Formula won’t cause fertilizer burn

What We Don’t Like

  • Only comes in 40-pound bags

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 7-1-2
  • Quantity: 40 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,600 square feet

The Andersons Innova organic fertilizer is a slow-release formula that earned our top spot for its versatile 7-1-2 NPK ratio and amino acids that provide extended feeding without burning. It supplies a high percentage of highly digestible carbon to support beneficial soil microbes for a healthier growing environment. The OMRI (Organic Materials Review Institute)-listed fertilizer contains no biosolids, manure, composted waste products, or animal parts, making it an especially eco-friendly option. We also appreciate how little dust is produced during application, minimizing respiratory irritation that causes coughing and sneezing. 

But more than our own comfort, we love this formula for what it does for our lawn. Even with accidental overapplication, it doesn’t cause turf burn and is safe to use adjacent to sensitive waterways and around kids and pets. Though this is an excellent all-around fertilizer for lawn grass, it only comes in 40-pound bags that cover up to 5,600 square feet each, which might be excessive for some.

Get The Andersons organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon

Best Bang for the Buck

Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Child- and pet-friendly lawn fertilizer
  • Grass treatments last up to 10 weeks
  • Plant- and animal-derived ingredients for added versatility

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for lawns requiring potassium

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 10-0-1 
  • Quantity: 17 or 51 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

Jonathan Green’s organic lawn care fertilizer food is a granular fertilizer made with a complex of plant and animal proteins, including feather meal, soybean meal, molasses, and wheat middlings. The 10-0-1 NPK slow-release formula delivers a boost of nitrogen plus iron to grow dark green grass for up to 10 weeks. 

One of the things we like best about this budget-friendly pick is its safety profile. Unlike synthetic fertilizers, this product poses no risk of burning the grass, even if overapplied. Kids and pets can play on it immediately, and it can be used for both cold- and warm-season grasses and applied during spring, summer, or fall. The Jonathan Green fertilizer comes in two sizes: a 17-pound bag for up to 5,000 square feet of coverage and a 51-pound bag that feeds up to 15,000 square feet of lawn.

Get the Jonathan Green organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Walmart, or Johnathan Green

Best for P & K Deficiency

Scotts Natural Lawn Food

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Scotts Natural Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Gentle enough for freshly seeded or sodded grass
  • OMRI-listed and comes from natural sources
  • Lawn is safe immediately after application

What We Don’t Like

  • Relatively limited coverage area

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 11-2-2
  • Quantity: 29.1 pounds
  • Coverage: 4,000 square feet

New and struggling lawns sometimes require a bit more phosphorus and potassium to boost root development and ensure drought tolerance, and with its 11-2-2 NPK content, the Scotts natural lawn food offers both. Made from natural sources like bone meal, blood meal, and meat meal, the formula is excellent for maintaining lawns across seasons and is suitable for all grass types, including zoysia grass

The manufacturer recommends feeding up to four times through the growing season at 6- to 8-week intervals, and you should start seeing results within those first few weeks. Since the 29.1-pound bag only covers 4,000 square feet, you’ll probably need a few packages to make it through the year.

Get the Scotts organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Scotts.

Best for N Deficiency

Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Urban Farm Fertilizers Liquid Lawn Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Concentrated formula covers up to 60,000 square feet
  • Iron helps produce deep green grass
  • Includes animal- and plant-based ingredients

What We Don’t Like

  • Recommended application frequency is 2 to 3 times per month

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 13-1-2 
  • Quantity: 1 gallon (makes 256 gallons)
  • Coverage: Up to 60,000 square feet

This super-concentrated liquid lawn fertilizer from Urban Farm Fertilizers boasts 13 percent nitrogen plus iron to help the grass grow and turn deep green at the beginning of spring. This innovative option goes beyond traditional picks by incorporating a blend of hydroponic-grade nutrients, mycorrhizae, humic acid, bacteria, enzymes, and minerals. Its 13-1- NPK content promotes rapid greening and growth for nutrient-deficient lawns. 

The ingredients in this combination organic fertilizer come from bat guano, sea kelp, worm casings, and more, creating a concentrated formula that makes up 256 gallons of fertilizer to feed up to 60,000 square feet. However, the manufacturer does recommend you apply it two to three times each month, so you may end up needing more than one bottle to make it through the season. For best results, apply in the evening using a boom sprayer or hose. Dilution instructions for each option are on the back of the bottle.

Get the Urban Farm Fertilizers organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Walmart, or The Urban Farm

Best with No Phosphorus

Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Espoma EOLB30 Organic Lawn Booster Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Includes calcium and sulfur for improved grass health
  • Promotes disease resistance
  • Made from feather meal, pasteurized poultry manure, and gypsum

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for lawns requiring potassium or phosphorus

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 8-0-0
  • Quantity: 30 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 square feet

This lawn fertilizer for spring uses a moderate dose of slow-release nitrogen and a boost of calcium for deep greening and healthy growth with limited nutrient application. It has an NPK ratio of 8-0-0, 3 percent calcium, and 1 percent sulfur, and is made from feather meal, pasteurized poultry manure, and gypsum. Available in 30-pound bags, it can feed up to 5,000 square feet of lawn.

We love this pick for its ability to provide a sustained supply of nitrogen over time. This allows it to encourage the growth of thicker, greener grass and reduces the frequency of mowing required. It also won’t cause turf burn and is safe for people and pets. You can apply it to newly seeded and sodded areas in early spring to get a good crop of green grass growing. 

Get the Espoma spring organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or Walmart.

Best for Dark-Green Lawn

Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Milorganite 0636 Organic Nitrogen Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fortified with iron for a dark green lawn
  • Feeds for up to 10 weeks
  • Helps establish a healthy room system 

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited coverage area of 2,500 square feet

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 6-4-0 
  • Quantity: 36 pounds
  • Coverage: 2,500 square feet

In the early 1900s, the City of Milwaukee began reclaiming its wastewater on a massive scale and using it to make for-profit products. The name Milorganite comes from Milwaukee organic Nitrogen (nite), and the brand’s 6-4-0 slow-release nitrogen granular has had a consistent spot in the sheds of many home and professional landscapers throughout the many decades since its creation. Made from nutrient-rich heat-dried microbes that have digested the organic matter in wastewater, the resulting product is 85 percent organic matter. It encourages deep root development and can create healthy grass growth for up to 10 weeks after application. 

In addition to nitrogen and phosphorus, this fertilizer contains 2.5 percent iron to encourage vibrantly green grass. As one of the most versatile picks on our list, it also makes a great garden fertilizer safe for flowers, vegetables, shrubs, and trees. As much as we love this pick and the story behind it, a 36-pound bag only feeds 2,500 square feet, so you’ll probably want to buy more than one bag. 

Get the Milorganite organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Target

Best for Fall

Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Espoma EOFW30 Organic Fall Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Specifically formulated for winterizing lawns
  • Works well as a Bermuda grass fertilizer 
  • Nonburning, even if overapplied

What We Don’t Like

  • Not good for lawns needing phosphorus

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 8-0-5 
  • Quantity: 30 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 square feet

Looking for a way to prepare a lawn for a harsh winter and promote healthy spring growth? This 8-0-5 fertilizer from Espoma is designed to be used between September and November. It has extra potassium that helps lawns recover from summer stress while enhancing winter hardiness. 

This slow-release formula is made from a blend of high-quality natural and organic ingredients, ensuring consistency and quality in every application. It’s nonburning, guaranteeing overfertilization isn’t an issue, and it’s suitable for all lawn types, including those that have recently been seeded or sodded. It is, however, best to apply this product to a dry lawn that has recently been mowed. A 30-pound bag will feed up to 5,000 feet. 

Get the Espoma fall organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or Walmart

Best Organic Liquid

GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer

 The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • OMRI-listed for organic food production
  • Helps prevent having a drought-stressed lawn
  • Works with other fertilizers for enhanced performance

What We Don’t Like

  • Smell can be offputting, especially if used indoors

Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 0.3-0-0.6
  • Quantity: 1, 5, 55, or 275 gallon(s)
  • Coverage: 1,000 square feet per gallon

This organic kelp fertilizer from GS Plant Foods is dependent on one hero ingredient: Ascophyllum nodosum extract. Touted as one of nature’s miracle plant foods, the seaweed fortifies plants of all types, making it suitable for everything from lawns to flower beds, vegetable gardens, and houseplants. So long as its strong smell doesn’t bother you, you can even use it to extend the life of cut flowers. 

The product comes in a 1-gallon bottle and is designed to be diluted with water at a ratio of 1 ounce of fertilizer to 1 gallon of water. The NPK ratio is 0.3-0-0.6, so nutrient levels are low, allowing this product to be combined with other types of fertilizers if desired. It also contains trace amounts of sulfur, magnesium, calcium, sodium, boron, iron, manganese, copper, zinc, and other carbohydrates and should be applied when temperatures are low to encourage nutrient uptake. 

Get the GS Plant Foods organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or GS Plant Foods.

Or, DIY Your Own Organic Lawn Fertilizer

While there are plenty of commercially produced organic lawn fertilizers on the market, it’s also possible to make a homemade fertilizer for lawns that delivers excellent results. A good fertilizer for grass should be about 50 percent organic matter and plant-based material, such as composted manure, garden clippings, decomposed leaves, sphagnum peat moss, sawdust, wood chips, or even seaweed. The other half of the fertilizer blend should contain slow-release sources of nitrogen such as blood meal, fish meal, cottonseed meal, feather meal, kelp meal, or soybean meal. 

Once you have gathered the necessary materials for the homemade lawn fertilizer mix, start blending them in equal parts in a bucket or large container. Make sure to mix them thoroughly so it’s easy to apply everything evenly on your lawn. 

Jump to Our Top Picks

Our Verdict

We love The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer for its versatility and quality organic formula. Other popular lawn fertilizers, such as Scotts Turf Builder, Pennington UltraGreen Weed & Feed, and Spectracide Weed & Feed, are effective but do not meet our sustainability guidelines. We cannot recommend them in our list of the best organic lawn fertilizers due to their potentially harmful ingredients and negative impact on the environment. 

How We Chose the Best Organic Lawn Fertilizers

We created this guide by drawing on our extensive experience covering home and garden products and comprehensive product research. We considered dozens of fertilizer options, primarily focusing on the following considerations before making our recommendations:

  • Organic vs. inorganic: We only considered organic fertilizers for this guide since they are capable of top-notch performance without negative environmental impact. 
  • NPK ratio: Since different lawns have different macronutrient needs, we included formulations with various NPK (nitrogen/phosphorus/potassium) ratios.
  • Value: Plant fertilizers vary widely in type and quantity. We ensured that each recommended product offered excellent value, regardless of the format. 

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer

When choosing between the best organic lawn fertilizers on our list, consider type, ease of application, and the desired effect.

Type

Organic fertilizer ingredients fall into three types: animal-based, plant-based, and mineral-based. However, most products contain a combination of these types to deliver the best possible balance of major and minor nutrients. Some products may only offer a single ingredient or a blend of ingredients from a single type. 

Animal-based fertilizers include blood meal, bone meal, feather meal, fish meal, and various manures. These products slowly break down over time, providing lawns and garden plants with season-long benefits.

Plant-based fertilizer ingredients include alfalfa meal, cottonseed meal, kelp meal, soybean meal, and compost. Soil microbes convert these materials into plant food much more quickly than animal products. They provide an immediate impact, often within days or weeks after application.

Mineral-based fertilizer ingredients like sulfur, dolomitic limestone, gypsum, greensand, and rock phosphate are naturally occurring concentrated forms of plant-food elements. They boost trace nutrient levels and eliminate deficiencies in the soil.

Liquid vs. Granular

Organic fertilizers, both liquid and granular, work with the naturally occurring microbes in the soil. When the fertilizer is applied to the soil, bacteria and fungi consume the natural ingredients and release the nutrients at a measured rate and in a form that is readily available to plants. 

The difference between liquid and dry organic fertilizers is in the rate at which the soil consumes them. Dry granular formulations, which are applied using a fertilizer spreader, break down slowly and feed lawns over weeks or months. Liquid organic fertilizers deliver a quick boost of nutrients and work faster due to their minute particle size and embedded moisture. 

NPK Ratio 

Three elements make up the major nutrients that lawns and plants need for lush, green growth: 

  • Nitrogen (N) promotes green color and leafy growth.
  • Phosphorus (P) stimulates deep root development. 
  • Potassium (K) boosts vigor and disease resistance.

Nitrogen is quite volatile. The amount not used by the lawn dissipates and must be regularly replenished. Phosphorus and potassium persist in the soil, so they are not required in such large quantities. On average, organic lawn fertilizer offers two to three times or more N compared to how much P and K are in the mix.

NPK ratios on fertilizer labels show the amount of each element present in the product as a percentage of the total weight, always in the order N-P-K. For instance, a product with a ratio of 11-2-2 contains 11 percent N, 2 percent P, and 2 percent K. Other ingredients and any additional nutrients will also be listed on the label.

Desired Effect

After a soil test (see the tips for using organic lawn fertilizer section below), it’s essential to factor the condition of the lawn into the fertilizer choice. Phosphorus is already sufficiently present in the soil in many areas. If your soil test shows levels are already high enough, you can help prevent pollution by not adding more. 

If the grass is robust with dense foliage and deep green color, choose a fertilizer with a moderate to high amount of nitrogen (10 percent or greater) and little to no phosphorus and potassium. As the lawn approaches the dormant season in late summer and fall, apply fertilizer with a lower nitrogen ratio and slightly more potassium. 

If your lawn is yellow or remains dull even when all three major nutrients are properly supplied, your grass may be deficient in iron. For a deeper green, choose a lawn fertilizer with supplemental iron.

Tips for Using Organic Lawn Fertilizer

There’s more to an effective organic lawn fertility program than simply applying fertilizer on a timed schedule. Don’t waste time and money by blindly applying fertilizer. First, test the soil, either with an over-the-counter testing kit from a local garden center or by sending a sample to your state’s Cooperative Extension Service for analysis. Then, use the results to map out a plan of action. 

The first step should be to adjust the pH of the soil as indicated by test results. Establish the proper soil pH, between 5.8 and 7.2 depending on the grass species, to ensure that the grass can efficiently pull nutrients out of the soil. Lime raises the pH, while sulfur and aluminum sulfate lower it. Once the acidity is ideal, proceed with the necessary fertilizer application—and remember to mulch grass clippings. 

  • Use soil test results to determine fertility needs.
  • Apply lime as necessary to maintain the proper soil pH and maximize fertilizer efficiency.
  • Mulch grass clippings and leave them on the lawn to reduce fertilizer requirements by as much as 30 percent.

FAQs

The best organic fertilizer can help keep lawns vigorous and healthy. For more information on using fertilizers, check out the answers to these frequently asked questions.

Q. How do I know what fertilizer to use on my lawn?

Before purchasing a fertilizer, buy an over-the-counter soil test kit or send a soil sample to your county’s Cooperative Extension Service for analysis. Use the soil test results to guide fertilizer choice and application.

Q. When should I apply fertilizer to my lawn?

Grass will take up fertilizer throughout the growing season. The best times to apply it are when active growth begins in spring and again in midsummer as well as prior to winter to increase hardiness.

Q. How much organic lawn fertilizer can I use? 

While organics are typically labeled as “nonburning,” excess fertilizer is a source of pollution. Follow soil test results and the instructions on the label of the specific product you are using.

Q. Can you overfertilize your lawn with organic fertilizer?

Generally speaking, it’s unlikely you will cause fertilizer burn with an organic fertilizer. However, applying excess product is bad for the environment and your wallet. 

Q. What are the disadvantages of organic fertilizer?

The disadvantages of organic fertilizer are that it may cost more yet have lower levels of nutrients. Still, organic fertilizer has advantages like helping create healthier soil and providing nutrients at a more consistent rate. 

Q. How often should I apply organic fertilizer to my lawn?

The frequency with which you should apply organic fertilizer to your lawn depends on the product you’re using and the conditions of the soil. Generally speaking, however, you will need to fertilize anywhere from a few times a month to once every few months. To get the best results for your lawn, perform a soil test and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. 

Q. What time of day is best to fertilize a lawn?

We spoke to Ryan Farley, the CEO of LawnStarter, an online marketplace that links you up with affordable lawn care services in your area, and he had this to say: “I tend to recommend fertilizing in the late afternoon or even a bit before sunset to avoid the hottest part of the day and give your fertilizer a chance to get into your soil overnight.” 

Q. How long does organic lawn fertilizer take to work?

While organic lawn fertilizer starts to get to work as soon as it’s applied, it will likely be at least a few days or even a couple of weeks before you start to notice its effects. 

The post Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T12:37:42-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees]]>The best fertilizers for palm trees provide healthy doses of the right nutrients to prevent fronds from turning brown or yellow. See our list of top picks.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-palm-trees/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=230437Wed, 12 Feb 2025 10:11:54 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Palm trees are notorious for the tropical touch they add to a garden landscape. Though easy to maintain once established, they require adequate sunlight, water, and the proper fertilizer. If these needs aren’t met, a palm tree’s fronds will begin to curl or yellow.

Gardeners can keep fronds lush and green by supplying a fertilizer with a healthy dose of nitrogen and potassium, and a low amount of phosphorus. Palm trees also benefit from micronutrients such as manganese, magnesium, and iron. Our favorite is the Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed thanks to its easy to use and long-lasting formula. There are many options to weed through, but we’ve done the work and found some of the best fertilizers for palm trees.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food
  3. BEST SPIKES: Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes
  4. BEST ORGANIC: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend
  5. BEST GRANULATED: Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food
  6. BEST WATER-SOLUBLE: JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25
  7. HONORABLE MENTION: Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12
The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Options
Photo: istockphoto.com

Product Comparison

TypeNPK RatioProduct Size
Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant FoodGranular8-2-124.5 pounds
Miracle-Gro Palm Tree FoodGranular8-4-820 pounds
Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container SpikesSpikes16-2-630 spikes
Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic BlendDry organic matter5-4-64 pounds
Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant FoodGranular4-2-44 pounds
JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25Water-soluble16-5-251.5 pounds
Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12Granular12-4-124 pounds

Our Top Picks

What is the best palm tree fertilizer? Let’s look at some of the best food for palm trees. When used as directed, these products will help palm trees thrive.

Best Overall

Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy to apply
  • Contains the proper micro- and macronutrients
  • Reapply as little as every 3 months
  • Works for container-grown and in-ground trees

What We Don’t Like

  • Overuse can lead to plant burns

Gardeners looking for a product with the right blend of nutrients in an easy-to-use bottle will appreciate Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food. It provides an NPK of 8-2-12 with magnesium, manganese, and iron to support fronds so they won’t yellow or curl.

Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed comes in a convenient container with a spout. To use the product, shake it around the drip line of the palm tree, lightly work it into the soil, and then water. Gardeners can use this product every 3 months.

This fertilizer works for palms in the ground or container-grown varieties. The only downside is that it can potentially cause plant burns if overused.

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 8-2-12
  • Product size: 4.5 pounds

Get the Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed fertilizer for palm trees at Amazon, Lowe’s or Tractor Supply Co.

Best Bang for the Buck

Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • 1 bag provides 15 feedings
  • Contains necessary nutrients for a healthy tree and fronds
  • Inexpensive
  • Easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Need to apply more frequently compared to other fertilizers

While moderately priced palm tree foods are abundant, Miracle-Gro’s Palm Tree Food is especially great for budget-conscious palm tree lovers. This fertilizer delivers approximately 15 feedings to a palm tree. Since it needs reapplication only every 6 weeks, one bag lasts a long time.

The Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food packs an NPK ratio of 8-4-8 and contains manganese, magnesium, and iron. It’s easy to use: Apply the fertilizer evenly to the soil under the palm’s branches, and lightly work it in the ground.

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 8-4-8
  • Product size: 20 pounds

Get the Miracle-Gro Tree Food fertilizer for palm trees at Lowe’s or Tractor Supply Co.

Best Spikes

Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-use spikes
  • Lasts for 2 months
  • Eliminates mess and fertilizer runoff

What We Don’t Like

  • Suitable only for container-grown palm trees

Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Spikes are hard to beat for gardeners with container-grown palm trees. They are easy to use, release nutrients slowly, and have an NPK ratio of 16-2-6.

To use Jobe’s plant food, insert the spikes in the palm tree’s pot between the tree trunk and the edge of the container. The number of spikes inserted depends on the container size, ranging from two to six. Replenish spikes every 2 months.

Jobe’s also makes a fertilizer spike for palm trees planted in the ground. These spikes have a slightly different NPK ratio, are larger, and should be used only twice per year.

Product Specs

  • Type: Spikes
  • NPK ratio: 16-2-6
  • Product size: 30 spikes

Get the Jobe’s fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

Best Organic

Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Organic and non-GMO
  • Contains microbes to improve soil health
  • Gentle 5-4-6 formula won’t burn plants
  • Easy to apply

What We Don’t Like

  • May have a slightly unpleasant smell

Dr. Earth packs a great mix of nutrients and microbes for gardeners who are more interested in organic products. The formula features an NPK ratio of 5-4-6 with sulfur and magnesium. This fertilizer is ideal for palm trees, plumeria, hibiscus, and other tropical plants.

For planted palm trees, apply this fertilizer every 2 months—use ½ to ¾ cups of fertilizer for every foot of tree height. Mix the fertilizer into the ground under the tree’s drip line. Fertilize container-grown palms every 2 months by adding 2 tablespoons of fertilizer for every 6 inches of pot diameter.

Product Specs

  • Type: Dry organic matter
  • NPK ratio: 5-4-6
  • Product size: 4 pounds

Get the Dr. Earth fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

Best Granulated

Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food
Photo: lowes.com

What We Like

  • Organic fertilizer with environmentally friendly ingredients
  • Gentle NPK won’t burn palm trees
  • Easy to use for planted and container-grown palms
  • Contains a mix of microorganisms for soil health

What We Don’t Like

  • Large trees require a lot of fertilizer
  • May have an unpleasant, organic smell

Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food provides the ideal NPK ratio and can boost soil health. This fertilizer contains Jobe’s Biozome, a unique blend of bacteria, fungi, and archaea, encouraging palm trees to absorb nutrients more quickly. It has an NPK ratio of 4-2-4.

To use this fertilizer, gardeners need to measure their palm tree’s longest frond. For example, a tree with a 2-foot frond will need 1 cup of fertilizer, while a tree with a 6-foot frond will need 11 cups of fertilizer. Gardeners should evenly work the correct amount into the soil under the tree’s canopy. This fertilizer also works for container-grown palm trees.

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 4-2-4
  • Product size: 4 pounds

Get the Jobe’s Organics fertilizer for palm trees at Amazon.

Best Water-Soluble

JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Fast delivery of nutrients
  • Easy-to-mix powder
  • Contains macro- and micronutrients

What We Don’t Like

  • Easy to overuse
  • Needs to be reapplied every 7 to 10 days

JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food mixes with water and goes around the palm’s base to deliver nutrients quickly. The NPK of this fertilizer is 16-5-25. It also contains micronutrients such as magnesium and sulfur.

Gardeners can apply Jack’s Classic Palm Food every 7 to 10 days during the growing season. It’s ideal for the following palm varieties: Date, Royal, Queen, Majesty, Kentia, and Lady.

Since this fertilizer is highly concentrated, take care not to overuse it. Using too much product or applying it too often can cause adverse effects such as burnt or yellowing fronds.

Product Specs

  • Type: Water-soluble
  • NPK ratio: 16-5-25
  • Product size: 1.5 pounds

Get JR Peters fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

Honorable Mention

Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12

 The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Contains 7 beneficial micronutrients
  • Lasts up to 4 months
  • Works for landscaped and container-grown palms
  • Simple application

What We Don’t Like

  • Can get expensive for fertilizing large palm trees

Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12 is one of the best fertilizers for palm trees because it’s versatile and long lasting. This granular fertilizer is a slow-release formula, leaching nutrients into the soil for up to 4 months. It contains an NPK of 12-4-12 with seven added micronutrients, including manganese, magnesium, and iron.

Planted palms will need 1 cup of fertilizer per 3 feet of tree, not to exceed 3 cups. Spread the fertilizer across the soil at the tree’s drip line. Potted palms receive amounts based on container size, with doses ranging from a ½ teaspoon to ⅜ cup.

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 12-4-12
  • Product size: 4 pounds

Get the Carl Pool fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

Our Verdict

The best fertilizer for palm trees provides the nutrients palms need but meets a gardener’s needs for cost, convenience, and personal preference. Our top pick for the best palm fertilizer is Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed fertilizer for palm trees. It’s easy to use; contains the ideal NPK ratio; and contains manganese, magnesium, and iron for healthy palm fronds. Our budget pick, Miracle-Gro Tree Food fertilizer for palm trees, provides one palm tree with an average of 15 feedings and needs to be reapplied only every 6 weeks.

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees

Palm trees are finicky when they don’t receive proper nutrients, causing their fronds to yellow and curl. We considered their unique nutrient needs and looked for fertilizers with higher ratios of nitrogen and potassium rather than phosphorus. This balance of macronutrients helps a palm tree maintain lush green fronds and supports growth.

Once we found products with the proper macronutrient blend, we looked for micronutrient content, ease of use, and price. Next, we narrowed our choices by searching for the best palm tree food in several categories based on price and type of fertilizer. And since palms can grow in containers or in the ground, we looked for options that work in both scenarios.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Palm Trees
Palm trees require a unique blend of macronutrients and micronutrients to thrive. Gardeners can provide these nutrients through granular, water-soluble, or spike fertilizers. These fertilizers deliver nutrients to the soil, which palm trees can absorb through their root system. Here’s what to look for when choosing the best palm fertilizer.

Type

There are a few forms of palm tree fertilizer, with liquid, water-soluble, granular, and spike being the most common. The difference between them is how they’re applied and how long they work.

  • Liquid: Liquid fertilizer comes premixed in concentrated or ready-to-pour containers. Users must dilute concentrated liquid fertilizer with water before adding it to the plant’s soil.
  • Water-soluble: Water-soluble fertilizers are highly concentrated and come in a fine powder. The powder is added to water to dissolve before use.
  • Granular: Granular fertilizers come in hard pellets that gardeners can work into the soil. Granular fertilizer is typically a slow-release type, providing nutrients to the plant for a longer time than liquid or water-soluble products do.
  • Spikes: For gardeners who like to “set it and forget it,” spike fertilizer is the way to go. Place these fertilizer sticks in damp soil around the base of the tree to release nutrients slowly into the soil.

NPK Ratio

Like humans and animals, plants need proper nutrition, and each species has its own requirements. The three macronutrients plants need are nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P), and potassium (K), also known as NPK. Nitrogen helps plants and trees grow green, lush foliage. Phosphorus helps establish a root system and encourages bloom growth in flowering varieties, and potassium improves a plant’s overall health.

On a fertilizer package, these nutrients are listed similarly to this: 10-30-10. Each number represents how much of each nutrient the fertilizer contains, always in the same order (nitrogen-phosphorus-potassium). In this example, the fertilizer has 10 percent nitrogen, 30 percent phosphorus, and 10 percent potassium.

The best food for palm trees is a fertilizer that has a low middle, or phosphorus, number. In addition, the best fertilizer for palms will contain potassium levels equal to or greater than its nitrogen levels. Palm trees also benefit from micronutrients such as magnesium, manganese, and iron.

Organic vs. Inorganic

Aside from the form of fertilizer, gardeners can choose between organic and inorganic products. Though both can deliver the same or similar nutrients to a palm, they have distinctive differences.

Organic fertilizers contain natural ingredients such as minerals from plants, rocks, and animals. These fertilizers are easy for a plant to use and can deliver microorganisms to improve soil quality over time. Most organic fertilizers are nontoxic, making them a top pick for gardeners who have kids and pets.

Inorganic (synthetic, man-made) fertilizers also contain some natural ingredients, such as minerals, that are combined with chemicals to create a highly concentrated product. Because of this process, inorganic fertilizers are less expensive and deliver nutrients quickly. However, they do not last long in the soil or improve its health. They also add to pollution of water bodies and are not as eco-friendly as organic fertilizers, so the best palm tree fertilizer option might depend on personal preference.

Tips for Fertilizing Palm Trees

Though palm trees are a relatively low-maintenance plant, they require ample sunlight, water, and the right fertilizer. Palm trees can be planted in the ground or grown in containers. Gardeners who live in areas with colder winters can choose hardy palms that can handle temperatures as low as 10 degrees Fahrenheit or keep their palms in pots, bringing them inside during the winter.

To get the most benefit out of palm tree fertilizer, follow these tips:

  • For outdoor palms, fertilize only during the growing season, which is March through October
  • Stop fertilizing 2 months before your area’s average frost date
  • To prevent potassium deficiencies that can cause fronds to turn yellow, use a fertilizer with potassium equal to or higher than nitrogen.

For indoor palm trees, use a potting soil developed for palms, place your plant in bright light, and water when the soil is dry. After about a month of having the palm indoors, fertilize it following the directions on the product package.

FAQs

Palm trees can be grown anywhere—the key is to pick a suitable variety based on the climate. For example, gardeners who live in areas with cold winters can choose hardy palms, while those who live in warmer regions can grow most types of palm trees. Here are some common palm tree fertilizer questions and their answers to help palm tree growers.

Q. Do palm plants require fertilizers?

Palm trees require fertilizer to keep their fronds from curling and turning yellow. These plants need a low amount of phosphorus compared to the amounts needed for nitrogen and potassium.

Q. Can I use homemade fertilizer for a palm tree?

Many homemade palm tree fertilizer recipes incorporate ingredients such as bone meal, kelp, bat guano, and eggshells. Making your own plant food can provide necessary nutrients if it is customized to a palm tree’s needs.

Q. What kind of fertilizer should I use for palm trees?

Use a fertilizer with low phosphorus and a potassium level equal to or higher than the nitrogen level. Gardeners can choose between granular fertilizer, spikes, and water-soluble powders. If possible, select a fertilizer that also has the key micronutrients of magnesium, manganese, and iron.

Q. How much fertilizer do palm trees need?

The amount of fertilizer a palm needs depends on the tree’s size and the fertilizer type. Slow-release fertilizers can last up to 4 months between applications.

Q. Are coffee grounds good for palm trees?

Coffee grounds increase the soil’s acidity level, which may be beneficial for palms that prefer a higher acidity. However, some palms do better in pH-neutral soil.

Q. Will vinegar kill palm trees?

Vinegar can kill palm trees when repeatedly applied to the root system. Some gardeners use vinegar as a nontoxic way to kill unwanted trees.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T10:11:54-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias]]>Gardenias are prized for their fragrant blossoms, and the best fertilizer for gardenias will help yield beautiful blooms. See our list of top picks.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-gardenias/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=197232Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:42:45 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Those who live in temperate climates—typically where winter temps don’t drop below 10 degrees Fahrenheit—may be interested in growing gardenias in their garden. These are shrubs known for their soft, large, typically white blossoms that give off a heady aroma. While the gardenia (Gardenia jasminoides) isn’t difficult to grow, it has a few soil requirements. In addition to choosing the right type of soil for gardenias—well-draining and amended with organic matter, such as mulch or dry leaves—the plant stands a better chance of developing healthy roots and producing blooms if it receives regular fertilizer feedings.

But don’t just grab the first package of all-purpose plant food you see off the shelf at the garden center. It might boost the gardenia bush’s foliar growth, but it might not encourage blooming. The best plant food for gardenias should be formulated to provide the nutrients acid-loving plants need for optimal results. Our favorite is Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food because it dissolves quickly and has added minerals. Ahead, learn what to look for when shopping for the best fertilizer for gardenias and find out why the following products fit the bill.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer
  3. BEST ACIDIFIER: Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer
  4. BEST WITH MICROBES: Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer
  5. BEST WATER-SOLUBLE: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food
  6. BEST SPIKES: Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
best fertilizer for gardenias
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

NPK AnalysisFertilizer TypeAdded Ingredients
Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food30-10-10Water-solubleTrace minerals
Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer9-3-6LiquidSulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum
Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier FertilizerNot applicableGranulesNone (sulfur only)
Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer3-4-3GranuleLand plants, ocean plants, fish, fish bones, and mined minerals
Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food30-30-10Water solubleIron, boron, copper, manganese, molybdenum, zinc, and boric acid
Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer9-8-7SpikesNone listed
Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer4-3-6Time-release granulesTrace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur

Our Top Picks

To earn a spot in this lineup, the following fertilizers had to contain ingredient formulations that offered the vital nutrients that gardenias need for healthy growth and abundant blossom development. The NPK analysis varies from product to product, and some contain no NPK components at all. Still, each is designed to benefit gardenias and other acid-loving plants.

Best Overall

Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Dissolves quickly in water
  • Nitrogen sources help acidify soil
  • Added minerals

Cons

  • Requires frequent feedings

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 30-10-10
  • Fertilizer type: Water-soluble
  • Added ingredients: Trace minerals

From one of the top names in gardening aids, the best overall pick for feeding gardenias is Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Acid-Loving Plant Food. This water-soluble fertilizer is designed to be mixed with water and poured over foliage or around the base of the plant. It can also be used in a garden hose dispenser and sprayed over plants on a broader scale. The granules dissolve rapidly and provide a quick boost for the plant.

Miracid features an NPK analysis of 30-10-10, with its nitrogen sourced from ammonium and urea, both of which help acidify the soil. Trace minerals are also included, with boron, copper, iron, and zinc rounding out the nutrient quotient. Miracle-Gro recommends feeding when the gardenia is first transplanted and every 7 to 14 days after that during its growing season.

Get the Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid on Amazon or at Ace Hardware.

Best Bang For The Buck

Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer 8oz.
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Up to 48 feedings
  • Affordable
  • Added nutrients

Cons

  • Requires frequent feedings

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 9-3-6
  • Fertilizer type: Liquid
  • Added ingredients: Sulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum

Those who want to keep gardenias healthy and happy on a budget should check out Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer, since a single 8-ounce bottle will last for the entire growing season.  Just a teaspoon of this concentrated liquid mixed into a gallon of water can feed one or more gardenia plants weekly or every other week.

This fertilizer has an NPK analysis of 9-3-6, making it well suited for healthy foliage and abundant blossoms on acid-loving gardenias. Other beneficial ingredients include sulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum—all nutrients ideal for gardenias and other acid-loving plants.

Get the Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer on Amazon.

Best Acidifier

Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Reduces pH in soil
  • Requires only two to three yearly doses
  • Easy-to-use granules

Cons

  • Contains no other nutrients

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: Not applicable
  • Fertilizer type: Granules
  • Added ingredients: None (sulfur only)

Rather than struggle with overly alkaline soil, consider feeding with Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier, which can help create the ideal pH for gardenias to thrive. This granular product contains no nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium. Instead, the formula features 100 percent sulfur—an excellent soil acidifier—sourced from elemental sulfur and gypsum.

For best results, test the soil before applying Jobe’s acidifier and then follow the directions for sprinkling the granules around the plant base (how much to use depends on plant size). Work the granules into the soil and water well. Reapply the acidifier two or three times per year to maintain an optimal pH balance. Tip: This product does not contain other nutrients, so consider feeding with other fertilizers described in this guide to boost healthy gardenia growth.

Get the Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier on Amazon.

Best With Microbes

Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Reduces soil alkalinity
  • Time-release granules
  • All natural

Cons

  • Slight objectionable smell

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 3-4-3
  • Fertilizer type: Granule
  • Added ingredients: All-natural ingredients sourced from land plants, ocean plants, fish, fish bones, and mined minerals

Dr. Earth’s Acid Lovers Organic Fertilizer goes a long way toward helping maintain the acidic soil gardenias prefer. It also helps improve soil quality by adding probiotic microbes: tiny microorganisms that add organic content and boost soil’s structure. The ingredients in Dr. Earth are 100 percent natural and designed to encourage abundant blooming.

Among the included microbes are eight strains of ecto and endo mycorrhizae (mushroom-based components) that help plant roots withstand the slight drought conditions that can occur if a watering is inadvertently missed. The granules should be spread around the base, worked into the top inch or so of soil, and then watered thoroughly. For the best results, reapply Dr. Earth every 6 weeks.

Get the Dr. Earth’s Acid Lovers Organic Fertilizer on Amazon or at Ace Hardware.

Best Water-Soluble

Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food

 Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Dissolves rapidly
  • Offers instant boost of nutrients
  • Acidifies soil

Cons

  • Requires frequent application

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 30-30-10
  • Fertilizer type: Water soluble
  • Added ingredients: Iron, boron, copper, manganese, molybdenum, zinc, and boric acid

This water-soluble Miracle-Gro fertilizer dissolves instantly in water to provide an immediate boost of nutrients for gardenias and other acid-loving plants, including azalea, camellia, and hydrangea. It features an NPK analysis of 30-30-10 for lush leaf growth, abundant bloom production, and healthy root development.

In addition, Miracle-Gro added trace minerals to assist in acidifying the soil for even better growth. The product can be mixed with water in a watering can and applied to foliage or poured directly around the plant’s base; it can be used in a garden hose dispenser for spraying large areas. Recommended application is every 7 to 14 days.

Get the Miracle-Gro Azalea and Camellia Plant Food on Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Spikes

Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Time-release feeding
  • Feeds up to 8 weeks
  • Simple to use

Cons

  • Animals may dig them up

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 9-8-7
  • Fertilizer type: Spikes
  • Added ingredients: None listed

Those looking for a fertilizer that suits gardenias and other acid-loving shrubs but doesn’t require frequent feeding may find Jobe’s Fertilizer Spikes to be just the ticket. This product contains an NPK analysis of 9-8-7 combined in tightly compressed spikes that dissolve gradually to provide a long-term, continuous supply of nutrients.

Push the spikes about an inch beneath the surface of the soil around the base of the plant (the number of spikes depends on plant size, so follow package directions) and water thoroughly. Jobe’s spikes will continue to feed gardenias, azaleas, and similar flowering shrubs for 8 weeks.

Get the Jobe’s Fertilizer Spikes on Amazon or True Value.

Also Consider

Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer

 Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Pros

  • Acidifies soil
  • Requires only three feedings per year
  • Improves soil content

Cons

  • Pricey

Product Specs

  • NPK analysis: 4-3-6
  • Fertilizer type: Time-release granules
  • Added ingredients: Trace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur

Down to Earth All Natural Acid Fertilizer is designed to feed acid-loving plants the nutrients they need while improving soil content in the process. The fertilizer has an NPK analysis of 4-3-6 and also provides trace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur to help acidify the soil and encourage nutrient uptake in the roots. Down to Earth has also amended its product with leonardite, a natural, mineral-based soil conditioner.

The manufacturer recommends applying these time-release granules in early spring, again in summer when blooms first appear, and once more in fall to promote root development and increase the plant’s resistance to winter temperatures.

Get the Down to Earth All Natural Acid Fertilizer on Amazon or at Walmart.

Our Verdict

While any of the fertilizers in this lineup are beneficial for feeding gardenias, Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food is an excellent choice for helping maintain the acidic soil gardenias prefer. For a budget-friendly fertilizer that goes a long way, we like Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer; it comes in a concentrated liquid that makes up to 48 gallons.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Gardenias

The best food for gardenias is easily absorbed by the plant’s roots. It boosts both overall plant growth and blossom production, and it should encourage robust root development. Beneficial products are available in several types and formulations.

Types of Fertilizer

Today’s fertilizers come in various types, and some are better suited to specific growing conditions than others.

  • Granular: Designed for gradual release, granular fertilizers resemble tiny pellets or grains of sand. They’re designed to be mixed into the top inch or so of the soil, where they gradually dissolve, providing the plants with a continuous supply of food for several weeks, depending on brand.
  • Liquid: Liquid fertilizer comes in two forms: ready-to-use sprays for application directly on foliage or in concentrated form that’s mixed with water and sprinkled on the leaves or poured near the plant’s base. Plants absorb liquid fertilizers quickly—so they’re good for a quick boost—but they also drain out of the soil quickly, so they should be applied frequently, some even weekly.
  • Spikes: Like granules, spikes provide time-released feedings. They’re inserted below the soil level near the plant base to feed the plant for up to 6 months.
  • Water-soluble: This type of fertilizer comes in a grainy or powdery form that dissolves rapidly in water. It can be applied via a garden hose dispenser or mixed with water in a watering can and then poured over the plant or soil.

Soil Acidity and NPK Ratio 

Understanding soil and fertilizer nutrient values helps gardeners achieve success. The pH scale measures soil acidity, running from 0 to 14, with 7 considered neutral. Numbers below 7 are progressively more acidic, and those higher than 7 are more alkaline. Gardenias grow best in soil with a pH content on the acidic side, ranging from about 5 to 6.5 on the pH scale.

Fertilizers today are identified by the amount of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) they contain by content. For example, a fertilizer with an NPK analysis of 3-3-3 contains equal amounts of each nutrient. These three primary nutrients are designed to boost different parts of plant growth.

  • Nitrogen: Responsible for boosting leaf development.
  • Phosphorus: Encourages root development and flower production.
  • Potassium: Helps ensure root uptake of nutrients and overall plant function.

Fertilizers made for gardenias may have an NPK analysis that’s higher in nitrogen, but nutrient levels vary from product to product, depending on other ingredients in the mix. Some of the best fertilizers for gardenias don’t contain any nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium at all. Some include components such as sulfur or iron sulfate instead, which increases acidity in the soil and encourages the plant to absorb nutrients better.

The NPK ratio doesn’t tell the whole story when it comes to feeding gardenias; the nutrient source plays a role here as well. For example, the nitrogen found in fertilizer can come from dozens of sources, but if it’s sourced from nitrate (a salt of nitric acid) it will be of less benefit to acid-loving plants than if it’s sourced from ammonium (ammonia combined with a hydrogen ion).

Fortunately, you don’t need a degree in chemistry to choose the best fertilizer for gardenia plants. Instead, look for a fertilizer labeled for “acid-loving plants” or an “acidic fertilizer,” which will gear it toward other acid-loving plants, such as rhododendrons, azaleas, or blueberries. A fertilizer formulated for any acid-loving plant will be beneficial for gardenias.

However, gardenia enthusiasts shouldn’t expect acid-loving fertilizer alone to correct soil that’s too alkaline—it simply cannot do the trick. Instead, test soil before planting via an inexpensive pH test kit (available online and from garden centers). The tests come with suggestions for correcting pH balance, such as adding decomposed compost to the soil to increase acidity. When the soil is in the correct pH range, it’s time to plant gardenias.

Soil Type

Soil is one thing gardenias are especially picky about. These bushy plants like moisture, but they don’t like wet feet, meaning their roots can’t tolerate standing water. Planting gardenias in a raised flower bed can solve drainage problems, but the soil must also be light and resist compaction.

Clay-based soils are thick and heavy and do not permit gardenia roots to develop freely. Soils that are high in decomposed organic matter, such as compost and dried leaves, are lighter in weight, and the decomposed matter also helps raise the acidity level.

While there is not one specific best soil brand for gardenias, those looking to grow gardenias in containers should opt for a commercial potting soil containing peat moss, sand, and perlite—ingredients that encourage drainage while retaining adequate nutrients and moisture.

How We Chose the Best Fertilizer for Gardenias

To arrive at this lineup of the best fertilizers for gardenias, we extensively researched dozens of popular products. We eliminated any fertilizers not explicitly designed for acid-loving plants. Brand reputation was considered—for example, Miracle-Gro, a nationally known manufacturer with an excellent reputation for producing top-quality gardening products and aids. But startup and niche manufacturers weren’t eliminated if their products met the qualifications for being suitable for acid-loving plants. Finally, we looked at the product’s track record as cited by other gardeners who used it.

FAQs

Just a few open gardenia blossoms are sufficient for filling the air with a heady aroma, so it’s no surprise that gardeners and landscapers in moderate climates love growing this bushy plant. Still, gardenias require acidic growing conditions, and using the right fertilizer will help maintain that pH balance. Newbies to growing gardenias are likely to have some questions, the most common of which are answered below.

Q. When should I fertilize gardenias?

While manufacturer recommendations may vary, in general, feed gardenias from March to October but don’t feed during the plant’s resting season from November to February.

Q. How often should I fertilize gardenias?

This depends on the type of fertilizer, so follow manufacturer instructions. You may need to feed every week or so with liquid fertilizer or every few months with spikes.

Q. How do I fix yellow leaves on my gardenia plant?

Yellow leaves may be a sign of poorly draining soil. Consider amending the soil to increase drainage by adding sand, peat moss, or perlite.

Q. How often should I put coffee grounds on my gardenia?

Like Epsom salt, coffee grounds are acidic and can be used occasionally to supplement a good acid-loving fertilizer. Don’t overuse them, however—once a month is probably fine.

Q. Can I use Miracle Grow on gardenias?

Since so many people are familiar with the manufacturer yet err on the name, we kept the common misspelling in this question so folks can find the answer! And the answer is: Yes, our Best Overall pick for a gardenia fertilizer is Miracle-Gro Miracid Acid-Loving Plant Food.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T09:42:45-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Rooting Hormones]]>Check out picks for the best rooting hormone to add to your garden out of these top-rated recommendations.

The post The Best Rooting Hormones appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rooting-hormone/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=150726Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:11:10 -0500ReviewsGardeningLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Gardeners use multiple methods for growing new plants, including starting them from seeds, bulbs, and rhizomes. However, when the goal is to produce a plant identical to an existing plant, taking a cutting is usually the simplest way. A cutting is a 4- to 8-inch section of stem taken from a healthy plant and then put in water or a growing medium to root. Using cuttings to propagate plants is suitable for many types of plants, including some species of trees and bushes, but it’s especially well suited to the indoor gardening plants that tend to grow well from cuttings. Even those who aren’t familiar with advanced gardening concepts and are just trying to clone a favorite plant from a planter can often be successful with cuttings.

Cuttings from some plants, such as ivy and Dieffenbachia, root easily in plain water. Others need a little encouragement, and that’s where rooting hormone comes in. Rooting hormones are chemicals that stimulate the growth of new roots on cuttings. For example, the odds of growing a plant from a cutting taken from a cascading plant in a hanging planter increase when a rooting hormone is used. Finding the best rooting hormone is somewhat a matter of personal preference because most rooting hormone products are very similar.

Ahead, learn what to look for in a rooting hormone product and find out why the following are among the top choices of home gardeners. Our favorite is Clonex’s HydroDynamic Rooting Gel thanks to its ready-to-use formula and suitability for different types of cuttings. Each of the top picks below was selected after an in-depth review of the market and thorough product vetting.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting Gel
  2. RUNNER UP: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Bonide Bontone II Rooting Powder
  4. BEST POWDER: Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone
  5. BEST LIQUID: Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate
  6. BEST GEL: Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel
  7. BEST CONCENTRATE: Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8
The Best Rooting Hormone Options
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

TypeActive IngredientsQuantity
Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting GelGelIBA3.4 fluid ounces
Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3PowderIBA0.75 ounces
Bonide Bontone II Rooting PowderPowderIBA1.25 ounces
Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting HormonePowderIBA2-ounce container
Bonide Root & Grow ConcentrateLiquidIBA and fertilizer1 quart
Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone GelGelIBA4 ounces
Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone ConcentrateLiquidNAA4 fluid ounces
Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8PowderIBA0.75 ounces

Our Top Picks

To qualify as a top pick, a rooting hormone should be simple to apply, the instructions should be easy to understand, and the product should contain either IBA or NAA (see the Ingredients section below for more information) to promote root growth. The following five products feature different types of rooting hormone—including liquid, powder, and gel—but all are top performers popular with experienced gardeners. Any one of the products in the lineup will be an asset for propagating plants from cuttings.

Best Overall

Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting Gel

 The Best Rooting Hormone Options: HydroDynamics Clonex Rooting Gel
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Gel formula seals cut tissue around stem
  • Suitable for starting a variety of cuttings
  • Requires no mixing, and there’s or mess

What We Don’t Like

  • Gel can loosen and become watery if not stored correctly

Product Specs

  • Type: Gel
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 3.4 fluid ounces

Looking for the sticking power of an easy-to-use gel? Consider this option from Clonex that contains the active ingredient IBA for stimulating root growth. The gel seals the cut tissue around the stem, helping to protect it from rot while encouraging strong root development. The gel is suitable for use on different types of cuttings, including flowering species, woody plants, and fruit tree cuttings, among others.

The jar contains 3.4 fluid ounces, plenty for rooting dozens of cuttings. There’s no mixing or mess, just dip the stem in the gel and insert it into a moist growing medium.

Get the Clonex HydroDynamics rooting hormone at Amazon or Tractor Supply Co.

Runner Up

Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3

 The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Comes in powder form that can bolster sagging cuttings
  • Contains no added chemicals, dyes, or preservatives
  • Can also boost root growth in transplants

What We Don’t Like

  • Adheres better when dipping a cutting in water first

Product Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 0.75 ounces

To propagate new cuttings, consider this rooting powder from Hormex that helps prevent stem rot while stimulating new root development. The powder, which can also help strengthen and bolster sagging cuttings, is suitable for use on most plants that can be propagated from cuttings.

The active ingredient is IDA. The Hormex powder does not contain added chemicals, dyes, or preservatives, making it desirable for use on vegetables and fruit plants used in food production. In addition to treating cuttings, it is also beneficial for helping transplants adapt to a new location. Hormex #3 comes in a ¾-ounce jar.

Get the Hormex #3 rooting hormone at Amazon, Grow Generation, or Hormex.

Best Bang For The Buck

Bonide 925 Bontone Rooting Powder

 The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Bonide (BND925 - Bontone II Rooting Powder, Hormone Root Fertilizer (1.25 oz.)
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Can be used for many cutting types
  • Also boosts growth of seeds and bulbs
  • Can ease transplant shock
  • Promotes healthy root production

What We Don’t Like

  • Works best if cutting is dipped in water first

Product Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 1.25 ounces

Bonide’s rooting powder is well suited for helping establish healthy, robust roots on stem cuttings, but it’s also useful for encouraging strong growth when planting seeds and bulbs. The active ingredient, IBA, stimulates root growth on most cuttings, including softwoods, hardwoods, vegetables, and flowering varieties.

It comes in powder form and can also be used to coat seeds and bulbs by sprinkling it directly on them before planting. When transplanting a plant to a new location, users can also mix a teaspoon, or so, of the powder in the growing medium to reduce transplant shock and help the plant adapt. Each jar contains 1.25 ounces, enough for a few dozen cuttings or transplants.

Get the Bonide rooting hormone at Amazon,The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Powder

Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone

 The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for use in gardens, greenhouses, and residential areas
  • Stimulates at the root
  • Easy to use and more affordable than other powders

What We Don’t Like

  • Low concentration formula

Product Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 2-ounce container

For a concentrate that can help your plants grow strong, look no further than the Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone. This pick comes in a low-concentrate, powdered form that stimulates plant cuttings at the root.

This easy-to-use powdered formula is made with indole-3-butyric acid, a compound that is naturally occurring in plants. This ingredient is safe to use on African violets, roses, and other plants that are grown in residential, greenhouse, and garden spaces. It should be noted that the roots should be moistened before applying the hormone.

Get the Garden Safe rooting hormone at Amazon (2 pack) or Lowe’s.

Best Liquid

Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate

 The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Helps promote root growth and boost plant growth
  • Makes up to 9 gallons of fertilizer/growth hormone
  • All-in-one fertilizer/rooting hormone

What We Don’t Like

  • Contains a smaller amount of IBA

Product Specs

  • Type: Liquid
  • Active ingredients: IBA and fertilizer
  • Quantity: 1 quart

Bonide Root & Grow concentrate is a 4-10-3 (4 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphate, and 3 percent potash) fertilizer with IBA growth hormone. It helps reduce transplant shock and promotes vigorous plant growth. The 1-quart concentrate will make up to 9 gallons of fertilizer/rooting stimulator. It instantly mixes with water, and the diluted solution is applied directly onto the soil and roots.

The rooting hormone fertilizer combo works on all types of plants, including vegetables, trees, shrubs, and houseplants. It’s designed to be used while seeding or on transplants to help stimulate early root formation. It also works well as a rooting hormone for plant cuttings due to the IBA growth hormone in the mix. It mixes at a ratio of 3½ tablespoons per gallon of water—so a quart can last an entire growing season. The Bonide Root & Grow concentrate is perfect for gardeners who want an all-in-one product that will give their plants a boost at planting time.

Get the Bonide Root & Grow rooting hormone at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot (128 ounces).

Best Gel

Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel

 The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Concentrated formula can help reduce cloning time
  • Gel is easier to use than powder products
  • Large 4-ounce container

What We Don’t Like

  • Used gel should not be poured back into the container for future use

Product Specs

  • Type: Gel
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 4 ounces

Packed in a convenient 4-ounce container, this cutting-edge rooting hormone gel from Midas Hydro is formulated with a high concentration of indole-3-butyric acid, the active ingredient known for its powerful rooting properties. The strong IBA formula gel can help reduce cloning time, enabling gardeners to achieve stronger and healthier roots in no time. Whether you prefer water propagation, general hydroponics, or other methods, Midas Hydro rooting gel is compatible with various techniques, providing versatility and ease of use.

For users who dislike the mess involved with rooting powder, a gel option may be a cleaner and more user-friendly choice. Note that used gel cannot be reused, though, so users may go through it quicker than they anticipate.

Get the Midas Hydro rooting hormone at Amazon, Walmart, Etsy, or Midas Hydro.

Best Concentrate

Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate

 The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Affordable concentrated liquid
  • Includes vitamin B1 to add nutrients
  • Can also be diluted for use on transplants

What We Don’t Like

  • Strong concentrate might require mixing with water
  • NAA is a synthetic chemical

Product Specs

  • Type: Liquid
  • Active ingredients: NAA
  • Quantity: 4 fluid ounces

Also from Hormex, this rooting hormone features the active ingredient NAA and comes in a concentrated liquid form that will treat dozens of cuttings. To use, dip a fresh cutting into the undiluted rooting hormone and insert the cutting in a moist growing medium. For an added root-boosting effect, mix 1 teaspoon of Hormex concentrate in 1 gallon of water and use the solution to saturate the soil around the new cutting.

When transplanting newly rooted plants, use the same liquid solution for watering to reduce transplant shock. The inclusion of Vitamin B in the Hormex product adds a vital nutrient to the soil for robust plant growth. Best of all, the rooting hormone is available at an attractive price point.

Get the Hormex Vitamin B1 rooting hormone at Amazon or Hormex.

Also Consider

Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8

 The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for cuttings from most plants
  • Package contains plenty of powder
  • Free of dyes and preservatives

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires dipping a cutting in water before dipping in powder

Product Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Active ingredients: IBA
  • Quantity: 0.75 ounces

For quick rooting of most cuttings, opt for a rooting hormone like this one that contains the active chemical IBA. Suitable for use in most plants, including greenwood and softwood cuttings, this Hormex option is formulated to promote the development of healthy roots. The product comes in powder form for easy application.

A single jar contains 0.75 ounces of powder—plenty for rooting dozens of cuttings. For best results, take cuttings only from the current season’s growth from a healthy mother plant. Dip the end of the cutting in water before dipping it in the powdered rooting hormone.

Get the Hormex #8 rooting hormone at Amazon or Hormex.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Rooting Hormones

Use of a rooting hormone can help gardeners duplicate favorite plants from cuttings. Although most rooting products are similar, we looked at types and some features of products to help buyers choose based on personal preference. This list includes liquid, gel, and powder formulas and a choice of the two most common active ingredients. We also considered application methods and ease of use.

What to Consider When Choosing a Rooting Hormone

Rooting hormone products are relatively inexpensive and range from around $13 for a bottle that will treat up to 50 cuttings to $25 (or more) for a large container that will treat more than 100 cuttings. The most significant difference is in the type of product and whether it contains added ingredients, such as nutrients or fertilizers intended to help the plant grow and thrive once the cutting develops roots.

Form

Rooting hormone products come in three main types: liquid, gel, and powder. No matter the type, all three are used in a similar manner: the gardener dips the end of the cutting in the hormone product and then puts the cutting in a moist, growing medium.

  • Liquid: Bottles of liquid rooting hormone come in either ready-to-use formulations or concentrated formulations that require mixing with water. Some gardeners feel liquid offers the best coverage since it can seep into tiny pores in the cutting.
  • Gel: This rooting hormone adheres well to cuttings and provides a slightly thicker coating of the hormone than liquid varieties, which may offer more root-boosting stimulus.
  • Powder: One of the most common types of root hormone products available, powder is simple to use and offers a thick layer of root-stimulating chemical. Before dipping the cutting in the powder, many gardeners will dip the cutting in water, so the root hormone adheres better.

Ingredients

The majority of rooting hormone products on the market today contain one of two common chemicals, IBA or NAA, both of which are synthetic forms of natural plant hormones known to stimulate root growth.

  • Indole-3-butyric acid (IBA): A chemical form of the plant hormone, auxin, IBA triggers root growth and is found in many commercial rooting hormone products of all types.
  • Naphthaleneacetic acid (NAA): Similar to IBA, NAA is a synthetic chemical formulation that stimulates root growth and retards rotting. It is often found in all three types of rooting products.
  • Added nutrients: While IBA and NAA are the active ingredients in rooting compounds, some products contain additional nutrients, such as nitrogen, to boost leafy green growth or have various vitamins to help bolster floral production. These added ingredients can be helpful, but some gardeners prefer to use only rooting compound, so they can add the exact nutrients they choose to the soil later.

Application

The information necessary for plant propagation in cuttings is available in gardening books, but, for the most part, the process is straightforward and simple enough for even newbie gardeners. The following offers an idea of the basic techniques used for taking cuttings and applying rooting hormone. Before proceeding, do a little research on the intended plant. While cuttings can successfully propagate many plants, others require different methods. Some cuttings should be from greenwood (new, supple growth), while others should be taken from the older, hardwood portions of a stem. Knowing the best method of propagation for a specific plant will increase the odds of success.

  1. Take a 4- to 8-inch stem cutting from a healthy plant.
  2. Strip all but one or two top leaves from the stem.
  3. Bruise the end of the stem by slightly crushing it or take a sharp knife and scrape away some of the stem’s outer covering. This step helps the rooting hormone penetrate more efficiently.
  4. Dip about 2 inches of the stem in the rooting compound. If you’re using a powdered mixture, dip the cutting in water first, so the powder adheres well.
  5. With a pencil or stick, make a hole about 2 inches deep in the growing medium and insert the treated end of the cutting.
  6. Press the growing medium around the cutting and cover the whole pot or tray with plastic to keep moisture in while the cutting takes root. By keeping the cutting in an enclosed container, the soil will stay moist, which is a requirement for roots to develop. Alternately, consider starting the cutting in a self-watering planter where it will receive a consistent amount of moisture.

FAQs

The application of rooting hormone increases the odds of success when propagating with cuttings. The product stimulates root growth and reduces the risk of stem rot. For gardeners new to the product, a few questions are to be expected.

Q. How does a rooting hormone work?

A rooting hormone stimulates root growth at the cut end of a stem.

Q. Is rooting hormone necessary for cuttings?

Not always, but it’s handy to have around. Some plants, especially indoor plants, can root in just plain water.

Q. How long will my rooting hormone take to work?

Depending on the plant, roots should start to develop within two to six weeks. Research the plant you’re trying to propagate for a specific timeline.

Q. Do rooting hormone solutions work for hydroponic plants?

Rooting hormones are often used in hydroponic systems to stimulate plant growth.

The post The Best Rooting Hormones appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T09:11:10-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas]]>Help your hydrangeas reach their full potential with the best fertilizer for hydrangeas. Check this buyer’s guide for our top picks.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-hydrangeas/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=156240Wed, 12 Feb 2025 08:51:29 -0500ReviewsGardeningLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A perennial favorite in the landscape, hydrangea is hardy in a wide range of growing zones and is a relatively easy keeper. While hydrangeas vary in form, color, and bloom time, they are known for the large flower heads that cover the plants—so large, in fact, the blooms often weigh down the stems. Once established, the hydrangea is one of the summer season’s most impressive shrubs, but it needs fertilizer to reach its full potential.

The best fertilizer for hydrangea plants should contain a blend of nutrients to encourage healthy root and branch development while boosting the color, size, and quantity of flower heads. Don’t just grab a package of garden fertilizer off the shelf, though.

We recommend Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4 as our top pick for its versatility, organic formulation, and availability. There are other common hydrangea fertilizer options on the market, including Miracle-Gro Acid-Loving Plant Food and JR Peters Jacks Classic Blossom Booster Fertilizer. However, they do not meet our sustainability guidelines and are not recommended in our top picks due to their potentially harmful ingredients and negative impact on the environment.

Learn what to look for when choosing a fertilizer for hydrangeas, and find out why the following products can help this impressive plant become a focal point in the landscape.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4
  2. RUNNER-UP: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant Nutrition
  4. BEST FOR BLUE: Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer
  5. MOST VERSATILE: Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer
  6. BEST ACIDIFIER: Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier
The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas Options
Photo: istockphoto.com

Before You Buy a Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

Before buying fertilizer for hydrangeas, it’s important to perform a soil test to determine the soil’s pH level and check for nutrient deficiencies. Hydrangea blooms will vary in color based on the acidity of the soil, and if the pH level is too high or too low, it can affect the plant’s ability to absorb essential nutrients from the soil. A soil test can also reveal if the soil lacks certain nutrients, such as nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium, which can affect the plant’s growth and overall health. Knowing the soil’s pH level and nutrient content enables shoppers to choose the appropriate fertilizer and make any necessary amendments to ensure hydrangeas thrive.

Product Comparison

TypeNPK RatioQuantity
Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4Granular fertilizer4-3-4Two 4-pound bags
Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix FertilizerLiquid fertilizer4-3-65 pounds
Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant NutritionWater-soluble fertilizer8-8-81 pound
Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid FertilizerGranular fertilizer3-4-34 pounds
Dr. Earth GL61100518430 FertilizerGranular3-9-4Two 4 pound bags
Espoma Organic Soil AcidifierSoil acidifierN/A6 pounds

Our Top Picks

The best fertilizer for hydrangeas will vary depending on the gardener’s goals for this spectacular shrub. Any one of the following fertilizers is well suited for use on hydrangeas, but keep in mind that more is not necessarily better when it comes to fertilizing plants. Follow application instructions carefully. Do not overfeed hydrangeas; rather, err on the side of too little rather than too much and use fertilizer in combination with other soil amendments and an optimal growing location.

Best Overall

Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for a wide variety of acid-loving plants
  • Plants only need to be fertilized twice a year
  • Available from major retailers at an affordable price

What We Don’t Like

  • Might need extra applications on alkaline soil
  • Smaller box than expected

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular fertilizer
  • NPK Ratio: 4-3-4
  • Quantity: Two 4-pound bags

The best overall pick is an acid-based fertilizer from a well-known and respected manufacturer in the gardening industry. A granular plant food designed for hydrangeas and other plants that prefer slightly acidic soil, this fertilizer comes in a 4-pound bag of granules. It features a 4-3-4 N-P-K ratio to help hydrangeas get off to a robust start in spring and grow vigorously throughout the summer.

The plant food’s acid formulation gently reduces the soil’s pH level, increasing the chance the hydrangea flowers will be a deep pink, purple, or blue tone. Along with hydrangeas, this fertilizer works well for holly, azaleas, rhododendrons, blueberries, evergreens, strawberries, camellias, and other plants that thrive in acidic soils.

Get the Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4 at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Runner-Up

Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for a wide variety of acid-loving plants
  • Contains macro-nutrients as well as magnesium and calcium
  • Encourages colorful blooms

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be applied monthly for the best results

Product Specs

  • Type: Liquid fertilizer
  • NPK Ratio: 4-3-6
  • Quantity: 5 pounds

This acidic, granular fertilizer comes in a 5-pound bag and is suitable for use on many types of flowers and plants. One application will provide hydrangeas with a steady 4-3-6 N-P-K diet for about a month. In addition to the N-P-K nutrients, the fertilizer contains additional beneficial ingredients like calcium and magnesium as well as sulfur, which helps to make the soil more acidic.

Designed to encourage large, bountiful blooms, this fertilizer should be spread around the base of the plant at a ratio of 1 pound per 1 inch of trunk diameter. Along with hydrangeas, it’s a great pick for feeding rhododendrons, azaleas, camellias, evergreens, blueberries, raspberries, and strawberries.

Get the Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer at Amazon.

Best Bang For The Buck

Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Nutrition

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Nutrition
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Includes both macro- and micro-nutrients
  • Suitable for a variety of flowering plants
  • Water-soluble fertilizers are easy to apply evenly

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be applied weekly for the best results

Product Specs

  • Type: Water-soluble fertilizer
  • NPK Ratio: 8-8-8
  • Quantity: 1 pound

There’s no need to spend a bundle on plant food. This affordable option features an 8-8-8 N-P-K formulation that promotes more blooms per shrub, along with vibrant flower heads. This is an all-purpose blossom booster that’s suitable for use on a wide variety of perennial and annual blooming plants, including hydrangeas.

It provides various minerals, including copper, calcium, and iron, to supplement common nutrient deficiencies. The water-soluble formulation should be applied every 7 days throughout the growing season for the biggest, brightest blooms and healthiest plants.

Get the Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant Nutrition at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot (2.5 pounds).

Best For Blue

Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Continuously feeds acid-loving plants for months
  • Contains macro-nutrients, probiotics, and microbes
  • Encourages vibrant blue blooms

What We Don’t Like

  • Strong smell; could attract dogs or insects

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular fertilizer
  • NPK Ratio: 3-4-3
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Dr. Earth’s acid fertilizer contains only natural ingredients, including alfalfa meal, bone meal, and kelp meal, in a 3-4-3 N-P-K formulation. In addition to nutrients, it contains select strains of probiotics that improve soil health and increase plant performance. Some of its ingredients are designed to reduce the soil’s pH level, too, making the product suitable for use on all acid-loving plants and increasing the chances that hydrangeas will produce blue flowers.

For the best results, apply in mid-to-early spring and then every 60 days afterward. The granules should be mixed with the soil and watered well.

Get the Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Most Versatile

Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for use on a variety of plants, trees, and shrubs
  • Supplemented with probiotics for optimal overall plant health
  • GMO-free formula

What We Don’t Like

  • May encourage gnat infestations

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 3-9-4
  • Quantity: Two 4 pound bags

Dr. Earth Flower Girl has a 3-9-4 NPK analysis and includes additional probiotics to boost overall plant health, making it a great option for feeding bulbs, tubers, corms, and rhizomes. It contains eight strains of ecto- and endomycorrhizae, which work together to increase drought tolerance and provide enhanced nutrient availability.

The 4-pound bag of granules is designed to provide slow-release nutrients for several months after the initial application. The formula includes ingredients like fish bone meal, alfalfa meal, feather meal, soft rock phosphate, and mined potassium sulfate, and is GMO-free. It’s free of chicken manure and sewage sludge.

Get the Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Acidifier

Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier

 The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Amends soil for acid-loving plants; creates blue blooms
  • Doesn’t conflict with other fertilizers
  • Only needs to be applied every 60 days

What We Don’t Like

  • Does not provide plant nutrients

Product Specs

  • Type: Soil acidifier
  • NPK Ratio: N/A
  • Quantity: 6 pounds

Gardeners and landscapers looking to create highly desirable blue flower heads need look no further than this soil acidifier from Espoma Soil. While not a strict fertilizer in the common sense—Espoma does not come with an N-P-K ratio—the product does contain elemental sulfur and gypsum that act together to lower the soil’s pH level, encouraging blue hydrangea blooms. For the best results, apply Espoma granules around the plant’s base in early spring before flowerhead buds develop and reapply every 60 days.

It comes in a 6-pound bag and is suitable for use on hydrangeas and other acid-loving plants. Be aware that pH levels adjust gradually. Depending on the soil’s current pH level, two or more applications may be necessary before the acidity is low enough to produce blue flower heads. This product can be used in conjunction with an all-purpose fertilizer to encourage robust plant health as well as blue flower heads.

Get the Espoma Soil Acidifier at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Or, DIY Your Own Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

One of the most effective and sustainable ways to make fertilizer for hydrangeas is by making compost from household scraps. Composting is a process of breaking down organic materials, such as fruit and vegetable scraps, leaves, and grass clippings, into nutrient-rich soil amendments that can be used to fertilize plants.

Start by collecting organic materials that are rich in nutrients, such as banana peels, eggshells, coffee grounds, and fish emulsion. Add them to an outdoor compost bin and mix in leaves and grass clippings.

Once the compost bin includes a good mix of materials, add some water and turn the compost pile regularly to provide oxygen and ensure even decomposition. As the compost breaks down, it will transform into a nutrient-rich soil amendment that can be added to the soil around the hydrangeas.

Not only is making compost a great way to provide hydrangeas with natural and healthy fertilizers, but it also helps to reduce waste and minimize environmental impact.

Jump to our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas

To keep hydrangeas growing and blooming bountifully, you need a fertilizer or soil amender that’s made specifically for these acid-loving plants. Our recommendations include a variety of options to help improve the health and beauty of these plants. We’ve selected traditional water-soluble fertilizers that help stimulate root growth, granular fertilizers, and soil amenders that help increase the soil’s acidity to achieve blue flowers.

To qualify as a top pick, a fertilizer should provide the nutrients hydrangeas need for developing strong branches, healthy foliage, and beautiful blooms. Our favorite options effectively increase the bloom rate of hydrangeas, and gardeners can choose between organic and non-organic products.

What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

Like all plants, hydrangeas draw nutrients from water, sunlight, air, and soil, but not all soil contains the nutrients necessary for robust growth and flower development. That’s where hydrangea fertilizer can help. The best fertilizer for any individual hydrangea plant will depend on the gardener’s preferred method of delivering the fertilizer to the soil, and the condition of the existing soil.

Type

Hydrangea fertilizers come in three primary forms: liquid, granule, and compressed spikes. All three offer slightly different benefits.

  • Liquid: Available as either a concentrate for diluting with water or a ready-to-use product, liquid fertilizers are quickly absorbed by the plant’s roots and leaves for a fast boost of nutrients. Depending on the product, liquid fertilizers are either sprayed on the plant’s foliage or poured around the plant’s base.
  • Granules: One of the most common forms of fertilizers, granule fertilizers can either be dissolved in water and poured on the soil or sprinkled around the plant’s base. Time-release granules, which have a polymer coating, should be worked into the soil around the hydrangeas’ base with gardening tools. They dissolve slowly and offer the plant a long-term supply of nutrients.
  • Spike: Like time-release granules, gardeners often use spikes if they’re looking for a long-term plant food. This fertilizer is compressed and shaped into hardened spikes that the gardener pushes into the soil around the plant’s base. Over the course of 2 or 3 months, the spikes slowly dissolve and provide nutrients for the plants.

Organic vs. Inorganic Fertilizers

Fertilizers are made up of either organic or inorganic ingredients.

  • Inorganic: This type of fertilizer contains chemical and synthetic nutrients. It has been formulated in a laboratory to produce specific growing results, such as larger or more abundant blooms or an increased acidity level, which is desirable when growing hydrangeas. Inorganic fertilizers may also include time-released ingredients that dissolve slowly and feed the plant over a period of weeks or months. We’ve opted to exclude inorganic fertilizers from our recommendations because of their potentially negative impact on the environment.
  • Organic: Many gardeners prefer using only natural fertilizers that contain ingredients such as earthworm castings, poultry manure, or compost. Organic fertilizers contain no chemicals, and they may not be as strong as inorganic fertilizers. They may, however, help increase soil health in addition to providing nutritional value. For example, compost doesn’t just provide the plant with essential nutrients; it also helps heavy clay soil drain better.

N-P-K Ratio

Commercial fertilizers are labeled by the amounts of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) they contain by weight, which appears on the package as the N-P-K ratio. Hydrangeas will benefit from an all-purpose, balanced fertilizer, such as a 10-10-10 N-P-K, that contains equal amounts of each nutrient. A balanced fertilizer will encourage healthy foliage as well as bountiful blooms. For gardeners explicitly seeking to increase the blooms’ quantity and size, a fertilizer with a higher concentration of phosphorus (the middle number), such as a 10-20-10 N-P-K, may be beneficial.

Plant Needs 

The hydrangea will tolerate partial sun, but it prefers a mostly shady spot in the yard. When possible, locate the shrub where it will not receive direct sun in the late afternoon in hot climates. Morning sun is usually acceptable and well tolerated. In northern climes where afternoon temps are moderate, some hydrangeas will also thrive if they receive some early afternoon sun. It’s the combination of hot temperatures and blazing sun that can take a toll on these spectacular shrubs. Hydrangeas like a permanent spot in the landscape, so planting them in pots or grow bags might not allow the shrubs to reach their full potential.

Soil Condition

Well-drained soil that’s high in organic matter is optimal for growing hydrangeas. Heavy, clay-type soil and sandy soil will benefit from additional organic matter, such as compost or dried leaves. By adding organic matter, the gardener will increase drainage and enhance the soil’s phosphorus level, which is favorable to producing colorful hydrangea blooms. Before amending soil, it’s a good idea to take a sample of the existing soil to a local extension office for testing. The test results will include recommendations for creating healthy, balanced soil.

Color and pH

White hydrangea species produce only white flower heads, but an interesting thing happens to colored hydrangeas when the gardener alters the soil’s pH level. The more acidic the soil’s pH, the more likely it is that the hydrangea flowers will be blue. The pH scale ranges from 0 to 14, with 7 considered neutral. Levels higher than 7 are considered alkaline, while levels lower than 7 are considered acidic. The greater the pH variation, the more pronounced the hydrangea color change.

  • Neutral: At a neutral soil pH level, around 7, colored hydrangea will produce flowers in shades of pink to deep pink.
  • Alkaline: At pH levels higher than 7, hydrangea flowers are a light, clear pink hue.
  • Slightly acidic: When the soil’s pH is around 6, the blooms take on a dark pink or even slightly red or purple hue.
  • Strongly acidic: When the soil’s pH level is lower than 6, hydrangea blooms tend to turn blue. This is the most desirable color for many gardeners, who regularly amend the soil to achieve beautiful blue flower heads.

When shopping for hydrangea fertilizers, you may notice that a good number of them are called acidic fertilizers. In addition to the product’s N-P-K nutrients, acidic fertilizers contain pH-changing additives, such as sulfur or aluminum sulfate. For those who strive for blue flower heads, it’s worthwhile to purchase a pH soil tester to monitor the soil’s pH level.

FAQs

Hydrangeas grow in most regions of the country and are prized for their spectacular blooms, so it’s natural to have a few questions about how to make the most of these eye-catching shrubs.

Q. When do hydrangeas start to bloom?

In warm climates, hydrangeas start to bloom in early summer. In northern climes, they bloom in mid-summer.

Q. What is the best time to fertilize hydrangeas? 

It depends on the type of fertilizer. It’s a good idea to give hydrangeas a first feeding in mid-to-late spring. After that, apply additional fertilizer at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Time-released fertilizers might need to be applied only once every 3 months, while other types should be applied every 1 to 2 weeks.

Q. How do I fertilize hydrangeas?

It’s essential to follow the directions on the product label. Liquids can be diluted and poured around the plant’s base or sprinkled on the foliage, while granules are often worked into the top inch or so of the soil. Fertilizer spikes are inserted near the base of the plant and pushed beneath the soil’s surface.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T08:51:29-05:00
<![CDATA[Use Your Lawn Mower Year-Round With This Handy Attachment]]>The best lawn mower snow blower combos can go from cutting grass to moving snow in no time, making them useful year-round tools. See our list of top picks.

The post Use Your Lawn Mower Year-Round With This Handy Attachment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-lawn-mower-snow-blower-combos/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=223710Tue, 11 Feb 2025 12:47:28 -0500ReviewsDIYLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Best Overall

The Best Lawn Mower Option: Husqvarna E-Lift 50 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

Husqvarna E-Lift 50" 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

Best Bang for the Buck

The Best Lawn Mower Option: Husqvarna Manual 42 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

Husqvarna Manual 42" 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

Best for Large Driveways

The Best Lawn Mower Option: NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76 Snow Blower Attachment

NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76" Snow Blower Attachment

Lawn mower snow blower combos offer a practical way for homeowners to get more out of their equipment, allowing them to cut grass in warmer months and add an attachment to blow snow in the winter season. But since this type of driveway- and lawn-maintenance equipment isn’t exactly cheap, it’s smart to spend time researching their key features to ensure you buy the right one for your needs. 

To simplify this process, we reviewed five excellent models and consulted a snow-removal expert for additional insights. Based on our efforts, we selected the Husqvarna E-Lift 50″ 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment as our top pick for its electric lift, toolless hookup and removal, and easily adjustable deflector and chute. Keep reading to compare our picks for the best lawn mower snow blower combos and learn which features matter most when choosing between them.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Husqvarna E-Lift 50″ 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment
    Jump to Review 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Husqvarna Manual 42″ 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR LARGE DRIVEWAYS: NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76″ Snow Blower Attachment
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST ELECTRIC LIFT: Husqvarna E-Lift 42″ Snow Blower Attachment
    Jump to Review
  5. ALSO CONSIDER: NorTrac 3-Pt. 50-54″ Snow Blower Attachment
    Jump to Review

Before You Buy a Lawn Mower Snow Blower Combo

Lawn mower snow blower combos are essentially large snow plow blades that turn a riding mower into a snow plow. Folks in warmer climates and areas that only get a small amount of snow can likely skip them in favor of a simple shovel or cordless snow blower. On the other hand, those who have large properties and see significant snowfall each year (and already own a garden tractor) may find that these attachments make their lives much easier. 

Still, since these units are typically several feet wide, weigh hundreds of pounds, and cost over $2,000, users will want to carefully consider compatibility, ease of attachment and removal, and storage space as part of the purchasing process. Also, if you don’t already own a riding mower, this will increase the cost, though you may be able to get a good deal on a used riding mower. Still, be careful the attachment you choose will work with your mower, as small lawn tractors may not have enough oomph to support them or may lose traction if the machine is too front-heavy. Also, some lawn mower snow blower combos are only compatible with mowers of the same brand. 

When it comes time to add the attachment to your mower, you will need to be knowledgeable and strong enough to remove the mower’s deck assembly and replace it with a pulley system that operates the snow blower. To make the installation and removal process easier, you may want to look for a model that runs off of your tractor’s power take-off (PTO) system. 

Product NameStageClearing CapacityCompatibility
Husqvarna E-Lift 50″ 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment 2-stage50 inchesFits all Husqvarna lawn tractors 
Husqvarna Manual 42″ 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment2-stage42 inchesFits all Husqvarna lawn tractors 
NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76″ Snow Blower Attachment2-stage72 to 76 inches35- to 50-hp lawn tractors, category 1 hitch 
Husqvarna E-Lift 42″ Snow Blower Attachment2-stage42 inchesFits all 2006 and newer Husqvarna tractors 
NorTrac 3-Pt. 50-54″ Snow Blower Attachment2-stage50 to 54 inches16- to 35-hp lawn tractors, category 1 hitch

The Best Lawn Mower Snow Blower Combos Options
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Our Top Picks

Each riding mower snow thrower attachment that made our list is one of the best options available to turn your lawn tractor into a snow plow.

Best Overall

Husqvarna E-Lift 50" 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

 The Best Lawn Mower Option: Husqvarna E-Lift 50 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • Replaceable wear plate and skid shoes
  • Toolless hookup and removal (after initial installation)
  • Deflector and chute angle adjust from the seat

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheel weights and chains recommended

Specs

  • Stage 2-stage
  • Clearing capacity: 50 inches
  • Compatibility Fits all Husqvarna lawn tractors

Folks looking for a lawn mower snow blower combo with all the features should check out Husqvarna’s E-Lift Snow Thrower Attachment. This snow blower has a 50-inch clearing capacity, which is enough for the typical Folks looking for a lawn mower snow blower combo with all the features should check out Husqvarna’s E-Lift 2-stage snow thrower attachment. This riding snow thrower has a 50-inch clearing capacity that’s more than enough for the typical driveway as well as a two-stage setup that allows it to handle heavy, deep snow. 

This lawn tractor with snow blower attachment got the award for best overall since it has a few extra features that make it especially desirable. Once initially installed, it can be hooked up or removed without tools. Users can raise and lower the snow blower and adjust the chute angle and deflector right from the seat. It’s also compatible with most Husqvarna models, though the manufacturer recommends adding wheel weights and chains to maintain traction.

Get the Husqvarna 50″ lawn mower snow blower combo at Lowe’s or Husqvarna.

Best Bang for the Buck

Husqvarna Manual 42" 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment

 The Best Lawn Mower Option: Husqvarna Manual 42 2-Stage Snow Thrower Attachment
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Works as a snow blower for gravel driveways
  • 180-degree adjustable chute
  • Toolless attachment and removal after initial installation

What We Don’t Like

  • Manual lift
  • Initial installation is easier with at least 2 people

Specs

  • Stage 2-stage
  • Clearing capacity 42 inches
  • Compatibility Fits all Husqvarna lawn tractors

The Husqvarna 42-inch manual lift snow thrower attachment is a two-stage option with a universal-fit design that works with all of the brand’s lawn tractors. It features a manual lift system, two 12-inch diameter serrated input augers that efficiently pull in snow, and a high-speed impeller that launches precipitation through the poly chute. 

Like our top pick, this model offers toolless attachment and removal after the initial installation of mounting brackets and pulley frame brackets. You can adjust the 180-degree chute and control the deflector from the seat, and the machine also features replaceable wear plates and skid shoes for long-lasting use. For best results, Husqvarna recommends adding wheel weights and chains. 

Get the Husqvarna manual lawn mower snow blower combo at Amazon, Lowe’s, Walmart, or Husqvarna.

Best for Large Driveways

NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76" Snow Blower Attachment

 The Best Lawn Mower Option: NorTrac 3-Pt. 72-76 Snow Blower Attachment
Photo: Northen Tools

What We Like

  • Attaches to a 3-point hitch system on larger tractors
  • Uses power take-off system instead of a pulley
  • Massive clearing capacity up to 76 inches

What We Don’t Like

  • Attaches to back of tractor
  • Manual chute adjustment

Specs

  • Stage 2-stage
  • Clearing capacity 72 to 76 inches
  • Compatibility 35- to 50-hp lawn tractors, category 1 hitch

Those looking to clear long or wide driveways with as few passes as possible might consider NorTrac’s 3-Point Snow Blower. This model attaches to heavy-duty tractors with a three-point hitch system, getting Those looking to clear long or wide driveways with as few passes as possible will want to consider this 3-point snow blower from NorTrac. Its 72-inch blower and bolt-on 4-inch wing kit can clear a path up to 76 inches wide and throw it 40 feet. It’s designed to fit lawn tractors with 35-to 50-horsepower (hp) engines and category 1 hitches and uses the tractor’s power take-off system to make installation and removal quick and easy. The two-stage system also features a chute that rotates up to 340 degrees, though you must adjust it manually unless you buy and install the optional hydraulic kit. 

One of the best things about this model is its versatility, as it will work with a range of tractor sizes. It also has adjustable skid shoes for precise height control and heavy-duty steel construction that stands up to harsh winter conditions. We also really like that it’s powered by the tractor’s PTO rather than a pulley system. If there’s a downside, it’s that it attaches to reach hitch, which could make use uncomfortable during extended jobs. 

Get the NorTrac 72-76″ lawn mower snow blower combo at Northern Tool + Equipment

Best Electric Lift

Husqvarna E-Lift 42" Snow Blower Attachment

 The Best Lawn Mower Option: Husqvarna E-Lift 42 Snow Blower Attachment
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • Electric lift system, chute, and angle adjustments
  • 42-inch clearing capacity
  • Toolless hookup and removal

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires wheel weights and chain
  • Only compatible with Husqvarna lawn tractors

Specs

  • Stage 2-stage
  • Clearing capacity 42 inches
  • Compatibility Fits all 2006 and newer Husqvarna tractors

This 42-inch lawn mower with snow blower combo features an innovative electric lift mechanism that allows you to lift and lower the snow blower with just a push of a button directly from your seat. Not only that, its 12-inch dual serrated augers and 180-degree rotating chute also use electric adjustment, adding to user convenience and efficiency. 

Beyond its electric lift, this tractor with snow blower also features a two-stage design with high-speed impeller to pull snow in and propel it quickly through the durable poly chute. It fits all Husqvarna lawn tractors made in 2006 or later, and after its initial installation, you can attach and remove it without needing tools. Like the other models we recommend from this brand, the manufacturer recommends you add wheel weights and chains for optimal performance. 

Get the Husqvarna electric lift lawn mower snow blower combo at Lowe’s or Husqvarna.

Also Consider

NorTrac 3-Pt. 50-54" Snow Blower Attachment

 The Best Lawn Mower Option: NorTrac 3-Pt. 50-54 Snow Blower Attachment
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Versatile compact tractor snow blower
  • Clears snow up to 20 inches deep
  • Scraping edge is replaceable

What We Don’t Like

  • Only throws snow about 20 feet
  • Automatic chute adjustment requires additional purchase

Specs

  • Stage 2-stage
  • Clearing capacity 50 to 54 inches
  • Compatibility 16- to 35-hp lawn tractors, category 1 hitch

If you liked the features offered by our pick for large driveways but need a more compact package, this model is worth considering. With a clearing width of up to 54 inches (including the bolt-on 4-inch wing kit), this model still moves plenty of snow with each pass. Similar to the other NorTrac model we love, it is compatible with a wide range of lawn tractors with category 1 three-point hitches and 16- to 35-horsepower engines. 

While we wish the 340-degree adjustable chute wasn’t manual-only without an additional purchase, we like that the attachment is powered by the tractor’s PTO rather than a pulley. Also, it only throws snow about 20 feet, but that’s likely sufficient for residential and light commercial use. Its body, auger, and discharge chute are made of steel for durability, and it has heavy-duty adjustable rear skid shoes and a replaceable scraping edge.

Get the NorTrac 50-54″ lawn mower snow blower combo at Amazon or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Lawn Mower Snow Blower Combos 

To choose the best lawn mower snow blower combos, we began by drawing on our expertise regarding lawn mowers and snow blowers. We identified which features are absolutely essential for using a tractor with a snow blower and conducted thorough product research to find models that fit those criteria. With a pool of eligible models to choose from, we compared features, performance, price, and overall value, eliminating options that didn’t stack up. In the end, the only models we picked are the ones we’d actually buy for ourselves. 

You may have noticed that no all-in-one versions of a riding lawn mower with snow blower made our list. The current options on the market are either incredibly expensive or don’t offer enough power to be worth their price. For now, we think most DIYers will be better off choosing one of the best lawn tractors first and adding a compatible snow blower attachment second rather than ending up disappointed with an all-in-one machine. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Lawn Mower Snow Blower Combo

Because they are undoubtedly one of the best tools for conquering snow and ice, lawn mower snow blowers come at a premium price. Purchasing one is a big decision that requires careful thought and research. However, when it comes to making quick and easy work of year-round maintenance tasks like lawn mowing and snow removal, they are nearly impossible to beat. To help you make a smart selection, we’ve outlined the features that matter most below. 

Number of Stages

Like traditional snow blowers, lawn tractor with snow blower combos come in a few different types, also known as stages. The stages refer to how the machine scoops and discharges the snow.

Single-stage snow blowers, or snow throwers, have an auger that grabs snow and pushes it out of the chute. They’re the most limited in the distance they can throw and the height of the snow they can handle.

Two-stage snow blowers have both an auger as well as an additional impeller. As the auger collects the snow and funnels it toward the chute, the impeller forces it out. These snow blowers can throw snow up to 50 feet or farther, especially when users lubricate the chute using a nonstick snow blower spray

Three-stage snow blowers have an auger, an impeller, and an additional grinder that shreds chunks of ice. They can throw snow extremely far but are often limited to commercial use since they’re so expensive. 

Compatibility and Horsepower

When choosing a riding lawn mower snow blower combo, compatibility with your lawn mower is essential. Smaller mowers may lack the power and traction necessary to maximize efficacy, and not all brands of attachments are compatible with all brands of mowers. 

To ensure compatibility, you may want to start by looking for a lawn mower snow blower combo that’s made specifically for the lawn mower’s model number. You can generally find this information on the manufacturer’s website, or you can call or email them for help. You’ll also want to make sure your garden tractor has sufficient horsepower (generally 16 hp or more) and may want either four-wheel drive or a set of tire chains.

Clearing Capacity

Lawn mower snow blower combo attachments come in various clearing capacities, which are the widths of the snow they can remove with each pass. Choosing the right size depends on the area that needs to be cleared and the power of the tractor.

For standard driveway snow removals, a 40- to 50-inch riding lawn mower with a snow blower should do the trick. This size snow blower doesn’t require a large, heavy-duty machine and can clear most driveways in three or four passes. 

For larger driveways and parking areas, a 50- to 60-inch lawn mower snow blower attachment will usually fit the bill. These require a bigger tractor but fewer passes to clear wider areas.

For very long driveways or large parking lots, a 60-inch or larger lawn mower snow blower combination will be ideal. Rather than needing you to make four passes to clear a given area, a snow blower with a wider clearing capacity may do it in two—half the amount of time. However, these machines require large tractors with 25 to 50 hp. 

Ease of Use 

Certain additional features may make some lawn mower snow blower combos easier to use than others. While these features are more about convenience than performance, finishing a big job quicker and with a bit more comfort can be a big deal on a cold day.

  • Electric lift systems: these allow you to raise and lower the snow blower from the seat rather than forcing you to get off the machine and find the right height manually
  • Adjustable chutes and deflectors: these allow you to change the angle of the discharge chute as you work, helping you blow snow in the direction you intend 
  • Adjustable skid shoes and replaceable wear plates: these allow the snow blower to move along the ground without damaging the blade 

When we asked Francisco Fuenmayor, insured handyman and snow-removal expert at LocalProBook, which of these features he thinks makes the biggest difference during big jobs, he said, “An electric lift system is a game-changer, especially if you have back issues or are frequently adjusting the height of the snow blower. It saves a ton of effort compared to manually lifting and lowering the attachment.”

The Advantages of Owning a Lawn Mower Snow Blower Combo

Even with a traditional snow blower, removing snow from a long driveway can be exhausting. A lawn mower snow blower attachment makes the job easier by allowing you to sit down and steer instead of pushing a heavy machine. Combo units also have more power than standard snow blowers, enabling them to remove more snow without bogging down. Some models can handle more than 20 inches at a time.

In addition to power, lawn mower snow blower combos offer greater versatility. Unlike snow plows, they can navigate walkways and sidewalks, making them ideal for snow removal across an entire property. 

Lawn mower snow blowers are:

  • Easier to use than traditional snow blowers
  • Better for removing larger amounts of snow
  • More versatile than plows or snow blowers alone

FAQs

The following section aims to answer any questions you may still have, covering topics like how deep snow combination machines can handle and whether lawn mowers and snow blowers use the same type of gas. 

Q. Is there such a thing as a riding snow blower?

Most riding snow blowers for residential use are just large snow blower attachments installed on compact garden tractors. While there are a few actual riding snow blowers available, we didn’t include any on our list as they are incredibly expensive and yet offer enough power to make them worth their price.

Q. Do lawn mower snow blowers work?

Yes, lawn mower snow blowers work. Unlike electric snow blowers, which use batteries or outlet power, or traditional snow blowers with gas engines, lawn mower snow blowers run off the tractor’s engine. They essentially turn lawn tractors into sit-down snow blowers, making these tools useful year-round.

Q. Is it possible to make a snow blower from an existing lawn mower?

Yes, you can turn your existing lawn mower into a snow blower if your mower has enough power and you can find a compatible snow blower. See the Compatibility and Horsepower section above for additional information.

Q. Can a snow blower be attached to a zero-turn mower?

Some zero-turn mowers have snow blower attachments, but it’s important to check that they’re compatible before purchasing one.

Q. What is a two-stage snow blower?

Two-stage snow blowers have an auger that scoops now and an impeller that throws it. Single-stage snow blowers, on the other hand, scoop and throw snow using power from their augers alone. Since two-stage machines can throw snow and ice further than single-stage models, they generally come at a higher price.

Q. How do I maintain a lawn mower snow blower combo?

You can maintain a lawn mower snow blower combo by following the same general steps found in our guide on how to maintain a snow blower. It’s also a good idea to refer to the owner’s manuals for both parts of your unit for additional recommendations.

Q. Do snow blowers and lawn mowers use the same gas?

Yes, most gas snow blowers and lawn mowers will work with unleaded gas that has an octane rating of 87 or higher or an ethanol-gas blend with less than 10 percent ethanol (E10). Still, you should always check your owner’s manual to see if your equipment has specific fuel requirements.

Q. How deep can a snowblower handle?

The depth of snow a snow blower can handle will vary based on which type of snow blower it is as well as its size. The clearing depth offered by your machine could be anywhere from 5 or 6 inches for a single-stage machine all the way up to 20 inches or more for a lawn mower snow blower. 

The post Use Your Lawn Mower Year-Round With This Handy Attachment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-11T12:47:28-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Get Rid of Caterpillars]]>Try these easy DIY pest solutions to rid plants of pesky caterpillars and take back control of your garden greens.

The post How to Get Rid of Caterpillars appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-get-rid-of-caterpillars/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=77279Tue, 11 Feb 2025 11:14:24 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYGarden PestsGardeningPest ControlWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

While backyard gardens attract some “pests” that are actually beneficial to the ecosystem, they also appeal to a number of insects that are detrimental to plants. While there are caterpillars, which are the larvae of moths and butterflies in the order Lepidoptera, that gardeners welcome to their properties—planting extra pots of dill for swallowtail caterpillars, and making sure there’s milkweed for monarchs—there are others that are unwelcome whenever they turn up: Tomato hornworms, tent caterpillars, and cabbage loopers, for example, have big appetites and can decimate gardens, and even trees, rapidly.

Getting rid of caterpillars in your garden is doable, but you have to act quickly and be diligent. These all-natural methods can help you regain control of your landscape.

1. Hand-Pick Them

A nighttime photo of a tomato hornworm on a plant glowing under black light.
Photo: giantveggiegardener | Photographer: Elodie Holmes

SUPPLIES

5-gallon bucket
Dish soap
Gardening gloves

When it comes to caterpillar removal, the fastest way to address the problem is to pick them off by hand.

Fill a bucket about halfway with hot water and a couple of tablespoons of mild dish soap, pull on a pair of rubber or canvas gardening gloves, and head out to your garden to do a different kind of picking.

This time, you’ll want to lift caterpillars from the leaves—checking all of the undersides, where caterpillars are known to hide—and drop them one by one into the bucket to drown. The protective hand gear will ensure that you aren’t stung by the spines on some varieties of caterpillar as you handle them, like the saddleback.

While this method is the most proactive, it also may require repeating to remove the entire population.

Pro tip: Removing tomato hornworms is easiest to do at night. Bring a black-light flashlight with you because hornworms glow in the dark.

Tried-and-True Advice

 

“Most caterpillars don’t do much damage to garden plants, so I leave them alone. However, I do take action against cabbage loopers, which love munching on my brassicas!

I find the best way to control cabbage loopers and other pest caterpillars is with physical barriers. By keeping vulnerable crops protected with row covers from the very beginning of the season, moths can’t lay their eggs on my plants and I have minimal caterpillar issues. Sometimes I also plant additional dill, parsley, and mustard plants on the side of my garden to act as sacrificial trap crops to entice caterpillars away from my more valuable produce.”

Lauren Landers, Contributing Writer

2. Empty the Nest

SUPPLIES

5-gallon bucket
Dish soap
Broom

A more aggressive way to attack the problem is to destroy the caterpillars’ nest.

You’ll often find these silk-spun homes hanging from tree limbs. Simply punch your implement of choice (either a long sharpened stick or broom handle work well) into the nest itself, then spin and scrape along its interior to remove all of its inhabitants. Afterward, dispose of the nest and its contents in a bucket of warm, soapy water to drown remaining caterpillars.

For the best chance of success, attack the camp early in the morning or late at night to guarantee that the majority of the caterpillars will be in the nest. While immediately effective, this method may also require repeating should any remaining caterpillars rebuild their home.

3. Spray Bt

Portrait of the larva or caterpillars of a cabbage looper moth.
Photo: Buddy Mays / Getty Images

SUPPLIES

Bacillus thuringiensis
Gardening gloves

Homeowners who aren’t interested in hunting and handling these pests can opt to administer the hands-off—and hand-down most effective—extermination solution, Bacillus thuringiensis (Bt).

This naturally occurring soil bacteria kills caterpillars in a matter of days by destroying the lining of their stomachs. Simply dust its powder or mist its liquid form directly onto your garden plants and wait for the caterpillars to get hungry.

Apply without worry about negative side effects: Bt is completely safe for the plants, their pollinators, pets, and humans. The bacteria is only toxic to caterpillars, as well as some moths and worms who’d like to munch on your greens.

Reapply after a week or two if your infestation still exists, as your first application would have broken down in direct sunlight and rainfall.

4. Make Homemade Caterpillar Deterrent

SUPPLIES

Spray bottle
Molasses
Dish soap
Garlic
Vegetable oil

If you’re not ready to shell out for caterpillar control, you can mix up a home remedy to get the job done. For plants, a regular spray of a molasses solution (1 tablespoon molasses, 1 teaspoon dish soap, and a liter of warm water) or a garlic solution (three crushed cloves of garlic, 1 tablespoon vegetable oil, 1 teaspoon dish soap, and a liter of water) will deter insects from munching.

The post How to Get Rid of Caterpillars appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-11T11:14:24-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Backpack Sprayers for Easier Yard Work ]]>The best backpack sprayers make easy work of applying fertilizers, weed killers, & insecticides. We tested top picks—see how they perform.

The post The Best Backpack Sprayers for Easier Yard Work  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-backpack-sprayer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=108191Tue, 11 Feb 2025 10:47:08 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Built for comfort and ease of use, the backpack sprayer is becoming a go-to tool for gardeners, landscapers, and pest-control professionals—as well as home dwellers who simply want to enjoy a weed- and insect-free outdoor space. A backpack sprayer’s ergonomic design features adjustable shoulder straps and a spray wand, allowing you to carry fertilizer, herbicide, pesticide, or other liquids on your back rather than hauling around a heavy metal cart or handheld manual sprayer. 

We tested and reviewed a variety of outstanding backpack sprayers. We also spoke to Tim Sherrer, owner of Expest Exterminating based in Snellville, Georgia, who shared his pest control expertise. Preview our top picks below, and then keep reading to learn how these tools work, features to consider, and how to pick the best model for your space and style. Later on, check out our reviews of the best backpack sprayers for lawn and garden maintenance.

  1. BEST OVERALL MANUAL: Field King Max 190348 Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST OVERALL MOTORIZED: Field King 190515 Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review 
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Chapin 61800 4-Gallon Manual Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
  4. UPGRADE PICK: My4Sons M4 4-Gallon Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST PROFESSIONAL: PetraTools HD5000 Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST HOBBYIST: Chapin 61900 4-Gallon Manual Backpack Sprayer 
    Jump to Review
  7. ALSO CONSIDER MANUAL: Solo 425 4-Gallon Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER MOTORIZED: PetraTools HD4000 4-Gallon Backpack Sprayer
    Jump to Review
The Best Backpack Sprayer Options
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila Photo: Mark Wolfe

How We Tested the Best Backpack Sprayers

We considered these backpack sprayers from a home-dweller’s perspective. Although several of our picks offer truly professional-level performance and durability, our testing criteria centered on basic functionality, ease of use, operator comfort, and overall value. 

To gauge mobility and operational comfort, we filled each sprayer to capacity with plain water and walked a spray route: putting on and taking off the backpack, walking between house and foundation plants, opening and closing a gate, uphill and downhill, and over small obstacles. Scoring favored sprayers that stayed most secure with less “slosh” and that generally felt most comfortable.

We then pressurized each sprayer, either by switching it on or by manually pumping and tried each nozzle. We noted ease and comfort of operation, speed of attaining initial pressure, motor noise, and drips from spray tips after releasing the spray trigger. The best backpack sprayers were easy to operate, versatile, fast, quiet, and drip-free.

Testing Stats
Products tested 8
Hours spent testing 4 to 6 hours
Tests performed6
Price range$150 to $200

Our Top Picks

We tried each of the following sprayers in our backyard testing program. Read on to learn their individual features and benefits, how each one performed, and why we included them in this lineup of the best backpack sprayers.

Best Overall Manual

Field King Max 190348 Backpack Sprayer

 The Best Backpack Sprayer Option: Field King Max 190348 Backpack Sprayer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Very comfortable harness system can be worn for long periods of time
  • 4 interchangeable nozzles included with purchase to satisfy multiple users’ preferences 
  • High maximum psi of 150; suitable for small- to large-scale spreading

What We Don’t Like

  • Manual operation increases user fatigue over extended periods of use

Specs  

  • Pressure: 150 pounds per square inch (psi)
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Manual

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Comfort 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

If you’re looking for excellent performance with long-lasting comfort, the manual Field King Max 190348 is bound to deliver on both fronts. It features a 150 max psi— adequate power for most applications—and an internal pump design to contain leaks within the tank. 

There are four nozzles: one for stream-to-cone spray patterns, one for a wide flat fan spray pattern, one for a narrow flat fan spray pattern, and one for a foaming spray. While a bit of muscle is required for operation, we found the Field King Max to be the best manual backpack sprayer we tested, largely due to its harness system. It isn’t especially well padded, but it includes a hip belt, sternum strap, and wide shoulder straps that did not dig into the shoulders during testing. It also had the least amount of drip after releasing the spray trigger, when compared with the other manual sprayers. 

Get the Field King 190348 backpack sprayer at Amazon, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Gemplers.

Best Overall Motorized

Field King 190515 Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer

 Field King 190515 Battery Powered Backpack Sprayer on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powered by rechargeable 20V lithium-ion battery for long usage times 
  • Padded shoulder straps and hip belt keep the unit in place comfortably; most comfortable battery-powered sprayer tested 
  • No drips when the spray trigger is released; no wasted product 

What We Don’t Like

  • Low psi limits this option’s uses; may not be ideal for some tasks 
  • Battery must be removed for charging

Specs  

  • Pressure: 40 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Battery-powered

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Comfort 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4.7/5

With a 4-gallon tank and a 4-hour battery charge, the Field King 190515 backpack sprayer is ideal for an enthusiastic amateur landscaper. It features a fully padded harness to cushion your shoulders against muscle strain, a preset rating of 40 psi that users can increase if necessary, and a lockable shutoff on the wand to help reduce hand fatigue. A built-in carry handle and wand storage make transportation simple. 

In our tests, the Field King 190515 was the most comfortable to carry battery-powered backpack sprayer, thanks to a generous amount of padding in the shoulder straps and hip belt. At 40 psi, it offered the lowest pressure rating, but that was still plenty of pressure to apply a variety of spray patterns, from a fine mist to a coarse shower of heavier droplets. The lithium-ion battery saves significant weight compared to the lead acid batteries in other sprayers, and the price is comparatively affordable. Good performance and excellent value.

Get the Field King 190515 backpack sprayer at Amazon or Forestry Suppliers.

Best Bang for the Buck

Chapin 61800 4-Gallon Manual Backpack Sprayer

 Chapin 61800 4Gal Backpack Sprayer on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable brass spray nozzle accommodates users during multiple tasks
  • Great price for this sprayer’s quality; can last for years of use 
  • Clean, efficient operation for weeds, fertilizer, and pest control 

What We Don’t Like

  • Minimal harness support and padding; may dig into the user if worn for extended periods
  • Manual operation can increase user fatigue; may not be ideal for some users

Specs  

  • Pressure: 60 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Manual

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Comfort 3/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 3/5; Value 4/5

Users are unlikely to make a mess when filling the tank of this affordable backpack sprayer, thanks to a large 5-inch-diameter opening that helps prevent spills. It weighs about 9 pounds when the tank is empty and comes with adjustable padded shoulder straps to help support the tank when it’s full. The adjustable brass spray nozzle allows users to change the spray pattern from a fine mist to a coarse stream. This backpack sprayer from Chapin has a maximum psi of 60, and it requires manual pumping to keep the sprayer pressurized while in use. 

When we tested this sprayer, it became apparent that Chapin saved costs on the harness system to preserve tank and pump quality at a bargain price. The manual pump and tank system proved easy to use and was efficiently designed. The spray tip dripped only slightly after the trigger was released. The bare-bones harness system, which consisted of thinly padded shoulder straps and a minimal lumbar pad at the base of the tank, was fine for limited work with a partially filled tank but was not comfortable for extended use.

Get the Chapin 61800 backpack sprayer at Amazon or Gemplers.

Upgrade Pick

My4Sons M4 4-Gallon Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer

 My4Sons M4 4-Gallon Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Accessible variable pressure switch can adjust the pressure of the product 
  • Automatically maintains psi between 40 and 60 for pest control, fertilizers, and weeds
  • Excellent shoulder-strap padding supports the users’ back and hips while in use 
  • Sprays up to 30 feet; suitable for large-scale product applications 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than the other battery-powered sprayers; may wear on some users 
  • Cannot be used if the battery isn’t charged

Specs  

  • Pressure: 60 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Battery-powered

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Comfort 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.3/5

This backpack sprayer from My4Sons is a premium product that comes at a premium price. It includes such impressive features as a variable pressure switch that allows the user to adjust the output pressure to the optimal level. It also boasts a variety of nozzles so users can switch between them, depending on the job and personal preference.

The battery-powered backpack sprayer has a motorized pump that works continuously to keep the pressure inside the sprayer between 40 and 60 psi. When used with the right nozzle and held at the right angle, this pressure allows the unit to spray up to 30 feet in a horizontal direction. Just keep in mind that even if the 4-gallon tank is filled and ready to go, the sprayer will not run unless the battery is charged. 

In testing, we really liked the build of this My4Sons sprayer. The combination of a low-profile tank and thick padded shoulder straps provides excellent comfort, balance, and maneuverability. The powerful pump brought the tank up to pressure in a matter of seconds and ran quieter than other motorized sprayers tested. Pressure was excellent and no drips, and we felt it was definitely worth the added cost for those who use a sprayer frequently.

Get the My4Sons backpack sprayer at Amazon

Best Professional

PetraTools HD5000 Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer

 The Best Backpack Sprayer Option PetraTools HD5000 Battery-Powered Backpack Sprayer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-volume tank is suitable for large-scale product applications; perfect for weeding, fertilizing, and pest control 
  • Converts from backpack to cart for increased portability and mobility
  • Variable pressure switch can adjust the output level of the product for added versatility 
  • Includes 4-foot and 100-foot spray hoses depending upon the application area

What We Don’t Like

  • Oversize tank can be cumbersome in backpack mode
  • Cannot be used if the battery isn’t charged

Specs  

  • Pressure: 80 psi
  • Tank capacity: 6.5 gallons
  • Type: Battery-powered

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Comfort 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Professionals in the market for a new backpack sprayer may appreciate the PetraTools backpack sprayer’s 6.5-gallon tank and its rugged steel cart for hauling the unit from the vehicle to the work site. It features a 100-foot hose for treating large areas without moving the sprayer from the cart. 

This battery-powered sprayer provides a base setting of 70 psi that can be increased to suit user needs—a great versatility factor when working on a variety of yards over the course of a long day.

This convertible backpack/cart sprayer offers excellent versatility for intensive spraying in a compact area or dispersed use over a larger area. In testing we found that the 6.5-gallon spray tank is too heavy to completely fill for backpack mode but a good size for the cart. The conversion from backpack to cart mode was quick and uncomplicated. The pump offers ample pressure to apply common lawn and garden chemicals, and the wand operated drip-free.

Get the PetraTools backpack sprayer at Amazon

Best Hobbyist

Chapin 61900 4-Gallon Manual Backpack Sprayer

 The Best Backpack Sprayer Option Chapin 61900 4-Gallon Manual Backpack Sprayer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wand-mounted pressure gauge monitors spray pressure
  • Multiple spray tips included for various spray patterns
  • 3-stage filtration system resists clogging

What We Don’t Like

  • Steel spray wand may not be appropriate for use with some chemicals
  • Manual operation can increase user fatigue

Specs  

  • Pressure: 60 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Manual

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Comfort 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4.3/5

For versatility and safety, the Chapin 61900 sprayer can handle some of the most volatile fertilizers, weed killers, and pest control treatments in use today. It features Viton seals, which are specially manufactured to be chemically resistant, and a three-stage filtration system to prevent clogging. 

A wand-mounted pressure gauge and a control flow valve both assure the user that the spray and pressure levels are consistent, while three different nozzles are included for direct stream, fan spray, and foaming applications. Great for home use or for industry professionals who need a single sprayer suited for multiple applications.

In our tests, the Chapin 61900 proved comfortable and capable as well as affordable. The wide shoulder straps and hip belt provided good comfort and excellent stability. The built-in pressure gauge gave a sure indication of adequate operating pressure, which the other manual sprayers tested did not offer. For just a few dollars more than our budget pick, the price appears to be a bargain for this upgraded sprayer.

Get the Chapin 61900 backpack sprayer at Amazon.

Also Consider Manual

Solo 425 4-Gallon Backpack Sprayer

 Solo 4 gal Backpack Sprayer on a white background
Photo: Ace Hardware

What We Like

  • Comfortable padded straps can support the back and hips of the user 
  • Collapsible carry handle provides added versatility and maneuverability
  • 5 spray tips included with purchase depending on the application type 
  • Four pressure settings integrated; suitable for small- to large-scale applications 

What We Don’t Like

  • No padding in the lumbar area or on the hip belt; may not be ideal for some users

Specs  

  • Pressure: 60 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Manual

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Comfort 3/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5

Gardeners looking for a durable sprayer for regular or intermittent use should consider the Solo backpack sprayer. It offers reliable operation and quality components, like a manual diaphragm pump that produces up to 60 psi, a full array of five spray nozzles for customized applications, an unbreakable wand, and padded shoulder straps. This sprayer is suitable for use with liquid concentrates, wettable powders, and bleach solutions that could damage other sprayers.

In our tests, this Solo sprayer came up to full pressure quickly and produced an excellent spray pattern with no drips. It was comfortable and easy to carry when half full, but at capacity, the shoulder straps dug in a bit too much for comfort. The plastic spray wand provided some flexibility and, as required equipment for use with bleach solutions and certain other chemicals, makes a good all-purpose applicator. 

Get the Solo backpack sprayer at Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Gemplers.

Also Consider Motorized

PetraTools HD4000 4-Gallon Backpack Sprayer

 2 PetraTools HD4000 4-Gallon Backpack Sprayers, one on someone's back
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable pressure output depending upon the application type and size 
  • Automatic pump to maintain 70 psi while spraying 
  • Low-profile tank is easier to carry that some comparable options 
  • Well-padded shoulder straps are comfortable for the user 

What We Don’t Like

  • Thin nylon waist belt does not relieve shoulder pressure 
  • No padding in the lumbar area; may not be ideal for those with back problems

Specs  

  • Pressure: 70 psi
  • Tank capacity: 4 gallons
  • Type: Battery-powered

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.7/5; Comfort 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.3/5

Capable of operating for up to 8 hours on a single battery charge while maintaining a constant pressure of 70 psi, this PetraTools backpack sprayer is an excellent choice for anyone with a lot of ground to cover. 

The 4-gallon tank can handle large yards without frequent refills, and it’s translucent, so users can see how much liquid is left at any time. With padded straps for added comfort and a wide-mouth tank lid to offset spills, this motorized backpack sprayer will keep the operator working comfortably all day long. 

We really liked this PetraTools sprayer’s low-profile tank and padded shoulder straps. It felt comfortable and well balanced for limited use. Unfortunately, the thin nylon waist belt only provides lateral stabilization without relieving weight from the shoulders, which makes it less than ideal for extended use. The pump worked quickly and was fairly quiet—nearly on the level of our upgrade pick and for about $80 less. 

Get the PetraTools backpack sprayer at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

What to Consider When Choosing a Backpack Sprayer

Before opting for the first hobbyist or professional backpack sprayer you see, take some time to familiarize yourself with the various product factors likely to lead you to the right decision. Consider the pressure (psi), tank capacity, the type of liquid delivery system, and the type of pump that pressurizes the backpack sprayer.

Pressure

Pounds per square inch (psi) is the unit of measure identifying the amount of pressure a backpack herbicide sprayer can propel through its nozzle. The average for a backpack sprayer is around 70 psi, but smaller models can use as little as 40 psi, and a commercial backpack sprayer may use as much as 150 psi. 

Pressure is important to ensure that a backpack sprayer operates effectively. Too little pressure will produce an uneven spray that reduces the effectiveness of its contents, while too much will prove excessive for a smaller yard. 

If you have a large yard with many hard-to-reach spots, or you are a professional who works in many different-size spaces, a sprayer with a psi rating of 70 or above is your best bet. For those with average-size or smaller yards, a moderate rating between 40 and 70 psi is more than enough to spray your space.

Piston vs. Diaphragm

Backpack sprayers generally come in one of two types of liquid delivery systems: piston pump and diaphragm pump. 

  • A piston pump works by drawing liquid from the tank into an enclosed chamber on the upstroke and pushing the liquid out through the outlet valve or nozzle on the downstroke. Piston pump sprayers are more popular with the average home dweller because of their simple design, easy accessibility for repairs, and beneficial psi ratings.
  • A diaphragm pump is designed for the safety of professionals who use potent pest control and weed killer chemicals. It is a sealed system that works by moving liquid from one side of a chamber to the other with a diaphragm so that one side is always full and one side is always empty. The diaphragm pump cannot produce the same pressure as the piston pump but is better suited to pros because it’s made of more chemically resistant materials.

Manual vs. Motorized

Backpack sprayers use an internal pump to draw liquid out of the chamber, through a hose, and out through a wand and nozzle. This pump can be operated manually, or an electric backpack sprayer will often use a motorized system—the pricier option.

Manual backpack sprayers operate via a hand pump attached to the backpack chamber. Pumping manually for an extended period can cause muscle fatigue and pain, so while this style of sprayer is fine for smaller yards, once-per-season jobs, and the average home dweller, it’s less suited to professionals who have to spray for hours at a time. Manual backpack sprayers cost as little as $40 to as much as $150, on average. 

Motorized backpack sprayers are powered either by battery or gas, with a battery backpack sprayer offering more versatility and a simpler setup. A motorized sprayer automatically pumps the liquid from the backpack chamber to the wand, requiring no physical work by the user. Intended for large projects and long workdays, a motorized sprayer (which can run between about $100 and $500) is a better choice for the busy professional who’ll rely on it daily. 

That said, Sherrer explains, “Most homeowners can use a backpack sprayer with a hand pump for effective results.” A motorized option may only be worth the jump in price for those looking for a more heavy-duty option to use more often.

Tank Capacity

Sprayers are available in a tank capacity range between 2 and 7 gallons. Carry smaller-capacity sprayers with a handle, and tote the largest tanks with a wheeled cart. A 4-gallon backpack sprayer is considered to be about average in size.

Sprayers that fall between these two size extremes are true backpack sprayers—light enough to carry on your back but too heavy to lug around by hand. For typical jobs, such as fertilizing a lawn or spraying an insect infestation, a 4-gallon tank can do the trick for a yard between 5,000 and 10,000 square feet. 

Additional Features

Backpack sprayers may include a variety of features, such as a built-in gauge to monitor the pressure of the unit while in use, extra padding in the shoulder straps for added comfort, a foaming nozzle, and a foldaway pump handle that won’t get in the way while spraying. Larger models may offer an extended hose and wheeled cart that can be used for more complex yards and heavier tanks. 

“Some backpack sprayers are designed with detachable and changeable nozzles,” Sherrer says. “Some nozzles produce a pin stream, which is useful when spraying in cracks and crevices or when a precise application is needed. Fan spray nozzles are useful when applied over a larger area.” He also adds that “the ability to adjust the application flow will make any sprayer more versatile and effective.”

Tips for Using a Backpack Sprayer

Backpack sprayers are helpful tools for quickly and efficiently treating the yard and garden with liquid fertilizers, herbicides, and insecticides. But to ensure against over- or under-spraying an area, it’s important to keep the same walking speed and distance from the target during use.

Additionally, users should ensure that the backpack sprayer is properly pressurized at all times so that it’s easier to maintain an even spraying pressure. By taking the time to balance the pressure, the same amount of solution will be applied to each area of the yard and garden.

Before starting to use a backpack sprayer, adjust the shoulder straps so that the unit fits properly. You don’t want to have to deal with a shifting tank of fertilizer, water, or pesticide while working because it will take extra effort to control the moving weight, increasing fatigue.

In general, remember to:

  • Maintain a uniform walking speed.
  • Balance the spraying pressure.
  • Adjust the straps before use for a secure fit.

FAQs

Buying and using a backpack sprayer brings up several questions. We’ve answered some of the common questions below.

Q. What do you put in a backpack sprayer?

You can fill a backpack sprayer with almost any liquid solution that has a similar consistency to water. This includes insecticide, herbicide, and liquid fertilizers. Just make sure the solution isn’t too corrosive or volatile, as these dangerous substances might eat through the walls of the sprayer. 

Q. Are backpack sprayers safe?

Backpack sprayers are safe to use as long as they are filled with suitable solutions and proper precautions are taken to protect the eyes, skin, and respiratory system during use. The reason for the added personal protection is that when the liquid sprays from the backpack, some might get caught in the wind and blow back toward the user. While this wouldn’t matter much with water, it could be hazardous when the sprayer is filled with pesticide or herbicide.

Q. How far will a backpack sprayer spray? 

The maximum distance that a sprayer can spray a liquid solution is determined by the maximum psi of the unit, the type of nozzle, the wind direction, the force of the wind, and the angle of the spray wand. On average, a backpack sprayer can spray up to about 10 to 20 feet, though there are models that can reach over 30 feet.

Q. How do you clean a backpack sprayer? 

To clean a backpack sprayer after using it to apply a volatile chemical like herbicide or pesticide, follow these simple steps:
Responsibly empty any excess solution from the sprayer tank and add about half a tank of water. 
Flush the sprayer system by using the sprayer until the tank is empty again. 
Fill the tank half full with water again, this time adding any cleaning agents or neutralizing solutions that can help to remove remnants of the herbicide or pesticide solution. 
Open all recirculation lines and any other hoses on the backpack sprayer.
Shake or agitate the unit to ensure the cleaning solution reaches every inch of the backpack sprayer.
Fill the tank to the top with water, and agitate again before emptying the sprayer.
Refill the sprayer with water to rinse out any remaining cleaning solution.

The post The Best Backpack Sprayers for Easier Yard Work  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-11T10:47:08-05:00
<![CDATA[11 Plants That Look Stunning in a Home Landscape With or Without Blooms]]>The post 11 Plants That Look Stunning in a Home Landscape With or Without Blooms appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/landscaping-plants/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426942Tue, 11 Feb 2025 10:42:45 -0500Lawn & GardenGardeningLandscapingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When searching for showstopping landscaping plants, many homeowners gravitate toward plants that bloom. But foliage doesn’t have to be merely backdrop scenery; it can take center stage. Through color, shape, or texture, some plants produce dramatic foliage that can sometimes rival flowers.

Foliage typically outlasts flowers, providing allure even when flowering plants aren’t in bloom. Foliage may also be a solution for shadier areas where flowering plants struggle, or it might complement modern architectural styles better than the bosomy blooms found in cottage gardens. Striking as their foliage may be, some plants also produce flowers, providing a one-two punch of beauty.

1. Red Twig Dogwood (Cornus sericea)

Red twig dogwood shrub outside of a home.
Photo: Clive Nichols via Getty Images

Prized for its pop of color against an often-snowy winter background, the red twig dogwood is a four-season plant, producing fragrant white flowers in spring and, in summer, offering variegated foliage, which turns rose-red in autumn and is adorned with red berries, before falling to reveal its brilliant red branches.

A fast-grower, this shrub can get quite large—up to 9 feet tall and 12 feet wide—but can (and should) be pruned and even periodically trimmed to the ground to control growth. Red twig dogwood is easy to grow, even in boggy conditions, and is as popular with pollinators, and resistant to deer.

Best For: Moist areas that receive full to partial sun; can be a specimen or part of a thicket
Hardiness Zones: 2-7

2. Canna Lily (Canna)

Canna lilies planted in a home landscape.
Photo: Raththaphon Wanjit/Moment via Getty Images

Canna lilies add a tropical look to the garden. Reaching heights of up to 10 feet tall, they can also serve as a seasonal privacy screen, with their large, green-and-bronze striped or variegated banana-like leaves along tall stalks inducing tropical vibes. While they produce stems of showy lily-shaped flowers in red, orange, yellow, or salmon, the foliage itself is a powerful draw.

In northern zones, otherwise easy-to-grow canna rhizomes must be dug in late fall and stored. They can be re-planted in late spring. When planted in full sun, they reward the gardener with blooms all summer.

Best For: Garden beds, borders, containers, and sunny areas where tall plants are desired
Hardiness Zones: 6-10

3. Caladium (Caladium x hortulanum)

Caladium plant growing in a home landscape.
Photo: Alexandre Morin-Laprise/Moment via Getty Images

Considered an annual in northern gardens, caladiums offer a tropical touch of color with their large, translucent heart- or arrowhead-shaped leaves in green, red, pink, and white, with mottling or stripes created by dramatically conspicuous veining. These lovely landscaping can be brought indoors to overwinter or tubers can be dug and stored for planting the following spring.

Capable of producing tiny flower spikes, their foliage, which lasts throughout the growing season, is the main attraction. Best suited for partial shade, caladiums are ideal for borders and containers. But they come with a caution: they’re toxic to cats, dogs, and horses.

Best For: Partial shade, borders, containers, indoors or out
Hardiness Zones: 9-11

4.  Rex Begonia (Begonia rex-cultorum)

Rex begonia planted around a home.
Photo: Amelia Martin/500Px Plus via Getty Images

With large swirled, spotted, spiraled, ruffled, or winged leaves in shades of green, red, silver, and purple, who needs flowers? Except that Rex begonias, sometimes known as painted-leaf begonias or fancy-leaf begonias, do produce dainty little flowers that add to this fibrous plant’s charms.

What doesn’t add to its charm is its fussiness. They need bright indirect light: too little light forces dormancy, while too much burns. They like regular water, but too much causes leaf drop, withering and ultimately, death.

These small plants grown from rhizomes can be rewarding, but are toxic to people and pets.

Best For: Shady flower beds or potted plants, inside and out
Hardiness Zones: 10-12

5. Hosta (Hosta lancifolia)

Hostas growing outside of a home greenhouse.
Photo: Johner Images/Johner Images Royalty-Free via Getty Images

Known for brightening shady corners around the yard, the herbaceous hosta is an easy-care perennial grown from rhizomes. It produces large leaves in a range of shapes, textures, and colors, including shades of green, gold, blue, and variegated patterns.

Capable of growing in full shade, hostas perform better when they receive at least some sun. Given adequate light, many varieties send up tall stalks of tiny purplish-white flowers, but it’s the foliage that is the true attraction. While deer love them and can devour mass plantings, hostas are toxic to pets.

Best For: Shady beds with rich, well-drained soil
Hardiness Zones: 3-9

6. Ornamental Kale (Brassica oleracea)

Ornamental kale growing in a home landscape.
Photo: Christophe Lehenaff/Moment via Getty Images

While other plants begin dying off in autumn, ornamental kale withstands temperatures as low as 5 degrees. Bred for looks over flavor, ornamental kale is nevertheless edible and may appeal to local wildlife, but its vibrant purples, roses, and whites on broad serrated, curly, or fringed leaves that form flower-like rosettes make ornamental kale a popular fall favorite.

Easily grown in sunny locations during the cooler spring and fall seasons, ornamental kale prefers the moist, well-drained soil conditions consistent with those times of year. Spreading up to one foot wide, it grows only about 15 inches tall, making it an ideal low border plant. 

Best For: Ground cover, edging in cool weather
Hardiness Zones:  2-11

7. Dusty Miller (Jacobaea maritima)

Dusty miller plant growing in a home landscape.
Photo: Ciara Houghton/Moment via Getty Images

Prized for its soft, silvery, deeply lobed leaves that adopt an almost fern-like quality, dusty miller is a common garden companion to brightly flowered annuals. An evergreen perennial in southern climes, it’s used as an annual in northern regions, where its fuzzy, feathery leaves add texture to the landscape.

Drought-tolerant, dusty miller prefers full sun, but tolerates partial shade. Capable of producing small yellow flowers, this low-maintenance plant is most often used for its neutral, complementary foliage. A well-behaved plant that doesn’t spread more than 2 feet, it is poisonous if ingested.

Best For: Borders, edging, containers
Hardiness Zones: 8-11

8. Lamb’s Ear (Stachys byzantina)

Lamb's ear plants growing outside of a home.
Photo: Keiko Iwabuchi/Moment via Getty Images

Another silver siren of the garden, lamb’s ear is an herbaceous perennial known for its plump, fuzzy silver leaves. A fast-spreading, drought-tolerant, deer-resistant, low-growing (12 to 18 inches) groundcover, it adds pleasing texture to garden beds and pathways and acts as a contrasting neutral to bright blooms of companion plants.

Best grown in full sun, this fuzzy-wuzzy tolerates partial sun as well as poor soil, but it doesn’t like too much dampness. Although new cultivars don’t bloom, older varieties may produce small flower spikes of pink, purple, or white in spring and summer.

Best For: Groundcover, garden beds, edging
Hardiness Zones: 4-9

9. Coral Bells (Heuchera sanguinea)

Coral bells growing in a home landscape design.
Photo: Grace Cary/Moment via Getty Images

A short-lived perennial foliage plant native to North America, coral bells are available in numerous varieties and hybrids. In general, the plant develops into round mounds with a crown at its base. Lobed leaves may be green, bronze-green, lime green, gold, deep purple, or wine-red, particularly on the underside, which produces a vivacious effect in a breeze.

Given partial sun to full shade and consistently moist soil, these small (6 to 18 inch tall) plants produce masses of small, delicate, almost airy red or pink bell-shaped flowers on tall stems in spring or early summer. 

Best For: woodlands, rock gardens, borders, containers, groundcover
Hardiness Zones: 4-9

10. Pink Muhly Grass (Muhlenbergia capillaris)

Pink Muhly Grass growing outside of a home in the front yard.
Photo: Nobutoshi Akao/Moment via Getty Images

Pink muhly grass, also called pink hair grass, makes a statement with its masses of pink flower panicles gently blowing in the wind atop 3-foot-tall dark green clumping foliage. “Ornamental grasses provide a soothing sound throughout your landscape, especially on a breezy day,” observes Matt Morelli, region technical manager for TruGreen. “Not only do they sway in the wind, these grasses can also provide privacy, depth, and character to the landscape with very little maintenance requirements.”

The pink plumes provide late season color, but the bushy grass adds interest all year. Grown best in full sun, this deer-resistant, native ornamental grass thrives in even the poorest soils.

Best For: Sunny spaces with good drainage
Hardiness Zones: 5-11

11. Jacob’s Ladder (Polemonium)

Jacob's Ladder plants growing outside of a home.
Photo: Walter Siegmund, CC BY-SA 3.0 via Wikimedia Commons

Jacob’s ladder’s fern-like, purple-flushed leaves make it a garden focal point, whether it’s in bloom or not. It’s a shade-loving perennial that produces clusters of fragrant, dainty, deep blue bell-shaped flowers in the spring. 

A low-maintenance plant, Jacob’s ladder likes moist but not soggy soil. At only about a foot tall and twice as wide, it has the appearance of a woodland shrub that is, fortunately, wildlife-resistant. Sometimes called Creeping Jacob’s ladder, it self-seeds, but is not an aggressive spreader.

Best For: Shady or partially shady woodsy areas with moist soil
Hardiness Zones: 4-8

The post 11 Plants That Look Stunning in a Home Landscape With or Without Blooms appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-11T10:42:45-05:00
<![CDATA[Homemade Weed Killers and Preventative Treatments That Really Work ]]>Don't use a herbicide on your weeds—use a natural weed killer instead! Learn how to spray or smother weeds to make them go away for good.

The post Homemade Weed Killers and Preventative Treatments That Really Work  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-kill-weeds-naturally/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=283996Tue, 11 Feb 2025 00:04:35 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Share

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Although not all of these methods will work all of the time, weed management should always begin with the most eco-friendly choices. Anything we can do to prevent the use of harmful herbicides is a good thing. Overusing herbicides can contaminate groundwater and harm beneficial plants and soil. Studies have shown that many of these chemicals remain in the soil and harm insects and microbes that are essential to soil health.

Although today’s herbicides are more selective than in the past, they can still pose health dangers to people, animals, desired plants, and soil. Instead, keep weeds away with these more natural approaches.

How to Kill Weeds Naturally

Getting rid of weeds is a two-step process: Kill them and prevent them. We’ll start with some ways to kill the weeds that are plaguing your lawn and gardens. 

Spray weeds with vinegar.

Spraying weeds with large spray nozzle.
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Apply undiluted household vinegar to the leaves of weeds with a spray bottle, pump sprayer, or brush, as long as you can direct it only to the plants you wish to get rid of, because vinegar cannot differentiate between weeds and other plants, and will kill whatever it comes in contact with. To avoid contaminating nearby plants, apply vinegar early in the morning when there’s little wind. Also, choose a cloudless day, which ensures that rain won’t wash it off before it works its magic.

Household vinegar is usually effective but if it fails to work in your yard, consider using a commercial preparation that contains a higher concentration of vinegar. Your local extension office can offer advice about what works well in your area and how to use it safely.

Sprinkle table salt at the base of the weed.

Dumping salt from a spade onto a garden plot.
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Regular old table salt is very effective at killing weeds. Put just a pinch of this natural weed killer down at the base of each unwanted plant. Be sure to use table salt (sodium chloride), not Epsom salt (magnesium sulfate), as the latter is not an effective weed killer. Salt is useful around the house in many ways and in the garden will render soil inhospitable for several months, so make sure you apply just a small amount and only where needed. Avoid getting it on your grass or other plants.

Spray DIY herbicidal soap.

A young woman in a blue blouse sprays solution from a bottle onto a garden bed with flowers.
Photo: ljubaphoto via Getty Images

If you’re not having luck with just vinegar or just salt, add dish soap to the party and make your own homemade weed killer using this natural weed killer recipe. Mix up 1 gallon of regular household vinegar, 2 cups of table salt, and ¼ cup of Dawn dish soap. Put the mixture in a sprayer and apply it to the offending weeds, but be judicious. This concoction might kill any plants it touches, so be careful not to get it on your prized perennials.

Pour boiling water on the unwanted plant.

Metal pot of boiling water on a stove.
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

If you’ve researched how to kill weeds naturally, you’ve probably read about using boiling water, because it works. Just grab your kettle or pot of boiling water off the stove, take it to the garden, and pour a stream of water carefully over each unwanted plant. Tough perennial weeds with long tap roots may take two or three applications but will eventually stop coming back. Use pot holders, of course, and dress for the task by wearing long pants and closed-toe shoes.

Smother them with recycled cardboard.

Stack of cardboard on green grass.
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

To prepare a garden bed for planting, smother weeds and help prevent new ones from growing by covering the soil with old cardboard boxes or even newspapers. A thick layer will keep sunlight from reaching weed seeds so they can’t sprout. First, remove visible weeds and wet the soil, and then lay the recycled paper product down, wetting it thoroughly again before covering it with mulch.

Placing the opaque layer on for 4 to 5 weeks at a time keeps sunlight from reaching weed seeds so they do not germinate. Leave the bed open for 1 or 2 weeks and repeat this DIY weed killer cycle a couple times to increase success. This smothering method also works with plastic tarps, which you can reuse. However, remaining cardboard and newspaper eventually break down into the soil, improving chances of earthworms and healthy soil activity.

Use a weed torch.

Using torch to kill weeds
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

A weed torch works by heating the water inside the cells of plants. When the water turns to steam, the cells explode and the plant dies. You don’t need to char the weeds, just wilt them. This takes some practice, but it is very effective.

Use caution with this method, of course, especially on windy days or in drought-prone areas. Don’t ever use it on poison ivy or other poisonous plants because it can release their oils into the air and ultimately into your eyes or lungs. Finally, be careful where you use the weed torch. The heat will melt plastic borders and landscape fabrics.

Apply an Organic Commercial Solution

Online or at a garden center, you should be able to find commercial preparations that use natural ingredients to kill weeds. Some, like this product from Natural Armor, contain “industrial strength” vinegar.  Others contain iron, which kills weeds by overfeeding them, and some contain citric acid or citric oil, the acidity of which will get rid of unwanted plants. Cornmint oil, derived from the Mentha arvensis (wild mint) plant, is another ingredient found in natural weed-killing products

How to Prevent Weeds Naturally

Optimally, of course, you’d prevent weeds from growing in the first place, so you don’t have to mess with killing them. But odds are, you’ve had to do some weed cleanup.  Now, on your quest for weed-free gardening, endeavor to prevent new ones from growing.  

Promptly pull them by hand.

Gloved hands weeding by hand.
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Before a colony of weeds can take root in your garden beds or lawn, be vigilant about hand-pulling individual weeds as they emerge. Wear a dedicated pair of gardening gloves for the task to avoid inadvertently transferring weed seeds where you don’t want them. Weed-removal tools such as claws or sharp trowels can help you loosen the weed roots from the soil. Pulling a weed completely out by the root is the only way to ensure it will not return.

Spread corn gluten meal in the garden.

Corn gluten meal in a basket with a white cloth.
Photo: Sergio Amiti via Getty Images

Corn gluten meal is like birth control for seeds: Sprinkle it on exposed areas of your garden to prevent weed seeds from germinating and growing into plants. Of course, corn gluten meal might keep other seeds from germinating too, so don’t try this method in your vegetable garden until your plants are established and you’ve finished planting seeds.

Layer on some mulch.

Shovel next to yellow wagon with mulch
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Cover your planting areas with a few inches of mulch and you’ll prevent weed seeds from coming into contact with the soil in the first place. Because mulch will also keep sunlight from reaching seeds that are already underground, they won’t get a chance to sprout. Organic mulches offer the added benefits of retaining moisture and breaking down to enrich the soil below. Bonus: A fresh layer of mulch amps up your curb appeal, too.

RELATED: Buyer’s Guide: The Best Organic Weed Killers

Plant ground cover.

Gardener watering ground covers
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Weeds mostly attack bare, open soil. Protect these weed-prone sites with ground cover, or low-growing plants that spread across and close to the soil and make it more difficult for weed seeds to get through. Plus, if these seeds do try to take root, they receive little to no light. As a bonus, you get to buy and enjoy some new plants that add evergreen or flowering color.

The best ground cover for your garden depends on your growing zone and where you need the greenery. Some good candidates include creeping thyme (Thymus serpyllum), especially between walkway stones; bugleweed (Ajuga), which thrives in shade; and ice plant (Delosperma), a sun- and heat-loving succulent.

Lay down landscape fabric.

Person using landscape material
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Much derided in some circles, landscape fabric has its place in gardens when used correctly. Today’s fabrics are not like the old nonpermeable landscape plastic, which basically depletes the soil beneath it. A good landscape fabric lets air and water through while preventing weed seeds from rooting. Use the fabric prudently, such as along walkways (covered with mulch, gravel, or crusher fines), to cut down on weeds in those spots where you aren’t growing plants. The fabric works best at weed suppression if it is laid from border to border, with as few cuts or openings as possible.

Plant cover crops.

A person in a vest and plaid shirt uses a garden hoe to plant cover crops in a garden.
Photo: Franziska & Tom Werner via Getty Images Photo: Franziska & Tom Werner via Getty Images

Also known as “green manure,” cover crops are plants that are typically sown in fall and grow in winter. They’re similar to ground covers in their ability to cut down on weed growth, but they also help improve the health of the soil. Come spring, they’re plowed or tilled under, and the plants and their nutrients are incorporated into the soil. Although cover crops are largely a farming practice, they can work for home gardeners as well, especially in vegetable gardens during the off-season.

Check with local nurseries, landscapers, or extension offices for the best cover crop for your area. Choose a native or local favorite for the greatest success and the least amount of watering and care. Most cover crops are from the legume, grass, and grain families. Some popular examples are winter wheat, certain clovers, and cereal rye.

Solarize garden beds.

Plastic cover to kill weeds in garden
Photo: iStock Photo: istockphoto.com

Similar to smothering, solarization kills existing weeds, but is a little more effective at preventing most annual weeds from emerging. This method uses clear plastic to let in sunlight First remove debris and live weeds, then till or turn the soil (to bring weed seeds closer to the surface). Next, wet the loosened ground and cover it with thin clear plastic and secure it by layering loose dirt on all its edges.

Temperatures under the plastic of at least 99 degrees Fahrenheit for 2 to 4 weeks are optimal to stop weeds, so it is most effective in summer to prepare future beds. In cooler climates, leave the plastic on for up to 6 weeks if desired. This method also can improve soil health. Painter’s plastic drop cloths are readily available from home improvement retailers. One  downside to these cloths is that the thin plastic can rip, so double the plastic over if you can.

Change your mowing routine.

A person wearing grey rain boots mows a lawn covered in a fall leaves.
Photo: ALI MAJDFAR via Getty Images

Another natural weed killer for lawn weeds involves has to do with your lawn maintenance schedule. Consider mowing more frequently, but to a taller height than perhaps you’re accustomed to. Changing your mowing height to 3 or 4 inches enables your lawn to grow more densely, which can crowd out weeds. Additionally, frequent mowing offers more opportunities to lop off developing weed seed heads before they can do their damage. 

Add organic matter to your soil.

Someone dumps a bucket of compost, or organic material, into a garden bed.
Photo: Patricio Nahuelhual via Getty Images Photo: Patricio Nahuelhual via Getty Image

Some weeds actually prefer compacted, nutrient-deficient soil. If you keep your soil healthy, you might discourage weedy plants from settling in. Add organic matter to your soil and mix it in well, breaking up the soil to keep it loose and welcoming to desirable plants. 

Adjust your watering schedule.

A sprinkler sprays water on a sunny day in a green lawn.
Photo: Chris Clor/Blend Images via Getty Images

Watering deeply but less frequently allows turfgrass lawns to produce deep roots and grow stronger overall. A healthy lawn is better able to squeeze out weeds, whereas a weak lawn is susceptible to takeover by unwanted invaders. Take this into consideration when determining your irrigation schedule. 

The post Homemade Weed Killers and Preventative Treatments That Really Work  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-11T00:04:35-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Garden Fertilizers, Vetted]]>The best garden fertilizer for you depends on several factors. Improve your garden soil with recommendations that benefit your vegetables, herbs, and flowers.

The post The Best Garden Fertilizers, Vetted appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-garden-fertilizer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=109310Fri, 07 Feb 2025 16:39:40 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Garden plants need nutrients to grow and remain healthy. Adequate soil fertility is as important to plants as a healthy diet is to animals and people. Experienced gardeners know the necessity of understanding soil nutrients so they can use them at the optimal time and in the right proportion with the best fertilizer to supplement the soil.

Choosing a fertilizer can be downright overwhelming because there are so many types and options available. Our favorite is Jobe’s All-Purpose Granular Fertilizer, because of its fast-acting, balanced, multipurpose formula that works for many different types of plants. Read on for tips and suggestions to help when shopping, and don’t miss our roundup of all our favorite picks among the best garden fertilizers available.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Jobe’s Organics All Purpose Granular Fertilizer
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Burpee Natural Organic All-Purpose Plant Food
  3. BEST ORGANIC: Sunday All-Purpose Plant Food Mix
  4. BEST LIQUID: GS Plant Foods Organic Fish and Kelp Blend
  5. BEST FOR VEGETABLES: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Home Grown Fertilizer
  6. BEST FOR FLOWERS: Jobe’s Organics Annuals and Perennials Plant Food
  7. BEST PLANT STARTER: Espoma Organic Bio-Tone Starter Plus Fertilizer
  8. BEST ACIDIC: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Acid-Lovers Fertilizer
The Best Garden Fertilizer Options
Photo: istockphoto.com

Before You Buy Garden Fertilizer

Choosing the right garden fertilizer is highly dependent on the types of plants being fed. Before buying garden fertilizer, take stock of the plants in the garden and research their individual nutritional needs. Flowers have different nutritional needs than vegetables, and seedlings have different nutritional needs than mature plants.

Before buying and applying a garden fertilizer, consider performing a soil test to determine the soil’s pH level and nutrient content. Use these test results to determine which type of fertilizer is the best fit.

Product Comparison

Our Top Picks

Organic fertilizers are the safest and most versatile for most landscapes and home gardens. They are unlikely to harm plants from accidental overapplications, are generally people- and pet-safe, and pose a lower risk for water pollution when used according to directions. That said, be sure to feed plants consistently for the best results.

Best Overall

Jobe’s Organics All Purpose Granular Fertilizer

 The Best Garden Fertilizers Option: Jobe’s Organics All-Purpose Granular Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Contains bacteria and fungi for soil health
  • Increases root mass and promotes healthy plant growth
  • Fast-acting, balanced, multipurpose formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Needs to be applied every 4 to 8 weeks
  • Can have a strong smell, attracting dogs

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 4-4-4
  • Quantity: 16 pounds

This all-purpose fertilizer includes a combination of healthy bacteria, mycorrhizal fungi (fungi that form a symbiotic association with plants), and archaea (a microorganism that aggressively breaks down material). It checks the boxes for most basic plant needs, plus it is Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI) listed for organic gardening by the USDA, which means it’s 100 percent organic and made with all-natural ingredients.

The blend of beneficial microorganisms in the fertilizer helps to improve soil quality, increases root mass, and promotes plant growth. The nitrogen-phosphorus-potassium (NPK) ratio is 4-4-4, which makes it a suitable fertilizer for flowers, a vegetable garden, shrubs, trees, and houseplants.

Get the Jobe’s Organics all-purpose garden fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Burpee Natural Organic All-Purpose Plant Food

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Burpee Natural Organic All-Purpose Plant Food
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Also contains micronutrients and beneficial microbes
  • Has received an OMRI label for organic use
  • Fine granular texture, making it easy to spread

What We Don’t Like

  • Isn’t as readily available from major retailers

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 4-4-4
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Burpee natural organic all-purpose plant food offers great value for a product that is effective and only contains organic ingredients. This fertilizer contains a balanced 4-4-4 formula of macronutrients as well as calcium, minor nutrients, and beneficial microbes. While some nutrients are released immediately, this is a slow-release product that feeds plants for up to 3 months. This versatile formula is suitable for seed starting, bedding plants, vegetable gardens, trees, shrubs, and container gardening, according to the manufacturer.

It comes in a 4-pound resealable bag that’s easy to store between feeding sessions. The product has been certified organic and given an OMRI label for organic gardening.

Get the Burpee garden fertilizer at Amazon or Burpee.

Best Organic

Sunday All-Purpose Plant Food Mix

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Sunday All-Purpose Plant Food Mix
Photo: getsunday.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for both outdoor and indoor plants
  • Offers higher nutrient levels than many competing products
  • Turkey litter and feather meal improve soil health slowly over time

What We Don’t Like

  • Should be applied every 4 to 6 weeks, which is more often than other options

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 6-3-7
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Sunday is known for its all-natural plant care products, and the all-purpose plant food mix is a star performer. According to the manufacturer, it’s a good choice for new or established flowers, vegetable gardens, trees, and shrubs.

Organic fertilizers typically have lower nutrient levels than inorganic formulas, but this product has an NPK ratio of 6-3-7, providing higher levels of nitrogen and potassium than many other organic fertilizers on the market. The fertilizer contains ingredients like turkey litter and feather meal to improve soil health.

While it needs to be applied every 4 to 6 weeks, the amount of fertilizer needed during each application is much less than for other products on this list. It’s also suitable for both indoor and outdoor plants, making it a versatile pick for those with a variety of plants to feed.

Get the Sunday garden fertilizer at Sunday.

Best Liquid

GS Plant Foods Organic Fish and Kelp Blend

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: GS Plant Foods Organic Fish and Kelp Blend
Image: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Liquid formulas provide immediate absorption
  • Suitable for most plant types, and can be used on both plants and flowers
  • Made from a renewable raw material

What We Don’t Like

  • The smaller container comes at a high price per ounce

Product Specs

  • Type: Liquid
  • NPK ratio: 2-3-1
  • Quantity: 32 fluid ounces

Water-soluble fertilizers penetrate the soil, and foliage absorbs them immediately, giving the plants fast access to nutrients. Fish emulsion and kelp are excellent natural sources of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium—the three nutrients that help plants thrive. GS Plant Foods’ organic liquid fish and kelp blend delivers these nutrients in a 2-3-1 NPK ratio, so it is safe for any type of plant and serves as a compost enhancer.

Although liquid fertilizers do not tend to last as long as granular fertilizers, they typically come in concentrated forms that need to be diluted before applying. Organic liquid fish and kelp blend comes in a 1-quart, 1-gallon, 5-gallon, or 55-gallon container. It’s compliant for use in organic gardening and OMRI listed for organic use.

Get the GS Plant Foods garden fertilizer at Amazon.

Best For Vegetables

Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Home Grown Fertilizer

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Home Grown Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Contains organic and feed-grade ingredients
  • The formula includes both essential nutrients and trace elements
  • Designed to be used as a starter, a top dressing, or a compost tea

What We Don’t Like

  • Primarily used for vegetable growth; not suitable for all plant types
  • The powder form must be worked into soil
  • Dogs may be attracted to the food-grade ingredients

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 4-6-3
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Made from human- and feed-grade ingredients, Dr. Earth fertilizer is enriched with multiminerals, proteins, carbohydrates, humic acids, and trace elements that promote the healthiest soils. It’s versatile, too. Use Dr. Earth as a starter fertilizer during initial planting and transplanting and regularly as a top dressing or in compost tea.

Dr. Earth fertilizer contains no synthetic chemicals, chicken manure, or toxic ingredients, so it’s safe for pets and people. This fertilizer is sustainably made in the United States and carries the OMRI seal.

Get the Dr. Earth Home Grown garden fertilizer at Amazon or Target.

Best For Flowers

Jobe’s Organics Annuals and Perennials Plant Food

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Jobe’s Organics Annuals and Perennials Plant Food
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Improves soil condition over time
  • Pet- and people-friendly
  • Balanced formula for flowering plants

What We Don’t Like

  • Strong smell of manure

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 3-5-4
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Featuring Biozome with archaea (Jobe’s proprietary microbe package), this fertilizer rapidly breaks down nutrients in the soil for faster results and improves soil condition over time by increasing microorganism activity for a healthier, living soil. Made from all-natural materials and certified for organic use, this fertilizer is pet- and people-friendly, will not cause fertilizer burn, and is safe for the environment.

The fertilizer analysis for this Jobe’s product is 3-5-4, which makes it a good source of nutrients for most annual and perennial plants. Use the granular formula on flowering plants such as impatiens, begonias, marigolds, zinnias, blue minks, lilies, daylilies, peonies, ferns, and more.

Get the Jobe’s Organics annuals and perennials garden fertilizer at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Plant Starter

Espoma Organic Bio-tone Starter Plus Fertilizer

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Espoma Organic Bio-tone Starter Plus Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Designed to promote root growth
  • Contains beneficial fungi along with key macronutrients
  • Ideal for starting a wide variety of plants

What We Don’t Like

  • Works best when placed in the hole at planting

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 4-3-3
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Specially enhanced with beneficial bacteria and starter cultures of seven different beneficial mycorrhizal fungi, Espoma Organic Bio-tone Starter Plus fertilizer promotes maximum root development directly after transplanting. Mycorrhizal fungi work symbiotically with the root system of the plants to greatly increase the amount of water and nutrients a plant can use.

Use of Bio-tone Starter Plus during planting will help seedlings develop a healthy colony of mycorrhizal fungi so the plants will settle into their new homes more quickly and thrive in the long run. With an NPK ratio of 4-3-3, Bio-tone Starter Plus is a good all-purpose starter fertilizer that gardeners can use in garden beds for all types of plants.

Get the Espoma fertilizer at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Acidic

Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Acid Lovers Fertilizer

 The Best Garden Fertilizer Option: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Acid Lovers Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Helps lower soil pH
  • Assists plants with absorbing nutrients efficiently
  • Designed for fast release

What We Don’t Like

  • Strong smell
  • Isn’t suitable for products requiring alkaline soil
  • Has a Proposition 65 warning

Product Specs

  • Type: Granular
  • NPK ratio: 3-4-3
  • Quantity: 4 pounds

Some plants need a little acidity to look their best. Acid fertilizers lower soil pH to free up and help plants access nutrients rendered unavailable in high-pH soils. Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Acid Lovers fertilizer is ideal for hollies, gardenias, hydrangeas, blueberries, evergreens, ferns, shade plants, azaleas, camellias, rhododendrons, and maples. It temporarily lowers pH values in the soil, allowing the plants to absorb the nutrients they need to promote healthier foliage and bigger blooms.

This fertilizer is specially designed to release a portion of nutrients quickly and provide continuous feeding for several months of long-lasting results. It’s also safe for people and pets when used as directed.

Get the Dr. Earth Natural Acid Lovers garden fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Or, DIY Your Own Garden Fertilizer

Compost can provide beneficial microbes and nutrients for plants. It can be made easily at home with vegetable scraps and yard clippings. Ingredients like coffee grounds, banana peels, and other kitchen scraps all make excellent natural fertilizers. Compost should make up about half of the total volume of the fertilizer blend.

Bone meal provides phosphorus, which encourages root growth, flower production, and better fruit yields. This organic material also helps plants resist disease and increases the number of beneficial microorganisms in the soil. Bone meal should make up one quarter of the total volume of the fertilizer blend.

Kelp meal is full of trace minerals like calcium, iron, zinc, magnesium, and boron that help keep plants healthy. Kelp meal can help promote microbial activity in the soil as well as improve its structure. This organic material should make up one eighth of the total volume of the fertilizer blend, too.

Fish emulsion is a great source of nitrogen, which helps plants produce the protein needed for photosynthesis, flowering, and fruiting. Fish emulsion also contains other essential minerals like potassium, calcium, and magnesium that allow plants to thrive even when conditions are unfavorable. This organic material should also make up one eighth of the total volume of the fertilizer blend.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Garden Fertilizers

Garden fertilizers can give new plants a boost and feed plants throughout their growing season. We looked at fertilizer types and common plant needs to come up with this carefully curated list of some of the best garden fertilizers.

We considered more than 20 garden fertilizer options, and we weighed a number of practical considerations. We analyzed the nutrient ratios, the purpose of various products, and the quantity of fertilizer in packages before making our recommendations.

The list includes multipurpose formulas and a few designed for specific garden uses.

  • Organic vs. inorganic: We only considered organic fertilizers for this guide since they are capable of top-notch performance without causing any negative environmental impact.
  • Type: We considered both liquid and granular formulas for our recommendations since both fertilizer types offer unique benefits.
  • Value: Since fertilizers vary in type and quantity, it can be hard to determine a product’s value. We ensured that each recommended product offered excellent value, regardless of the format.

Our Verdict

We recommend Jobe’s Organics all-purpose garden fertilizer as our top pick for its organic formulation, fast-acting results, and ready availability. There are other common garden fertilizer options, including Miracle-Gro Shake ‘N Feed All Purpose Plant Food and JR Peters All Purpose Fertilizer. However, they do not meet our sustainability guidelines and are not recommended in our top picks due to their potentially harmful ingredients and negative impact on the environment.

Types of Garden Fertilizers

Fertilizer comes in three basic forms: granules, liquid, and stakes. Each type of fertilizer can be classified as either organic or inorganic.

Granule Fertilizers

Gardeners apply fertilizer granules by either mixing them into the soil at planting time or by “top dressing.” Top dressing simply means sprinkling the granules on the soil surface over the plant’s root zone. Granular fertilizers are available in either slow-release or quick-release formulas.

  • Slow-release fertilizers provide a steady flow of nutrients for an extended time, up to a full growing season. These fertilizers comprise organic or inorganic ingredients. Soil microbes break down organic slow-release fertilizer and make it available for plants to use. Manufacturers coat inorganic slow-release fertilizer pellets to slowly dissolve as water moves through the soil.
  • Quick-release fertilizer is inorganic. It should dissolve fully into the soil within just a few weeks, giving plants a quick burst of nutrients.

Liquid Fertilizers

Liquid fertilizers include ready-to-mix dry granules and liquid concentrates. They can consist of either organic or inorganic ingredients. Water-soluble fertilizers can soak the roots, or in some instances, spray right onto plant foliage. These formulas are available to the plant immediately.

Fertilizer Spikes

Fertilizer spikes also come in either organic or inorganic formulas. They act similarly to slow-release fertilizers. Calculate the number of spikes needed for a plant based on plant size and manufacturer directions. Space the spikes evenly around the edge of the plant’s root zone and push them into the soil.

Organic vs. Inorganic Fertilizers

There are two major differences between organic and inorganic fertilizers: ingredients and the way nutrients become available to the plant.

  • Organic fertilizers add vital organic matter to the soil and work with the living microorganisms in the soil to feed plants. These fertilizers come from plant and animal sources: composted chicken manure, bone meal, blood meal, alfalfa meal, cottonseed meal, and kelp meal.
  • Inorganic fertilizers are highly concentrated and feed plants directly. Manufacturers make inorganic, or synthetic, fertilizers from the synthesized chemicals of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium, sometimes as byproducts of other industrial processes.

What to Consider When Choosing Garden Fertilizer

NPK Ratios

It is usually best to begin with a soil test to determine the natural fertility of a garden soil before applying fertilizer. Contact the local Cooperative Extension Service to submit a soil sample for testing. The results will show which nutrients the soil might lack, so those nutrients can be provided in the form of fertilizer.

The major nutrients in fertilizer are nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium. Fertilizer products list these elements on the bag as a ratio such as 10-10-10 or 4-3-4. The package listing always appears in the order NPK.

Determining the right ratio for a garden depends on what the specific plants need.

  • Nitrogen supports foliage plants’ growth. High-nitrogen fertilizer is useful to help grass start growing in spring or to help leafy greens produce a heavy yield.
  • Phosphorus helps plants establish roots, produce flowers, and develop fruit. High-phosphorus fertilizer is useful as a starter fertilizer or to spruce up annual flower beds.
  • Potassium is an important element for rigid stems and overall plant health. Potassium helps plants get through drought and other growing stresses.

Plant Needs

Different kinds of plants, and plants at various stages of life, have different nutrient requirements. Flowering and fruiting plants need plant food with higher phosphorus content, while plants grown for foliage need more nitrogen.

Planting a new flower, vegetable, or herb bed? Use a starter fertilizer to help the young plants become established in their new home.

Do the azaleas, camellias, gardenias, or blueberries look weak and puny? Perk them up with a fertilizer specifically formulated for acid-loving plants.

Quantity

Regular fertilizer applications keep plants vigorous and productive. How often fertilizer should be applied depends on the soil type and whether the plants are in raised beds or containers. Most plants growing in porous, well-drained soil or in containers need more frequent feeding, about every 3 to 4 weeks throughout the growing season. Plants growing in clay soils typically require less fertilizer. One application every 4 to 6 weeks after planting is usually enough.

Typically, granular fertilizer will go further than a liquid fertilizer. To determine how much fertilizer is needed, look at how much area one bag or bottle covers and divide that by the square footage of the garden beds. The result will indicate how much fertilizer will get the plants through the growing season.

FAQs 

Q. When should I fertilize my garden?

The best time to fertilize outdoor plants is when they are placed in the ground, beginning with added compost or a starter fertilizer. After that, plants need nutrients during their peak growing season, typically spring through summer. When choosing a long-acting or continuous feeder, you can apply it less often.

Q. What is the best fertilizer for vegetables?

Vegetables need a good start since they typically have a short, one-time growing season. Start them out with a boost of nutrients and good soil, and then apply a balanced fertilizer for vegetables and herbs like Dr. Earth Home Grown garden fertilizer for tomato, vegetable, and herb gardens.

Q. What is the best fertilizer for garden plants?

The best fertilizer depends on the plants. Lawn fertilizers, for example, differ from vegetable fertilizers. Many native plants need little to no fertilizer, assuming they are growing in decent soils. But flowering plants often need a boost so the plant can stay healthy plus send extra energy into producing lots of large, colorful flowers. Try Jobe’s Organics all-purpose garden fertilizer for beautiful blooms.

Q. When should I apply 10-10-10 fertilizer to my vegetable garden?

Apply most balanced (10-10-10) fertilizers monthly during the growing season to boost the health of perennial plants. But be sure to check the package directions, since some fertilizers have slow-release formulas that last longer.

Q. How do you naturally fertilize soil?

Nutrient-rich soil is the best type for gardens, and keeping soil balanced and with plenty of humus is preferred by many gardeners over adding fertilizer regularly. Get healthy soil with annual additions of organic compost such as manure, homemade compost from kitchen scraps, and even leaves or grass clippings. Mix up the ingredients for the best effect, and use organic fertilizer as needed.

Q. Are eggshells good for fertilizer?

Ground-up eggshells can add some calcium and other nutrients. They won’t necessarily provide all nutrients that all plants need, and they break down slowly, so effects are not immediate. Still, adding them can be part of any effort to maintain soil health; they do not contain enough of any ingredient to harm plants.

The post The Best Garden Fertilizers, Vetted appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T16:39:40-05:00
<![CDATA[How Starting Seeds Indoors This Year Will Help You Grow a Better Garden Than Ever]]>Give your garden a head start by starting your seeds indoors. When your last frost date rolls around, you'll have seedlings ready for planting in the ground.

The post How Starting Seeds Indoors This Year Will Help You Grow a Better Garden Than Ever appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/starting-seeds-indoors/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=92380Fri, 07 Feb 2025 16:37:40 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYGardeningHouse PlantsLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’re itching to get your garden going, there’s no need to wait until the weather outside is agreeable (and really, your garden will thank you for your impatience). By growing plants from seeds that you start indoors, you’ll save money and have access to a wider variety of vegetables, fruits, and flowers than you can buy at garden centers as seedlings. 

Starting seeds indoors also helps extend the growing season for vegetables like peppers and tomatoes, since hardened-off seedlings will be weeks ahead of seeds sown directly in the ground. Although some plants, like carrots and beets, fare best when sowed directly in the ground, many others transplant well. What are you waiting for? Learn more about starting seeds indoors and avoiding potential missteps in the process.

Materials needed for starting seeds inside, including soil and a fan.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

What to Know Before You Sow

Some seeds require stratification. 

Many seeds can be sown as is, but some have additional requirements. If you’re sowing only vegetable seeds and annual flowers, you can likely skip this step. Some plants, however, require stratifying, or chilling, to mimic the overwintering cycle a fallen seed would undergo in nature. Among those that need stratification are black-eyed Susan and some types of milkweed.

If your seed packet calls for stratifying, place the seeds on a dampened paper towel and fold the paper gently before slipping it into a zip-top plastic bag and placing it in your fridge. Depending on the seeds, they may need to remain in the fridge for 1 to 3 months; the suggested chilling time should appear on the seed packet.

Scarify your seeds, if called for on the packet.

Using nail clippers to scarify seeds.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Scarifying is the process of nicking the outer shell of a seed to encourage it to germinate. Some seed shells (like those for nasturtiums and sweet peas) are so hard that the rate of germination is low unless they get a little help breaking out of their shells. A simple way to do this at home is to chip the edge of the seed with sharp fingernail clippers—only enough to perforate the hard shell casing and no more.

Start seeds at the right time.

Person points to planting instructions on the back of a seed packet.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

A plant’s seed packet lists the best time to start the seeds. Many vegetable seeds should be started 4 to 6 weeks before the last expected frost date in your area. Other seeds, including many perennial flowers, should start earlier, as much as 8 to 10 weeks or 10 to 12 weeks before the last frost date. If you’re starting perennials, make sure the mature plants will survive in your growing zone through winter.

Sow and Grow

Prep your mix for planting.

Pour sterile seed-starting medium in a clean bowl and add just enough warm water to dampen it. Use of a sterile mix, not garden soil, is important to avoid spreading diseases to the young seedlings. Seed-starting mix is designed to be lighter and airer so that seeds and young roots can break through the soil.

Fill up your tray.

Person wearing gloves adds moist soil to black seed-starting cells.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Purchase a plastic grow flat or tray designed for seed starting. A long, shallow container is designed specifically to accommodate a growing plant and its roots. Seed-starting kits might come with an insertable tray consisting of multiple cells with drainage holes and a bottom tray to catch and hold water. Having a tray with individual sections makes it easier to keep the roots of the seedlings separate after they start to grow, and the cells are tiny enough to hold one seedling each.

Moisten the seed mix well, so that it feels like a wrung-out sponge. Distribute the moistened mix between the individual cells in the tray and fill each one almost to the top. Another option is to set tiny peat pots in a large bottom tray or use peat starter pods.

Plot out the plants.

Person uses a wooden skewer to make indentions in soil inside seed cells.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Make an indentation in the top of the planting mix in each cell, or make shallow rows if you’re using a flat without individual cells. The packet will tell you how deeply the seeds should be planted, but the general rule is to plant a seed four times as deep as its width. Large seeds, like cantaloupe and sunflower, need to be planted deeper than small, fine seeds.

Drop in seeds.

Woman places seeds one by one into soil inside black plant cells.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Allot one seed per cell or distribute them evenly in the shallow rows. Plant each at the depth listed on the seed packet. If the packet says they require light to germinate, then don’t cover them; these seeds may be sprinkled on top of the seed-starting mix. If there aren’t instructions regarding light for the seeds, cover them with the moistened medium to match the recommended depth, patting the soil very lightly on top. Then, cover the seed tray with a fitted plastic top or with plastic wrap to keep the medium from drying out.

Find an indoor spot with optimal temperatures.

Woman slides a heat mat under a domed tray of seedlings by a sunny window.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Find a room-temperature or warmer spot for the seed tray, based on recommended temperature per the seed label. Both the ambient air temperature and soil temperature can affect seed germination. Adding gentle bottom heat for the soil often raises the temperature 10 to 20 degrees. Use a heated growing pad or place the tray on top of a refrigerator where it’s slightly warm. 

For seeds that require cooler temperatures to germinate (like carrots, cabbage, or Swiss chard), find a cool part of the house away from heat sources until they sprout (or start the seeds outdoors in spring as directed by the seed label).

Wait Until Sprouts Start

Check seeds daily.

Germination times vary by seed type, so check seeds daily for moisture and for the chance to see a new sprout. Some seeds (such as lettuce and kale) can germinate within a couple of days, while others (including perennial flowers) can take two or more weeks. 

Give sprouts the light they need.

Woman clips a multi-armed grow light onto a table on which there's a seed-starting tray.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob VIla

Once the seeds sprout, remove the plastic cover and move the seedlings near a sunny window or place them under grow lights to encourage healthy growth. Don’t place them in direct sunlight, where they can become too warm—a table near a sunny window is sufficient. When using a grow light, place it directly overhead if possible and keep the bulbs about 2 to 6 inches above the surface of the sprouts’ leaves.

Water carefully and consistently.

Person mists seed-starting tray with water mister.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Water plants as needed to keep the starting mix damp, but not soggy. If the seed-starting mix is moist and the tray is covered, you might not have to add any more water to get the seeds to sprout; if you do, a gentle mist is the best option. Once seedlings emerge, a few clues can help you know when to water: the tray feels lighter than normal, or the soil changes color or pulls away from the side of the tray.

Water sprouts carefully, either from above with a gentle mist or flow, or by pouring water into the tray beneath the pots so they can wick moisture up. Just be sure not to leave standing water in the tray for long; drain excess water after the soil feels damp.

Provide air circulation.

Woman places a fan near a seed starting tray, with grow lights set up overhead.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

When setting a seed tray on top of the fridge or in a closet out of the way, recognize that the soil might not get enough air circulation. Lack of moving air combined with wet soil causes fungi to thrive. Damping off is a soil-borne fungal disease that often affects new seedlings, and can lead to demise of the plants. One way to provide airflow is to place a small fan near the seed-growing area; don’t point the fan directly at tender seedlings.

Thin out seedlings.

If you’ve hedged your bets at seed-sowing time by placing two or more seeds in some or all cells, you will have to sacrifice a few starts. The small cells in most seed-starting trays are designed to hold a single plant. Even if you sow in rows (indoors or out), thinning starts keeps the young plants from competing for resources and root space. As tough as it is to dispose of a successful sprout, it will pay off. Instead of pulling out the weaker of the starts, use a tiny pair of manicure scissors to snip it off at soil level; this avoids disturbing the other start. 

Know when to pot up seed starts.

When the seedlings develop their first true leaves, transplant them into individual peat pots. This ensures they have room to grow as they prepare for transplanting outdoors. The first leaves that emerge are called cotyledons, or “seed leaves”—the plant’s true leaves will develop next. As one or more sets of true leaves develop (typically about 4 to 5 weeks after sowing), the seedling likely is strong enough to be transplanted into a peat pot where it can remain until it’s time to plant it in the garden. Any good potting soil will do for filling the peat pots.

Get Ready to Garden

Prepare the garden for transplants.

Till and prepare your garden soil in preparation for the new plants. Break up large clods and remove twigs and rocks. Most vegetables thrive in well-draining soil and full sunlight, but other plants have different light requirements, so choose a spot that’s suitable for your specific plants.

Harden off plants to make the switch to outdoors.

After sprouts have recovered from being potted up, and hopefully a week or so before time to plant outdoors, place young potted-up plants outdoors in a protected area. This means out of the direct sun and wind at first. Gradually introduce them to outdoor conditions by starting with only an hour or two of exposure the first trip outdoors and more time and sunlight each subsequent day as they gain strength.

Called “hardening,” this gives the tender plants a chance to adapt to the outdoor environment before you move them to their final growing spot. After hardening, transplant the young plants into the garden, leaving the peat pots in place if you like—they should biodegrade in the soil (or remove and compost them). Just be sure to tear off the top half-inch of each pot so it won’t wick moisture from the transplant, and the bottom of the pot to ensure delicate roots can go through. After planting, water the new transplants well to give them a good start in the garden.

Final Thoughts

The advice above can help new gardeners’ chances of success by ensuring seeds and young seedlings get the right water, light, soil, airflow, and space to grow. All you have to do is combine these tips with the wealth of information on each plant’s seed packet, so be sure to read those labels.

The other insurance for success is experience, even a failure or two. Make notes on what does and doesn’t so you can adjust for the next round of indoor seed starting.

The post How Starting Seeds Indoors This Year Will Help You Grow a Better Garden Than Ever appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T16:37:40-05:00
<![CDATA[10 Types of Dogwood Trees to Beautify Your Yard Year-Round]]>The post 10 Types of Dogwood Trees to Beautify Your Yard Year-Round appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/types-of-dogwood-trees/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426608Thu, 06 Feb 2025 17:21:13 -0500Lawn & GardenGardeningLandscapingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

As you approach spring landscaping chores, you might be considering adding a dogwood tree to your yard. But, when do dogwoods bloom? They typically flower between early spring and early summer, depending on the species and the climate it inhabits. Many also offer colorful drupes and fall foliage after the “dog and posy” show.

Their common name may derive from dagwood—not the comic strip character but the branches once used to skewer meat. Types of dogwood trees vary from the 6- to 12-inch miniature dogwood “tree” known as bunchberry to the giant dogwood, which can reach 60 feet. Their flowers also vary from large “blooms” composed mostly of leaf bracts to tiny blooms in clusters. 

1. Cornelian Cherry Dogwood or European Cornel (Cornus mas)

A Cornelian Cherry dogwood tree with berries.
Photo: Christian Huetter/imageBROKER via Getty Images

Named for its “cherries,” oblong red drupes, rather than for its flowers, the European Cornelian Cherry Dogwood can bloom during winter in the mildest areas of its range. However, it usually produces its tiny yellow flowers in small clusters in early spring before foliage appears. Its edible but tart ½ to 1 inch long fruits ripen to red in midsummer and are most often used in jellies.

This dogwood shrub has typical oval dogwood leaves whose fall color can vary from dull green to the purplish-red more common with Cornus species. It will sucker, which can be a good thing if you want a hedge, but you can prune the shrub into a tree shape instead if you prefer. Choose Golden Glory for more prolific bloom or Variegata for variegated foliage.

Hardiness Zones: 4 to 8
Mature Height: 15 to 25 feet 

2. Dwarf Dogwood or Bunchberry (Cornus or Chaemaepericlymenum canadensis

Bunchberry or Dwarf Dogwood growing along the ground and around a tree.
Photo: Ed Reschke/Photodisc via Getty Images

The dwarf dogwood tree isn’t actually a tree but a native woody ground cover that usually doesn’t surpass 1 foot in height. It begins to flower in late spring and sometimes persists blooming until midsummer. As with most dogwoods, its “petals” actually are colored leaf bracts—white in this case—while the true flowers are the bracts’ greenish centers.

The bracts are followed in late summer by clusters of edible ¼-inch red drupes. Bunchberry grows in either partial shade or dappled shade in a woodland-like setting where it won’t be trampled underfoot. According to Clemson Cooperative Extension, “Dogwoods prefer moist, well-drained, acidic soil that is high in organic matter.”

Hardiness Zones: 2 to 6
Mature Height: ½ to 1 foot

3. Eastern or Flowering Dogwood (Benthamidia or Cornus florida)

A yellow flowering dogwood tree in front of a house.
Photo: Maria Mosolova via Getty Images

Clemson Extension notes that the flowering dogwood tree “is the species most people think of when the word dogwood is mentioned.” In other words, it is top dog! Flowering dogwood characteristics include 3- to 6-inch “blooms,” each made up of four notched white, pink, or yellow leaf bracts surrounding the true yellow-green flowers at their center.

Those “blooms” appear in mid to late spring before the trees’ leaves, followed by clusters of nontoxic but bitter drupes that redden along with the foliage in early to mid-autumn. According to Jenny Rose Carey, author of Glorious Shade, “If you are encouraging wildlife to your garden, this is a must-have tree. Birds and other animals love the fruits. I refer to them as an ‘energy bar’ for migratory birds returning to their winter residences.”

This species, which prefers partial shade, is prone to fungal diseases. Resistant cultivars include Appalachian Spring and Appalachian Joy.

Hardiness Zones: 5 to 9
Mature Height: 15 to 30 feet

4. Chinese Evergreen or Strawberry Dogwood (Cornus capitata subsp. angustata

Strawberry dogwood berries on a tree.
Photo: Albel Singh/500Px Plus via Getty Images

Although most dogwoods are deciduous, the leathery leaves of the Chinese Evergreen type can persist through winter in Zones higher than 6, but are more likely to turn reddish green and drop during winter in Zone 6 and lower. Its 3- to 6-inch late spring and early summer “blooms” offer un-notched leaf bracts surrounding the true yellow-green flowers, so the blooms appear more star-shaped than the earlier blooming Benthamidia (Cornus) florida’s cross-shaped ones.

This evergreen’s flowers are followed by roundish strawberry-like fruits, which ripen to red. NCSU Cooperative Extension admits that those fruits “are technically edible but are better left to the birds.” Clemson Cooperative Extension recommends “complete, acid-forming organic fertilizers” for dogwoods, applied in mid-spring and, 6 weeks later, in early summer.

Hardiness Zones: 6 to 9
Mature Height: 12 to 20 feet

5. Giant Dogwood (Cornus or Swida controversa

A giant dogwood tree near a home pond.
Photo: Paul Thompson via Getty Images

Native to the Orient and one of the tallest of the dogwood tree varieties, this species can reach 45 feet with its branches held horizontally like the tiers of a wedding cake. Its white flowers, on the other hand, are very small but produced in large 3- to 7-inch clusters in late spring to early summer, followed by blue-black fruits in late summer. Those fruits attract birds and other animals but are considered inedible for humans.

As with most dogwoods, the tree can thrive in either full sun or partial shade. For a white wedding cake look, choose the variegated cultivar (Variegata). If you prefer dark green leaves and orange/red fall color, select June Snow.

Hardiness Zones: 5 to 8
Mature Height: 35 to 45 feet

6. Kousa or Chinese Dogwood (Cornus kousa or Benthamidia japonica)

A Kousa dogwood tree outside of a home.
Photo: Nobutoshi Akao/Moment via Getty Images

Like the eastern type, this nonnative dogwood makes 3- to 6-inch white or pink blooms. However, they have pointed rather than notched petals and appear about a month after those of Cornus florida, in late spring to early summer once the trees have leafed out. Those flowering trees also produce raspberry-like pinkish-red fruits that are edible. Their fall leaf color varies from purple to red to yellow. Kousa is more sun-loving than the eastern dogwood and also more disease-resistant, making it one of the most vigorous dogwood flowering trees.

For that reason, Chinese dogwood often has been crossed with C. florida to produce cultivars that offer the best traits of both species. Purely kousa cultivars include the variegated dogwood tree Summer Fun, as well as Moonbeam, which has unusually large 7-inch flowers.

Hardiness Zones: 5 to 8
Mature Height: 20 to 30 feet

7. Pacific or Western Dogwood (Cornus nuttallii

A Pacific dogwood tree in bloom.
Photo: Kevin Schafer/The Image Bank via Getty Images

The western dogwood native to the Pacific Northwest and California resembles the eastern one, but it is less hardy, and its “blooms” often offer six to eight white pointed leaf bracts—rather than four notched ones—clustered around the greenish or purplish true flowers at the center. It also may bloom twice, once in spring before the tree leafs out and again in late summer or fall, with flowers up to 6 inches across. Of its pinkish-red fruit, Calscape notes that “Though edible, it is not very palatable.’

Unfortunately, the western dogwood shares the eastern dogwood’s vulnerability to anthracnose and also often is crossed with C. kousa for greater disease resistance. Fall foliage may be yellow, red, or pink. Cultivars include Colrigo Giant with 6-inch flowers and the yellow variegated Goldspot.

Hardiness Zones: 7 to 9
Mature Size: 15 to 40 feet

8. Pagoda Dogwood (Cornus or Swida alternifolia)

A Pagoda dogwood tree with yellow blooms.
Photo: Rob Routledge, Sault College, Bugwood.org, CC BY 3.0 , via Wikimedia Commons

Except for the fact that it is native to North America, the pagoda dogwood might be considered a shorter version of the Oriental giant dogwood. It too offers tiered branches and tiny white blooms in clusters in late spring and early summer followed by bitter blue-black berries in mid to late summer and red foliage in autumn.

The Pagoda dogwood generally tops out at about 25 feet and its flower clusters measure only about 2 to 3½ inches across.  So, this small dogwood tree fits into the backyard landscape more easily than the giant one does. Its variegated cultivars include Argentea and Golden Shadows.

Hardiness Zones: 3 to 7
Mature Height: 15 to 25 feet

9. Redtwig or Red Osier Dogwood (Cornus or Swida sericea or stolonifera)

Redtwig dogwood shrub covered in ice and snow in the winter.
Photo: Gail Shotlander/Moment via Getty Images

Popular as a winter shrub for its red stems that stand out against the snow (though a few cultivars offer yellow stems instead), this osier is native to North America and typically inhabits somewhat boggy locations. Therefore, it may make a good choice for a poorly draining area of your yard where nothing else will grow.

This dogwood bush produces clusters of small white flowers in late spring and early summer followed by bitter drupes in late summer. According to North Carolina Extension, the edible white fruits with blue tinge “are attractive to birds and hold even more ornamental value than the flowers.” Also ornamental is the red or orange fall foliage which darkens to purple. This fast-growing shrub tends to spread rapidly via underground stems, so it could become invasive if not kept in check. Choose Baileyi for particularly vivid red stems, or Flaviramea for golden-yellow stems.

Hardiness Zones: 2 to 7
Mature Height: 5 to 9 feet

10. Tatarian or Red-Barked Dogwood (Cornus or Swida alba)

Red-Barked dogwood shrubs in a tidy landscaped yard.
Photo: Jacky Parker Photography/Moment via Getty Images

Tartarian Dogwood might be called the Asian form of Redtwig Dogwood, since it shares most of the characteristics of that species, including the red stems, clusters of white flowers, and white drupes. In both species, younger stems offer the reddest hues, so it’s a good idea to remove about a fourth of the older ones in spring for better color in winter. Both can be used as either full sun shrubs or partial shade shrubs.

Missouri Botanical Garden agrees that Tatarian dogwood is similar in appearance to redtwig dogwood, “but generally does not spread as aggressively.” Cultivars of this dogwood shrub include the variegated Elegantissima and the smaller-than-usual Sibirica, whose height tops off at about 7 feet.

Hardiness Zones: 3 to 7
Mature Height: 8 to 10 feet

The post 10 Types of Dogwood Trees to Beautify Your Yard Year-Round appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-06T17:21:13-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Overseed a Lawn]]>Is your grass looking less lush than you'd like? Overseeding a lawn chokes out weeds, fills in bare patches, and is an easy weekend DIY.

The post How to Overseed a Lawn appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-overseed-a-lawn/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=115123Wed, 05 Feb 2025 17:41:19 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A full, green lawn creates curb appeal and makes you feel like sipping an iced tea on the back patio. But if bare spots peek through and weeds overpower the grass, the lawn might be more of an eyesore than a point of pride. Overseeding chokes weeds and fills out the grass until it’s thick and lush. If you’re not sure how to overseed a lawn, all it takes is the right tools, smart timing, and a little knowledge about your local climate.

Sunday Lawn Care

DIY Lawn Care. Simplified.
Bob Vila has partnered with Sunday to get your lawn exactly what it needs to thrive.

START GROWING

What is “overseeding,” exactly? Why is this lawn task not just called “seeding”? “Overseeding” is the term for adding more grass seed to a lawn without turning the topsoil. For many homeowners, overseeding is central to general lawn maintenance. Some lawns might need it once a year if drought or disease threaten the grass, and other lawns might need it every few years only to brighten the grass and keep it full.

A few basic tools—like a lawn mower, seed and fertilizer spreader, and rake—are all that you need to achieve a less patchy, more verdant yard. With the right grass seed and timing, overseeding will restore the lawn and give it a lush, uniform appearance.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Project Overview

Working time: 3 hours or more, depending on the size of the lawn
Total time: 3 hours or more, depending on the size of the lawn
Skill level: Beginner
Estimated cost: $100 to $200, depending on size of lawn and products used

Before You Begin

Materials for overseeding a lawn sitting on the grass, including garden hose, rake, fertilizer, seeds, and spreader.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

If your lawn has thatch (a compact layer of grass and soil), it might need dethatching or aerating before you spread seed. Otherwise, the grass seed used in overseeding won’t reach the soil to germinate and take root. Aerating creates holes in the grass and soil through which water, oxygen, and vital nutrients can reach the new grass seed and the roots of the existing grass.

Overseeding a Lawn in 5 Simple Steps

Step 1: Mow and rake the lawn.

A person raking a lawn before overseeding the lawn.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

The goal of overseeding a lawn is to get the grass seed in contact with the soil. To do that, the first step is to mow the lawn. Mow it shorter than usual so the grass seed will have a better chance of reaching the soil. Make sure to bag the clippings so they don’t come between the seeds and soil.

After mowing, rake the entire lawn to remove dead grass, rocks, sticks, and any other debris. This process removes any final barriers between the grass seed and soil, and loosens the soil in preparation for seeding and germination.

Step 2: Amend the soil, if necessary.

Woman takes a soil sample from her lawn and deposits it in a Ziploc bag.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Soil amendments are different from fertilizers. Amendments have specific nutrients and chemical compositions for specific soil types. For example, lime, wood ash, and poultry manure raise the pH level of acidic soil to make it more suitable for certain plants and grasses. Sulfur amendments, on the other hand, add acidity to alkaline soil. Additions of peat moss for clay soil and compost for sandy soil also can improve the nutrients in the lawn and its condition.

If a lawn has not been growing and greening as it should, doing a soil test can determine the soil type and pH. The test results will identify what, if any, types of amendments the soil needs for grass to develop. Keep in mind that if the soil has a neutral pH and is fertile, it likely needs no amendments.

RELATED: Top-Dressing a Lawn: Why It’s Important and How to Do It

Sunday Lawn Care

DIY Lawn Care. Simplified.
Bob Vila has partnered with Sunday to get your lawn exactly what it needs to thrive.

START GROWING

Step 3: Spread the grass seed.

Woman uses a handheld spreader to distribute grass seed on her lawn.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

After determining the right time of year time to overseed (knowing when to reseed a lawn is based on your climate and grass type), load the grass seed into a seed spreader and set it to distribute about 16 seeds per square inch of soil. The right seed density will depend on the thickness of the existing lawn, so some lawns might need less. You can spread grass seed by hand if you don’t have a spreader.

Choose a grass seed designed for your climate or region that complements the existing grass. Cool-season grasses thrive in variable temperatures, like those found in the Northeast and Pacific Northwest. Warm-season grasses grow best in a climate like that of the southern United States. (For recommendations on quality seeds, see our researched guide to the best grass seed for overseeding.)

Consulting the USDA Plant Hardiness Zone Map can help determine the average local climate to best choose the appropriate grass type. Look for grass seed that’s rated by the National Turfgrass Evaluation Program because these varieties have been tested and found resistant to disease, drought, and common pests.

Step 4: Add grass seed fertilizer.

Woman pours fertilizer from a bag into a seed spreader for distribution on her grass.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Select the best fertilizer for your region and property, and load it into a fertilizer spreader. Start by scattering around the perimeter of the lawn to make sure fertilizer reaches the edges of your property. Next, follow a pattern similar to a mowing pattern by moving in straight rows until the entire lawn is fertilized.

There are different types of fertilizer spreaders, including a broadcast spreader, handheld spreader, snap spreader, drop spreader, and liquid sprayer. Fertilizing small yards often requires just a small handheld spreader. Those with larger yards will save a lot of time and effort by using a broadcast spreader.

Both yard size and fertilizer type will determine which type of spreader is best for your property. For example, liquid fertilizer is applied via sprayer, like a quality backpack sprayer, and midsize yards are more easily fertilized with a snap or drop spreader. Keep in mind that some spreaders can handle both grass seed and fertilizer broadcasting, so depending on the fertilizer type and spreader, you might only need one tool for both steps.

Step 5: Water the seeded lawn.

A lawn sprinkler attached to a garden hose waters the grass.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

After fertilizing, water the lawn for a short time each day. It’s best to water in the morning to maximize the water intake. More evaporation occurs during the afternoon and evening, which means it will take more water to get the same benefits. You don’t want to overwater the lawn because doing so can wash away the seed, prevent germination, or encourage thatch development and the growth of fungus and weeds. If there are puddles or the ground feels spongy, cut back on the watering time.

RELATED: Solved! How Long Does It Take Grass to Grow?

Final Thoughts

Part of learning how to overseed a lawn requires knowing when to do it, and this has everything to do with climate and grass type. Cool-season grasses seed best in the late summer and early fall. The cooler temperatures slow the growth of the existing grass but give the seeds time to germinate and grow before the grass goes dormant. Warm-season grass does best when seeded between early spring and early summer. In this case, the seed has time to germinate and grow before the warmest summer temperatures hit. Keep the new seed well watered to give it a good start on growth.

Once your lawn grass is shipshape, consider browsing low-maintenance plants for your landscape.

FAQs

Q. Can you just sprinkle grass seed on lawns?

You will have very little success overseeding a lawn if you just head out and sprinkle grass seed and then cross your fingers. For grass seed to take, the soil must be ready and free of barriers like grass clippings. If the lawn has lots of weeds that compete with grass, for example, sprinkling seed is a waste of time.

Q. When is the best time to overseed a lawn?

Knowing when to overseed a lawn depends largely on grass type. Sow cool-season grass seed in late summer and early fall, giving the seedlings a little time to develop before winter. Overseed a warm-season lawn in spring for best success. Also, try not to overseed on especially windy days or after a heavy rain.

Q. What do you put down first, grass seed or fertilizer?

First, spread your seed on prepared soil, then add grass seed fertilizer. Since you typically are overseeding in fall or late summer for cool-season grasses, and in spring for warm-season ones, you might as well apply your fertilizer to the entire lawn anyway, not just the overseeded portions. It’s typical to seed and fertilize a lawn at the beginning of the turf’s growing season.

Q. How long after overseeding can I mow?

Mowing after overseeding a lawn requires a little patience. You might be itching to make your lusher lawn a nice, even carpet of turf now that it has filled in. But you should wait until the new grass blades are about 2 inches tall. Since you mowed as part of preparing the soil for lawn seeding, the established grass shouldn’t be wildly overgrown.

The post How to Overseed a Lawn appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-05T17:41:19-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Seed Starting Mixes of 2025 for Successful Germination]]>Give flowers and vegetables a head start and use the best seed starting mix designed especially for germinating seeds. See top picks here.

The post The Best Seed Starting Mixes of 2025 for Successful Germination appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-seed-starting-mix/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=159403Mon, 03 Feb 2025 13:52:28 -0500ReviewsGardeningLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Seed starting mixes are clean and lightweight, offering an optimal foundation for seed germination. They come in various mediums, including loose grow mixes (similar to potting soil), expandable coconut coir bricks, or easy-to-transplant pellets. 

Unlike regular garden soil, which can be too dense for tiny roots to expand, seed starting mixes are airy, providing the right environment for delicate roots to take hold. After researching more than 20 of the best grow mix options, our favorite is the Espoma Organic Seed Starter Premium Potting Soil Mix. It’s suitable for flowers and vegetables and is organic and non-compacting, encouraging the growth of healthy plants.

We also interviewed a horticulturist for expert opinion on the benefits and differences between each type of grow mix and how to incorporate them into your home gardening practices. Read on for some of the best seed starting mixes available today and some things to keep in mind while you shop. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Espoma Organic Seed Starter Premium Potting Soil Mix
    Jump to Review 
  2. RUNNER-UP: Hoffman Seed Starter Potting and Planting Soil
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro 8-Quart Seed Starting Potting Mix
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST WINDOW KIT: Window Garden Mini Greenhouse Seed Starter Kit
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST ORGANIC: Coast of Maine Sprout Island Organic Seed Starter
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST COCONUT COIR: Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Seed Starting Mix
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST STARTER PELLETS: Jiffy-7 36-Millimeter Peat Pellet Seed Starter Plugs
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST PEAT-FREE: SpongEase Pro Coco Coir Brick
    Jump to Review
The Best Seed Starting Mix Options
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy Seed Starting Mix

Before spring arrives, garden centers begin stocking large bags of growing medium, but don’t grab one without reading the label. Growing mixes come in various blends, some designed to amend outdoor garden beds, while others are for potted plants. Still others contain fertilizers for specific plants, such as “acid-loving” or “indoor.” Along with standard potting soil, most of these options are not suitable for starting seeds because they contain some contaminants. Choose a mix labeled for starting seeds to ensure it doesn’t contain traces of fungus or bacteria that could wipe out tiny seedlings.

IngredientsQuantityOrganic
Espoma Organic Seed Starter Premium Potting Soil MixSphagnum peat moss, perlite, limestone to adjust pH, and yucca extract8 or 16 quartsYes
Hoffman Seed Starter Potting and Planting SoilSphagnum peat moss, vermiculite, limestone, and a wetting agent 
4, 10, or 18 quarts No
Miracle-Gro 8-Quart Seed Starting Potting MixSphagnum peat moss, perlite, fertilizer, and a wetting agent8 quartsNo
Window Garden Mini Greenhouse Seed Starter Kit30- to 36-millimeter fiber soil 3 trays with 10 cells each (30 cells total)Unspecified
Coast of Maine Sprout Island Organic Seed StarterSphagnum peat moss; perlite, kelp meal, worm castings, lobster meal, dehydrated poultry manure, dolomitic lime, and well-aged compost8 or 16 quarts or 2 cubic feetYes
Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Seed Starting MixCompressed coir soil derived from coconut husks 8 or 16 quarts Yes
Jiffy-7 36-Millimeter Peat Pellet Seed Starter PlugsCompressed peat moss 50 pelletsYes
SpongEase Pro Coco Coir BrickYes1 brick makes 2 gallons of soilYes

Our Top Picks

To qualify as a top pick, a seed-starting mix should be lightweight, contain ingredients that retain moisture, yet drain well, and be free from harmful contaminants. The following products are better suited to some situations than others, but each seeding mix provides an optimal environment for germinating seeds.

Best Overall

Espoma Organic Seed Starter Premium Potting Soil Mix

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option: Espoma Seed Starter Potting Mix Natural & Organic
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • All-natural potting mix for seedlings and root cuttings
  • Helps improve moisture retention
  • Noncompacting; intended to promote better root growth
  • Suitable for vegetables and flowers

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report poor growth with certain plants

Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, perlite, limestone to adjust pH, and yucca extract
  • Quantity: 8 or 16 quarts
  • Organic: Yes 

Espoma’s organic seed starter mix contains all-natural ingredients, including sphagnum peat moss, peat humus (a decomposed ingredient from peat bogs), perlite, and Myco-tone, a proprietary blend of ingredients designed to help seedlings develop strong roots. This premium seed-starting mix retains moisture without compacting. Its all-natural formula helps when rooting cuttings, and it produces healthy plants with abundant blooms, making it well suited for both flowers and vegetables. This potting mix comes in an 8-quart or 16-quart bag.

Get the Espoma seed starting mix at Amazon, The Home Depot, TrueValue, or Walmart

Runner-up

Hoffman Seed Starter Potting and Planting Soil

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option Hoffman Seed Starter Potting and Planting Soil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight, loose, and fertile soilless mix
  • Specially formulated to promote seed germination 
  • Contains 6 components blended in proper proportions
  • Also suitable for root cutting and transplanting

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes some time to fully germinate some seeds

Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, vermiculite, limestone, and a wetting agent 
  • Quantity: 4, 10, or 18 quarts 
  • Organic: No

This seed-starting mix from Hoffman, which comes in a 4-, 10-, or 18-quart bag, contains Canadian sphagnum peat moss, vermiculite, limestone (a pH adjuster), and a wetting agent. We like that this mix retains moisture while providing a light, airy growing medium that promotes seed germination and root development. Also use this seed-starting mix to root cuttings and in larger containers when transplanting seedlings. Ground limestone makes this mix work as a potting soil and for acid-loving plants, such as hydrangea or blueberries. 

Get the Hoffman seed starting mix at Amazon, Kmart, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Miracle-Gro 8-Quart Seed Starting Potting Mix

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option: Miracle-Gro Seed Starting Potting Mix, 8 qt. 2-Pack
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Enriched with Miracle-Gro Plant Food
  • Formulated to boost root development 
  • Good choice when starting from seed 

What We Don’t Like

  • Intended for container use only
  • Some users report a sour smell

Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, perlite, fertilizer, and a wetting agent
  • Quantity: 8 quarts
  • Organic: No

From a manufacturer well-known in the gardening industry, this Miracle-Gro potting mix is specially formulated to boost root development. Miracle-Gro contains sphagnum peat moss, perlite, fertilizer, and a wetting agent. The mix helps retain moisture and drains well, and it won’t pack down. 

The included fertilizer contains nitrogen, phosphate, and potash to help stimulate sprout growth, root development, and blooms. This Miracle-Gro product, which comes in an 8-quart bag, is suitable for starting root and leaf cuttings as well as starting seed trays. Also use it in larger containers when transplanting. 

Get the Miracle-Gro seed starting mix at Amazon (2-pack), Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Lowe’s (2-pack), or Tractor Supply Co.

Best Window Kit

Window Garden Mini Greenhouse Seed Starter Kit

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option Window Garden Mini Greenhouse Seed Starter Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 3 mini greenhouses are reusable
  • Offers a moist, warm environment for seed germination
  • Creates a better root system
  • Makes new plants easy to transplant

What We Don’t Like

  • Pricey compared to other seed starter kits
  • Seeds must be purchased separately

Specs

  • Ingredients: 30- to 36-millimeter fiber soil 
  • Quantity: 3 trays with 10 cells each (30 cells total)
  • Organic: Unspecified 

This Window Garden seed-starting kit features three grow trays that are small enough to fit on a windowsill. Each tray comes with 10 compressed coconut coir grow pods. A clear dome sits atop each tray to act as a mini-greenhouse and help keep the pods from drying out. 

Put the fiber soil pods in the bottoms of the trays and add warm water; the pods will expand and become light and fluffy. Each pod contains only organic coconut coir. When the seedlings are ready for transplanting to garden soil, insert the entire pod in the garden.

Get the Window Garden seed starting mix at Amazon, Target, Bed Bath & Beyond, or Walmart.

Best Organic

Coast of Maine Sprout Island Organic Seed Starter

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option: Coast of Maine Organic Seed Starter Sprout Island
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Designed specifically for germinating seeds and rooting cuttings
  • All-natural fertilizer made with rich ingredients
  • Provides ample drainage and water retention

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report poor consistency and mold
  • Some say this mix attracts flies

Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss; perlite, kelp meal, worm castings, lobster meal, dehydrated poultry manure, dolomitic lime, and well-aged compost
  • Quantity: 8 or 16 quarts or 2 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes 

This Coast of Maine organic seed starting mix contains a blend of ingredients designed specifically for starting seeds and root cuttings, including sphagnum peat moss, perlite, aged compost, kelp meal, and worm castings. We appreciate that this mix also contains an all-natural fertilizer to encourage growth and help produce disease-resistant plants. 

Coast of Maine seed starter is a lightweight, well-draining growing medium that won’t pack down, so tender seedling roots can develop. It retains moisture to help prevent roots from drying out. The mix comes in 8- and 16-quart bags. There’s also a 2-cubic-foot option.

Get the Coast of Maine seed starting mix at Amazon, The Home Depot, Target (2-pack), Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best Coconut Coir

Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Seed Starting Mix

 Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Seed Starting Mix 16 Qt.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact size; easy to store
  • Expands to 8 quarts of soil when watered
  • Ideal for seed starting
  • Balanced pH improves nutrient absorption by seedlings 

What We Don’t Like

  • Dries out faster than other mixes

Specs

  • Ingredients: Compressed coir soil derived from coconut husks 
  • Quantity: 8 or 16 quarts 
  • Organic: Yes 

The compressed coconut coir in this seed-starting mix comes as an 8-quart, 7.25- by- 6- by-4-inch compressed brick. Just add water and crumble it to obtain 8 quarts of seed-starting mix. The Burpee Organic Seed Starting Mix contains only coconut coir to help promote plant and root growth. 

Once expanded with water, use the coir in any seed-starting container, by itself or in combination with potting soil to grow larger plants. The material retains moisture yet won’t pack down.

Get the Burpee seed starting mix at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Burpee (2-pack).

Best Starter Pellets

Jiffy-7 36-Millimeter Peat Pellet Seed Starter Plugs

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option: 50-Count Jiffy 7 Peat Pellets Seed Starter Plugs
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 50 pellets included
  • Pods are biodegradable
  • Suitable for transporting 

What We Don’t Like

  • Some user reports of mold growth

Specs

  • Ingredients: Compressed peat moss 
  • Quantity: 50 pellets
  • Organic: Yes 

These Jiffy-7 peat pellets arrive in small, compressed discs but expand into fluffy grow pods when immersed in water. This soilless seed starting mix contains only compressed peat moss—nothing else. The user places a pellet in the bottom of a plastic flat or tray and pours in warm water to trigger expansion. When the expansion is complete, the pellet measures 1.5 inches by 1.5 inches, just large enough to insert a seed or two in the top of the peat moss. 

The peat moss is held in place with a thin biodegradable net, and gardeners place the entire unit in the soil when transplanting to the garden or a larger pot. Buyers receive 50 compressed peat pellets per package.

Get the Jiffy-7 seed starting mix at Amazon, Grower’s Solution, or Walmart.

Best Peat-Free

SpongEase Pro Coco Coir Brick

 The Best Seed Starting Mix Option: SpongEase Pro Coco Coir Brick
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact and easy to store when not using
  • More environmentally friendly than peat moss products
  • Affordable; product makes 2 gallons of soil

What We Don’t Like

  • Grittier texture than other coco coir products

Specs

  • Ingredients: Coconut coir 
  • Quantity: 1 brick makes 2 gallons of soil
  • Organic: Yes 

The SpongEase Pro Coco Coir Brick squeezes nutrients down to a compact brick full of goodness. Made of raw coconut coir, this fibrous block expands to a light texture designed to aerate, retaining moisture. At the same time, it provides a nutritious boost for starting seeds.

Gardeners can rehydrate the entire block to create 2 gallons of soil or hydrate only the amount needed to fill their seedling starter trays. The compressed packaging stores easily and provides options for a wide range of gardening needs and uses. This organic and eco-friendly starting mix for seeds makes a good substitute for peat since coco coir saturates more quickly than peat moss, although it dries out more quickly, so be aware of this when using. 

Get the SpongEase seed starting mix at Amazon or The Home Depot (3-pack).

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Seed Starting Mixes 

We researched the most sought-after seed starting mixes in their respective categories and discovered that the best options are determined by their ingredients, form, quantity provided, and other special features included by top brands.

While searching for the best seeding mix available, the most effective and popular types among users for outdoor and indoor plant growth were potting soil mixes, pods, and sponges. These mixes included coconut coir, sphagnum peat moss, perlite, fertilizer, wetting agents, and even compost. We looked for versatile mixes that would grow everything from flowers to tomatoes from seed.

The seeding mixes allow for drainage, water-retention, root cutting, and transplanting while young seeds begin to grow. Many come with large quantities of up to 16 quarts or 50 pods or sponges. Plus, the majority of these picks are 100 percent certified organic seed starters. 

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Seed Starting Mix

Most seed-starting mixes are soilless, which means they contain no dirt. While established plants may thrive in real garden soil or potting soil, the delicate roots of just-sprouted seeds may find it challenging to do so.

“Seed mixes are designed to create the perfect environment for seeds to germinate and develop their first roots,” says Michael Clarke, horitculturist and founder of Yardwork, based in San Juan Capistrano, California. “Because regular garden soil can be too dense and not drain well, the newly formed roots can become compacted or damaged from mold growth. The mixes also need to be lightweight, drain well, and sterile, to give seeds the best chance to thrive without the competition of soil-borne diseases or pests which can be present in garden soils.”

Ingredients

Most seed-starting mixes contain one or more of the following ingredients: 

  • Sphagnum peat moss: The most common base ingredient in seed-starting mixes, sphagnum peat moss is the decomposed material of sphagnum moss, a moss that grows in peat bogs. After it’s sterilized and dehydrated, sphagnum peat moss provides an optimal base for seeds to sprout; it’s absorbent yet won’t pack down. Peat moss, also popular for compressing into small pods, is called “peat pellets,” which expand into fluffy grow mix for starting seeds when immersed in water.
  • Coconut coir: Removed from the outside of coconuts during the harvest process, coir is the fibrous layer that surrounds a hard coconut shell. Formerly discarded as a waste product, coir is now valued for its ability to retain moisture without compacting, making it well suited as an ingredient in seed-starting mixes. Like sphagnum peat moss, coir can be dehydrated and compressed into plugs for rehydrating and starting seeds. 
  • Perlite: Perlite is a byproduct of volcanic glass that’s been heated to high temperatures, resulting in a product that resembles puffy white beads. Perlite retains a small amount of moisture, but its primary purpose is to keep the growing mix from compacting.
  • Vermiculite: Almost as light as perlite but highly absorbent, vermiculite is a silica mineral that’s mined from the earth. It’s in potting soil and seed-starting mix to lighten the mixture and help retain moisture.
  • Diatomaceous earth (DE): This powdery natural product in some seed-starting mixes helps kill insects. Diatomaceous earth contains the finely ground fossils of tiny aquatic organisms known as “diatoms.” When insects come into contact with DE, the powder sticks to their bodies and acts as a desiccant to dehydrate and kill them.
  • Lime: Powdered lime is in some seed-starting mixes to help lower the pH level of the mix to around 6 to 6.5 on the pH scale. The pH scale ranges from 0 to 14, with 7 considered neutral. Higher numbers indicate greater alkaline content, and lower numbers indicate more acidic content. Most plants grow well in soil with a pH level of around 6.5 to 7. 
  • Wetting agent: Completely dry grow mix ingredients initially resist absorbing water, so some manufacturers include a wetting agent (surfactant) that helps the material absorb water. A wetting agent, such as powdered kelp, is needed the first time the material is moistened. 

Organic vs. Non-Organic

When a starter soil for seeds is labeled “organic,” gardeners know that all its ingredients are natural and contain no chemicals or synthetic agents. Most seed-starting mixes contain most, if not all, natural ingredients, but the inclusion of synthetic fertilizers disqualifies it as organic. An organic seed-starting mix may be more important to those who produce edible vegetables rather than flowers or ornamental plants. 

Sterilization

Manufacturers remove fungi and bacteria from seed-starting mix by heating it to over 200 degrees Fahrenheit for a period of time, usually at least 30 minutes, to destroy pathogens that might kill tender seedlings. Depending on the manufacturer, heat may be applied by forcing steam through the material or by submerging the mixture in water and heating the water. Sterilizing the mixture gives delicate seeds their best chance at survival.

Aeration and Moisture Retention

A seed-starting mix should retain its lightness and loft, even when wet. Not only do new roots need moisture to grow, but they also need oxygen. Manufacturers add perlite and vermiculite to aerate the mix. Starting seeds in compact or heavy garden soil usually results in poor germination rates. Optimal seed-starting mixes retain just enough moisture for the mixture to stay damp to the touch while still providing the aeration necessary for roots to develop.

pH Levels

If a seed-starting mix is labeled as having “balanced pH,” the pH should fall between 6.5 and 7. Adjusting the pH level of a seed-starting mix isn’t always essential, since the natural ingredients in most mixes fall within the correct pH levels. Monitoring pH is more important if the plant is grown hydroponically (in water). pH adjusting solutions, known as “pH UP” and “pH DOWN,” are available to mix with the water in a hydroponic system to help maintain a neutral pH level.

Tips for Using Seed-Starting Mix

The best time to start seeds indoors depends on the type of seed and your USDA growing zone. Use a seed-starting mix rather than soil or potting mix to increase seed germination and get tiny seedlings off to a healthy start. Employ these tips to simplify the process and increase success.

  • “It’s best to moisten the mix before planting seeds. It should be damp, but not soaking wet, to prevent the seeds from drying out too quickly,” says Clarke.
  • If the tap water is high in mineral content, consider using distilled water to avoid creating a high alkaline pH environment.
  • Consider wearing a dust mask when working with a dry seed-starting mix since some contain powdery, fine elements that can become airborne. 

Clarke also cautions against watering plants too frequently. “It’s best to use seed liners or trays containing drainage holes to prevent water from sitting at the bottom,” he says.

FAQs 

By using a seed starting soil, you increase the chance of successfully growing from seeds to transplant to the garden later. Frequently asked questions about seed starter mixes appear below. 

Q. Which type of soil is best for starting seeds indoors?

None, actually! Avoid planting seeds in natural soil; instead, opt for a commercial seed-starting mix for optimal germination and survival rates when starting seeds indoors. The best indoor seedling starter mix only needs three ingredients for seeds to germinate: sphagnum peat moss (or coco coir), perlite, and vermiculite. 

Q. What is the difference between potting soil and seed-starting mix?

Potting soil is denser and may contain larger bits of ingredients, such as twigs or clumps. Potting soil for indoor plants usually does not drain as well as starting mix and is packed with richer nutrients (which seeds don’t actually need to germinate)
Seed starting mix is very fine and contains no large pieces, drains well, and helps prevent compacting inside the small seed starting cells or containers.

Q. Can you reuse seed starting mix? 

No, once it’s been used, it’s no longer sterile. But you can sprinkle leftover mix on the garden or blend it into a potted plant to help lighten the soil.

Q. Does seed starting mix expire?

No. Seed starting mixes don’t have expiration dates. However, users should take care when storing unused starting mix to prevent mold growth or bugs. 

Q. How long can seedlings stay in a seed starting mix?

Seedlings should be kept in a seed-starting mix for about 3-4 weeks or until the roots develop and become visible at the bottom of the tray or soil block.

Q. Should you cover seeds when germinating?

Whether or not you should cover a seed to help it germinate depends on the type of plant you’re growing. In general, covering seeds with a dome or plastic will keep them damp, helping them germinate faster. However, fungal infections can take hold if you keep germinated seeds covered too long.

Q. How wet should a seed starting mix be?

Seed starting mix should be damp to the touch but not soaking wet.

Why Trust Bob Vila

Bob Vila has been America’s Handyman since 1979. As the host of beloved and groundbreaking TV series including “This Old House” and “Bob Vila’s Home Again,” he popularized and became synonymous with “do-it-yourself” home improvement.

Over the course of his decades-long career, Bob Vila has helped millions of people build, renovate, repair, and live better each day—a tradition that continues today with expert yet accessible home advice. The Bob Vila team distills need-to-know information into project tutorials, maintenance guides, tool 101s, and more. These home and garden experts then thoroughly research, vet, and recommend products that support homeowners, renters, DIYers, and professionals in their to-do lists.

The post The Best Seed Starting Mixes of 2025 for Successful Germination appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-03T13:52:28-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Fell a Tree]]>Before swinging an axe or starting up the chainsaw, familiarize yourself with key safety practices for felling.

The post How to Fell a Tree appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/felling-a-tree/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=98402Fri, 31 Jan 2025 11:18:47 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLandscapingLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Trees can provide shade, privacy, and add a unique aesthetic to the home, but if a tree is diseased, damaged, showing signs of falling, or simply blocking a great view, DIYers can remove the issue by felling a tree. Though, it’s important to mention that in some areas, the homeowner will need to get a permit before cutting trees, even in their own yard.

For those with the right tools, skills, and enough relevant DIY experience, learning how to cut down a tree can help manage their property and eliminate potential risks before they can become a true hazard to structures or people. However, due to the sheer size and bulk of most trees, this job can be highly dangerous. Use this guide to learn how to fell a tree safely.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Project Overview

Working Time: 2 hours
Total Time: 4 hours
Skill Level: Intermediate
Estimated Cost: $220 to $360

Before You Begin

Protective equipment is necessary for a wide range of home DIY projects, and an important consideration when planning how to fell a tree. While it’s essential to avoid the falling trunk of the tree, falling branches also can pose a significant risk, so it’s recommended to have a quality chainsaw, wear a full chainsaw helmet, with a built-in face shield and hearing protection

In addition, DIYers should wear some of the best work gloves to safeguard their hands while they fell a tree. It may be a good idea to invest in kevlar chaps, as well as a pair of durable work boots to protect their legs and feet from chainsaw grazes. 

How to Cut Down a Tree

Diagram explaining how to fell a tree and cut directional notches.
Photo: John B. / Fiverr

Learning how to fell a tree can help maintain the yard, but is also a useful skill for cutting down your own Christmas tree or splitting wood for the fireplace. Follow the steps provided below to find out how to inspect the condition of the tree, plan the felling zone, and safely fell a tree with wedges.

Step 1: Check whether it’s safe to cut down the tree.

Before cutting down a tree, it’s necessary to learn how to identify a dangerous tree to avoid injury to yourself, bystanders, and your surroundings. Start by examining the angle of the tree. If it is leaning significantly in one direction, it will be difficult to control the fall, so it’s best to call in the pros, who can manage the tree using specialized equipment.

Similarly, if the tree has dead branches still attached or that are being supported by other branches, they may fall on you while you are cutting the tree, another DIY safety consideration. Also, if the tree is located in a small backyard with nearby obstacles, like buildings, fences, or even power lines, this job should be handled by a crew of professionals. Otherwise, the tree may destroy the fence, get tangled in the power lines, or even fall on the house

Step 2: Determine the felling zone.

After verifying whether it’s safe to cut down a tree, the next step is to determine the felling zone. The felling zone refers to the path where the tree will fall, and it needs to be free of structures, roads, and other trees to avoid causing any unnecessary damage or creating a domino-like effect in the area.

Estimate the height of the tree, then mark out a corresponding felling zone using a tape measure. The area from the base of the tree to where the top of the tree will land is the felling zone, though experts often recommend at least doubling the estimated height. You should also take this time to determine two escape routes on the opposite side of the felling direction that will allow you to safely retreat when the tree falls (at 45-degree angles from the trunk). Keep in mind that falling objects are one of the top reasons DIYers visit the E.R., so it’s necessary to take proper precautions before you begin.

Step 3: Clear the surrounding area.

Even if you are only cutting down a small tree, it’s important to clear the area as much as possible, including the felling zone and two escape routes. Cut away the brush from around the trunk of the tree, clear any shrubs, clear away items like outdoor furniture, and ensure that there aren’t any buildings or other structures that could be damaged while felling the tree. Additionally, it’s a good idea to pick up any sticks or stones that could become a tripping hazard while you are retreating from the falling tree. 

Step 4: Plan the notch.

A directional notch forms a weak point in the bottom of the trunk that determines which way the tree will fall when the felling cut is made. When done correctly, the tree will fall in line with the notch. Without a directional notch to direct which way the tree will fall, you will be left guessing where it will land. 

For inexperienced DIYers, it can help to wrap a chalk line horizontally around the lower part of the tree where you plan to cut the notch in order to keep the cuts on track. Determine the best direction for the tree to fall and make a mark on the trunk facing that direction.

Step 5: Cut the notch.

Lumberjack using chainsaw while cutting tree in forest.
Photo: istockphoto.com

Before cutting into the tree, make sure you sharpen the chainsaw and inspect the tool for any problems. When you are satisfied that the chainsaw is in good working condition, make the first notch cut starting a foot or so above the chalk line and cut downward at a 70-degree angle until reaching the chalk line. Aim for the first cut to end up about one-third of the way into the trunk.

Make the second cut of the notch along the horizontal chalk line until it meets the bottom edge of the first cut. Use a hammer, maul, or mallet to knock the cut piece of wood out of the tree trunk. If you are having difficulty, use the chainsaw to widen the horizontal cut until the chunk of wood falls out on its own. 

Step 6: Add wedges, if necessary.

Wedges can be used to help prevent the chainsaw from getting pinched while you cut. They aren’t necessary for smaller trees, with less weight and girth, but if the diameter of the tree is more than 18 inches, it’s a good idea to use wedges. 

If you are felling a tree that is greater than 18 inches in diameter, start by making the notch cut, then begin the felling cut, but stop cutting as soon as the blade is far enough into the tree to insert the wedges. Lock the chain brake and leave the chainsaw bar in the cut with the saw running while you use a hammer or maul to tap in the wedges.

Step 7: Make the felling cut.

Felling a large tree is a task too big for a single person. The best way to ensure a safe fall is to have a reliable assistant known as a lookout. The lookout should stand a few feet behind the person who’s felling the tree and communicate emergencies using a pre-planned series of taps rather than verbal cues (which cannot be heard). If a problem occurs, the lookout should tap on the DIYer’s shoulders with a stick or broom handle to warn them.

When you are ready, get in position to cut the tree from the side opposite of where the direction notch is located. Begin cutting along the horizontal line indicated by the chalk marking. As the chainsaw blade gets closer to the notch, the tree will become unstable and may rock or lean slightly. This is normal. 

Keep the chainsaw blade horizontal and continue cutting. When the tree begins to fall, stop cutting, lock the chain brake, and back up in the direction of the previously determined escape route. Make sure to keep your eyes on the tree until it lands to avoid any unfortunate surprises.

Step 8: Remove branches and saw the trunk Into firewood.

After felling the tree, you will need to cut it into pieces for proper storage, use, or disposal. Start by cutting the branches off the lower end of the trunk and work your way to the top. When possible, it’s recommended to stand on the uphill side of the tree to reduce the risk of it rolling on top of you. 

Once the tree branches have been removed, you can begin cutting the trunk (and removed branches) into short pieces for use as firewood. Saw about three-fourths of the way through the log before rotating it to complete the cut. 

FAQs

Q. Can I cut down trees on my own land?

In some cases, landowners are allowed to cut down trees—in others; a professional tree-cutting service must perform the work. Similarly, in some states a permit is required before you can cut down a tree, while others do not have this regulation. Contact the local permit office or building authority to find out the rules in your area, and thoroughly assess the tree, felling area, and your skills and tools before proceeding.

Q. Who is responsible for dangerous trees?

The landowner of the property where the tree sits is responsible for any damage caused by the tree to the neighboring property. However, if the tree branches extend over a neighbor’s property, the neighbor can often legally cut off those branches. 

Q. How do you cut down a severely leaning tree?

It’s typically easiest to fell the tree in the direction of the lean, unless it’s leaning toward a home or other structure. In that case, the tree should be felled in the direction opposite of the lean. That may require the use of a crane, and it involves making cuts and inserting wedges to reverse the lean, and that’s best left to the pros.  

Q. How much does it cost to cut down a large tree?

Having a tree professionally cut down ranges from about $200 to $2,000, with $750 being the average. The final cost depends on the size of the tree and whether anything is in the way of the fall, such as a roof or power lines.

The post How to Fell a Tree appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-31T11:18:47-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Kill Tree Roots Naturally]]>Are tree roots taking over your yard? Don't resort to toxic chemical root killers. Instead, try this all-natural solution.

The post How to Kill Tree Roots Naturally appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-kill-tree-roots/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=79154Thu, 30 Jan 2025 15:13:05 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLandscapingLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Trees add great beauty to your landscape and their shade can help keep cooling costs low. But when a tree outgrows its location or is seriously damaged in a storm, it becomes a hazard that should be removed, and chopping it down is only half the battle.

Find trusted local pros for any home project
+

A tree’s underground root system can extend up to 20 feet deep in ideal soil conditions, and spread over an even greater area. The roots can continue to grow even after the trunk is gone; if they’re too close to your sewer line or foundation, they can cause serious damage. Killing the roots can avoid potential problems down the road.

One common way to kill tree roots is one that the BobVila.com staff does not support: using the chemical herbicide glyphosate, the active ingredient in RoundUp, on the roots and tree stump. We never recommend the use of this herbicide. Instead, we urge readers to seek out more environmentally solutions to lawn and garden problems.

How to Kill Tree Roots Using Rock Salt

Although it takes long time to work, rock salt can effectively kill tree roots by robbing them of water.

TOOLS AND MATERIALS

Rock salt
Water
Drill with a 1-inch or larger drill bit

Step 1: Drill holes into the tree’s trunk and roots.

Bore several holes 3 to 4 inches deep into the cut surface of the tree trunk. Make several additional holes into any larger roots that are exposed near the ground.

Tried-and-True Advice

“When we bought our house the front yard had one beautiful tree and one stump. After removing the stump there were still quite a few roots, so we took an unconventional approach: We built up a fire pit [over the roots], and for two years we had bonfires there. After two years, between the fire and the natural decomposition process, it was easy to just lift out the remaining dead roots and repair the lawn. I live in Minnesota where bonfires are permitted on the front lawn so it wasn’t an issue.”

Amber Guetebier, Contributing Writer

Step 2: Fill the holes with rock salt and water.

Sprinkle rock salt into the holes you’ve bored, and then pour water into the holes. The rock salt solution is harmful to surrounding vegetation and toxic to pets, so take care to avoid overfilling the holes. Repeat this process several times over the course of a few months, and eventually the rock salt will kill the tree roots. (You’ll know the roots are dead when there is no longer any regrowth from the trunk.)

If you are worried that the roots have invaded a sewer line or your foundation, you can also try digging the larger tree roots out of the ground. It’s an arduous process, but once you remove them you can reclaim your lawn.

The post How to Kill Tree Roots Naturally appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-30T15:13:05-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Propane Heater Can Be Used Almost Anywhere—Even Inside]]>The best propane heater can effectively warm up your space. See shopping tips and check out our test results of this year's most popular propane heaters.

The post The Best Propane Heater Can Be Used Almost Anywhere—Even Inside appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-propane-heater/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=139102Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:56:52 -0500ReviewsExteriorGaragesHVACLawn & GardenMajor SystemsOutdoor LivingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Best Overall

The Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater on a white background.

Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater

Best Bang for the Buck

The Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane Heater on a white background.

Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane Heater

Best Tank Top

The Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater on a white background.

Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater

Propane heaters are an incredibly effective way to quickly heat a medium to large living space using liquid propane (LP) as fuel, making them suitable for a range of heating needs.

We researched more than 30 propane heaters and then selected several top-rated models for hands-on testing by the Bob Vila test team. We also consulted Alex Rushwin, technical service manager for Enerco Group, manufacturer of the ever-popular Mr. Heater line of propane heaters.

Today’s propane heaters burn cleaner and are safer than early models. “Mr. Heater patented the first indoor propane heater back in 2000,” Rushwin says, “and that was a huge step forward for portable propane heat.” Since then, Mr. Heater has improved on the technology, and their indoor heaters are safer than ever.

Finding the best propane heater for your purposes depends on how you will use it, where it will be used, the heat output you need, and the important safety features included. Our favorite of the bunch was Mr. Heater’s MH9BX model for its portable design and quick heating capabilities. While intended use varies, each of the following models excelled in our hands-on tests and earned its spot in this lineup of the best propane heaters.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane Heater
  3. BEST TANK TOP: Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater 
  4. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Dyna-Glo Delux 300,000 BTU LP Forced-Air Heater 
  5. BEST PATIO: East Oak Pyrol Outdoor Patio Propane Gas Heater
  6. BEST INDOOR: Dyna-Glo 30K BTU LP Blue Flame Vent-Free Heater
  7. BEST FOR GARAGE: Mr. Heater MH18CH 18,000 BTU Cabinet Heater
The Best Propane Heater installed through a cement wall at the base of a set of stairs.
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

TypeHeating PowerWeightSafety Features
Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy HeaterRadiant4,000 or 9,000 BTUs10.6 poundsTip-over shutoff, ODS
Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane HeaterRadiant3,800 BTUs5.8 poundsTip-over shutoff, low-oxygen sensor
Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater Radiant9,000 to 30,000 BTUs5.07 poundsTip-over shutoff
Dyna-Glo Delux 300,000 BTU LP Forced-Air Heater Convection (forced air)300,000 BTUs32.6 poundsOverheat shutoff, delayed ignition shutoff
East Oak Pyrol Outdoor Patio Propane Gas HeaterRadiant48,000 BTUs57.3 poundsAnti-tilt, flame-out protection, low-oxygen sensor
Dyna-Glo 30K BTU LP Blue Flame Vent-Free HeaterConvectionUp to 30,000 BTUs24.6 poundsOverheating shutoff, low-oxygen sensor
Mr. Heater MH18CH 18,000 BTU Cabinet HeaterRadiant6,000; 12,000; and 18,000 BTUs23 poundsTip-over shutoff, low-oxygen sensor

Our Top Picks

The following are some of the best propane heaters on the market in their respective categories. They were selected for quality and price, with a focus on the shopping considerations mentioned above.

Best Overall

Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater

 The Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

Product Specs

  • Type: Radiant
  • Heating power: 4,000 or 9,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 10.6 pounds
  • Safety features: Tip-over shutoff, ODS

What We Like

  • Propane bottle is easy to connect
  • Portable and compact design
  • Comes with an oxygen-depletion sensor and tip-over shutoff

What We Don’t Like

  • Lower BTU range not sufficient for spaces over 250 square feet

Rushwin says that Mr. Heater’s Buddy series is one of its most popular sellers, and it’s been one of our favorites for years, as it was our standby heater for mountain camping adventures. The MH9BX was new to us though, and we were impressed right off the bat by the new swivel-connector feature that allowed us to twist the 1-pound propane bottle into position with ease. Some of the older models didn’t have the swivel connector, so good going, Mr. Heater! That’s a huge plus.

The Buddy MH9BX has an attractive design with a sturdy fold-down carrying handle that makes it easy to pick up and take wherever it’s needed. The heater has a choice of two heat outputs, either 4,000 or 9,000 BTUs, making it capable of heating up to 225 square feet of space. We tested the MH9BX in a 180-square foot room, and on high, it raised the temperature from 70 to 78 degrees Fahrenheit in just 30 minutes. It’s a radiant heater, so it warms objects, not the air, but the heated objects in turn warmed up the room.

This heater is able to burn propane at near-100 percent efficiency, which makes it an option for indoor applications. Its oxygen-depletion sensor (ODS) ensures that the oxygen level never drops to a dangerous point. Plus, its tip-over safety mechanism immediately shut the heater off when we tipped it over.

Read our full review: Mr. Heater MH9BX Portable Buddy Heater 

Get the Mr. Heater MH9BX propane heater at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane Heater

 The Mr. Heater MH4B Little Buddy Propane Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Radiant
  • Heating power: 3,800 BTUs
  • Weight: 5.8 pounds
  • Safety features: Tip-over shutoff, low-oxygen sensor

What We Like

  • Lightweight and portable
  • Reliable emergency heat source for indoor use
  • Warms nearby objects and people
  • Good safety measures

What We Don’t Like

  • Radiant heat only

Our second Mr. Heater pick is the Little Buddy MH4B, which provides instant warmth at an attractive price point. Not only is the Little Buddy easy on the wallet, but it’s also simple to carry along when tailgating or just spending a little time bird-watching on a chilly day. It’s an excellent pick for supplemental indoor emergency heat, too. It burns clean and comes with a low-oxygen sensor that shuts it off if the oxygen level in the space drops to an unhealthy level.

The Little Buddy is designed to heat spaces up to 95 square feet, so we tested it in a bathroom, where it raised the room’s temperature by 15 degrees Fahrenheit in 30 minutes. Keep in mind that temperature increases will vary depending on the type of space, starting temperature, and whether the space is insulated or if it is being used as a tent heater without any insulation.

Like its big brother, the Buddy heater, Little Buddy is a radiant propane heater, and it warms nearby objects—and people. We found it excellent for warming our gloved hands outdoors, but it doesn’t blow hot air. The tip-over shutoff turned the heater off immediately when we laid the Little Buddy on its side.

While this little propane heater isn’t powerful enough for warming up large rooms, it’s an excellent small heater that’s safe for indoor use.

Get the Mr. Heater Little Buddy propane heater at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Tank Top

Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater

 The Camplux Outdoor Tank Top Propane Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Radiant
  • Heating power: 9,000 to 30,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 5.07 pounds
  • Safety features: Tip-over shutoff

What We Like

  • Easily attaches to the propane tank
  • Dual burner design; adjustable operation
  • Provides significant radiant heat

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires ventilation

Tank tops aren’t just sleeveless attire for hot summer days. The Camplux Tank Top propane heater attaches to the top of a 20-pound or larger propane tank, and it quickly warms nearby objects or people—making it a handy heater for outdoor use or in ventilated shops and garages.

This is not an in-home model; the manufacturer suggests having a 0.5-square-foot opening for fresh air for every 15,000 BTUs being used. For example, if using both burners simultaneously on the highest setting (total of 30,000 BTUs), opening a 24-inch wide window just 1 inch would be sufficient. A door does not need to be wide open; just crack a window.

It comes with two radiant burners and attaches securely to the steel collar at the top of a standard propane tank. It was easy to connect to the tank and held firmly throughout our tests. We tested the Camplux dual-burner propane heater in a mobile workshop with an open-end wall.

It was simple to connect to the top of the propane tank and easy to light—but be aware this is a manual-light heater; we had to insert a lit match in a hole in the side of the reflective cover and then slowly turn on the propane. It fired right up. Each side lights and operates independently.

The Camplux Tank Top heater provided a lot of radiant heat—so much that we couldn’t stand any closer than about 4 feet without feeling uncomfortably hot when running it on the high setting. On the low setting, it was more tolerable, but it still puts out a lot of heat. It didn’t appreciably raise the temperature in the mobile shop, but that was due to one end of the shop trailer being completely open, which allowed cool breezes to blow through.

This is a powerful, no-frills propane heater for use in a ventilated workshop or on a jobsite.

Get the Camplux propane heater at Amazon.

Best Heavy-Duty

Dyna-Glo Delux 300,000 BTU LP Forced-Air Heater

 The Dyna-Glo Delux 300,000 BTU LP Forced-Air Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Convection (forced air)
  • Heating power: 300,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 32.6 pounds
  • Safety features: Overheat shutoff, delayed ignition shutoff

What We Like

  • A high-performance model
  • Adjustable thermostat
  • Reliable electronic ignition
  • Carry handle and cord wrap

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires an electrical outlet to operate
  • Must be connected to a 100-pound or larger propane tank

Here come the big boys in the propane heating world! The Dyna-Glo Delux isn’t a heater that most will want to keep in a living room unless the living room happens to be around 7,000 square feet in size, but it is an excellent option as a space heater in a large garage, barn, warehouse, or worksite because it can produce up to 300,000 BTUs.

We took the Dyna-Glo to our shop and connected it to a propane tank—but nothing happened. It didn’t fire up. We saw the pilot light flicker inside and smelled propane, which led us to shut down the unit promptly, but there were no flames or heat. We suspected the reason might be a too-small propane tank, and we were right—the instruction manual specifies connecting the Dyna-Glo to a tank no smaller than 100 pounds. So, that’s what we did; we hauled in a larger tank and tried again, and the heater fired right up.

And, boy did it put out the heat! Within 30 minutes, our shop went from a chilly 56 degrees Fahrenheit to 72 degrees Fahrenheit. This is a forced-air (convection) heater—a strong fan blows heat out of the front end of the combustion chamber at a forceful rate.

Ventilation is a must: The manufacturer recommends 11.25 square feet of open-air space when running the heater at maximum force. It features a safety shutoff if it overheats and another shutoff that keeps the heater from igniting if propane has been circulating through. The latter is to prevent the type of fireball that can result if propane gas is in the combustion chamber before it ignites.

The Dyna-Glo must also be plugged into an electrical outlet to power its heavy-duty fan. While it weighs 32 pounds, it has a carrying handle and a built-in cord wrap, making transportation easier. Overall, this powerful heater will keep large areas toasty warm, but don’t use it in the house.

Get the Dyna-Glo Delux propane heater at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Patio

East Oak Pyrol Outdoor Patio Propane Gas Heater

 The East Oak Pyrol Outdoor Patio Propane Gas Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Radiant
  • Heating power: 48,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 57.3 pounds
  • Safety features: Anti-tilt, flame-out protection, low-oxygen sensor

What We Like

  • Embossed design in stainless steel
  • Heats up in just 5 minutes
  • Efficiently heats nearby objects and people
  • Propane tank is concealed right inside the base
  • Adds a measure of ambience

What We Don’t Like

  • Assembly is complex and time-consuming

The East Oak patio heater offers ambience and is a stunning focal point for a chilly outdoor winter gathering, but plan on spending at least an hour or more assembling all the parts. As we were setting it up, more than once we wondered whether the heater would be worth the hassle of trying to peel off the stubborn protective blue film—with some pieces coming off in tiny bits rather than sheets—and then putting together literally everything on the unit.

Once we got the East Oak pyramid heater together and fired up, we changed our minds—it was worth it. The glass cylinder in the pyramid’s center showcases beautiful dancing flames that rise to the upper vent, where the heat is reflected downward and outward toward anyone standing nearby. The outdoor temperature and breezes will affect its heating range, but we could feel warmth when standing about 10 feet away.

This is strictly an outdoor propane heater, so don’t take it in the house—it needs ample ventilation. It comes with tip-over shut-off protection and also shuts down propane flow if the flame goes out to keep propane gas from leaking into the air. We tested both, and they worked well. It connects to a 20-pound propane tank that fits right inside its base.

The East Oak pyramid heater also provides a good amount of light, so it can be used as supplemental lighting for outdoor entertaining. We really liked this tower heater, but we would have been happier with our experience if it had come at least partially assembled. It’s a lot to put together for even those familiar with assembling tools and appliances.

Get the East Oak propane heater at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Indoor

Dyna-Glo 30K BTU LP Blue Flame Vent-Free Heater

 The Dyna-Glo 30K BTU LP Blue Flame Vent-Free Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Convection
  • Heating power: Up to 30,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 24.6 pounds
  • Safety features: Overheating shutoff, low-oxygen sensor

What We Like

  • Designed for indoor use
  • Slim profile fits neatly on interior walls
  • Equipped with low-oxygen sensor
  • 5 heat settings and thermostat

What We Don’t Like

  • Cannot install the heater too close to side walls or ceiling
  • Propane tank should be located outdoors

Those looking for a designated source of propane heat for indoor use, such as to warm a chilly basement, may need to look no further than the Dyna-Glo wall-mount propane heater. It features a slender profile that fits nicely on an interior wall, and it uses a gentle fan to help circulate heat.

No assembly was necessary with this wall-mount heater, but we had to install brackets on the wall and then hang the heater on the brackets. Just make sure the brackets are level and the heater is not positioned too near something flammable. The manufacturer recommends locating the heater a minimum of 8 inches away from perpendicular walls on either side of the heater and a minimum of 36 inches below the ceiling. In addition, keep all furniture, draperies, and other items a minimum of 36 inches away from the front of the heater.

We ran a long propane hose from an outdoor tank (don’t use propane tanks inside a house) and then fired the heater up using its simple push-button ignitor. It produces up to 30,000 BTUs of heat on the high setting but can be turned down when less heat is desired. A control knob features five heat settings and serves as a thermostat to turn the heater on and off. We found it increased our 200-square-foot test space 11 degrees Fahrenheit in 30 minutes, but results will vary depending on room size and ambient temperature.

This Dyna-Glo comes with an automatic overheating shutoff as well as a low-oxygen sensor. It’s a nice little heater that would serve well as a source of emergency heat during a power outage or for supplemental heat.

Get the Dyna-Glo vent-free propane heater at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best for Garage

Mr. Heater MH18CH 18,000 BTU Cabinet Heater

 The Mr. Heater MH18CH 18,000 BTU Cabinet Heater on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Radiant
  • Heating power: 6,000; 12,000; and 18,000 BTUs
  • Weight: 23 pounds
  • Safety features: Tip-over shutoff, low-oxygen sensor

What We Like

  • Efficient radiant heating
  • Offers 3 heat settings
  • Rugged steel casing with 4 heavy-duty swivel wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited coverage for spaces more than 450 square feet

For many DIYers, the garage is the only covered space available for working on projects. Losing that space to cold weather is avoidable when using a propane heater like this one from Mr. Heater, which can heat a space of up to 450 square feet. The heater has three radiant-heat output settings, including a low setting of 6,000 BTUs; a medium setting of 12,000 BTUs; and a high setting that reaches 18,000 BTUs.

We put the MH18CH in a corner in a three-stall garage for testing. It was a chilly day, and also cold the day before testing, so the temperature in the garage was 53 degrees Fahrenheit. We turned the MH18CH on the high setting, and within 30 minutes, the temperature in the nearest stall rose to 61 degrees Fahrenheit, but the farthest stall registered just 54 degrees Fahrenheit. This was in an uninsulated garage, and results would vary in different-size garages or an insulated garage.

The propane heater has a space in the back designed to accommodate a 20-pound propane tank so that users can move the entire unit around easily on the four attached swivel wheels. This product also has a tip-over safety mechanism and an ODS sensor to automatically shut down the heater if the oxygen level gets too low.

This is a nice portable little propane heater that can be rolled around a garage or shop, which is a convenient way to heat the space where work is being done.

Get the Mr. Heater MH18CH propane heater at AmazonLowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Propane Heaters 

We examined several factors when choosing the propane heaters we wanted to test. Safety was essential, and beyond that, we looked at heat output (British thermal units, or BTUs), heater type (convection vs. radiant), ease of use, and cost. We considered the brand; after all, Mr. Heater and Dyna-Glo are well-respected names in the propane heater world. Still, we didn’t automatically dismiss smaller niche brands if the heaters were durable, safe, and highly rated.

The actual testing of the heaters was pretty simple; after all, they serve one primary purpose: to warm up a space or warm up nearby objects and people. We noted how easy (or challenging) the heaters were to assemble, and then we connected them to propane tanks or bottles, as called for by the manufacturer.

We tested the heaters’ ignition features and noted how much heat they produced and how quickly. Each propane heater was scored using a rubric. The better the heater performed on a test, the more points we awarded. After testing, we averaged the points to determine our top pick and to establish the best uses for each model.

What to Consider When Choosing a Propane Heater

Before choosing the best propane heater for a patio, garage, or home, take a look below to learn about some of the most important shopping considerations that can help you select a heater that suits your needs.

The Best Propane Heater set up on an outdoor side table between two chairs on a porch.
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Ignition

Propane heaters must have the pilot light ignited before the unit will produce any heat. Keep in mind that igniting the pilot light requires the gas to be turned on. These units typically have one of three different ignition methods: manual ignition, push-button ignition, and continuous ignition.

  • Manual ignitions require users to light the pilot light with a long match or a barbecue lighter. Liquid propane heaters with this ignition type are usually more affordable.
  • Push-button ignitions are the most common ignition option for indoor propane heaters. After turning the gas on, push a button for the indicated amount of time so that an integrated sparking mechanism will light the pilot light. (Before using, make sure to follow all of the safety considerations listed in the safety section below and in the manufacturer’s directions for indoor propane heaters.)
  • Continuous ignitions are more common on large, commercial propane heaters. This style of ignition will automatically begin sparking when the gas is on. This feature prevents the hazardous build-up of propane gas that can occur if the delay is too long between sparks. After the pilot light is lit, the continuous ignition stops creating sparks.

Location

One of the main benefits of having a propane heater is that they are usually portable and can be connected to a small or large propane tank. It’s relatively easy to take a portable propane heater to another room, to the garage, or to the outdoors. However, if the heater will be used in one or two main locations, the product needs to be suited to those main areas.

In general, only heaters that accommodate 1-pound propane bottles are suitable for use indoors. Those that connect to 20-pound or larger propane tanks should be connected to a hose that’s long enough to locate the tank outdoors. The exception is models designed to hold 20-pound tanks that can be used in ventilated garages or workshops. Read the manufacturer’s safety precautions carefully.

The best outdoor propane heaters have enough heating power to deal with the rapid dissipation of heat that will naturally occur in a wide-open space. For those who want a great camping heater, a large outdoor option might be best. An alternative is a handheld propane heater that will keep people warm instead of heating the entire area. Some users may prefer to have a wall-mounted propane heater to save floor space and to keep the heater out of reach from kids and pets.

Portability

Portability is one of the features that sets propane heaters apart from electric or natural gas heaters, but not all propane heaters can really make the claim that they are portable. Some propane heaters that have built-in fans or other electronic components will typically need to be plugged into a power source, despite their main fuel being propane.

If portability is a key personal factor, then a propane heater that doesn’t need an electrical power source is often a better choice. A smaller size and a carrying handle will make it easier to pick up and move around. However, if a larger heater is needed for commercial or industrial applications, there are powerful propane heaters that sit on a set of wheels. The wheels make it easier to move the heater around a space.

Safety

Whenever using any type of heating device, it’s critical to be certain that all the necessary precautions are being followed to ensure that no one is at risk. This includes the proper storage of propane tanks and adequate ventilation when the heater is in use. There are other safety features to consider like overheating protection, a tip-over mechanism, and an oxygen-depletion sensor.

  • The overheating protection feature senses the rising temperature and shuts down the heater to prevent damage to the room or any flammable objects and to stop internal damage to the heater.
  • Tip-over mechanisms protect users from the risk of fire if the heater falls over. The impact of the fall is what activates this feature, turning off the heater so that it cannot start a fire by igniting any nearby items, like carpeting or curtains.
  • An oxygen-depletion sensor is designed to measure the available oxygen within the local vicinity. If the oxygen level drops below a specified point, the heater will automatically turn off to allow the oxygen to increase and prevent the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning.

BTU Capacity

The heat output of a propane heater is normally measured in BTUs, with each BTU equal to the heat it would take to increase the temperature of 1 pound of water by 1 degree Fahrenheit. The BTU rating of a propane heater can range widely from as low as 3,000 BTUs to higher than 300,000 BTUs. The best BTU output for a heater will depend on how and where it will be used. For example, outdoor heaters naturally require a higher heat output.

Before deciding on a product, measure the room that needs to be heated. To help figure out which heater is best suited to a particular need, most manufacturers list the BTU output and include the approximate square footage that is appropriate for the heater. For example, a heater with a maximum of 10,000 BTUs may heat a space of approximately 250 square feet, while a unit that has a maximum of 18,000 BTUs will have no problem with 450 square feet.

Size

Size is a factor that can impact where the heater will be used, how it is set up, and whether it’s a portable heater or a stationary unit. A small heater can often be picked up and carried around without a problem. Always check with the manufacturer, but smaller units usually can be used both indoors and outdoors without producing harmful fumes, as these smaller heaters tend to burn fuel at a slower pace.

Large propane heaters can take up a lot of space, which can become a safety hazard if they are too close to flammable objects in the room. Their size also may affect the placement in the room, or it may limit the product to outdoor use. However, a larger propane heater is able to hold an equally large propane tank so it won’t need to be replaced as frequently as the fuel in a small heater.

The Advantages of Owning a Propane Heater

There are many advantages to owning a propane heater. One of the defining features is that these heaters are typically fueled by a portable container of propane, giving users the freedom to carry them from room to room or even take them out into the middle of the woods when camping. Unless the heater has a built-in fan unit, users won’t have to be tethered to a power outlet with this heater.

There is also the benefit of cost savings with a propane heater. This is because the average cost of electricity is higher than the average cost of propane. With a propane heater, there is a wide range of heat-output options that can increase well beyond the capabilities of an electric or natural gas heater, allowing users to rapidly heat up large outdoor spaces.

  • Unless the heater has a built-in fan unit, propane heaters don’t normally need to be plugged into a wall, allowing users to move the heater wherever it’s needed.
  • Propane is more cost-effective than electricity for heating an area, so users save money with this style of heater.
  • The same high heat outputs aren’t available from electric heaters or natural gas heaters as from a propane heater.

FAQs

Whether you want to supplement heat for a greenhouse or have access to a source of emergency heat when the power goes out, propane could be the answer. If you still have questions about propane heaters, read below to find the answers to some of the most commonly asked questions.

Q. Can you get carbon monoxide poisoning from propane?

While it’s unlikely, if the propane heater is not designed for indoor use, it could put off some carbon monoxide fumes. If you are using the heater in a larger enclosed space like a garage, make sure that you have a carbon monoxide detector installed to warn you of any danger.

Q. Is it safe to have a propane heater in a bedroom?

It is generally considered to be a bad idea to have a lit propane heater in your bedroom because it will quickly burn up the oxygen in an enclosed room, which could cause the oxygen levels to drop. Fortunately many of today’s indoor propane heaters, such as those made by Mr. Heater, come with low-oxygen sensors that shut the unit off if the oxygen level in the room drops.

Q. Do propane heaters need ventilation?

Outdoor propane heaters need proper ventilation to ensure that you don’t get carbon monoxide poisoning. Indoor propane heaters—often called “vent-free” heaters—do not put off carbon monoxide, but ventilation is still necessary to ensure healthy oxygen levels in the room.

Q. How do you light an indoor propane heater?

While it’s essential to always follow the manufacturer’s directions for safe use, here are the basic steps for how to light a propane heater:

1. Turn on the propane tank.
2. Adjust the knob on the front or side of the heater to the “start” or “light” position.
3. Push the knob in and hold it to send gas to the unit. Continue holding the knob in for 30 seconds to ensure adequate gas flow.
4. Press the igniter button firmly until you hear a click. You may need to press it more than once on some heaters.
5. Adjust the control knob to the desired temperature.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale and Bob Beacham.

The post The Best Propane Heater Can Be Used Almost Anywhere—Even Inside appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-29T09:56:52-05:00
<![CDATA[This Single-Stage Snow Blower is My Favorite for Moderate Snow]]>We put the Snow Joe snow blower to the test to see if it's worth the hype. Check out how it performed and read our honest review here.

The post This Single-Stage Snow Blower is My Favorite for Moderate Snow appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/snow-joe-snow-blower-review/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=255173Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:01:50 -0500ReviewsDIYLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Snow Joe is competitive in the electric tool market, with several snow blower models built for clearing paths, decks, and driveways. I tested the company’s 48V iON+ Cordless Snow Blower near Lake Tahoe after a series of large storms. The snowfalls were alternatingly wet, crunchy, and fluffy, with depths ranging from several inches to several feet. I pushed the Snow Joe’s limits regarding recommended snow loads and found this little model capable of delivering surprising performance.

The Snow Joe snow blower packs a punch without weighing users down. It’s lightweight, easily maneuverable and, with multiple 24-volt (V) 4-amp hour (Ah) batteries, delivers reliable performance for moderate snow removal. At 18 inches wide, it’s capable of throwing snow up to 20 feet—perfect for clearing moderately sized areas with snow up to 10 inches deep.

Snow Joe 48V iON+ 18-Inch Cordless Snow Blower Kit: At a Glance

Rating: 8/10

Snow Joe Snow Blower Kit on white background

Snow Joe 48V 18-Inch Cordless Snow Blower Kit

What We Like

  • Two 24V batteries deliver ample power and fast recharge cycles
  • Bright LED headlight offers excellent visibility for night use
  • Exceptionally easy assembly out of the box
  • Lightweight at 37.5 pounds

What We Don’t Like

  • Chute can clog in very wet snow, but chute-clearing tool helps
  • Single-stage operation and smaller size limit
  • No power drive system, so users must push to propel the machine

Get the Snow Joe snow blower at:

What is the Snow Joe snow blower?

At only 37.5 pounds (including batteries), the Snow Joe is a lightweight, cordless electric snow blower built for clearing moderate snow on paved surfaces. And since it costs under $400, the Snow Joe hits a nice price point and offers a great solution for a wide range of users.

Since it’s a single-stage snow blower, it’s less beefy than the two-stage versions, which require heavier batteries and are more expensive. Folks managing large areas with very deep snow might want to upgrade (or choose to hire a snow-removal service). But for the average user, the Snow Joe 48V iON+ delivers reliable performance in a no-frills, easy-to-operate model. The kit includes two 24V 4Ah lithium batteries, a dual-port charging station, and a chute clean-out tool.

In the single-stage electric snow blower market, the Snow Joe is competitive regarding price, features, power, and performance. Several brands offer similar models with comparable capabilities at prices up to and over $700. Battery size often influences the price of electric tools, but the Snow Joe snow blower delivered a consistent performance for over 30 minutes on a single charge. Its ample power offers increased runtime in lighter snow loads.

Snow Joe Snow Blower Review
Photo: Zach Lazzari

How easy is the Snow Joe to set up?

I was surprised by the Snow Joe’s ease of setup and readiness out of the box. Gas-powered snow blowers are bulky, and they require the user to tune the engine and add fluids prior to operation. Many of the other electric models I tested also required slightly longer setup times to connect handles in preparation for initial use.

The Snow Joe arrived in a single box, and after opening it, I discovered the handle was folded over and ready to assemble. I used two included screws to stabilize the lower handle section and another two screws for the upper handle. The chute top had an intuitive attachment design, which I secured in seconds. Lastly, I inserted the chute control rod through the handle and into the keyhole on the main unit. With everything ready in a matter of minutes, I charged the batteries, and the unit was prepared for use.

The average user will have no problem assembling this snow blower. Clear instructions are included, but it’s pretty intuitive and comes together without the need for much guidance.

How easy is the Snow Joe snow blower to use?

As a single-stage snow blower, the Snow Joe is simple in terms of controls. It has a chute rod for 180-degree snow-throwing control, a plastic chute with an adjustable throwing angle, and a single-speed throttle to start and stop the unit. Each battery has a covered port that seats easily, locking in place for use. Lastly, a single button turns the LED headlights off and on.

To turn the unit on, I simply pushed a button adjacent to the throttle. I held the throttle against the handlebar to engage the 1200-watt brushless motor, which began running the steel auger. There is no drive system, so I had to manually push the unit to begin blowing snow. The lightweight design makes for easy pushing though, and it threw snow with little effort.

Chute clogs were easy to clear with the rubber clearing tool mounted on the unit. I did experience clogging in very wet snow, which was to be expected. Having the tool immediately available made it easy to clear the chute and jump back into action. When I’d cleared the driveway, I released the throttle handle and removed the batteries for recharging.

Snow Joe Snow Blower Review
Photo: Zach Lazzari

How powerful is the Snow Joe snow blower?

Power on this unit only applies to this unit’s auger as it does not have a drive system. Most single-stage snow blowers do not offer a power drive system because they drain the battery quickly. The trade-off is that the Snow Joe 48V iON+ is much lighter than a two-stage model, making it easy to push. The auger also helps create momentum as it works through the snow with only light to moderate effort from the user.

The Snow Joe’s power hit a nice middle ground, and it had no problem eating through a foot of snow. Anything deeper, though, and it was a bit overtasked, requiring multiple laps through the same lines to work down the snow level. The unit’s 20 feet of throwing distance was plenty for my use, especially on my elevated deck. That said, there are single-stage snow blowers that throw farther. Anyone with a large driveway or who needs to get more distance should take this into consideration.

For my general-use tests, the 48 volts of power and 1,200-watt motor delivered plenty of power. For deeper snow and more intensive use, a two-stage blower with a drive system would be more appropriate.

Is the Snow Joe snow blower worth the money?

In terms of value, the Snow Joe is fantastic. It’s well built, simple, and has quality components like a steel auger and powerful lithium batteries. The price point is moderate, and while shoppers might find more robust single-stage models, they’ll likely cost more yet have similar features and applications.

Overall, this model is a good buy for budget shoppers who don’t need additional bells and whistles that would drive up the price.

Snow Joe Snow Blower Review
Photo: Zach Lazzari

Is the Snow Joe snow blower right for you?

I enjoyed using this snow blower, which covers a ton of ground without breaking the bank. Shoppers can find better models (and plenty of less adequate models), but not many offer the Snow Joe’s ease of use and consistent performance for under $400.

The best features of the Snow Joe snow blower include:

  • Reliable power for clearing up to 10 inches of snow
  • Light weight that’s easy to maneuver
  • Minimal setup that renders it almost immediately ready for use
  • Quality lithium batteries
  • User-friendly operation with simple controls
  • A nice price point

Those needing more power will want to look at our top tested electric snow blowers with bigger chutes and larger batteries or go for a much bigger (and more expensive) two-stage option. Otherwise, the Snow Joe is a worthy pick for most moderate conditions.

Where to Buy the Snow Joe Snow Blower

Get the Snow Joe snow blower at:

The post This Single-Stage Snow Blower is My Favorite for Moderate Snow appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-29T09:01:50-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Build a Horseshoe Pit]]>You don't need special skills to play horseshoes or construct a horseshoe pit. With lumber and play sand, you can DIY a pit in plenty of time for summer.

The post How to Build a Horseshoe Pit appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-build-a-horseshoe-pit/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=29536Tue, 28 Jan 2025 12:30:13 -0500DIYLawn & GardenOutdoor LivingSkills & TechniquesWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’re looking for ways to make your backyard more fun, why not build a horseshoe pit? There’s more than one way to approach this easy, inexpensive project, but the basics hold true no matter your approach. Read on for a full tutorial on how to build a horseshoe pit for entertainment for all ages, all season long.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Step 1: Measure your space.

In a “regulation” pit, horseshoe pit dimensions require that stakes be exactly 40 feet apart. Those stakes should sit within a box that, while at least 31 by 43 inches, measures no larger than 36 by 72 inches. Common horseshoe pit dimensions for backyard play is 36 by 48 inches. You can make only one box, but horseshoes technically involves two boxes: one for stakes and one for pitching. So in all, a 48-by-6-foot rectangular area must be set aside for the game. 

Note: Orient your pits in a north/south direction so that you can play comfortably, without your face in direct sunlight.

Step 2: Build the horseshoe boxes.

Assuming a pair of 36 by 48-inch horseshoe pits, you will need to cut eight pieces of lumber—that is, four pieces measuring 36 inches and four pieces measuring 48 inches. Using fasteners appropriate for the lumber you’ve chosen, assemble the wood pieces into two identical rectangular boxes.

Tried-and-True Advice

 

Dark green wooden horseshoe pit surrounded by large stones.
Photo: Gretchen Heber for Bob Vila

“My husband and I had plenty of leftover lumber from previous projects, so we just cobbled together what we had. Our horseshoe pits probably won’t win any design awards, but they were cheap and they work! We used leftover plywood to make a tall back and sides to keep wayward horseshoes contained. We spray painted everything to give the unmatched pieces a somewhat more cohesive look. Yes, the horseshoes have banged it up, but, you know… it has character.

Another thing to think about: You’ll want to run a rake through your pits before starting up a game, as neighborhood (and maybe your own) cats will almost certainly find the sand irresistible.”

—Gretchen Heber, Contributing Editor and Writer

Step 3: Set the boxes.

You can get away with simply setting your boxes on the ground, but it’s a better idea to dig trenches so that each box can sit flush to the ground. If you want, line the bottom of each horseshoe pit with landscape fabric to suppress weed growth and keep sand from sinking into the dirt.

Step 4: Set the stakes.

Set the stakes a minimum of 21 inches from the front of the box. Be sure the stakes are sticking up about 14 or 15 inches from the ground. Drive the stakes on a bias, so they lean toward the other pit at a slight angle of about 3 inches.

Step 5: Fill the pits with sand.

Fill both pits with sand. The type used for sandboxes is the best and most accessible in stores. Depending on the exact dimensions of the boxes you’ve built, expect to use five or six bags of sand to fill each pit. 

    If you want to invest more real estate and effort, you can upgrade your pit with backboards and pitching platforms. Most of the time, however, a no-frills design is more than enough to enthrall players of all ages and skill levels. If only “scoring a ringer” were as easy as it is to build a horseshoe pit!

    The post How to Build a Horseshoe Pit appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-28T12:30:13-05:00
    <![CDATA[Gas vs. Electric Lawn Mowers: Which Are Better?]]>Gas mowers dominate when it comes to cutting power, but electric mowers are quieter, cleaner, and easier to use and maintain.

    The post Gas vs. Electric Lawn Mowers: Which Are Better? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/gas-vs-electric-lawn-mowers/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=107748Mon, 27 Jan 2025 14:44:41 -0500Lawn & GardenLandscapingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    If it’s time to replace your old lawn mower, then chances are you’re weighing the pros and cons of going with an electric or gas-powered model. Gas still offers the most grass-cutting power and longest runtimes, making this type of mower the clear choice for those with larger yards. But for most homeowners, cordless electric is the way to go. With advancements in battery technology, most cordless mowers have a runtime approaching an hour, ample time for mowing the average 1/4-acre yard on a single charge. Plus, they’re far easier on the environment, quieter, and easier to operate and maintain. Not sure whether gas or electric is the right mower for your yard? Ahead, we break down all the factors you need to consider when choosing between these two types of lawn mowers. 

    Types of Lawn Mowers

    A woman in a plaid shirt rides a red tractor lawn mower.
    Photo: Olga Rolenko via Getty Images
    • Push mowers: Push mowers come in corded and cordless electric models and gas models. They have cutting decks that are about 20 inches wide and require you to provide the force to push them forward. 
    • Self-propelled: Self-propelled lawn mowers, which come in both electric and gas powered models, are just like their push mowers, only they have motorized wheels that pull them forward, so you don’t have to push them. They’re a great option for lawns with slopes, those who may physically struggle to push a mower, or those with larger yards to mow. 
    • Riding: Riding lawn mowers come in two varieties, lawn tractors and zero-turn mowers, both of which are designed to handle larger yards that span a 1/2 acre or more. Both types are available in gas-powered and cordless electric models. 

    Comparing Electric vs. Gas Lawn Mowers

    When choosing between these two types of lawn mowers, it’s important to consider cost, run time, power, maintenance, and ease of use. We break down each of these factors below. 

    Cost

    Cost ranges significantly depending on a lawn mower’s power source. Corded electric lawn mowers are by far the cheapest options out there, with most ranging from $150 to $200, depending on the brand and deck size. 

    Cordless models are pricier than corded models, with prices depending on the brand, deck size, and whether it’s self-propelled. A basic 20-inch walk-behind mower can range from around $300 to $700 with some self-propelled models with extra large decks running as high as $1,200, and batteries running $150 to $200. A battery-powered riding mower is significantly more expensive than walk-behind models, ranging from $4,000 for a lawn tractor up to $7,000 for a zero-turn riding mower, with batteries costing $150 to $400. 

    Gas mowers, which also come in a variety of sizes and types, also run the gamut when it comes to price. Except to pay between $300 and $800 for a walk-behind gas powered mower, again depending on brand, deck size, and whether it’s self-propelled. Some super high-end models with wide mowing decks can reach as high as $1,600. Gas riding mowers range from $2,000 for a small riding tractor up to $4,000 for a zero-turn riding mower. 

    Run Time 

    When considering whether a gas mower or electric or electric is better for you, keep in mind that gas-powered lawn mowers have the clear advantage when it comes to runtime. You’ll get between 30 and 60 minutes on a cordless, battery-powered lawn mower, depending on the size of the battery, the voltage of the mower’s engine, and how hard it has to work to cut through the grass. Thicker, taller grass requires more power and hence drains the battery more quickly. You’ll get about 45 to 60 minutes of run time out of one tank of fuel of a gas lawn mower

    The main difference with a corded lawn mower is that once the batteries are drained, you’ll need to wait for them to recharge before you can proceed, a process that can take 45 minutes to several hours. With a gas lawn mower, you can simply refill the tank and keep on mowing. For this reason, most battery-powered lawn mowers are limited to yards you can mow in less than an hour (which can vary depending on the size of the mower’s deck). 

    “Gas mowers are just going to last longer and can therefore handle a bigger mowing job with a larger yard than an electric mower might,” says Ryan Farley, CEO of Lawnstarter, a company that matches lawn care services with homeowners. 

    While corded electric mowers can run indefinitely, keep in mind that they’re limited in range and power. They’re only rated for extension cords up to 100 feet long, and the 120-volt outlet limits their deck size to a maximum of 20 inches. 

    Power and Cutting Ability

    While there are some battery-powered mowers that can match gas in cutting power, on average, gas lawn mowers are more powerful and have greater cutting ability than cordless electric models. While most gas lawn mowers have the muscle to cut through even thicker grass, not all cordless electric lawn mowers do. 

    That said, advancements in battery technology have put some higher-end electric lawn mowers in the same league as gas powered models when it comes to toque. For example EGO, which makes some of the most powerful electric mowers, produces battery-powered push mowers that put out between 6 to 9 ft. lbs. of torque—on par with gas-powered mowers. 

    “Gas mowers do have a more powerful cut, so they can provide a higher quality cut when you’re working with denser grass, weeds, etc,” Farley says. “But for your average lawn, I haven’t really noticed too much of a difference.” 

    BV’s Top Gas and Electric Lawn Mowers

    Best Gas Mower 

    The Honda HRN216VKA 21″ Variable Speed Walk-Behind Mower in red.
    Photo: The Home Depot

    Honda HRN216VKA 21″ Variable Speed Walk-Behind Mower, $549 at The Home Depot 

    This 21-inch lawnmower has a powerful, 170cc engine that sits atop an ample 21-inch deck. A simple clip system makes it easy to switch between mulching, bagging, and side discharge of grass clippings without needing to add or remove attachments. This Honda mower uses a rear-wheel drive for its propulsion system, which gives it superior ability to navigate uneven terrain and climb slopes. Handlebar controls make it a breeze to switch between the mower’s variable speeds.

    See our researched guide to the best gas lawn mowers for more recommendations.

     

    Best Electric Mower

    The Ego Power+ 21″ Self-Propelled Lawn Mower in green and black.
    Photo: Amazon

    Ego Power+ 21″ Self-Propelled Lawn Mower, $649 at Amazon

    The Ego Power+’s 56V 7.5 amp-hour (Ah) battery produces up to an hour of runtime per charge and recharges within 60 minutes. Cutting power automatically increases when conditions get tougher; use a lever to adjust the self-propelled pace for optimum comfort. Choose from rear bagging, side discharge, or mulching with the included equipment. 

    See our tested guide to the best electric lawn mowers for more recommendations.

    Maintenance and Winterization

    When it comes to lawn mower maintenance and winterization, electric models have the clear advantage. Beyond storing the batteries indoors in times of extreme cold or heat and occasionally sharpening the blade, electric mowers require virtually no maintenance. Gas-powered mowers are another story. You’ll need to periodically replace its spark plugs, change its oil and oil filter, and clean its air filter to keep your lawn mower running smoothly. You’ll also need to winterize the gas to prevent it from going stale if you plan to store the mower for a long period of time. 

    Storage and Portability

    Electric lawn mowers also have the edge when it comes to storage and portability. On average, gas mowers weigh 80 to 90 lbs. with an empty gas tank. Electric lawn mowers, in comparison, weigh 50 to 60 pounds, making them easier to maneuver and store. In fact, since electric lawn mowers don’t have a fuel tank, you can even store them vertically in your shed or garage to help save space. 

    Noise and Ease of Use

    Man in uniform and with ear protectors cutting grass with lawn mower outdoors in a garden.
    Photo: Manu Vega / Getty Images Manu Vega

    An electric lawn mower’s light weight makes it easier to maneuver and use than a heavier gas-powered lawn mower. Electric mowers are also easier to start. Whereas most gas mowers have a pull starter that requires the operator to have a certain amount of strength to fire up the engine, electric lawn mowers have push-button starters that make starting them effortless. If you struggle to start or push a mower, then an electric mower is the best choice when it comes to electric vs gasoline mower.

    If your neighbors are sleeping in on Saturday morning, you won’t make any friends if you crank up your old gas-powered mower that emits around 95 decibels of racket—comparable to the sound of a motorcycle running. 

    Electric mowers (corded and battery operated) are much easier on the ears, producing between 65 to 75 decibels—similar to the sound of a washing machine running. “Electric mowers are known for making much less noise, so if you’re in pretty close quarters with a lot of neighbors, it can be courteous to spring for the quieter option,” Farley says. 

    Environmental Impact

    Gas-powered lawn tools, including lawn mowers, release dangerous pollutants, including carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxide, and a host of volatile organic compounds, into the atmosphere. According to the Environmental Protection Agency, off-road gas-powered equipment, such as chainsaws and lawn mowers, emit about 242 million tons of pollutants each year, with mowers accounting for about 40% of those emissions. 

    Electric mowers, in comparison, have far less impact on the environment as both types of electric mowers create zero emissions. Rechargeable batteries for cordless mowers, however, do contain lithium, the mining of which has been known to pollute water supplies. If going green is your top priority, a corded electric mower is likely to have the least impact on the environment.

    Keep in mind that depending on where you live, you may not have a choice between electric vs. gas lawn equipment. California banned the sale of gas lawn mowers beginning in 2024 as part of its Green Lawn Care Law. Cities such as Denver, Washington D.C., and Burlington, Vermont may soon follow suit. 

    Pros and Cons of Electric Lawn Mowers

    ProsCons
    Produce no harmful emissionsLimited runtime of an hour or less
    Lighter and easier to store and maneuver than gas mowersLack the cutting power of gas mowers with some exceptions 
    Low maintenance 

    Best for:

    • ¼-acre yards, or flat ½-acre yards with no obstructions 
    • Those who may have difficulty using a pull starter or pushing heavier equipment
    • California residents and environmentally conscious homeowners
    • Those looking for a low-maintenance mower

    Pros and Cons of Gas Lawn Mowers

    ProsCons
    Power to cut through dense grassEmissions are harmful to the environment
    Long runtimeRequire routine maintenance and winterization

    Best for:

    • Larger yards and 1/4-acre to 1/2-acre lawns with slopes and numerous obstacles
    • Lawns with thick grass 

    Are Gas or Electric Lawn Mowers Better?

    A man in a green shirt pushes an orange gas lawn mower.
    Photo: AleksandarNakic via Getty Images

    Whether you should go with a gas or electric lawn mower really depends on the type of yard you have. “Smaller or average-sized yards without dense spots or weeds will do great with an electric mower,” Farley says. Cordless mowers have enough runtime for you to mow the entire yard on a single charge, are lower maintenance, and are easier to operate and store. Electric lawn mowers are also by far the more environmentally conscious way to go. 

    That said, an electric lawn mower isn’t the best option for all lawns. If you have a lawn that’s larger than a 1/4 acre with slopes and various trees, landscaping beds and other obstacles to work around, you’ll likely need the longer runtime and raw cutting power that a gas mower offers. You may also want the superior cutting power offered by a gas mower if your lawn consists of thicker grass or if you like to let the grass grow longer between cuttings. 

    “Gas mowers come with the advantage of having a more powerful motor,” Farley says. “There’s also no need to charge a battery, and they can run for longer than an electric mower.”

    If you’re looking for a budget option, have a small yard that’s less than an acre and don’t mind the inconvenience of a power cord, then a corded electric mower is a viable option. 

    The post Gas vs. Electric Lawn Mowers: Which Are Better? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-27T14:44:41-05:00
    <![CDATA[Pest Predictions: 2025 Could Be a Doozy for Many Households]]>The post Pest Predictions: 2025 Could Be a Doozy for Many Households appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/diy/pest-predictions-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=425403Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:30:03 -0500DIYGarden PestsGardeningInteriorLawn & GardenPest ControlPestsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Understanding seasonal pest patterns can help you take action to prevent infestations that could damage your yard or home. By knowing when certain pests are most likely to invade, you can be on alert and implement targeted measures, whether that means scheduling a pest service or using some DIY tools like setting traps or using natural methods. 

    Each year presents a different story on the type and number of insects that could show up in your area. Much of this depends on climate patterns. “The warmer it is, the more pests will thrive and the more populations we’ll see,” says Emma Grace Crumbley, an entomologist with Mosquito Squad Plus, a pest control company with more than 200 locations nationwide.

    Crumbley believes that 2025 climate patterns will be very similar to those of 2024. Keep in mind that 2024 was the warmest year on record, according to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. Crumbley suggests that if these climate patterns “of being warmer than usual and more precipitation than usual in a lot of regions [continue], that will naturally make all our pests across the board have a spike this year.” 

    Discover which insects to look out for in the coming months as warmer temperatures arise, where pests might appear, and what you can do to prevent an infestation on your property. 

    Closeup of a mosquito biting a hand.
    Photo: Joao Paulo Burini/Moment via Getty Images.

    5 Pests to Watch for in the Coming Months

    The following insects are most likely to cause trouble in and around your house as temperatures warm up in the spring, says Crumbley.

    Mosquitoes (Culicidae family)

    Nobody enjoys dealing with itchy mosquito bites, but these critters are more than a nuisance. Unfortunately, of the 200-plus mosquito species in the U.S., about 12 types can cause diseases—even deadly ones. More than 1,000 Americans experience serious illness or death because of a mosquito bite every year. 

    Last year, there was a huge spike in mosquitoes over the summer, along with the emergence of several mosquito-borne illnesses throughout the U.S., says Crumbley. “We saw dengue and West Nile virus become more prevalent. And at the end of last year, in the northeastern part of the country, we saw encephalitis (EEE) start to pop up as well.” 

    This year could be as bad or worse than last year, warns Crumbley. “The second it starts getting warmer, especially for mosquito populations, I would expect to see an uptick pretty quickly in areas that typically have a warm, wet climate.”

    Close-up of Spotted Lanternfly on a piece of wood
    Photo: Philippe Gerber/Moment via Getty Images.

    Spotted Lanternflies (Lycorma delicatula)

    These pests are one of the newest invasive insect species spreading across the country. First introduced in Pennsylvania in shipping cartons from Asia, these flying insects are either black with bright white spots, vibrant red with black and white spots, or gray-winged with black spots, depending on their stage.

    While spotted lanternflies do not bite or sting and are not dangerous to people or animals, they excrete a sticky sugary substance called honeydew that builds up and leads to fungi. The sooty mold can damage plants, trees, outdoor furniture, and cars. They also are a nuisance to buildings. “They’ll lay their eggs and colonize on trees nearby homes,” says Crumbley. “When it gets cold they want to find a way inside a warm area,” she says. Crumbley adds that people complain about the insects coming into their homes.

    “They’re certainly going to be spreading throughout this next year,” says Crumbley. “They are mostly in the Northeastern U.S., but last year they got introduced to Georgia as well.” 

    Asian Longhorned Ticks (Haemaphysalis longicornis)

    Crumbley has also been keeping an eye on Asian longhorned ticks, another invasive insect. When unfed, they are light reddish-tan to dark reddish with brown and have dark markings, while adult females are gray-green with yellowish markings. Introduced a few years ago in New Jersey, the ticks pose a large risk for the health and safety of livestock animals and can carry pathogens that make people ill. Also called the bush, cattle, or scrub tick, the insects can now be found in the eastern half of the country from New York south to Georgia and west to Missouri.

    “They’re capable of not only biting and being annoying and sucking blood, but they can also spread diseases to livestock,” says Crumbley, which can threaten owners’ livelihood. They could be vectors of Rickettsial diseases like Rocky Mountain spotted fever, which can develop an allergy to red meat. “These ticks can also spread anaplasmosis to people, which can develop to either minor symptoms like fever, chills, headache, and muscle aches to more severe symptoms, including respiratory failure, bleeding problems, organ failure, and even death,” says Crumbley.

    Three cicadas on a tree.
    Photo: ELIJAH NOUVELAGE/AFP via Getty Images.

    Cicadas (Cicadoidea family)

    Last spring, three different broods of cicadas emerged at the same time, but this year won’t be as intense. “There is going to be a brood of periodical cicadas that will emerge in a few months,” says Crumbley. Brood XIV, the second largest group of periodical cicadas, appears every 17 years and is also called the Greater Eastern Brood since it will mostly appear in the Eastern U.S. “Based on the data we have from the last time they emerged, it seems likely the states of Tennessee, Kentucky, West Virginia, and Pennsylvania will be hit the hardest, but they could emerge in neighboring states as well,” says Crumbley. 

    Cicadas don’t bite or sting, but they cause a nuisance with their loud chirping and by flying into everything. “They’re clumsy flyers, so if you leave a window or a door open, they can fly right in,” says Crumbley. To prevent an influx of these creatures in your home, keep doors and windows closed as much as possible and add screens if you don’t have them yet, she suggests. 

    Joro Spiders (Trichonephila clavata)

    Joro spiders are another annoying invasive pest to watch for this year. First introduced in Georgia, they are now appearing in Tennessee, North Carolina, South Carolina, Maryland, and Florida. “They’re large, yellow and black, and they build really massive, sturdy webs that have a golden tint to them,” says Crumbley. Fortunately, they are not harmful to human health, but they are another type of spider to control in your yard and home, since they might reduce populations of helpful native spiders. 

    Woman Opening Mosquito Net Wire Screen Door At Home
    Photo: aquaArts studio/E+ via Getty Images.

    Tips to Prevent an Insect Infestation on Your Property

    Wondering how to battle a surge of creepy crawlies at home this year? Keep in mind that pests rely on food, shelter, and water or moisture to thrive. If you can remove those elements, you will drastically decrease the pest population, advises Crumbley. Here are some tips to get started.

    • Learn how to identify insects when they appear. Some resources include the National Pest Management Association or your County Extension Office. You also can refer to Pestworld.org, iNaturalist, and the Identification Technology Program at the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS) Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) division, or your pest control company’s website.
    • Choose integrated pest management (IPM) strategies instead of going straight to pesticides. For example, try reducing clutter, removing trash, installing physical barriers, setting traps, and getting rid of overgrown vegetation.
    • Seal cracks in doors and walls to prevent insects from sneaking in.
    • “Remove any standing water source that’s not necessary outside,” says Crumbley. Examples include water collecting in a bird bath or on an old tarp in the corner of your yard.  
    • Avoid overgrown grass and debris in your yard and wood piles close to your house.  
    • Monitor vegetation for bite marks, discoloration, and other signs that could indicate an insect infestation. 
    • Hire a professional pest control company, but be sure to ask that they use natural pest-control solutions, such as a botanical insecticide derived from essential oils. 

    The post Pest Predictions: 2025 Could Be a Doozy for Many Households appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-24T17:30:03-05:00
    <![CDATA[How to Lay Artificial Grass]]>Laying an artificial grass lawn is a DIY you can do in a weekend. The payoff? A lush, green lawn that’s virtually maintenance free and doesn't have to be watered.

    The post How to Lay Artificial Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-lay-artificial-grass/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=92360Wed, 22 Jan 2025 11:46:03 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Artificial grass made its big debut at the Astro Dome in 1966, hence the term Astroturf, but it’s come a long way since then. Once used only for professional sports fields, artificial grass is now a bona fide option for homeowners who want the look of a lush, green lawn without maintenance that provokes headaches.

    Artificial grass requires no water or fertilizer, which makes it eco-friendly, and there’s no mowing required either. A lawn of artificial grass can last up to 15 years under heavy traffic, the only maintenance being an occasional spraying with the garden hose if you have pets (for obvious reasons!).

    Professional installation of artificial grass can cost anywhere from $10 to $15 per square foot. But laying the turf, which costs between $2 and $8 per square foot, on an average-sized yard is a doable project if you’re game for some physical labor.

    Check out this tried-and-true technique here for how to lay artificial grass!

    Tools & Materials

    Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

    Step 1: Remove grass from the area.

    Remove whatever current turf you have. Use a spade or a sod-cutting machine (available to rent for about $100/day at a home improvement store) to pull it up. If a neighbor or friend can’t use it, dispose of the turf according to the organic waste removal rules in your community.

    Tried-and-True Advice

    “When laying artificial grass, I found that using a leaf blower to clear away sand and debris after spreading the builder’s sand and installing the turf made a huge difference in keeping the workspace clean and making sure the turf stuck properly. It’s quicker and more efficient than sweeping, and it helps prevent any leftover debris from getting trapped under the seams. Just be sure to hold the leaf blower at an angle to avoid disturbing the sand layer you just put down.”

    —Paul Rankin, Contributing Writer

    Step 2: Level the area.

    You will need a level base on which to lay your artificial grass. Spread about 1 ½ inches of builder’s sand in the area to create a level surface, using a landscaping rake to distribute it evenly. Then, compact the sand with a tamper or 2 x 2 piece of plywood and a rubber hammer until it’s firm and level.

    Step 3: Lay a weed barrier.

    Lay down landscape fabric to reduce the chance of weeds growing up through the turf. Roll it out to cover the area completely, allowing the edges to overlap at any joints by several inches, and trim with a utility knife to secure it into place with landscaping staples every three or four feet.

    Need help installing your turf?
    Get a pro to do it for you! Receive free, no-commitment project estimates from landscape specialists near you.
    +

    Step 4: Lay the artificial turf.

    Artificial grass has a “grain” to it, which means rather than standing straight up, it bends slightly at an angle. For the most natural look, roll it out so that the blades bend toward your home, making sure that all pieces are laid in the same direction.

    If using more than one roll’s width of turf, it’s best to stagger the end seams so that they don’t line up in a row: They’ll be less visible and will wear better that way.

    Trim any edges with a utility knife from the underside, being careful not to cut any of the turf.

    Step 5: Join turf with jointing tape and adhesive.

    Gardener joins two strips of artificial grass with adhesive strip underneath.
    Photo: JHRSPhotos / Depositphotos

    Artificial grass generally comes in widths of 12 to 15 feet. If the space you’re covering is more than the roll’s width, you’ll need to join pieces together.

    To do so, trim the edge of each of the pieces with a utility knife (from the back, being careful not to cut the turf) so that they will meet without overlapping. Then roll the pieces back and lay jointing tape underneath where the seam will be.

    Apply artificial turf adhesive to the jointing tape, and lay the two turf pieces together, making sure that the seam matches up together, without overlapping.

    Step 6: Nail the grass in place.

    Using a rubber hammer, nail the artificial grass down with 7-inch lawn spikes. Space the nails about every 4 feet. Take care to spread the turf blades out and away from the base of the nail before you hammer it in. After nailing, brush the nap up around the nail to hide placement.

    Step 7: Brush the lawn.

    Once all the turf is installed, brush the entire lawn with a stiff-bristled broom to fluff up turf blades. If any sand went wayward during installation, hose the lawn down to remove it.

    The post How to Lay Artificial Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-22T11:46:03-05:00
    <![CDATA[The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed]]>Need to detect moisture? Use a moisture meter. We put our top picks to the test to find the most reliable moisture meter. Check out our results.

    The post The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-moisture-meter/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=114844Mon, 20 Jan 2025 19:48:35 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Moisture meters can test the moisture content of many different materials, including drywall, paneling, and wood studs. Furniture makers and other woodworkers use them frequently to ensure they’re working with a quality product, and flooring contractors use the meters to determine ideal moisture conditions when installing a laminate or wood floor over a concrete slab or subfloor.

    For home and building inspectors, a moisture detector is a necessary tool for verifying the condition of a home. Similarly, you can use this tool to verify that your home is moisture-free or ensure the quality of materials during DIY projects. A moisture meter can help you determine if there is too much moisture or your home needs a dehumidifier.

    Our favorite is the General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter. We like it because of its built-in temperature and humidity sensors, pin/pinless design, holes built into the cap for quick calibrating, and durable storage case.

    This guide features hands-on testing of the top-rated moisture meter options available. Some passed with flying colors, while others didn’t make the cut.

    1. BEST OVERALL: General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
    2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood 
    3. UPGRADE PICK: Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter
    4. BEST COMBINATION: Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
    5. BEST FOR WOOD: Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood
    6. BEST EASE OF USE: Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter
    7. BEST FOR PROFESSIONALS: Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter
    The Best Moisture Meter Options
    Photo: Tom Scalisi

    Product Comparison

    StyleRangeAccuracy
    General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture MeterCombination5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials3 percent
    Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for WoodPin0 percent to 99.9 percent in wood0.5 percent
    Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture MeterPinless4 percent to 32 percentUnspecified
    Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture MeterCombination– 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials (pin)

    – 0 percent to 99 percent in wood and other materials (pinless)
    3 percent
    Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for WoodPin6 percent to 60 percent in wood; 0 percent to 40 percent in building materials2 percent
    Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture MeterPin6 percent to 45 percent0.5 percent
    Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture MeterPin7.9 percent to 99.9 percent with pins, and 70 to 999 with the pads1 percent

    Our Top Picks

    The top-rated products below were chosen for quality, price, and customer satisfaction to help you find the best moisture meter for your projects. And, to make sure you know everything you need to, we performed hands-on testing with several models. The following meters are ranked among the best.

    Best Overall

    General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter

     The Best Moisture Meters Options: General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Great versatility for multiple projects
    • Pin and pinless design for added flexibility
    • Comes with durable case
    • Cap has holes

    What We Don’t Like

    • Temperature resets to Celsius every time it’s powered on
    • No “mold tester” as description claims


    This multifunctional moisture meter helps DIYers test for moisture using pinless, flat sensors without damaging the material. If the meter finds moisture, the user can remove the cap to expose two pins for accurate moisture measurement within 3 percent, humidity measurement within 5 percent, and temperature measurement within 2 degrees.

    Considered the best moisture meter for plaster walls, it can be used for drywall, carpeting, flooring, brick, grout, soil, paper, or powders, and it shows readings on two bright displays. The meter has a moisture level range of 5 percent to 50 percent for wood and 1.5 percent to 33 percent for other building materials, plus a humidity range of 25 percent to 95 percent and a temperature range of 32 to 140 degrees.

    During testing, this General Tools digital moisture meter proved to be accurate and easy to use. We liked that it didn’t take much setup, and there aren’t any complicated charts to read in order to set it to the correct species. The built-in temperature and humidity sensors work well and are easy to read. Also, we like that we could use the cap to check our calibration. The only thing that we found frustrating is that it reverted to Celsius every time we turned it off and back on. Also, there is no “mold tester” as the product description claims.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Combination
    • Range: 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials
    • Accuracy: 3 percent

    Get the General Tools digital moisture meter at Amazon or General Tools.

    Best Bang for the Buck

    Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood

     The Best Moisture Meters Option: Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Screen is simple and very easy to read
    • Versatile tool with broad temperature range
    • Very easy to use with no complicated settings
    • Affordable compared to other moisture meters

    What We Don’t Like

    • Designed for wood use only


    This digital handheld moisture meter from Proster is made for use with wood and wood products only. This specialization comes with two big benefits: The first is that DIYers can get this moisture meter for a bargain compared to other models. The second is that the Proster can provide impressive accuracy to within 0.5 percent on a massive scale of 0 percent to 99.9 percent for wood, firewood, logs, cardboard, paper, and other wood products.

    The pin moisture meter settings can switch between four different wood groups containing 50 wood species for precision measurement. The large LCD screen is easy to read, and the body of the device comes in sturdy ABS plastic for superior durability. This moisture meter won’t work with concrete, gypsum, drywall, or other nonwood building materials, but DIYers with wood-based projects have an affordable specialty pick.

    We really like the Proster meter. Unlike other models that require lengthy user manual reads and have complicated settings, this affordable meter has everything we need to know displayed right on the front. We liked the wide range, though we suspect that anything above 70 percent would probably feel like it was dripping wet to the touch. The only real drawback of the Proster is that it’s for wood use only, meaning it isn’t very helpful for locating leaks or moisture in building materials.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Pin
    • Range: 0 percent to 99.9 percent in wood
    • Accuracy: 0.5 percent

    Get the Proster moisture meter at Amazon or Proster.

    Upgrade Pick

    Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter

     The Best Moisture Meter Option: Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Incredibly accurate (despite an unspecified accuracy by the manufacturer)
    • Comes with a calibration plate and durable carrying case
    • Adjustable for several tree species

    What We Don’t Like

    • Limited moisture range only up to 32 percent


    For shoppers with extra room in their meter budget, the Wagner Meters Orion 940 is one of the best pinless moisture meter options worth considering. While the model might be a bit expensive, it does offer deeper, more accurate readings than most meters, and it does it without pins.

    This model from Wagner Meters features a measurement range of 4 percent to 32 percent. It also comes with a chart that allows the user to calibrate it to a specific value assigned to a species, offering the most reliable readings possible. And, unlike many other pinless meters, this model can take measurements in wood as thick at 1.5 inches, or the full thickness of a stud. Should you question its calibration, it comes with a calibration plate for checking at any point.

    There’s a bit of a learning curve when it comes to the Orion. First, we had to read the manual to discover how to change the species setting, but once we did, the change was easy. Also, cycling through the calibration, species, and materials menu was a little confusing at first. Although it doesn’t have a tremendous range, it was incredibly accurate and consistent. Truth be told, we used this model as the baseline for accuracy in our test.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Pinless
    • Range: 4 percent to 32 percent
    • Accuracy: Unspecified

    Get the Wagner Meters moisture meter at Amazon, Acme Tools, or Wagner Meters.

    Best Combination

    Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter

     The Best Moisture Meter Option: Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Easy to use with a simple screen
    • Offers visual guide and audio alerts for moisture content
    • Ideal when precision is key

    What We Don’t Like

    • Material setting button seems sensitive


    Anyone looking for a combination pin/pinless moisture meter might not want to overlook the Extech MO55 pin/pinless moisture meter from Teledyne Flir. This meter offers accurate pinless readings between 0 percent to 99 percent in both wood and other building materials, as well as a 5 percent to 50 percent range in wood and 1.5 percent to 33 percent range in building materials when using the pins.

    A calibration test in the cap allows users to check the Extech’s accuracy before relying on its readings. It also features a visual guide to moisture, with one digital raindrop representing dry wood, two drops for medium moisture, and three representing wet wood.

    When we were testing the Extech in pin mode, we continued to press the materials button, which would inevitably give us a reading of our index fingers rather than the material we were testing. Beyond that, we liked how easy the Extech was to use, and we appreciated the digital raindrops and audio alerts that speed up according to a wood’s moisture content. And, we continued to check this model’s accuracy with its built-in calibration gauge.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Combination
    • Range:
      • 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials (pin)
      • 0 percent to 99 percent in wood and other materials (pinless)
    • Accuracy: 3 percent

    Get the Teledyne Flir Extech moisture meter at Amazon, Acme Tools, or Teledyne FLIR.

    Best For Wood

    Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood

     The Best Moisture Meters Option: Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Excellent pin design
    • Includes a built-in thermometer for added versatility
    • Best digital screen in the test

    What We Don’t Like

    • Many of the tree species in the guide go by their scientific names


    The Tavool digital moisture meter is an excellent addition to any woodworking shop. This moisture meter for wood comes with seven calibration scales for wood so DIYers can be as precise as possible with their measurements at an accuracy within about 2 percent. The pin moisture meter also can measure the temperature of the material within 4 degrees to help quickly track down leaks.

    The moisture meter uses a scale of 6 percent to 60 percent for wood and 0 percent to 40 percent for other building materials. Its big, backlit LCD screen makes for easy readability, even in dim lighting. A “Hold” key freezes readings on the screen, while the built-in memory function stores readings so the user doesn’t have to keep track.

    The Tavool was one of the biggest surprises we found during testing. For one, the digital screen is both easy to read and full of information. We liked that this moisture meter features a built-in temperature sensor as well. But the one “point” we liked most about the Tavool was its pin design; the pins are long and thin enough to plunge deeply into wood but not so thin that they’re not durable. The only issue we found came when adjusting for species. Tavool, for some reason, included scientific names for tree species. We didn’t bring our biology book, so we had to do a lot of googling.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Pin
    • Range: 6 percent to 60 percent in wood; 0 percent to 40 percent in building materials
    • Accuracy: 2 percent

    Get the Tavool moisture meter at Amazon.

    Best Ease of Use

    Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter

     The Best Moisture Meter Option: Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Doesn’t get any easier to use
    • Extreme accuracy
    • Cap forms a comfortable handhold

    What We Don’t Like

    • Feels like an old-school design (but is that really bad?)


    The Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D moisture meter is a premium tool designed for a specialized purpose. This pin moisture meter comes calibrated for use with wood and wood products, but it boasts an accuracy of 0.5 percent on a precision scale of 6 percent to 45 percent. Its sturdy body is easy to hold and use, with sharp pins that can push through even the toughest wood.

    The body of the moisture meter holds a longer second set of pins for deeper penetration, but the real benefit of this model is the simplicity of the design. Select the wood type to be measured, then push the pins into the material. A unique on-off switch between the pins activates the meter so the user only has to look at the reading on the bright, digital LED display.

    We’ll try not to gush, but the Lignomat moisture meter is pretty much everything you need from a moisture meter, and it’s by far the easiest to use in the group. First, this thing doesn’t even have a power button; simply poke it into a piece of wood and it will give you a reading. Second, it provides readings for a wide range of species while only requiring the user to switch between “Group 2” or “Group 3”—no fancy calculations necessary. And, we couldn’t help but enjoy the Lignomat’s accuracy and the way the cap forms a comfortable hand-hold during testing. If we’re going to complain about something, it’s that this thing looks and feels like it’s straight out of the 1980s, but we’re not so sure nostalgia is a bad thing.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Pin
    • Range: 6 percent to 45 percent
    • Accuracy: 0.5 percent

    Get the Lignomat moisture meter at Amazon or Acme Tools.

    Best for Professionals

    Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter

     The Best Moisture Meters Option: Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Comprehensive tool set with plenty of accessories
    • Very accurate
    • Excellent pin penetration for deep readings

    What We Don’t Like

    • Pinless readings are not shown as a percentage
    • Doesn’t adjust for species


    The Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster professional moisture meter is dual functional but doesn’t just use standard pins and pads to take readings. It also features a set of 5-inch pins for deep penetration and a moisture probe that can plug into the unit to help with taking readings in difficult-to-access areas. It even includes a calibration tool to ensure the readings are accurate.

    The heavy-duty design and highly accurate moisture readings within 1 percent make this a must-have tool for discerning DIYers and industry professionals like contractors, surveyors, inspectors, and many more. With two modes of operation for search (pinless) and measure (pin), the moisture meter works with concrete, wood, tile, vinyl, drywall, and many other building materials with a scale of 7.9 percent to 99.9 percent using the pins and a relative scale of 70 to 999 using the pads (where 70 to 169 is dry, 170 to 199 is at risk, and 200 to 999 is considered wet).

    During testing, we liked the accessories and could definitely see their usefulness. Even grabbing readings from boards right in front of us was easier, since we could look at the display while getting the reading at the same time. Also, we enjoyed the 1 percent accuracy and excellent pin penetration. Our only concerns were that we would prefer the pinless readings in a percentage, and we couldn’t adjust it for species.

    Product Specs 

    • Style: Pin
    • Range: 7.9 percent to 99.9 percent with pins, and 70 to 999 with the pads
    • Accuracy: 1 percent

    Get the Protimeter moisture meter at Amazon.

    Also Tested

    We also tested the General Tools pinless digital moisture meter and the Klein Tools ET140 pinless moisture meter; however, neither of these models passed our tests.

    The General Tools pinless moisture meter uses a measurement range of 0 percent to 53 percent for softwoods like pine, a range of 0 percent to 35 percent for hardwoods like maple, and a relative scale for drywall and masonry. This meter was difficult to use, and didn’t register moisture readings anywhere near the range of the other models on the list. It could’ve been a calibration issue, but since it automatically calibrates, we didn’t have any luck.

    The Klein ET140 is a durable pinless moisture meter that calibrates for each material with the push of a mode button that switches between types of material for precise measurement. Unfortunately, during our repeated testing of this model, it consistently read 4% moisture and the unit could not be recalibrated after multiple attempts. We’re big fans of Klein Tools, but this one didn’t make the grade.

    Jump to Our Top Picks

    How We Tested the Best Moisture Meters

    Typically, we love testing products, but this moisture meter test was tough. First, every meter had a different range and accuracy rating, which made establishing baselines difficult. While we were conducting moisture meter reviews, we found that each product had a different method of adjusting for certain species, so we spent an entire day reading user’s manuals—surely a better test for eyeglasses and patience than moisture meters.

    Eventually, with everything dialed in as well as possible, we began checking moisture levels. For some variety, we used three pieces of pine lumber from a recent project. One piece soaked in a bowl of water overnight. The other piece sat in an oven and dried at 225 degrees for 2 hours. The third piece was left alone. We checked each of the meters using all three of these pieces of lumber and compared readings.

    Next, we checked the meters on a small section of drywall, a small section of concrete foundation, and an unfinished oak stair tread. Those readings were collected and compared as well.

    Finally, we went through all the settings, modes, and extra features (for those that had them). At this point, we had a solid grasp on which models were worth the money and which we needed to discard from the test.

    What to Consider When Choosing a Moisture Meter

    Before purchasing a moisture meter, it’s a good idea to educate yourself about these important considerations to make sure that you settle on the appropriate product for your purposes.

    Types of Moisture Meters

    DIYers and professionals in industries like home inspection, fine carpentry, and flooring use three common types of moisture meter: pin, pinless, and multifunctional.

    Pin

    Pin moisture meters get their name from the two metal prongs, or pins, that emerge from the top of the meter like antennae. These pins are what measure the moisture percentage. Using a pin moisture meter requires aligning the pins with a spot on the material, and then pushing them so they penetrate the material.

    Once the pins are inserted, users can operate the moisture meter with a control pad to send an electrical signal down one pin. This signal travels through the material on its way to the other pin. The moisture meter uses this signal to measure the material’s resistance to electrical current, which can help determine its moisture content.

    This method of measurement is considered invasive because it requires puncturing the material to obtain a result. However, pin moisture meters are the only type that can help identify the exact location of moisture.

    Pinless

    Pinless moisture meters, so named for their lack of measurement pins, do not penetrate the material to get a reading. Instead, a plate on the back of the meter lays flat against the material and a high-frequency signal travels through it. The signal changes based on the material’s ability to store an electrical charge, which enables the moisture meter to detect the levels of moisture in the substance.

    The main benefit of pinless moisture meters becomes clear when testing drywall. Having to drive holes into drywall to detect moisture can quickly turn it into Swiss cheese. A pinless moisture meter can check for moisture multiple times without damaging the drywall.

    Although pinless moisture meters are less invasive than pin meters, their readings show moisture in a general area rather than a specific spot. A good option for regular moisture detection is a multifunctional moisture meter. Multifunctional moisture meters use both methods of measurement for noninvasive, precise moisture detection if an issue is discovered.

    Accuracy

    DIYers and pros looking for a moisture meter place accuracy as one of the most important factors in deciding which one to buy. A unit lacking in accuracy is essentially useless for measuring moisture. However, not all units advertise the same accuracy rate.

    High-quality moisture meters should be accurate to within 0.1 percent, but these high-end models can cost a lot. For a less-expensive option, some moisture meters are accurate to within 5 percent. This still represents a reasonable accuracy rating for the average DIYer, but if a project or professional requires a more precise measurement, it is best to stick to the high-end models. It isn’t advisable to invest in a moisture meter that has more than a 5 percent variance in its accuracy.

    All moisture meters’ readings are displayed as a percentage of moisture content (% MC). Typically, a moisture meter is calibrated for use with wood and has a scale between 5 percent (dry) and 40 percent (saturated). Measuring nonwood materials like concrete uses a relative scale from 0 (dry) to 100 (saturated). Moisture meters for use with gypsum or drywall offer a third scale that ranges from 0.2 percent (dry) to 50 percent (saturated). Before deciding on a moisture meter, determine the accuracy levels you need and the materials you will want to check.

    Durability

    A product’s durability is important to anyone who will be using a moisture meter regularly on job sites. Even a newer model with the best features should survive having its pins pushed into a wall or being jostled in a tool box.

    The moisture meter should include the features a DIYer wants but also have a reputation for durability and long life. Consider options that have a rubberized casing, a heavy-duty design, or shock resistance built in. These moisture meters will survive a few falls without damage and make a great investment because they’ll need to be replaced less frequently.

    Ease of Use

    Choose a moisture meter that is relatively simple to use. Complicated moisture meters take much longer to read than those with a more straightforward design and can lead to inaccurate and inconsistent readings that could result in undetected moisture damage.

    Instead, opt for a moisture meter with an easy-to-read, backlit digital display that shows the information you need. Users should be able to navigate easily between the menus on the device and switch between functions quickly. Pinless moisture meters are much easier to use than pin moisture meters, but the trade-off is in pinpoint accuracy.

    Range of Measurement

    The range of measurement a moisture meter offers is determined by the minimum and maximum moisture percentages it can read. The broader the range of measurement, the less precisely the device will measure, with some moisture meters offering as wide a range as 0.2 to 60 percent.

    Smaller, more precise scales provide more accurate measurement and frequently come in meters used in the flooring and fine carpentry industry to ensure optimal moisture percentage. However, most DIYers would benefit more from a broader scale range so they can use the same meter for many applications.

    Additional Features

    Moisture meters, like most electronic devices, can pack plenty of additional features to make the task easier. One of these features is a temperature display that can track a hot or cold water leak. Following changes in the temperature helps locate the source.

    Other features include memory functions that can keep track of previous readings instead of having to write them down or remember them, audible alerts for the moisture level reading, and a carrying case to protect the moisture meter.

    The Advantages of Owning a Moisture Meter

    Having a moisture meter handy can save you a lot of trouble in your home and with DIY projects. It is easy to quickly test areas that look like they might be accumulating moisture to determine whether there is an issue. By taking the reading yourself, you avoid having to call a professional inspector and paying a costly fee only to find no moisture problem exists. If you have frequent problem areas in your home or in a high-moisture basement or cellar, a moisture meter can take regular readings to quickly identify and treat mold growth.

    In addition, a moisture meter improves the outcome of DIY projects by providing accurate moisture readings for flooring projects, when installing wallpaper, and during woodworking projects. Without a moisture meter, DIYers only can guess at the moisture content in a material, which could lead to problems with mold growth or structural issues if the moisture buildup becomes severe.

    • Owning a moisture meter helps you to detect problems without having to call in a professional.
    • Regular readings in high-moisture homes can help detect and stop mold growth.
    • Using a meter for flooring, wallpapering, and other DIY projects will ensure a high-quality finish and appropriate moisture percentages.

    FAQs

    Before buying a new moisture meter, take a look at the most frequently asked questions and their answers below.

    Q. How does a moisture meter work?

    Pin moisture meters work by measuring the resistance an electrical current meets when passing through a material. Inserting the pins into the material sends a current down one pin to flow into the second. The meter then measures the resistance the current met traveling through the material between the pins to generate a moisture reading.

    Pinless moisture meters use a high-frequency signal to permeate the material. The electrical signal changes based on the material’s ability to hold a charge, and the moisture meter receives a measurement of the moisture content in the material.

    Q. What is a normal reading on a moisture meter?

    In general, a reading of 5 to 12 percent is optimal, but a normal reading on a moisture meter depends on the material. Drier materials like drywall should have lower moisture readings of around 5 to 7 percent. Damp materials like wall studs and framing lumber have acceptable moisture levels of up to 12 percent.

    Q. What is a bad moisture meter reading?

    A bad moisture reading would be one that climbs to 20 percent or higher—in this environment, your porous materials like lumber may be susceptible to mold growth or decay.

    Q. Does moisture in walls mean mold?

    Not necessarily. A moisture meter can be used to help detect problem areas, but it cannot detect mold. The hope is that you would use the moisture meter to detect a leak before the mold can form. But if the moisture is left untreated, it can become the perfect environment for mold spores to flourish.

    Q. How do you use a moisture meter on drywall?

    To use a moisture meter for drywall, first ensure that the meter is calibrated to accurately measure moisture in the material. If the meter is not calibrated, the results will be inaccurate.

    Once the meter is calibrated to test drywall, operate the moisture meter normally according to product instructions. Insert pin meters into the drywall in several different spots to get an accurate reading of the entire wall. Similarly, a pinless meter should scan several sites on the wall for a full scope of its moisture content. For drywall, a reading of 5 percent to 7 percent is optimal.

    Q. Are moisture meters accurate?

    A dependable moisture meter may boast an accuracy within 3 percent of the reading, with some professional-grade models getting within 0.5 percent.

    The accuracy of a moisture meter varies depending on the material you are testing, the calibration of the meter, the type of moisture meter, the procedures used during the test, and the meter’s functionality, which can vary based on upkeep and maintenance of the unit.

    Above all, a moisture meter for walls and other structures will be most accurate if used correctly. A high-quality moisture meter used on the correct material by an experienced DIYer can accurately measure moisture to within 0.1 percent. However, an inexpensive moisture meter used on an inappropriate material without a proper scale could return inaccurate readings in the same way that a poor-quality stud finder can fail to find a stud if used improperly.

    The post The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-20T19:48:35-05:00
    <![CDATA[8 Essential Tools and Materials for Starting Seeds Indoors]]>Are you ready to start your seeds for the season? You’ll need these essentials to make sure they get the best possible start.

    The post 8 Essential Tools and Materials for Starting Seeds Indoors appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/essentials-for-starting-seeds-indoors/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=204191Thu, 16 Jan 2025 17:26:29 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Many gardeners skip seed starting in favor of purchasing plants, often assuming the tools necessary for indoor sowing will be too expensive to make the project practical. However, you often can get by with substituting items you already have for those you’d need to buy.

    For example, shop lights from the garage can take the place of grow lights, while produce boxes rescued from the trash can stand in for seed-starting trays. Of course, if you lack time or energy to do things the DIY way, you can purchase some of the highly rated and reasonably priced items listed here.

    1. Seed Starting Tray With Cover

    Radish seedlings in a black seed-starting tray.
    Photo: Amazon

    Seed-starting containers can vary from repurposed “clamshell” produce boxes to more professional options like the Gardzen 5-Set Garden Propagator Set. As with the Gardzen set, your trays need drainage holes. This set includes a transparent dome to keep seed-starting mix damp. (Another way to go is to use shallow flower pots capped with plastic wrap).

    The Gardzen set’s main tray has optimal drainage, and the set includes a base tray to catch drained water. If you make a DIY setup, you’ll need a second container without drainage holes. One option is an unperforated flat or shallow dishpan, into which you can water your seeded containers from the bottom.

    Get the Gardzen 5-Set Garden Propagator Set at Amazon for $19.99.

    RELATED: All You Need to Know About Starting Seeds Indoors

    2. Seed-Starting Mix

    Coir or peat soil brick in a galvanized bucket is being rehydrated with a watering can.
    Photo: Amazon

    Soilless seed starting mix has a lighter texture than standard potting or garden soil, which new gardeners often make the mistake of using. Most importantly, seed-starting mix is sterile, which isn’t true of the aforementioned soils. That sterility helps prevent the damping off disease that frequently affects seedlings. Usually, seed-starting mix is composed mainly of peat moss or coir, such as Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Concentrated Seed Starting Mix, with perlite or vermiculite sometimes added.

    Get the Burpee Organic Coconut Coir Concentrated Seed Starting Mix at Amazon for $12.25.

    3. Spray Bottle

    Unrecognizable woman spraying newly sown seeds in plastic propagators on a window sill with a spray bottle.
    Photo: Peter Burnett / Getty Images Peter Burnett

    Although some gardeners like to mist the surface of their seed-starting flats with water, using a spray bottle such as the JohnBee 16-ounce spray bottles, moisture delivered in that way seldom penetrates far. For the best results, water your containers from the bottom first to get them thoroughly damp, allowing them to drain afterward to prevent sogginess. Save the spray bottle to use when the surface of the mix is just beginning to dry out.

    Get a 2-pack of JohnBee 16-ounce Plastic Spray Bottles at Amazon for $7.96.

    4. Grow Lights

    seed starting
    amazon.com

    Although it is possible to start seedlings on sunny windowsills, hanging LED grow lights, such as the Juhefa LED Grow Lights, above seed-starting trays for 12 to 16 hours per day generally works better. Hanging grow lights just a few inches above the plants prevents the seedlings from bending toward the window and getting “leggy,” or growing overly long stems. For seedlings, fluorescent or LED shop lights work almost as well as these full-spectrum lights.

    Get the Juhefa LED Grow Lights at Amazon for $23.99.

    5. Seedling Heat Mat

    starting seeds
    amazon.com

    Normal indoor temperatures between 70 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit are warm enough to start most seeds. However, tropical plants and vegetables such as eggplant, peppers, and okra sprout more readily at temperatures above 75 degrees. For these you may want to purchase a seedling heat mat, such as the VIVOHOME Seedling Heat Mat. If you don’t want to go the heat-mat route, place your seed-starting containers in the warmest spot in your home, perhaps on a high shelf above a radiator or register.

    Get the VIVOHOME 20W Waterproof Seedling Heat Mat on Amazon for $14.99.

    6. Portable Fan

    Honeywell Tower Fan in white on a white background
    Photo: Amazon

    Circulating air in the room where you start seeds can reduce fungus on the plants and soil, and can strengthen the stems and limbs of young seedlings. A tower fan such as the Honeywell HYF260 Whole Room Tower Fan is a good option because it oscillates and will blow a gentle breeze over multiple shelves of plant starts; it also has an automatic shutoff and a remote control for ease of use. Running a fan also will get the new plants used to wind before you move them outdoors.

    Get the Honeywell HYF260 Whole Room Tower Fan at Amazon for $56.88.

    7. Plant Labels

    A flat of plant starts with white plant labels tucked into each cell, plant names and dates written on the labels.
    Photo: Amazon

    When sowing seeds, you’ll need to label them to remember what you planted where. KINGLAKE’s Plant Nursery Garden Labels can be tucked into individual pots or cells and are not likely to be disturbed—that is, unless you have young children or cats, in which case you might opt for sticky labels that you can affix to plant containers. In either case, use a permanent marker to prevent the plant names and dates from being rubbed or washed off.

    Get the KINGLAKE 4-Inch Plastic Plant Nursery Garden Labels (100 pieces) at Amazon for $4.69.

    8. Seeds

    Baker Creek Heirloom Seed catalog 2025
    Photo: Baker Creek Heirloom Seeds

    Before purchasing from seed companies, check online reviews or curated lists from trustworthy sources (such as Dave’s Garden) to ensure sellers are well regarded by your fellow gardeners. Baker Creek Heirloom Seeds, for example, scores high and offers both vegetable and flower seeds. Alternatively, you can save your own seeds from plants that aren’t hybrids and swap with other gardeners online to obtain more. Although some seeds never should be started indoors, plenty more will thrive if given that head start.

    Get the Baker Creek Heirloom Seeds Catalog for FREE

    The prices listed here are accurate as of January 16, 2025.

    The post 8 Essential Tools and Materials for Starting Seeds Indoors appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-16T17:26:29-05:00
    <![CDATA[How Much Does Lawn Aeration Cost?]]>Learn when you need to aerate your lawn, factors that influence price, and how much you can expect to pay for this service.

    The post How Much Does Lawn Aeration Cost? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/lawn-aeration-cost/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=163781Wed, 15 Jan 2025 12:46:24 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Aerating a lawn reduces soil compaction to improve the health of the grass by allowing more oxygen and nutrients to reach the roots. For most lawns, an annual aeration is sufficient. The cost is small compared to other lawn improvement costs, such as installing a sprinkler system or removing a tree, and aerating is one of the best ways to improve a lawn’s condition.

    While many factors influence lawn aeration prices, including lawn size, location, and other community factors, you might pay as little as $45 to aerate a small yard, while a large lawn could cost $400 or more to aerate. In most cases, a rep from the lawn company will want to take a look at the property before quoting a price, but the following general guidelines might be helpful. 

    Aeration Cost by Lawn Size

    In many cases, the size of the lawn determines aeration cost. Lawn companies often calculate their square-foot charges in increments, and the larger the yard, in general, the lower the square-foot cost of aerating. For example, while there’s a particular price range to aerate a lawn under 1,000 square feet, that per-square-foot cost may decrease for a yard of 5,000 square feet.  

    After that, the price may be charged as a flat rate for yards of 10,000 square feet or more. When it comes to massive yards—measured in acres—the overall cost will usually be quite a bit lower per square foot; expect to pay a few hundred dollars per acre for aeration.

    Visual 2 - HomeAdvisor - Lawn Aeration Cost - Cost per Service f
    Graphic: bobvila.com Photo: bobvila.com

    Other Factors That Affect Lawn Aeration Cost   

    Lawn aeration service costs can vary widely based on a number of other considerations beyond the size of the yard. In the hunt for low-cost solutions to lawn care needs, take into account the following factors that will likely affect the final cost.

    Aeration Type

    Lawn companies typically use one of three aeration methods, and the preferred method for each lawn will impact the price quoted. The type of aeration that arguably offers the most comprehensive benefits, core aeration, costs the most, while spike and liquid aeration are less expensive.

    Aeration MethodAverage Cost for a 10,000-square-foot Lawn
    Core$200
    Spike$85
    Liquid$75

    Core Aeration

    The equipment required to dig and remove plugs from the existing lawn is typically more expensive than either spike aeration equipment or lawn-spraying equipment, so the end cost is higher. This is reflected in the average 12 to 20 percent increase over the cost of spike aeration. On average, core aeration costs around $200 for a 10,000-square-foot lawn.

    Spike Aeration

    Spike aeration involves driving 4- to 5-inch spikes into the ground to increase drainage, but no soil is removed as it is with core aeration. This type of aeration is well suited for lawns with sandy soil, which doesn’t compact as clay-type soils do. It costs more than liquid aeration but less on average than core aeration, often coming in at around $85 for a 10,000-square-foot lawn.

    Leave lawn aeration to the pros
    Get free, no-commitment estimates from experts near you.
    +

    Liquid Aeration

    Liquid lawn aeration involves spraying a solution that contains enzymes over the grass. The enzymes go to work decomposing thatch—the layer of thick, dead grass that collects at the base of the grass blades—at ground level. Thatch hampers air circulation and reduces drainage. Liquid aeration can run about $75 for an average-size lawn. Liquid aeration is cheaper because it doesn’t require heavy equipment, but it won’t alleviate soil compaction as core aeration will.

    Lawn Slope

    Navigating steep slopes with a lawn aerator will take longer, so you can expect to pay a higher fee to have those spots aerated. Lawn companies that typically charge a set rate may switch to a per-hour rate if a substantial part of the lawn is sloped.

    Soil Type

    The type of soil can also affect lawn aeration costs because lawn companies may recommend different aeration methods based on whether your soil is sandy, clay-based, or loamy.  

    Geographic Location

    In any community, the cost of living and the going price of labor are determining factors in lawn care services. In general, the cost of lawn care services in rural communities can be significantly lower than in busy metropolises because the cost of living is lower. In addition, local taxes and business fees can fluctuate, which will affect the price since these overhead costs are passed on to the customer.

    Pricing and Packages

    The cost of aeration can often be negotiated down by purchasing a package deal. This might involve buying a maintenance package that provides for fertilizing every other month, reseeding in the fall, and applying an herbicide in the spring. Packaged together, these services could end up costing up to 20 percent less than they would if they had been purchased individually. However, the savings will vary depending on the company and the promotions and packages it offers.

    Some companies may offer flat-rate aeration services, typically in the range of $120 to $175, either as part of a package or separately, while others might charge an hourly rate of between $40 to $70.

    Prep Work

    Aeration equipment requires a smooth, clear yard to operate efficiently. If the lawn company has to rake up bushels of dry leaves or clear away fallen limbs and debris, there may be an extra service charge added to the bill—ranging from $40 to $70 per hour.

    Common Add-On Services

    Landscapers sows lawn grass seeds with a drop lawn spreader in backyard.
    Photo: Photovs / Depositphotos

    Even without buying a seasonal service package, it’s possible to save money on aeration and lawn care costs by having the company perform an additional service on the same day they aerate. Lawn companies may offer a discount for two services done on the same day because they’re already on-site aerating. 

    Fertilizing

    Having the lawn fertilized costs $50 to $80 for a whole lawn. If the yard needs to be fertilized, it will probably cost less to have aeration and fertilization performed at the same time. Applying fertilizer is often done immediately after aeration so the nutrients can seep into the holes in the lawn.

    Overseeding

    Aeration and seeding also go hand in hand. In many regions, it’s standard practice to overseed a lawn after aeration—depending on climate—so reseeding is often combined with aeration. The average cost to aerate and overseed a lawn is $100 to $160. Seeding a new lawn costs about the same as overseeding an existing one. 

    Dethatching 

    While aeration will overcome some of the problems of thatch—the layer of dead organic material at soil level—if the thatch is thicker than 1/2 inch, it might be better to have it completely removed before aerating. You can expect to pay an additional $10 to $20 per 1,000 square feet to have the lawn dethatched. Dethatching is typically done before lawn aeration.

    Mowing

    Mowing can add $50 to $200 to the cost of lawn aeration. This is where having a whole-season lawn maintenance package can really cut down on costs. Using the same company to perform all necessary lawn care services weekly or biweekly could provide significant savings over having the same services contracted individually. You may want to consider hiring a lawn mowing service that also provides aeration. 

    Tree and Shrub Maintenance

    Having shrubs and small trees trimmed as part of a lawn maintenance package that includes aeration could add as much as $450 to $1,400 to the bill. Having an entire tree removed could cost an additional $1,800 or more, depending on the size of the tree. While many lawn companies perform general tree and shrub trimming, they may not offer tree removal services, which require specialized equipment.

    Get a healthy lawn from the start
    Get free, no-commitment estimates from lawn aeration experts near you.
    +

    Reasons to Aerate Your Lawn

    A lawn can go from lush one year to splotchy with bare patches the next if thatch builds up, reducing air circulation and the ability of the grass roots to absorb fertilizers and nutrients. For the best-looking lawn, perform regular maintenance tasks, such as aerating, dethatching, and fertilizing, before lawn problems arise. Any of the following signs may indicate the yard is overdue for aeration.

    Pooling Water

    Water should soak into the soil within approximately 30 minutes after the lawn is watered or after a light rain. If water is standing in puddles longer than that, it could result from overly compact soil or a heavy layer of thatch.

    Thin or Dried-Out Grass

    Just because water isn’t puddling doesn’t mean it’s soaking into the ground. Heavy, compact soil with a dense layer of thatch will keep water from soaking in, causing it to simply run off during watering or rain storms. While the ground may seem saturated, water may not be reaching the soil at root level. If the soil below isn’t getting enough water, the grass will dry quickly after watering and the lawn itself may look dried out or show signs of thinning.

    Hard Soil

    Clay-based soils are heavy and slick when wet but turn rock-hard when the soil dries out. Aeration is often the first step in rescuing a lawn that has too-hard soil. Core aeration will remove hard soil plugs, and then the lawn can be top-dressed with compost, which will filter into the holes, increasing air and water availability and improving soil structure.

    Too Much Thatch

    Brown spots in the lawn may be the result of overly thick thatch. To check your lawn, separate the blades of grass and pinch up a small amount of thatch—it’s the brown, spongy layer just above the soil. If it’s thicker than 1/2 to 3/4 inch, it’s time to aerate or dethatch the lawn.

    Uneven Growth

    In a healthy lawn, grass grows uniformly and evenly. But in areas with dense thatch and compacted soil, the grass won’t grow as well, resulting in a lawn that looks uneven or grass that appears to be different shades of green.

    High Traffic

    A lawn is meant to be enjoyed, but one that is the site of the weekly neighborhood touch-football game or frequent parties is more likely to suffer from compaction problems. Having it aerated will go a long way toward keeping it soft and lush.

    Should You Hire a Pro for Lawn Aeration?

    View of the bottom half of a large lawn aerator and a swath of grass.
    Photo: iStock

    To save money on lawn maintenance costs, you can rent a core-type lawn aerator from a home improvement or equipment rental store for about $100 per day. A spike aerator typically rents for less. An equipment deposit of about $150 may also be required, but it will be refunded when the machine is returned. 

    You don't have to do it yourself
    Get free, no-commitment estimates from lawn aeration experts near you.
    +

    A truck or trailer is necessary for hauling an aerator, which, depending on the size, can weigh upwards of 100 pounds. Some aerators are gasoline-powered, so factor in the price of fuel. Those unfamiliar with operating an aerator should plan to spend about 30 minutes learning how to use it correctly. The aeration process itself can take a few hours, depending on yard size.

    While liquid aeration sits solidly in the DIY realm, the spike and core methods may be best left to a professional who’s familiar with the machine and able to load, unload, and transport the equipment with ease. Additionally, a pro is also more likely to spot other lawn problems and suggest a plan of action before the issues can develop into something more expensive to remedy. It’s important to weigh the pros and cons of attempting this job yourself as opposed to hiring one of the best lawn care services

    FAQs

    Q. What’s the main disadvantage of aerating? 

    Lawn aerating offers many more benefits than drawbacks, but some homeowners don’t like the look of the core plugs that most lawn companies leave on the lawn. They’ll just want to wait a couple of weeks, and they’ll decompose and won’t be visible anymore.

    Q. How often should I aerate the lawn?

    For healthy lawns, once a year is sufficient. Lawns with heavy clay soil will benefit from aeration twice per year.

    Q. What is the best time of year to aerate the lawn? 

    The best time to aerate lawns is just before periods of rapid growth. For warm-season grasses, that’s usually in late spring or early fall. For cool-season grasses, it’s best to aerate in early spring or the fall. Homeowners are advised to avoid aerating during times of lawn stress, such as high temps or drought.

    Q. How do I know if my lawn needs to be aerated? 

    Water standing in puddles, uneven grass growth, and thinning grass are all signs it might be time to aerate.

    Source: Angi

    The post How Much Does Lawn Aeration Cost? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-15T12:46:24-05:00
    <![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Indoor Plants, Tested and Reviewed]]>Help your houseplants thrive with the best fertilizer for indoor plants. We tested and reviewed a wide range of options for this list of top picks.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Indoor Plants, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-for-indoor-plants/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-for-indoor-plants/Mon, 13 Jan 2025 10:13:49 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningHouse PlantsLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Fertilizers for indoor plants provide essential nutrients for houseplants living in containers, helping them stay strong, healthy, and pest-free. After researching dozens of the most popular indoor houseplant fertilizer products, we tested nine top performers for 30 days to learn more about their effectiveness for different plants, soils, and growing environments. We also contacted a landscape expert with more than 30 years of experience to get insights on the benefits of using a houseplant fertilizer.

    Based on our research and test results, our top recommendation is the Espoma Organic Indoor Plant Food—a balanced formula that’s easy to apply, effective, and inexpensive. Ahead, follow along with the results of our tests of the best fertilizers for indoor plants before choosing the one that meets your needs.

    1. BEST OVERALL: Espoma Organic Indoor Plant Food
      Jump to Review
    2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble All-Purpose Plant Food
      Jump to Review
    3. BEST ORGANIC: Neptune’s Harvest Fish and Seaweed Fertilizer
      Jump to Review
    4. BEST SLOW-RELEASE: Osmocote Plus Smart-Release Plant Food 
      Jump to Review
    5. BEST LIQUID: Dyna-Gro SuperThrive Grow 7-9-5 Liquid Plant Food
      Jump to Review
    6. BEST FOR CACTUS: Grow More Cactus Juice Cacti & Succulents Fertilizer
      Jump to Review
    7. BEST FOR FLOWERING PLANTS: JR Peters Jack’s Classic 10-30-20 Blossom Booster
      Jump to Review
    8. BEST FOR HERBS: Dr. Earth Organic Life All Purpose Fertilizer
      Jump to Review
    9. BEST ALL-PURPOSE: JR Peters Jack’s Classic 20-20-20 Plant Food
      Jump to Review
    A bottle of plant fertilizer being poured into its cap above a water can
    Photo: Debbie Wolfe Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

    Fertilizer for Indoor Plants Comparison Chart

    Product NameTypeSizeNPK
    Espoma Organic Indoor Plant FoodOrganic liquid concentrate8 ounces2-2-2
    Miracle-Gro Water-Soluble All-Purpose Plant FoodWater-soluble granules0.5, 3, 5, 5.5, 6.25, and 10 pounds24-8-16
    Neptune’s Harvest Fish and Seaweed FertilizerLiquid18 and 36 ounces, 1 and 5 gallons2-3-1
    Osmocote Plus Smart-Release Plant Food Slow-release pellets1, 2, 4.5, and 8 pounds15-9-12
    Dyna-Gro SuperThrive Grow 7-9-5 Liquid Plant FoodWater-soluble liquid8 and 32 ounces, 1 gallon7-9-5
    Grow More Cactus Juice Cacti & Succulents FertilizerLiquid16 ounces1-7-6
    JR Peters Jack’s Classic 10-30-20 Blossom BoosterWater-soluble granules1.5 pounds10-30-20
    Dr. Earth Organic Life All-Purpose FertilizerSlow-release pellets1, 4, 12, and 40 pounds4-6-5
    JR Peters Jack’s Classic 20-20-20 Plant FoodWater-soluble granules8 ounces, 1.5, 4, and 10 pounds
    20-20-20

    Our Top Picks

    We tested the best indoor plant fertilizers for a range of specific houseplant needs. If you’re looking for the best plant food for your indoor home garden, check out these reviews. 

    Best Overall

    Espoma Organic Indoor Plant Food

     Bottle of Espoma Organic Indoor Plant Food on a white background
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Concentrated formula is easy to mix and apply
    • Includes humic acid and beneficial microbes
    • Very affordable organic option

    What We Don’t Like

    • Bottle size isn’t economical for big plant collections
    • Requires frequent applications

    Specs

    • Type Organic liquid concentrate
    • Size 8 ounces
    • NPK 2-2-2

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4.5/5

    In our test, the Espoma organic indoor houseplant food proved effective and easy to use. As a concentrated liquid plant food, it requires mixing, which is as simple as filling the cap halfway full (about 2 teaspoons) with fertilizer and the rest of the way with water. Its smell isn’t as pungent as other organic fertilizers we’ve tested and doesn’t linger long after application.

    This natural plant food’s ingredients are derived from hydrolyzed poultry manure, hydrolyzed soy protein, hydrolyzed fish protein, bone meal, and kelp extract. It also contains added beneficial microbes proven to enhance nutrient absorption and minimize waste as well as humic acid to regulate soil pH and increase water retention. Even at its regular vs. sale price, this is the most affordable organic houseplant fertilizer we tested in terms of both the purchase price and cost per application. If you have a particularly large collection of indoor plants, however, you may want to wait for a sale as this concentrate only comes in 8-ounce bottles.  

    Read our full review: Espoma Organic Indoor Plant Food

    What our tester says: “This formula is mild and doesn’t deliver fast bursts of growth, but by using in on our plants twice a month, they stay healthy and attractive, with no noticeable insect or disease issues.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

    Get the Espoma fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart,or Target.

    Best Bang for the Buck

    Miracle-Gro Water Soluble All-Purpose Plant Food

     Box of Miracle-Gro Water Soluble All-Purpose Plant Food on a white background
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • General purpose formula promotes growth and health
    • Works for both houseplants and outdoor garden plants
    • Lowest cost per application of all tested products

    What We Don’t Like

    • Low phosphorus level isn’t ideal for flowering plants
    • Highly concentrated formula must be diluted

    Specs

    • Type Water-soluble granules
    • Size 0.5, 3, 5, 5.5, 6.25, and 10 pounds
    • NPK 24-8-16

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4.5/5

    Miracle-Gro has been around for generations, and our test results show why. It’s easy to use and store, produces zero smell, delivers fast results, and is incredibly inexpensive overall and per application. To use these highly concentrated fertilizer granules, simply measure them with the included scoop and mix with water. They will dissolve instantly without clumping or stirring. 

    Since this product is so concentrated, it’s important to soak the soil when watering but not add so much solution that it runs off. This prevents unused water-soluble nutrients from flowing out of the soil (and perhaps down the drain, depending on your watering process), which can contribute to pollution. Excess nitrogen and phosphorus from private septic systems and municipal sewage treatment facilities can contaminate groundwater and cause unchecked algae growth in streams, lakes, and rivers. To help prevent this, consider capturing and storing any excess water that drains off after fertilization. Use plain water next time your plants need a drink, and then apply the stored runoff during subsequent fertilization.

    What our tester says: “Our plants responded really well to us alternating Miracle-Gro applications with plain water during testing. They all sent out a flush of fresh new growth about 2 days after the first treatment and looked healthy and strong by the end of the month.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

    Get the Miracle-Gro fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart,or Miracle-Gro.

    Best Organic

    Neptune’s Harvest Fish and Seaweed Fertilizer

     Bottle of Neptune’s Harvest Fish-Seaweed Blend Fertilizer on a white background
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Minimally processed natural ingredients
    • OMRI listed for use in organic gardening
    • Concentrated liquid formula is easy to apply
    • Generous phosphorus content stimulates root and flower production

    What We Don’t Like

    • Strong fish smell lingers around for a day
    • Doesn’t include measurement tool for mixing

    Specs

    • Type Liquid
    • Size 18 and 36 ounces, 1 and 5 gallons
    • NPK 2-3-1

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 3/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4/5

    This organic fertilizer from Neptune’s Harvest is formulated with a combination of fresh fish and seaweed from the North Atlantic. It’s certified by OMRI, so you can rest assured it’s made exclusively with natural and organic ingredients. After watering our test plants with it for a month, the results were excellent: lush new growth and no symptoms of overfertilization or infestation. 

    To use this concentrated formula, mix it according to the label’s instructions and apply every two weeks. Unfortunately, Neptune’s Harvest doesn’t come with any type of measuring device for this process. While one cap approximates the required tablespoon per gallon of water, the cap isn’t designed for that purpose, which makes it very hard to clean. Still, we had to figure out a way because the dirty cap made the bottle a smelly mess—and the smell is acute, especially in its undiluted state. It is not horrible like rotten fish, but it gives off an intense fish smell that lingers for a day after feeding. Odor aside, the nutrient analysis is just right for stimulating root and bud development, so this could be an excellent choice for cultivating seedlings, reducing transplant shock, and boosting flowering plants. shock, and boosting flowering plants.

    Get the Neptune’s Harvest fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon or Neptune’s Harvest.

    Best Slow-Release

    Osmocote Plus Smart-Release Plant Food

     Bottle of Osmocote Outdoor & Indoor Smart-Release Plant Food
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Continuously feeds for up to 6 months
    • Available in 4 different sizes
    • Great for indoor and outdoor plants

    What We Don’t Like

    • Difficult to measure for pots smaller than 6 inches

    Specs

    • Type Slow-release pellets
    • Size 1, 2, 4.5, and 8 pounds
    • NPK 15-9-12

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 5/5

    We anticipated some difficulty gauging the effectiveness of a slow-release fertilizer in just a few weeks, but we were pleasantly surprised. Within a month, our test plants perked up and began showing additional growth. Each had a nice new flush of foliage that looked healthy and strong. The best part was that we didn’t need to mix up fertilizer or follow a weekly or biweekly application—we simply used the included measuring scoop to get the appropriate quantity of fertilizer pellets, pushed them down into the soil’s surface with a small stick, and watered each pot as usual. 

    Although the purchase price of the Osmocote is slightly higher than some of the other fertilizers we used, the product’s value shines through in the season-long feeding it provides. In fact, on a per-application basis, it’s actually one of the least expensive options we recommend (approximately $.32 per application for 2 gallons of soil). It also eliminates the hassle of mixing solutions and keeping up with a feeding schedule. 

    Get the Osmocote fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware,or The Home Depot.

    Best Liquid

    Dyna-Gro SuperThrive Grow 7-9-5 Liquid Plant Food

     Best fertilizer for indoor plants option Dyna-Gro SuperThrive Grow 7-9-5 Liquid Plant Food
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Formula is perfect for flowering plants
    • Ultraconcentrated liquid is budget friendly
    • Can also be used in hydroponics and outdoor gardens

    What We Don’t Like

    • Difficult to measure accurately in small amounts

    Specs

    • Type Water-soluble liquid
    • Size 8 and 32 ounces, 1 gallon
    • NPK 7-9-5

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4/5

    The most difficult part of working with the Dyna-Gro fertilizer was measuring the minuscule amount of concentrate needed for a quart of plant food (a quarter of a quarter teaspoon, or .042 ounces). To address this, we mixed up a gallon of fertilizer solution and stored the extra three quarts until needed. Now, each time we apply it, we appreciate that this well-balanced fertilizer provides both micronutrients and a beneficial NPK content, delivering 2 percent calcium along with traces of magnesium, boron, chlorine, cobalt, copper, iron, manganese, molybdenum, sodium, and zinc—all of which are required for long-term plant health. 

    Our results with Dyna-Gro were similar to those using Osmocote but not as rapid as with Miracle-Gro. The plants produced a healthy flush of new foliage with no symptoms of stress, disease, or insect infestation. This was the only synthetic fertilizer we applied with each watering, so our long-term concern was that residue could accumulate in the soil and cause problems with extended use. When using this product long-term, buyers should monitor their plants for signs of stress and flush the soil with clear water. 

    Dyna-Gro offers recommendations for different application rates to fit a variety of growing situations. You can feed at each watering with a solution of ¼ or ½ teaspoon per gallon of water or increase the ratio to 1 teaspoon per gallon for a biweekly or monthly feeding schedule. They also provide instructions for use in hydroponic systems, siphon feeders, irrigation injectors, or foliar spray.

    Get the Dyna-Gro fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon or Walmart.

    Best for Cactus

    Grow More Cactus Juice Cacti & Succulents Fertilizer

     Bottle of Grow More Cactus Juice Cacti & Succulents Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Low nitrogen for cacti and succulents
    • Value price is great for large cacti collections
    • Supports healthy plant tissue and drought resistance

    What We Don’t Like

    • Must be applied frequently for best results
    • For cacti and succulents only

    Specs

    • Type Liquid
    • Size 16 ounces
    • NPK 1-7-6

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4.5/5

    It was much more difficult to gauge our success with Cactus Juice compared to the other fertilizers we tested. The test cacti simply didn’t grow as quickly as other types of houseplants, and we didn’t expect them to. But they looked great and continued to improve throughout the month of testing. The color of the foliage deepened noticeably, and the first hints of flower buds began to appear by the end of the month. In short, everything progressed as it should.

    Like most of the other liquid fertilizers we tested, this one did not include a measuring device. Using a measuring spoon to gauge the bottle cap volume, we found that half a capful approximates a teaspoon, so we used it to measure afterward. But then we had to clean it thoroughly before replacing it on the bottle. The tall, narrow 16-ounce bottle itself was easy to handle and poured cleanly.

    Get the Grow More fertilizer for indoor plants at Lowe’s or Amazon.

    Best for Flowering Plants

    JR Peters Jack’s Classic 10-30-20 Blossom Booster

     Best fertilizer for indoor plants Option JR Peters Jack’s Classic 10-30-20 Blossom Booster
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • NPK content is perfect for flowering plants
    • Also suitable for boosting vegetable and fruit production
    • Feeds through both roots and leaves

    What We Don’t Like

    • Easy to overfertilize if not careful

    Specs

    • Type Water-soluble granules
    • Size 1.5 pounds
    • NPK 10-30-20

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 5/5

    We fed Jack’s Classic Blossom Booster to two African violets, two Reiger begonias, and a phalaenopsis orchid. All of these plants had just completed a resting phase when we started the feeding test, and by the end of the month, both the violets and begonias had begun to produce an abundance of new flowers, while the orchid was starting to send up a new flower spike. 

    This fertilizer comes with its own measuring scoop, and its granules dissolve instantly without clumping. While the 1.5-pound size could be a bit much for those with just one or two indoor plants, its value increases since it’s labeled for use on “all indoor and outdoor flowering plants.” At about $.04 per feeding, this specialty plant food is very cost-effective and produces quality results across a range of different types of flowering plants.

    Get the JR Peters Blossom Booster fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon or JR Peters.

    Best for Herbs

    Dr. Earth Organic Life All-Purpose Fertilizer

     Bag of Dr. Earth Organic Life All Purpose Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Minimally processed organic ingredients from natural sources
    • Suitable for culinary herbs and other edible plants
    • Dry formula is easy to apply

    What We Don’t Like

    • Bulkier and a bit more expensive per application

    Specs

    • Type Slow-release pellets
    • Size 1, 4, 12, and 40 pounds
    • NPK 4-6-5

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Odor 4/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4/5

    This Dr. Earth fertilizer smells mildly like a hayfield, probably due to the high alfalfa meal content, and also contains fish bone meal, fish meal, and kelp meal that (thankfully) does not emit a noticeable fishy smell. It’s easy to apply (although no measuring scoop is included), and because it contains no animal manure, it doesn’t produce any of the “off” smells often associated with organics. 

    In our trial, we used this Dr. Earth fertilizer for potted plants on potted herbs. As with the Osmocote product, it only required applying it once and watering as necessary. By the end of the month, our plants looked great and had beautiful new flushes of fresh foliage and buds. As much as we like this organic option, it is a bit more costly and bulky than other houseplant food products we tested. The 4-pound bag we used was relatively large and inconvenient for storage, and more product (by volume) is needed per feeding. Also, at $.32 per application, it was the second most expensive fertilizer we tested. However, for shoppers interested in working with nature to improve the soil and grow edible plants with a reduced risk of nutrient runoff, this Dr. Earth product is one of the best houseplant fertilizers available.

    Get the Dr. Earth fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

    Best All-Purpose

    JR Peters Jack’s Classic 20-20-20 Plant Food

     Tub of JR Peters Jack’s Classic 20-20-20 Plant Food
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • 20-20-20 formula works for most plant types
    • Water-soluble granules are easy to measure, mix, and apply
    • Affordable at about $.04 per application

    What We Don’t Like

    • Careless use may lead to plant damage or nutrient pollution

    Specs

    • Type Water-soluble granules
    • Size 8 ounces, 1.5, 4, and 10 pounds
    • NPK 20-20-20

    Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Odor 5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Value 4.5/5

    This water-soluble plant food comes in a plastic tub and includes a measuring scoop, making it very easy to store and mix. As with Miracle-Gro and the other JR Peters product we tested, the granules dissolve instantly in water and are easy to sweep up if a few spill. But more importantly, our plants love this fertilizer for the quick burst of nutrients each feeding provides. 

    After the first application, we noted deep greening of the foliage within 3 days and new bud development within a week. The second application was less like flipping on a light switch and more like nudging a merry-go-round already in motion. Growth continued progressing, culminating in a lush new foliage display by month’s end. Just be careful to mix and apply this product strictly according to the label directions to avoid overfertilizing, waste, and excessive nutrient runoff.

    Get the JR Peters 20-20-20 fertilizer for indoor plants at Amazon.

    Jump to Our Top Picks

    Best fertilizer for indoor plants Option
    Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

    How We Tested the Best Fertilizers for Indoor Plants

    Our tests looked at organic and synthetic fertilizers as well as liquid concentrates, water-soluble granules, and dry-application formulas. To obtain comparable results, we set up a trial with nine groups of five houseplants each, all healthy and growing in 6-inch pots. Seven of the groups were made up of common foliage plants like pothos, dracaena, snake plant, and croton, and two specialty groups featured cacti and succulents in addition to flowering houseplants.

    We tested these fertilizers from early February through early March, starting as the plants completed a semi-dormant phase. Throughout testing, we monitored them for changes in health and vigor, foliage color, new growth, and infestation by insects or diseases. We also compared the up-front costs of the products along with the application rates, storage, mixing, and user convenience. We recorded our observations, scored each product on a scoring rubric, and gave awards to worthy products based on performance. 

    Testing Stats
    Products tested 9
    Time spent testing 4 weeks
    Tests performed4 to 5
    Price range$10 to $20

    Our Ratings: Fertilizers for Indoor Plants

    What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer for Indoor Plants

    While it’s easy to assume that all indoor plant fertilizers offer similar performance, several factors affect their functionality. Keep reading to learn about several of the most important features to consider when choosing the best fertilizer for indoor plants.

    Types of Fertilizers for Indoor Plants

    The three primary types of fertilizer are liquid, granular, and slow-release pellets. Each kind has advantages and disadvantages. 

    Liquid

    Before applying it to a plant’s leaves or soil, liquid fertilizers for plants must be mixed with water, which requires some additional measuring. However, the water makes liquid plant foods easier to apply sparingly and avoid overfertilization. Liquid houseplant fertilizer and food are typically best for those with many houseplants because a large amount of water must be used to dilute very little fertilizer. However, liquid indoor plant fertilizers move through soil and plant systems rapidly and must be applied frequently—every 1 to 2 weeks. 

    Granular

    Granular fertilizers are affordable and effective. Simply sprinkle the fertilizer on top of the soil, then mix or water it in. Synthetic fertilizer granules gradually dissolve as the plant is watered, typically within about 30 days. Organic plant food nutrients are released by soil microbial activity, also within about a month. Use a granular houseplant fertilizer when initially planting or repotting a plant so it can be thoroughly mixed into the soil. It typically must be reapplied after 4 to 6 weeks.

    Slow Release

    Slow-release indoor plant fertilizers come in several formats, including pellets, spikes, pods, and capsules. Because they emit nutrients gradually, they can last 3 to 6 months. They’re typically only available in traditional—not organic—formulas.

    NPK Ratio and Plant Species

    The best fertilizers contain a mixture of macronutrients—nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K)—along with traces of micronutrients. The balance of these three macronutrients is represented by its NPK guaranteed analysis, which is listed on the fertilizer’s packaging. 

    For example, a guaranteed analysis of 10-10-10 means that 10 percent of the fertilizer, by weight, is nitrogen; 10 percent is phosphorus; and 10 percent is potassium. The remaining 70 percent can be made up of any combination of micronutrients and inert ingredients. Explicit details are shown on the back of the houseplant fertilizer label. 

    The guaranteed analysis is sometimes converted to an NPK ratio. For instance, 10-10-10 fertilizer has a ratio of 1-1-1, whereas 10-30-20 fertilizer has an NPK ratio of 1-3-2. The NPK ratio is a good way to compare different brands and formulations of fertilizers. Three different fertilizers may have three different analyses, for example, 5-5-5, 10-10-10, and 20-20-20, but the same 1-1-1 NPK ratio. This comparison could indicate that the products may work for the same plant types, using different application rates.

    Because each plant species has different nutritional needs, a “perfect” NPK ratio doesn’t exist. Generally, green houseplants require a balanced NPK ratio or one that’s slightly higher in nitrogen. A higher balance of phosphorus is particularly beneficial for flowering plants such as African violets, oxalis, and peace lilies. Phosphorus also aids in fruit production, making it beneficial to edible plants like citrus trees and tomatoes. Potassium is closely linked to general plant health, healthy cellular structure, and drought resistance.

    Organic or Traditional

    One of the primary decisions shoppers must make is choosing between a traditional or an organic fertilizer. 

    • Organic fertilizers are made entirely from minimally processed natural ingredients. Although organic fertilizers are free of potentially harmful chemicals and synthetics, their nutrient values aren’t as concentrated as traditional products. Moreover, over time, their natural content can emit an unpleasant odor. Since the marketing term “natural” isn’t regulated particularly well in fertilizers, look for a product approved for certified organic use by the OMRI. 
    • Traditional or synthetic fertilizers contain a balanced blend of minerals for feeding houseplants. They typically cost less than organic fertilizers and come in more concentrated formulas. 

    Application

    A fertilizer’s ease of application depends largely on whether it’s a liquid, granular, or slow-release formula. 

    • Liquid fertilizers must be diluted with water according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Pour liquid fertilizers onto the plant’s soil, or if directed by the manufacturer’s instructions, some liquid fertilizers may be absorbed through plant foliage. 
    • Granular fertilizers can be sprinkled evenly on the soil’s surface and mixed into the top 3 inches of soil before it’s watered, which releases the nutrients. 
    • Slow-release fertilizers vary in application method. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for fertilizing with pods, spikes, pellets, or capsules. 

    Tips for Using the Best Fertilizer for Indoor Plants

    Best fertilizer for indoor plants Option
    Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

    To know how to fertilize plants without risking overfertilization or other fertilizer mistakes most home gardeners make, follow these tips:

    • Since all fertilizers are different, follow the instructions on the manufacturer’s label.
    • Avoid over-fertilization. Reduce your fertilizing schedule if your plant’s leaves droop or begin to look burnt at the edges. 
    • Avoid fertilizing plants that are stressed by drought, disease, or insect infestation. Treat the problem first, then fertilize after the plant recovers.
    • Know how to recognize nutritional deficiency based on leaf color: According to Ward Dilmore, founder and head landscape designer at Petrus Landscaping, “brow leaves can be a sign of a lack of potassium,” and “yellow leaves are a very common sign of a lack of nitrogen.” Purple leaves often indicate the plant needs more phosphorus. 
    • There’s no need to fertilize most houseplants during their dormant season if you live in an area that experiences standard seasonal temperature changes. 
    • If you’re still experiencing issues, use a soil test kit to check the soil’s nutrient levels and adjust fertilizer application as appropriate.

    FAQs

    While you now know more about choosing the best fertilizers for indoor plants, you might still want more information about how to use them. Here are some answers to some of the most frequently asked questions about the proper fertilization of plants. 

    Q. Why do indoor plants need fertilizer?

    Houseplants have been removed from their natural habitat and therefore lack the macronutrients and micronutrients present in their native soil that help them remain healthy. Good fertilizer for houseplants supplements these nutrients. 

    Q. What’s in houseplant fertilizer?

    Houseplant fertilizers contain a mixture of macronutrients (nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium) and micronutrients that supplement the nutrients already in the plant’s soil. These ingredients can come from a variety of sources. In fact, you can make homemade plant food with a few everyday household products.

    Q. How do I fertilize indoor plants?

    The fertilization method depends on the chosen formula. Add powder and granular fertilizers to the plant’s soil, and then water. Dilute liquid fertilizers with water before application.

    Q. How often should I fertilize indoor houseplants?

    The ideal fertilization schedule depends on the type of fertilizer you choose. Liquid fertilizer should be applied every 2 to 4 weeks, whereas a granular fertilizer only needs to be applied every 4 to 6 weeks. Fertilize with a slow-release formula every 3 to 6 months. 

    Q. Can you overfertilize houseplants?

    Overfertilization is a common problem with houseplants. The signs of overfertilization vary depending on the plant species, but they include symptoms like wilting, burnt leaves, and dried leaf margins.  

    Q. When should I fertilize indoor plants?

    When asked about fertilizer application, landscape expert Ward Dilmore said, “During the spring and summer, most indoor plants benefit from monthly fertilizing. In fall and winter, when plants enter dormancy it’s best not to fertilize at all as it will allow the plants to go into dormancy without it pushing out new growth.” Start fertilizing your houseplants in early spring, about 8 weeks before the last expected frost. In areas that don’t experience winter frosts, reduce applications to half strength. 

    Meet the Tester

    Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the nursery and landscaping industry. For more than 20 years, he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn-care products, and other outdoor-living goods.

    Additional research provided by Savannah Sher.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Indoor Plants, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-13T10:13:49-05:00
    <![CDATA[My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It?]]>If your lawn mower will start but won’t stay running, there are a few parts of the machine that may need cleaning or replacement. We'll show you where to look.

    The post My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/lawn-mower-wont-stay-running/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=160628Wed, 08 Jan 2025 16:53:07 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Q: I can’t seem to figure out why my lawn mower won’t stay running. There’s plenty of gas and oil in it. Can it be repaired, or is it a lost cause?

    A: Lawn mowers seem like simple machines, yet they require some TLC to operate smoothly—especially if they’ve been sitting in the shed for a while. A full gas tank and oil reservoir are the essential first steps when checking why the lawn mower won’t stay running, but the problem could also be a dirty filter, clogged carburetor, improper fuel mixture, or a dirty spark plug. If you’re ready to get your hands dirty, check out these troubleshooting tips to get your lawn mower running again. However, you may need a lawn mower specialist to get you back to trimming your grass. Alternatively, a landscaping professional can take care of it for you.

    Lawn mower letting you down?
    Find the best lawn mower repair specialists and compare multiple quotes today.
    +

    The fuel might be old and dirty and needs to be replaced.

    Person wearing gloves switches the gas supply line on a lawn mower on and off.
    Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

    Fuel that has sat in the motor for a while can evaporate and leave a sticky residue. The inlet and outlet ports leading to the carburetor could be clogged, as well as the fuel filter. In cold, wet winter seasons, condensation can collect inside the tank, which doesn’t mix with the fuel. Replace old, dirty, or diluted fuel; adding fresh fuel to it won’t solve the problem. Drain the old fuel out of the tank and collect it to be disposed of safely per local requirements. Clean off the carburetor ports before refilling the tank.

    The air filter might be dirty, which prevents it from getting enough air.

    Motors have air filters to collect and trap dust and debris that could clog the machine’s inner workings. Over time, they become clogged and need to be replaced. If an air filter isn’t working correctly, the motor can’t get enough air to prevent overheating. Inspect the air filter for carbon deposits or oil, and replace it if it’s contaminated. Paper filters always need immediate replacement if they’re contaminated, but a dusty foam filter could benefit from being washed and dried at least once before replacement. It’s recommended to replace the air filter after every 25 hours of use.

    The carburetor might be clogged and dirty.

    Person wearing black work gloves removes gas cap from a lawn mower.
    Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

    One inconvenient reason a lawn mower won’t stay running is a problem with the carburetor, which mixes the air and fuel for internal combustion. The carburetor bowl may be clogged, or the inlet and outlet ports are slimy from fuel residue. Remove them and spray them with an aerosolized carburetor cleaner (not water). You can try disconnecting the fuel lines and spraying them out with cleaner to remove any sitting sludge as well. Replacing the fuel filter is also recommended if the carburetor is showing signs of contamination. If the lawn mower has a gas cap vent, open it to clear any visible clogs. If none of these steps solve the problem, it’s worth having the carburetor replaced by a pro.

    Lawn mower letting you down?
    Find the best lawn mower repair specialists and compare multiple quotes today.
    +

    You forgot to reset the choke, so the fuel mixture is too rich.

    Most lawn mowers have a choke to modify the fuel-to-air mixture, which keeps the engine running until it’s warmed up. Unless you’ve had cool weather for a while, the choke should be off to prevent overloading the motor with the wrong mixture of fuel. If the choke is left on for too long, excess fuel flows into the combustion chamber, causing it to seize up and stall. If this happens, the lawn mower will need to sit idle for several hours to allow the fuel to drain out of the chamber. Turn off the choke and try again later. If the problem still isn’t solved, a faulty choke switch could be the problem. Clean it with carburetor spray or replace it entirely.

    A dirty spark plug is misfiring and needs to be replaced.

    Person wearing work gloves exposes spark plug on lawn mower.
    Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

    A faulty or dirty spark plug could be the reason your lawn mower won’t stay running. It might produce the initial spark, but the spark won’t be enough to keep the engine running if the plug is clogged with dirt and oil. Spark plugs are usually located on the front of a push lawn mower and connected to a black cable. Remove it with a socket wrench and clean with a wire brush and some brake cleaner. A dark, sticky carbon residue indicates a need to replace the spark plug. Especially if you have repeated times when the lawn mower won’t stay running, scheduling regular tune-ups can help keep spark plugs in great shape all year.

    The post My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It? appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-08T16:53:07-05:00
    <![CDATA[How to Prune a Lemon Tree the Right Way]]>The post How to Prune a Lemon Tree the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/how-to-prune-a-lemon-tree/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423094Fri, 03 Jan 2025 10:21:01 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYGardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    When considering how to prune a lemon tree, keep in mind that: “Pruning is generally not required to keep citrus productive or attractive,” according to UC Davis. “However, you should remove deadwood, very weak shoots or suckers and prune any crossing branches.” California Rare Fruit Growers calls those discards the four Ds: “dead, damaged, diseased, and dysfunctional branches.”

    Just don’t get carried away with your cutting. “Excessive pruning usually results in reduced fruit production, vertical shoots called water sprouts, and suckers,” warns Alabama A & M Extension.  Therefore, never remove more than 20 to 30 percent of your tree’s canopy.

    Tools & Materials

    Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

    Project Overview

    Working Time: 30 minutes
    Total Time: 40 minutes
    Skill Level: Beginner
    Estimated Cost: $30 to $90

    When to Prune Lemon Trees

    Since lemon trees can bloom and bear on and off throughout the year, it may be difficult to prune them without also removing flowers and fruit. However, they generally bloom most heavily in late winter and spring, and then fruit most heavily in fall.  

    Therefore, Laurelynn and Byron Martin advise in their book Growing Tasty Tropical Plants: “For the least disruption to fruiting, wait until the spring flush of flowering is complete to head back plants.” Spring’s new growth also will allow you to easily see which branches were winter-killed and should be removed.

    Before You Begin

    A man's hands use a pair of shears to cut back branches on a lemon tree.
    Photo: Eriko Koga via Getty Images

    If you’ve used your pruning tools on other trees, soak them in a bleach solution—one part bleach to nine parts of water—for 10 minutes before you begin cutting. That will help prevent the spread of disease. Also, wear long, heavy gloves to protect yourself from lemon tree spines.

    STEP 1: Remove any suckers and water sprouts from your lemon tree.

    Except for seedlings, most lemon trees are grafted onto more vigorous rootstock such as trifoliate orange. Suckers are the vertical shoots which sometimes emerge below the graft from that rootstock. They should be removed at once since they “suck” energy from the actual lemon tree and produce inferior fruit.

    Water sprouts do the same, but spring from dormant buds on the tree branches instead. Cut both suckers and water sprouts back to the trunk, root, or branch from which they emerged. Use pruning shears for shoots under ½ inch in diameter, and use loppers or a pruning saw for larger ones. 

    STEP 2: Remove branches which are dead and those marked by disease.

    Avoid tip pruning lemon trees since that causes heavy growth where the cut was made. Instead, if part of a branch is dead or diseased, remove the entire branch.

    To avoid causing a large one—more than 1 inch in diameter—to tear away from the trunk when you are cutting it, use a pruning saw to make your first cut part way up from the bottom of the branch at a 1-foot distance from the trunk. Make your second downward cut a little further out. Then saw the remaining 1-foot stub off closer to the trunk, leaving its “collar” in place. 

    STEP 3: Remove spindly branches and those which cross into the center.

    According to IFAS Extension “Three to five main shoots should be selected at planting to form the primary scaffold framework for the mature tree.” Thereafter try to keep the center of the tree open enough that dappled sunlight falls on the ground beneath it at noon.

    You can do that by removing spindly branches and those which cross into the center of the tree from the outside. Also, if two branches are rubbing against each other, remove the smaller one. You may snip off lemon tree thorns too, if you prefer, to prevent them from scratching you.

    Pro tip: If you remove enough lemon tree leaves that the branches are exposed to direct sunlight, you’ll need to whitewash them to prevent burning from the sunlight. To whitewash, mix one part of white interior latex paint with one part of water and brush it onto the exposed branches. That should provide sufficient sunscreen to allow your lemon tree to bask rather than bake.

    STEP 4: Thin the lemon tree back to the height you prefer.

    Mature man in denim shirt prunes a lemon tree.
    Photo: Gajic via Getty Images

    If you are growing lemon trees indoors, it’s likely that you’ll want to keep them no taller than 5 feet or so. However, a dwarf lemon tree that doesn’t surpass 10 feet also is a good idea for outdoors, so you can harvest fruit while standing on the ground.

    When cutting back lemon trees, avoid shearing off the tips of these fast-growing fruit trees as if they were hedges—unless they actually are hedges. Instead, shorten each too-tall shoot by pruning it back to the next lateral branch. Because lemon fruits bend branches, keep the lowest ones at least 2 feet above the ground.

    STEP 5: Root prune a container tree to keep it small enough.

    An important part of how to trim a lemon tree is how to trim its roots. If your potted specimen is outgrowing its container but you don’t have room for a larger one, lemon tree care may require you to prune its underpinnings.

    Remove your recently watered tree from its pot and use a sharp knife to slice off 1 to 2 inches of the roots and soil around the outer edge of the root ball. After returning the tree to its container, add fresh potting soil to the space now opened up between the root ball and the pot.

    Final Thoughts

    Whether your lemon is an indoor fruit tree—which you grow as a big houseplant—or a larger outdoor cultivar, the above directions on how to prune citrus trees should help you keep it growing and glowing. 

    The post How to Prune a Lemon Tree the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-03T10:21:01-05:00
    <![CDATA[You Won’t Believe These 5 Houseplants Are Fake (and Better for Decorating Than Their Live Equivalents)]]>The post You Won’t Believe These 5 Houseplants Are Fake (and Better for Decorating Than Their Live Equivalents) appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/fake-plants-that-look-real/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422965Thu, 02 Jan 2025 12:36:30 -0500Lawn & GardenDesignGardeningHouse PlantsInterior DesignWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Decorating your home with indoor plants improves the aesthetic and can be beneficial to your health and happiness. However, if caring for plants is too cumbersome and ends up causing a major inconvenience and stress, then it might be a wise decision to try some artificial plants instead. 

    Fortunately, you can feel some of the positive attributes of natural plants with fake ones, such as their ability to boost one’s mood simply by looking at them. Plus, some real plants can trigger allergies, attract pests inside the home, and even cause toxic reactions to both people and pets. 

    Opting for certain fake plants that look real might be a solution, especially when it comes to plants that are particularly challenging to care for daily or in certain conditions. “Fake plants are perfect for people who lack the skills, experience, or simply the desire to care for real plants,” says Zeeshan Haider, CEO and founder of Greenry Enthusiast in Sheridan, Wyoming. “They are a great way to add greenery to your home without the worries of keeping real plants alive.” Many artificial plants actually cost less in the long run compared to real plants and can be purchased at places such as Wayfair, Amazon, Target, The Home Depot, Lowe’s, and IKEA. 

    Here are five plants that are particularly challenging to take care of indoors yet can easily be replaced by fake ones. 

    1. Elephant’s Ear (Alocasia spp.)

    Faux elephant's ear plant.
    Photo: Amazon

    It’s a bit of a challenge to grow alocasia indoors, says Caleb Young of Rare Indoor Plants. “They like high humidity and a warm environment. If the roots stay too wet or it gets too cold, they’re quick to show signs of stress,” he says. Elephant ears require consistently moist—but not soggy—soil since they are susceptible to root rot, which can make them challenging to care for. 

    This plant relies on bright indirect sunlight when grown indoors, so it is also critical to avoid placing it in full direct sunlight because this can lead to leaf burn. Another major problem with growing this plant indoors is that it is toxic to dogs, cats, horses, and humans, causing mouth and stomach irritation and possibly vomiting if ingested; a fake Elephant Ear would be safer. 

    2. Calathea (Calathea spp.)

    Faux calathea plant.
    Photo: Amazon

    Commonly referred to as prayer plant, pinstripe plant, or rattlesnake plant, calatheas are attractive but difficult to grow indoors, given their requirements for the right amount of light, water, and nutrients. “Calatheas are pretty with their colorful leaves, but they’re hard to maintain when it comes to care,” says Young. He says the plants need high humidity and consistent watering. “If those aren’t spot on, they’ll start showing stress with browning edges,” Young says. 

    The prayer plant is known to curl, fade, or droop under the wrong conditions. These houseplants do best with indirect light and should never receive direct sunlight because that will lead to leaf burn, causing the leaves to curl, turn brown, and fall off the plant. Given their specific humidity needs, it is necessary to mist the plant with water once or twice a day, run a humidifier, or grow it in a large terrarium. All of these options require additional work to keep the plant flourishing, and to consider an artificial calathea instead. Finally, they are susceptible to spider mite infestations, which can lead to the leaves curling up.

    3. Fiddle-Leaf Fig (Ficus lyrata)

    Faux fiddle leaf fig in modern living room.
    Photo: Amazon

    An artificial fiddle leaf fig tree is a much better option than a real one since it’s toxic to pets and people, quite finicky, and hard to keep alive. “The fiddle-leaf fig is an absolute diva—she requires perfection when it comes to lighting, no drafts, and plenty of attention, or she will drop leaves all over the place,” says Haider.

    Fiddle-leaf figs love bright, filtered light such as being in front of a window with eastern exposure. If that’s not possible, they might need LED grow lights. However, too much direct sun can burn the plant and turn the leaves brown. The water temperature also has to be just right; if the water is too hot or too cold, then the plant can go into shock. Finally, this plant is susceptible to common pests like mealybugs, scale, whiteflies, aphids, and fungus gnats.

    4. Maidenhair Fern (Adiantum spp.)

    Faux maidenhair fern.
    Photo: Amazon

    A maidenhair fern is among the hardest plants to grow indoors, mainly because the leaves are so thin. “This plant is super delicate and really hard to keep alive in drier homes,” says Young. “It needs constant moisture and humidity, so if it doesn’t get those conditions, it starts wilting or turning brown pretty fast.” 

    These plants demand 60 percent humidity, which is unrealistic for a healthy home, and a good reason for a faux fern instead. Therefore, they need to be placed inside an enclosure to control humidity levels, such as a fern case, large terrarium, or glass cloche. They also like bright, indirect sunlight; if they are left in dim spots, they will struggle. Finally, fern spores can trigger allergic reactions like rashes and hay fever. 

    5. Phalaenopsis Orchid (Phalaenopsis spp.)

    White orchid in vase on table in front of window.
    Photo: Amazon

    Also called moth orchids, Phalaenopsis orchids are one of the most popular orchids, but can be challenging to care for as a houseplant. “They are gorgeous yet very vulnerable and quite easy to damage,” says Haider. They are also really picky, according to Young. “They need the perfect balance of light, humidity, and watering. A lot of people struggle with getting the watering just right,” says Young. As a result, the plants end up wilting or never blooming, Young adds. These plants also need bright, indirect sunlight, so if a sunny spot inside isn’t available, the best alternative is to purchase faux silk orchids

    The post You Won’t Believe These 5 Houseplants Are Fake (and Better for Decorating Than Their Live Equivalents) appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2025-01-02T12:36:30-05:00
    <![CDATA[Our Favorite New Plants of 2024 and Why We Love Them]]>The post Our Favorite New Plants of 2024 and Why We Love Them appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/new-garden-plants-and-houseplants-2024/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422397Thu, 26 Dec 2024 09:05:00 -0500Lawn & GardenGardeningHouse PlantsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    As an enthusiastic gardener passionate about outdoor and indoor plants, I’m always looking for new and exciting varieties. One of the perks of being a garden writer is that I often have the privilege of testing out fresh introductions as they hit the market. I must say, 2024 has delivered an impressive array of must-have plants poised to transform any space. There were plenty of amazing new plants that caught my eye, but my top picks include dazzling reimaginations of a beloved houseplant, miniaturized versions of edible garden classics, and innovative shrubs that have garnered a near-cult following among gardening enthusiasts. Whether you’re a seasoned green thumb or a beginner, there’s something magical about discovering fresh varieties that breathe new life into your collection. 

    New Pothos Varieties

    Our Favorite New Plants Skeleton Key
    Photo: Costa Farms

    Pothos (Epipremnum) doesn’t get the credit it deserves. Often dismissed as a generic office staple, this resilient houseplant is a superstar for its ability to thrive with minimal care. Its forgiving nature makes it an excellent choice for new indoor gardeners, while its diverse varieties offer something for seasoned plant enthusiasts. Earlier this year, Costa Farms added two striking new varieties to their Trending Tropicals line: Silver Streak (Epipremnum amplissimum) shown above on the left and Skeleton Key (Epipremnum pinnatum Skeleton Key) shown above on the right.

    These new additions are a far cry from the familiar golden pothos you’ve seen hanging in offices and waiting rooms. Skeleton Key features uniquely shaped leaves that resemble—true to its name—skeleton keys when mature, adding an architectural flair to its trailing habit. “Bright light is best, but it tolerates low and medium lighting conditions,” says Justin Hancock, horticulturist at Costa Farms. “In lower light levels, it’s slower and more likely to have lanky internodes” he adds. Silver Streak, on the other hand, boasts elongated, lance-shaped leaves adorned with silvery stripes that shimmer in the light, giving it an elegant and modern look. “Because it’s not variegated—like a lot of the other trendy pothos varieties are—it’s a faster grower,” says Hancock, “If you’re used to a variety like Marble Queen, you may be surprised at this one.” 

    Together, these varieties showcase the versatility and beauty of pothos, proving that this houseplant is anything but ordinary.

    Eclipse Bigleaf Hydrangea (Hydrangea macrophylla  ‘Bailmacseven’)

    Our Favorite New Plants Eclipse® Big Leaf Hydrangea_Photo Credit-First Editions® Shrubs & Trees_4x3
    Photo: First Editions Shrubs & Trees

    As a passionate hydrangea enthusiast, I’m always thrilled to discover a new, standout variety. The Eclipse Bigleaf Hydrangea from First Editions Shrubs and Trees is a true showstopper that checks all the boxes for garden lovers. Its stunning dark pink blooms and deep purple foliage offer an unforgettable contrast that dazzles any landscape. It’s the perfect addition to the gothic garden trend

    Like its Endless Summer cousins, this is an everblooming variety, providing a continuous display of flowers throughout the growing season. I had the privilege of seeing this extraordinary plant in person at the 2024 Penny McHenry Hydrangea Festival, where it was rightfully awarded Hydrangea of the Year—a favorite among enthusiasts year-round! “Eclipse brings such a new take on bigleaf hydrangeas in the garden with its deep purple leaves and contrasting cranberry or amethyst-colored blooms,” says Ryan McEnaney, spokesperson for First Editions Shrubs & Trees. “It adds a new way of using this beloved hydrangea in the garden or in deco pots and plays really well with perennials and grasses to make a statement.”

    Orange Glow Knock Out Rose (‘Radslam’  PP 35,826 CPBRAF)

    Our Favorite New Plants OrangeGlow_KnockOut_Blooms_Photo Credit_credit Star® Roses and Plants_4x3
    Photo: Star Roses and Plants

    The Orange Glow Knock Out Rose is a vibrant addition to any garden, appreciated for its stunning orange blooms and ease of care. I’ve had Knock Out roses for years, and I love that they are easy to grow and offer tons of nonstop color. The Orange Glow is incredibly fragrant, adding a sensory delight to its visual appeal. Its unparalleled rust resistance makes it a top performer in practically any garden.

    “Orange Glow’s incredible rust resistance makes it a top-performer in every climate and a standout on the West Coast,” says Stephanie Waltz, rose trial coordinator from Star Roses and Plants. This versatile rose can be planted individually, in groups, or mixed with other perennials and shrubs to add a striking pop of color. Perfect for gardeners of all skill levels, Orange Glow is a real showstopper!

    Kitchen Minis

    Our Favorite New Plants Kitchen Minis™_Photo Credit_Kitchen Minis™_4x3
    Photo: Kitchen Minis

    During a press trip to Ball Horticultural this summer, I saw and tasted fruit from some of the most exciting plant introductions for 2024—Kitchen Minis. This collection offers compact, easy-to-grow plants perfect for small spaces, bringing fresh produce and herbs directly to your kitchen or patio with minimal effort. The lineup includes tomatoes, peppers, cucumbers, and herbs, each offering a bountiful harvest over several weeks. “With Kitchen Minis, the true concept is ‘No Garden? No Problem’,” says Katie Rotella, senior public relations and digital manager at Ball Horticultural Company. “This opens the door for so many different lifestyles to care for and harvest their own vegetables and herbs,” she adds. “And there’s no requirement for a large garden space. This appeals to busy families, people living with a disability, urban dwellers, or those looking to put a kitchen garden close to the culinary action.”

    Although I was impressed by the entire collection, four varieties caught my eye in particular. Standouts include Tomato Siam (Solanum lycopersicum), a compact yet prolific producer of flavorful cherry tomatoes that’s perfect for containers, and Basil Bonsai (Ocimum basilicum), a charming, petite herb with the same robust flavor as full-sized basil. Also on my list are Pepper Hot Fajita (Capsicum annuum), a spicy ornamental pepper that doubles as an edible accent, and Cucumber Quick Snack (Cucumis sativus), which produces crisp, snack-sized cucumbers ideal for fresh eating. These innovative plants are perfect for gardeners of all levels looking to refresh their collections with compact, high-yielding options. I’ve already purchased seeds to grow them in my vegetable garden for 2025! 

    Jurassic Stegosaurus Holly Fern (Cyrtomium fortunei ‘MONSTGO’)

    Our Favorite New Plants Jurassic Stegosaurus Holly Fern_Monrovia_Photo Credit_Doreen Wynja_4x3
    Photo: Doreen Wynja

    As a fan of low-maintenance plants, I’m always drawn to options that bring unusual texture and beauty to the garden, like the Jurassic Stegosaurus Fern. This striking fern from Monrovia is as easy to care for as it is eye-catching, with its dramatic, deeply lobed fronds that add a fun, textural element to any landscape or container. Its robust nature makes it perfect for gardeners at all levels, thriving in shaded areas with minimal upkeep. 

    “Our Jurassic series may change everything you think you know about ferns,” says Katie Tamony, trend spotter at Monrovia. “These unique selections provide so many options for shady gardens, with interesting forms and textures that are perfect for creating calm and serene outdoor spaces. Jurassic Stegosaurus Holly Fern is also a wonderful indoor plant.”

    The post Our Favorite New Plants of 2024 and Why We Love Them appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2024-12-26T09:05:00-05:00
    <![CDATA[Yes, It’s Possible to Grow Garlic Indoors—Here’s How]]>The post Yes, It’s Possible to Grow Garlic Indoors—Here’s How appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/how-to-grow-garlic-indoors/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=419635Thu, 26 Dec 2024 08:00:00 -0500Lawn & GardenGardeningHouse PlantsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Garlic is one of the easiest garden plants to grow, which, along with its health benefits and pungent flavor, is just another reason to love it. This low-maintenance relative of the onion is typically planted in fall about a month before the first frost in order to allow the chill to induce dormancy and give it time to produce bulbs for harvest the following summer. But those who relish the taste of fresh garlic (which can be eaten immediately after harvest) may want to learn how to grow garlic indoors so they have a ready supply at hand, no matter the season.

    Before You Begin

    Spatially, garlic is a good fit for growing indoors because it’s comfortable in compact spaces. However, there are other things to consider:

    • Garlic requires 6 to 8 hours of direct light. Where natural light is insufficient, grow lights can be substituted, but it doesn’t grow as well under manmade light.
    • Garlic (especially hardneck varieties) needs cold temperatures for a dormancy period before planting. When growing indoors, this can be replicated by placing bulbs in the refrigerator.
    • All parts of garlic are toxic to dogs and cats, so ensure their safety when planting indoors.

    How to Grow Garlic Indoors in 6 Easy Steps

    Growing garlic indoors can be easier than outdoors because you’re in control of the environment, eliminating pest infestations and providing consistency in growing conditions. But this is only a benefit if you provide all the elements this root vegetable needs to thrive.

    Step 1: Select the right varieties of garlic for indoor cultivation.

    Garlic cloves growing in soil in a planter indoors.
    Photo: Xiuxia Huang via Getty Images

    There are approximately 300 varieties of garlic, and these are divided into hardneck and softneck types. While all types can be grown indoors, softneck types tend to do better inside because hardneck types prefer colder climates.

    Winter garlic is easy to grow indoors, as it doesn’t have a period of dormancy and is less demanding, says Anastasia Borisevich, plant expert at Plantum. “Spring garlic is better suited for growing garlic greens, as it will yield smaller bulbs but bigger scapes.”

    Some varieties that do well indoors include:

    Step 2: Choose the right-sized container.

    Garlic can grow in a compact container of 6 to 8 inches diameter, depending on the number of cloves planted, but because it’s essentially a root crop, the pot should be deep enough—at least 8 inches—to allow bulbs to develop.

    Clay pots are a good choice, but whatever type of material the container is made from, it should have good drainage. A five-gallon bucket can suffice, but will need holes drilled in the bottom to allow water to drain.

    Step 3: Use the right soil.

    Choose a lightweight, sterile commercial potting mix that includes vermiculite or perlite to aid with water retention and drainage. While garlic likes loamy, sandy soils, Borisevich says, “Any store-bought all-purpose soil mix will work fine for garlic.” Because garlic appreciates soil with good fertility, opt for a mix with peat or compost. Alternatively, you can add organic fertilizer to boost the soil’s nutrients. 

    You can also make soil for growing garlic yourself by mixing two parts leaf mold compost, two parts other compost, and three parts sand.

    Step 4: Prepare the garlic bulbs for planting.

    Separate the bulb(s) you intend to plant into cloves, leaving as much of the papery skin on as possible. Place them in a plastic bag with a little soil. Put the bag in the freezer and leave it there for 4 to 6 weeks. This process, called vernalization, replicates the conditions the cloves would face outdoors. Alternatively, if the outside temperatures are cool, you can place them outdoors. This cold period is essential for growing garlic bulbs indoors because it encourages garlic cloves to sprout.

    Step 5: Plant the cloves in soil.

    Garlic cloves should be planted about 2 inches deep, with the pointy end up, and spaced about 6 inches apart. Gently tamp down the soil around the planted cloves. Irrigate until excess water drains off. Garlic likes soil that is consistently moist, but not soggy. During its germination period, it may need watering more heavily.

    Place the container in a cool, sunny spot where it will receive plenty of bright, indirect light.

    Step 6: Maintain conditions for healthy growth.

    Planters with garlic cloves growing scapes.
    Photo: Xiuxia Huang via Getty Images

    To get the most out of your garlic harvest, maintain the conditions that will allow the plants to thrive.

    • Keep garlic where it will receive at least 6 hours of direct sun, or use grow lights indoors.
    • The ideal air temperature range for growing garlic is 60 to 75 degrees Fahrenheit, with the cooler end of that range being the most ideal.
    • Soil should be consistently moist, but not soggy. Avoid overwatering.
    • Use a fan for air circulation to prevent mold and mildew.
    • Fertilize every 2 to 3 weeks once sprouts are 6 inches tall. Borisevich suggests using “complex mineral fertilizers that contain all basic nutrients, as well as microelements that increase the plants’ resistance to pests and diseases.”  
    •  Sturdy bamboo stakes in the pots will hold the garlic upright.

    Final Thoughts

    These easy steps will enable you to grow garlic indoors year-round, providing fresh flavor for your favorite dishes. Garlic doesn’t require a lot of attention, but it does need planning to include a period of cold dormancy. After that, all it takes is nutrient-rich, well-draining soil, at least 6 hours of direct light, consistent moisture, and regular fertilizing. 

    Fortunately, garlic doesn’t produce strong odors while growing, but it is toxic to dogs and cats, so take precautions.

    The post Yes, It’s Possible to Grow Garlic Indoors—Here’s How appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US2024-12-26T08:00:00-05:00